Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 2001-R0510 - Authorization Of Contract - Hunter Construction Company - 12/03/2001
Resolutlon No. 2001-RO510 December 3, 2001 Item No. 38 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a contract for the water utilities electrical shop building & equipment operations, by and between the City of Lubbock and Hunter Construction Company of Lubbock, Texas, and related documents. Said contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 3rd day of December , 2001. NINDYON, A OR ATTEST: Rebecca Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Victor Kilman, rchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: William de Haas Contract Manager/Attorney gs:/ccdocs/Contract-Hunter Construction Co.res Nov 21, 2001 4A p� CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR, WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING ITB #266-01 /RS CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas oe TEXAc r .1 Acp ITB #266-01/RS, Addendum #2 ' City of Lubbock ADDENDUM #2 PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING ITB .#266-011RS ' 162513 TH STREET Water Utilities Electrical Shop LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 Building and Equipment Operations FAx:(806)775-2164 Building ' http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us MAILED TO VENDOR: November 6, 2001 ' CLOSE DATE: November 7, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any ' item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. ' ARCHITECTURAL ITEMS: ITEM #1: SHEET A2.0, ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE, SHOP 100, there will not be a suspended ceiling in this area, this area will be open to the structure above. ITEM #2: SPECIFICATIONS, METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS, 07.610, delete the entire section 1.05 WARRANTIES. This specification section ONLY applies to the metal canopies on the Equipment Operations Building. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer ' City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 ' Questions may be faxed to: (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 266-01/Rsadd2 ITB #266-01/RS, Addendum #1 ' City of Lubbock ADDENDUM #1 PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ITB .#266-01 /RS ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 1V STREET Water Utilities Electrical Salop LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 Building and Equipment Operations FAx:(806)775-2164 Building http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us MAILED TO VENDOR: November 2, 2001 CLOSE DATE: November 7, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any ' item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. ' MPE ITEMS: 1. SHEET M2: GAS UNIT HEATER DETAIL, secure the hanger rods to the bottom of the new runway crane girder indicated on details 7/A3.0, 81A3.0 and 3/S3. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: or Email to: 266-01/Rsaddl (806)775-2164 Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Ron Shuffiel Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR TITLE: WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS ITB NUMBER: 266-01IRS PROJECT NUMBER: 9799.8107 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT fl 1 INDEX ' 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BICDERS ' 3. BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND ' 5. PERFORMANCE BOND ' 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT ' 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS t10. SPECIFICATIONS I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 � NOTICE TO BIDDERS 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 J ' NOTICE TO BIDDERS ' ITB #266-01/RS Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 'o'clock p.m. on the 7th day of November. 2001, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project with a budget amount of 400.000.00: ' "WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING,' After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in ' the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Bids are due at 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 7th day of November, 2001, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids on the 3rd day of December, 2001, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as 'soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds {if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre-bid conference on 31st day of October. 2001 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Engineering Conference Room 107, Lubbock, ' Texas. Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at Lubbock City Hall, 1625 13`h Street, Lubbock, Texas, Purchasing Department, Room L-04. Plans and specifications may be obtained by the bidder for a $100.00 refundable deposit per set. Plans and specifications may be obtained from Adling Associates Architects, 2529 74th Street, Lubbock, TX 79423, Phone: (806) 748-0880. Plans and specifications will be shipped at the bidder's expense. If bidder requires overnight or second day expedited method parcel shipment, the bidder will incur shipping charges and must furnish the name of the service to be used and the bidder's account number. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, 'Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this tadvertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. 'The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre-bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775- 2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. ' CITY OF LUBBOCK v� ' VICTOR KILMAN PURCHASING MANAGER 1 1 1 11 11 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 11 d J GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 BID DELIVERY. TIME & DATE 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING per the attached ' specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later than 2:00 p.m. CST, the 7th day of November, 2001 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a ' sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "ITB #266-01/RS, WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of the ' envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing Department. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier ' service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. ' 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an addendum. 2 PRE-BID MEETING ' 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non -mandatory pre-bid meeting will be held at 1000 a.m.. October 31st 2001 in Engineering Conference Room 107 Lubbock. Texas. All ' persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. 2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre-bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre-bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre-bid meeting. 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may ' request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department. Such addendum issued by the Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid {ITS) and will ' become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of ' Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information ' supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be .used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in ' any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in preparing responses. ' 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders. 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS ' 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations ' that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid. ' 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifi"tions. If bidder does not notify Purchasing Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and ' adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 5 BID PREPARATION COSTS ' 5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a bid. ' 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. '5.3 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, ' including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular be from portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may withheld public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal ' position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the ' Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. ' 6.3 Marking your entire bid CON FIDENTIAUPROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Op -en Records Act. 7 LICENSES PERMITS, TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may be required to pay. ' 8 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 8.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 2 ' 8.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this bid. 9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 9.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 10 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without ' charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined withoutchargeas noted in the Notice to Bidders. 11 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS ' 11.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibili1y to advise the Purchasing Manager if any language requirements etc or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the. bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. ' 11.2 NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE ' BID CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: RON SHUFFIELD, SENIOR BUYER City of Lubbock 162513 1h Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: (806) 775-2164 Email: rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us 12 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION ' 12.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within TWO HUNDRED SEVENTY (270) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. 12.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be ' submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 13 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the ' contract documents. ' 14 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements ' contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 15 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until ' incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to ' procure a satisfactory project. 16 GUARANTEES 16.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against ' defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects ' appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 16.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and ' warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as ' the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the ' procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 16.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be ' delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. ' 16.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. ' 17 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use ' during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. ' 18 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any ' and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: ' 4 ' (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. ' (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. ' 19 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 19.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. ' 19.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. ' 20 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or ' other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all sucK-underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve ' the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. ' 21 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be ' necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of ' barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 22 EXPLOSIVES ' 22.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of ' the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. ' 22.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 22.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or ' below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the 'Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 23 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE ' The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. ' 24 INSURANCE 24.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the ' City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this ' contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether ' performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. ' 24.2 The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor, to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to provide ' to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 25 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS ' 25.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The ' bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract ' documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that maybe applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: ' 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is ' approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 25.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the ' Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on ' weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 25.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately ' commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of -day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 26 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS ' The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the ' work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the ' 6 ' copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees ' according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of'general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each ' calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. ' 27 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the ' bidder without being considered. 28 PREPARATION FOR BID ' 28.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or.furnish the materials required. Such pcices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written ' in figures, the price written in words shall govern. 28.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be t given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing ' agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. 28.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and ' endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 28.3.1 Bidder's name ' 28.3.2 Bid for (description of the project). 28.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. ' 28.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR ' TO BID OPENING. 29 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the ' following: (a) Notice to Bidders. ' (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). ' (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 1 ' Q) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered ' incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 30 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy ' the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. ' (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. - ' (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. 31 BID AWARD ' 31.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole discretion. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid based on the total bid for Bid ' Items _through plus the sum of any Alternate Bids the City may select. 31.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may ' result in disqualification of the bid. 31.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to ' determine possible Anti -Trust violations. 31.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder ' would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. 31.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may be applicable. 31.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS INVITATION TO BID. n 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 'DATE: November 7, 2001 BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT ' PROJECT NUMBER: #266-01./RS - WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING ' Bid of Hunter Construction Company (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. IBASEBID#I: New Electrical Building MATERIALS: i�� x7(� 5.�� tCc `t�c`''4sd�at� ($_�, �r?�T©Q�• ) ' SERVICES: 1.ClC- 1MY66eQ DlAf,- �r�� �� ��1. ✓ ) TOTAL BASE BID #1:($-rG��• ) 4, BASE BID #2: New Equipment Operations Building FMATERIALS:FOrtY�twO thousand four hundred dollars--------------- ($ 42,400.00 ------------- ) ' SERVICES: Twenty-eight thousand four hundred dollars------------ ($ 28 400 00------------ ) TOTAL BASE BID #2: Seventy thousand eight hundred dollars--------- {$ 70,800-00 ------- ) ' OPTION #1: ' Add one bay to the Electrical Shop Building. The end wall condition shall be part of the base bid. MATERIALS: Sixteen thousand one hundred & sixty dollars---------- ($ 16,160.00--------------) SERVICES: Eleven thousand dollars------------------------------- ($ 11400.On------------- ) ' TOTAL OPTION #1: went v -seven thousand one hundred & �ixt-Y rko1 1 a 827,1 fin nta--------------� I - OPTION #2: Add the bridge crane to the Electrical Shop Building. All structure for the bridge crane shall be a rrt of the base bid. ATERIALS: Fifteen thousand six hundred and ninety-five dollars ($15,695.00 ------ -------- �RVICES: Ten thousand dollars--------------------------------- ($10, 000.00------------- ) TOTAL OPTION #2: Twenty-five thousand six hundred & ninety-five 25.695.00------------- ) IPTION #3: Add the bridge crane to the Electrical Shop Building with the added bay under alternate #1. IATERIALS: Fifteen thousand six hundred & ninety-five dollars--- ($15,695.00------------- ) SERVICES: Ten thousand dollars-------------------------------- {$10, 000. 00 ------------ ) Twent five thousand six hundred & ninet five-- 25,695.00------------ FAL OPTION #3: Y- Y- ($ ) Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written 'Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 270 (TWO HUNDRED SEVENTY) consecutive �lendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to y to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $0 (ZERO) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set orth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract iocuments. , Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with nstruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the [ding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days ter the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the dans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to Mrnmence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on ich he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or Irtifiedcheck issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable thout recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the lid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all cessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for �fn )oliars ($ N/A ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of F; ye Fp_r Vent of i rl----------- Dollars �c,��ajd_j, which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the ent the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, nsurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of eipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the fdersigned upon demand: • 0 Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE 81D SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. �TTEST: r ecr ry Joanne Thomasson kidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: �ddenda No. one Date? y ddenda No. Date Addenda No. Date (ddenda No. Date LBE Firm: Jim D Hunter. President (Printed or Typed Name) Hunter Construction C Company Post Mice Box 2587 Address Lubbock Lubbock City, County Texas __ 7940 State Zip Code Telephone:_aafi Fax: 806 Hisnnnic American I I Asian Pacific American I I Other (Specify) I 4 BIDDER: 'Hunter Construction Compan* PC Box 2587 Lubbock, TX 79408-2587 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Minority Owned Yes No Lone Star Dirt & Paving X Royal Concrete, Inc. 3rd Generation Construction Miller Construction RPM Drywall Cverhead Door Company X KK Glass, Inc. X Hargrove Painting X 3 ' CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder ' And Attached to Bid Submittal I, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been ' reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within fifteen (15) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, ' furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this' bid/proposal. 'LJ=Z Jim D. Hunter, President (Signature Contractor (Print) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: Hunter Construction Company (Print or Type ) ' CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: P.C. Box 2587 Lubbock, TX 79408 ' Name of Agent/Broker: Gallagher Invest Address of Agent/Broker: P.C. Box 53910 `City/State/Zip: Lubbock, TX 79453 ' Agent/Broker Telephone Number: ( 806 ) 785-1988 Date: November 7, 2001 NOTE TO CONTRACTOR If the time requirement specified above is not met, the. City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165. BID #266-01/RS WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING 4 All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O.6oX 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)775.2164 or Email to: Rshi ffield@mail.a.lubbock.t ws THANK YOU, CITY'OF LUBBOCK Ron Shuftlel Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. R FT E—D LBY:INnv 2 2 01 28W01111oaddl nog -OZ -01 11:17ae Prop, -CITY of t.0URCHASINc 806tt6;:16d • 7-886 P-01/01 F-902 rr811266-01M. Addendum *1 City of'Lubbock PURCHASING D9rARTmrzNT ADDENDUM #1 ROOM L04. MUNICIPAL 13UILPING 162513TR STREET ITB 7TZS6�"t/RS LUBBOCK TEXAS 794a1 Water Utilities Electrical Shop PH: (806)773-2167 PAX:(ao6)775.216a BuildingEquipment p and E ui ment Q erations trite:l/purchasing,cl.lubbaclwtx us Building t MAILED TO VENDOR: November 2, 2001 CLOSE DATE: November 7, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITS). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is Supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. MPF rrFmt 'I. -SHEET M2: GAS UNIT HEATER DETAIL„ secure the hanger rods to the bottom of the new runway 9lr4er indicated on, details 7!113.0, 81A3.0 and 3155. crane All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O.6oX 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)775.2164 or Email to: Rshi ffield@mail.a.lubbock.t ws THANK YOU, CITY'OF LUBBOCK Ron Shuftlel Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. R FT E—D LBY:INnv 2 2 01 28W01111oaddl • INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST P.O. Box 85563, San Diego, CA 92186-5563 BID OR PROPOSAL BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, Hunter Construction Company . (hereinafter called the Principal), and INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, a corporation organized and doing business under and by virtue of the laws of the State of California, and duly licensed for the purpose of making, guaranteeing or becoming sole surety upon bonds or undertakings required or authorized by the laws of the State of Texas as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called the obligee) in the just and full sum of Five Percent of Greatest Amount Bid -------- Dollars ($------ (5%)--------------► lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby bind ourselves and our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT WHEREAS, the above bound Principal as aforesaid, is about to hand in and submit to the obligee a bid or proposal dated November 7, 2001 for Water Utilities Electrical Shop Building and Equipment Operations Building in accordance with the plans and specifications filed in the office of the obligee and under the notice inviting proposals therefor. NOW, THEREFORE, if the bid or proposal of said principal shall be accepted, and the contract for such work be awarded to the principal thereupon by the said obligee, and said principal shall enter into a contract and bond for the completion of said work as required by law, then this obligation to be null and void, otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, neither Principal nor Surety shall be bound hereunder unless Obligee prior to execution of the final contract shall furnish evidence satisfactory to Principal and Surety that financing has been firmly committed to cover the entire cost of the project. Signed, sealed and dated: November 7, 2001 by I ICWTX 409(06/92) 111 Princi I,ND. Hunter, SURANCE-C Kevin OF THE WEST (Seal) No. 0001740 ICW GROUP Power of Attorney Insurance Company of the West The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Insurance Company of the West, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of California, The Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Arizona, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Companies'), do hereby appoint KEVIN J. DUNN, FRED DAVIS, CARA D. HANCOCK, MIKE HENTHORN, RON STROMAN AND HAROLD BINGGELI their true and lawful Attorneys) -in -Fact with authority to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers this 16th day of January, 2001. 6pMNNY�, 1M81Jq gystY'y� o�0`cvrcq�r4y�i� c3' ~ �� SEAL 9:OMA /901 John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary State of California County of San Diego ss. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST THE EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President On January 16, 2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Public, personally appeared John L. Hannum and John H. Craig, personally known to me to be the persons whose names are subscribed to the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that they executed the same in their authorized capacities, and that by their signatures on the instrument, the entity upon behalf of which the persons acted, executed the instrument. Witness my hand and official seal. NOIaMAMMER COMM. #1257540 V � NOTARYPUBUC-GALIfORNIA't�i SAN IE00CCe Commission Expires MAftCH 19, 2004 Norma Porter, Notary Public RESOLUTIONS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed, sealed and notarized with facsimile signatures and seals under authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of each of the Companies: 'RESOLVED: That the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, together with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, are hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney appointing the person(s) named as Attomey(s)-in-Fact to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the signatures of the officers making the appointment, and the signature of any officer certifying the validity and current status of the appointment, may be facsimile representations of those signatures; and the signature and seal of any notary, and the seal of the Company, may be facsimile representations of those signatures and seals, and such facsimile representations shall have the same force and effect as if manually affixed. The facsimile representations referred to herein may be affixed by stamping, printing, typing, or photocopying-" CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolutions were duly adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of the Companies, and are now in full force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,1 have set my hand this 7th bey of November 2001 John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-877-1111 and ask for the Surety Division. Please refer to the Power of Attorney Number, the above named individual(s) and details of the bond to which the power is attached. For information or filing claims, please contact Surety Claims, ICW Group, 11435 EI Canino Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 or call (858) 350-2400. I I I I E 11 PAYMENT BOND I H I H I I I CHECK RAI O'C"ll?"'i'S)EDU V4 TEXAS o'k. TF y Bond No. 18449 64 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021 (a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of THREE HUNDRED SEVENTY SIX THOUSAND SIX HUNDRED FORTY TWO AND N0/100 ------------- Dollars ($376,642.00 )lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 3RD day of DECEMBER _,2001 to BID #266-01/RS -WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond Is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021 (a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 7TH day of DECEMBER 2001 INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST Surety *By. KE IN J. DUNN, ttorney-In-Fact (Title) By: (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas and hereby designates KEVIN J. DUNN an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in, matters arising out of such suretyship. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST Surety x * By: KEVIN J. DUNN , Attorney-In-Fact Approved as to form: tCity of Lubbock By: City Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company There must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy :of power of attorney for our files. i E f ICW GROUP Power of Attorney Insurance Company of the West Independence Casualty and Surety Company The Explorer Insurance Company No. 0001740 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Insurance Company of the West, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of California, The Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Arizona, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Companies'), do hereby appoint KEVIN J. DUNN, FRED DAVIS, CARA D. HANCOCK, MIKE HEN HORN, RON STROMAN AND HAROLD BINGGELI their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with authority to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers this 16th day of January, 2001. o�d`avvcg�f'�i�ia d SEAL r Mat.' 0'qi ♦a; ! R p John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary State of California County of San Diego ss. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST THE EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President On January 16, 2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Public, personally appeared John L. Hannum and John H. Craig, personally known to me to be the persons whose names are subscribed to the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that they executed the same in their authorized capacities, and that by their signatures on the instrument, the entity upon behalf of which the persons acted, executed the instrument. Witness my hand and official seal. NORMA PORTER COMM.ARYU#1257540 NOTAHYPUt3L1G-CALIFORNIA. V SAN D1t?GOCOUNIY Commission Expires NS MARCH 19, 2004 Norma Porter, Notary Public RESOLUTIONS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed, sealed and notarized with facsimile signatures and seals under authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of each of the Companies: "RESOLVED: That the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, together with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, are hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney appointing the person(s) named as Attomey(s)-m-Fact to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the signatures of the officers making the appointment, and the signature of any officer certifying the validity and current status of the appointment, may be facsimile representations of those signatures; and the signature and seal of any notary, and the seal of the Company, may be facsimile representations of those signatures and seals, and such facsimile representations shall have the same force and effect as if manually affixed. The facsimile representations referred to herein may be affixed by stamping, printing, typing, or photocopying." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolutions were duly adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of the Companies, and are now in full force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand this 7th dayof December 2001 John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-877-1111 and ask for the Surety Division. Please refer to the Power of Attorney Number, the above named individual(s) and details of the bond to which the power is attached. For information or filing claims, please contact Surety Claims, ICW Group, 11455 El Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 or call (858) 350-2400. 1 TEXAS j,9-, ATC jWIA By 1 i 1 1 PERFORMANCE BOND 1 t u fl i Bond No. 184 49 64 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021 (a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of THREE HUNDRED SEVENTY SIX THOUSAND SIX HUNDRED FORTY TWO AND NO/100----------- Dollars ($376,642.00 ) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 3RD day of DECEMBER , 2001 , to BID #266-01/RS - WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING I& EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING ' and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021 (a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHER OF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 7TH day of DECEMBER, , 2001 INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST Surety By:. ,, --/, - KEVIN I DUNN , —Attorney -in -Fact HUNTER CON (Title) (Title) By: (Title) i t The undersigned surety company represents that it Is duly qualified to do business In Texas, and hereby ' designates KEVIN J. DUNN an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. t Approved as to Form City of Lubbock By: City Attorney INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST Surety * By: K IN J. DUNN, Attorney -In -Fact * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. if signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. No. 0001740 ICW GROUP Power of Attorney Insurance Company of the West The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Insurance Company of the West, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of California, The Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Arizona, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Companies'), do hereby appoint KEVIN J. DUNN, FRED DAVIS, CARA D. HANCOCK, MIKE HENTHORN, RON STROMAN AND HAROLD BINGGELI their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact with authority to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers this 16th day of January, 2001. ey�M•yar OQ apa�9XTY 9SEAL+ c art. � 9�so•a `° a! • John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary State of California County of San Diego ss. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST THE EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President On January 16, 2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Public, personally appeared John L. Hannurn and John H. Craig, personally known to me to be the persons whose names are subscribed to the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that they executed the same in their authorized capacities, and that by their signatures on the instrument, the entity upon behalf of which the persons acted, executed the instrument. Witness my hand and official seal. NORMA PORTER COMM.•#1257540 AA CU NOTARY PUt3UC-CA(.IFORNIA .N y SAN D1EGO,QOUNT Is on Expires 4�. My CC' IM NIARCN t9, 2004 Norma Porter, Notary Public RESOLUTIONS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed, sealed and notarized with facsimile signatures and seals under authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of each of the Companies: "RESOLVED: That the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, together with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, are hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney appointing the person(s) named as Attorneys) -in -Fact to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the signatures of the officers making the appointment, and the signature of any officer certifying the validity and current status of the appointment, may be facsimile representations of those signatures; and the signature and seal of any notary, and the seal of the Company, may be facsimile representations of those signatures and seals, and such facsimile representations shall have the same force and effect as if manually affixed. The facsimile representations referred to herein may be affixed by stamping, printing, typing, or photocopying." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolutions were duly adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of the Companies, and are now in full force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand this 7th day of December 2001 7 t� John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-877-1111 and ask for the Surety Division. Please refer to the Power of Attorney Number, the above named individual(s) and details of the bond to which the power is attached. For information or filing claims, please contact Surety Claims, ICW Group, 11455 El Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 or call {858) 350-2400. IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint; You may contact_ the Texas Department of Insurance. to. obtain information on companies, coverages, .rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of. Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX # (512)475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should yo.0 have a dispute. concerning `your premium or about a claim you should contact the agent or the company first.. If the dispute is not _resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice -is for. information only. and does not become 'a part or condition of the attached document. u I u l n r CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 4 ACQR-IX CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURAN %ODW (906) 795-1999 FAX (806) 795-2158 THIS CERTMATE IS ISSUED Gal l algber ZnMest ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIM HOLDER. TMB�C RT�IFICATE I 0. Box 5393.0 ALTER THE COVRAtiE AFFC ubbock. Texas 79453 MUR&M A ON THE CERTFICATE 10T AMEW EXTEND OR BY THE POLICIES BELOW. ING COVERAGE eulm Hunter Construction Company P.O. Box 2587 Lubbock. TX 7940x! WMMERA: FILO 6DIIL Real: %mamimis N5UNKM Fir '* VU04 Co. Nutual ftnm Staves) WOUR xa General StAr emnity(3arret) warm n Texts Work Fund WOUERI- Firemmas Fund (Metas) THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN maymToTHE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE I m ANY REQUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUWNT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH' MAY PERTAIN, THE MURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRMW HEWN M SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS. POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. ilk TVW OF weusAM POLICY "mmum GENSMLrAmm D4GL51694 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 X MMMEWIAL GENERA. UAB UTY 0 Mas MAGE ocom 1 GENL AGGREGATE UMIT APPUE9 PW- BA6400396 03/31/2001 03/31/2007 AM ATO X ALL aMM AVMS B SCHEDULED AUTOS X HIRED AWW X Nor amm Auras GARASE LIARL" AW Aura prOy G376037 03/31/2001 03/32/tO -Xj 0=1% F-1 OA Ms MADE C DEDUC ME X RETENnON s 20,000 EOR�NTHD<iA� F426616 03/31/2001 03/31/ — owu+a umurl 0 t 1NDICATW. NOTMRTHSTA M FrATE MAY BE ISSUED OR NS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH EACH C COUR 46NM $ 1, OflO. wMOAMAGE(Mrmegay s I 100 MED EW (Any as yawn) s 5 ccnaroaALl t caw Kn INV S ] _ tm _ G&WEPALAGGRWAX s 2.000.0 001 PRODUCTS • COMProP AGG s Z1000, 0 Cr- - s Le ulwT s 1,000,000 ytom cF : 900CYNAMs DAMAGEPRCPMVV s Arlo GWY - EA ACCIOENT s GrAER'D" EA ACC s AUTO ONLY. AMG s EACH OCCURRENCE : 1 000,0010 AGGI*MTE s s s s X LHM EL EACH ACCIDENT s 1,000,000 EL DWEASE - EA EMPLDM e E.L DIH mm- POLICY u wr Is F3,Tders• Risk •---'-S30N ON PerE.000 Deductible IEEWNW eMRnno�wLoo►molu+vElrauwzawsloNe Aoom 4r sa�ooEorstsa nllovpwns . ro ect: #9799.9107 dditional Insured A Waiver of Subrogation included onGan Pal it Auto.. Lin lity policies in favor f certificate bolder as required by written contract. M1a vjr of Subjd t 4d 'included on all policies; o favor of certificate holder as required by written contow. ell UW A* or TNq "0r :cIi "Lome 9E CAN06140 VVF=E THE aIIP*"* DAIS.: M �AM WLLUDEAMOR T00ft iQ i D1�rWWmfffw t0 0 TQICiTt "CLOW t1AMR0 To Tgti Lon, VUn PALU: TO NMOL swam i NO OBUQAWK OR LVmmuY city of Lubbock PO Box 2000 at ANS 91.0 Tm COMOAkff. hl i►o OR Re 161PPITATdes. Lubbock. R ?X 79457 rdiha[I /A�G l�W�IJ�ilh■.�. IMPORTANT r If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policyties) must be endorsed A statement ' on this ce tTcste does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endomemenks). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may ' require an endorsement A statement on this ceffKx to does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsemerhIts). DISCLAIMER The Ceffiicate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contrst bs*mn the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, w does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by. the policies Hsted thereon. L ACORDM CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE �2/06/22o 1 RODUCER (806) 78S-1988 FAX (806) 785-2155 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION her Inwest ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE Gallagher HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR P. 0, Box 53910 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. ' Lubbock, Texas 79453 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURED Hunter Construction Company INSURER A: Mid -Continent Casualty Company ' P.o. Box 2587 INSURER B: Fireman's Fund Co. Mutual(Myron Steves) Lubbock, TX 79408 INSURER C: General Star Indemnity(Jarret) INSURER D: Texas Work Comp. Fund INSURER E: Fl remans Fund (McGee) V Y CRPiV G.7 THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. TR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE MMIDD POLICY EXPIRATION DATE M D LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 04GLS1694 03/31/2001, 03/31/2002 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000. FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 100,0001 MED EXP (Any one person) $ S'0001 A CLAIMS MADE FRI OCCUR PERSONAL 8 ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY PRO LOC JECT AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO BA6400396 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ (Ea accident) 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY $ (Per person) B X ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS X HIRED AUTOS X NON -OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC $ AUTO ONLY: AGG $ ANY AUTO EXCESS LIABILITY 7X OCCUR 1 CLAIMS MADE XG376037 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 AGGREGATE $ $ C $ DEDUCTIBLE $ X RETENTION $ 10,000 WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY TSF426616 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 X TORY LIMBS ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,00 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE $ 1,000,00 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT . $ 1,000,000 UTTIRders' Risk X197700341 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 $3,000,000 Per Jobsite E 1,000 Deductible DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATIONSIVEHICLESIEXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENTISPECIAL PROVISIONS roject: #9799.8107 FERTIFICATE HOLDER I I ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER: I IWIN SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, City Of Lubbock BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY CiBOx 2000 OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. Lubbock, TX 794S7 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Ron Stroman CIC ASG 411- ACORD 26-S (7197) ©ACORD CORPORATION 1988 I IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, mind cr alter the coverage affcrued by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25-S (7/97) ' CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: ' (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; ' (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; ' (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; ' (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and ' (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; ' (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the ' contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; ' (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 -point normal type, and shall be in both ' English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: fl u REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE '"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the 'identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to ' report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; ' (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: ' (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during ' the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year ' thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of ' coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by ' paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. Li CONTRACT 1 I� I� t ' CONTRACT 'STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 3rd day of December, 2001 by and between the City of Lubbock, t County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Hunter Construction Companyof the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. ' WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements ' described as follows: BID #266-01/RS -WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING - $376,642.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his {or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have ' been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with ' the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. ' IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. ATTEST: CITY F L BOCK, TEXAS O R) i _ By: Sec etary MAYOR 'PS AS TO CONTENT: ' Owner's Representative APPROVED AS TO FORM: City Attorney ERRITED NAME: ..�. TITLEr:-f COMPLETE ADDRESS: Hunter Construction Company P.O. Box 2587 Lubbock, Texas 79408 11 u GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT F�l n 0 7 0 E IGENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of ' Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR ' Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. ' 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative BRUCE BLALACK. WATER SUPERINTENDENT, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, ' supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 2 1 r ' 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other ' facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. ' All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the fecility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. ' 10. LAYOUT ' Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall,t des 4p i le for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to thy, vne 's , � se l i`v T � Qwner's RsepfpIq iafive wtli check the Contractor's layout 94f9V t u tl?r r f o All Contractor's reque . „ � cidcs "n1t ,' V!O - the 41!6ctor of the respons�i��ty of cor c lj i�ca no all ' work in accordance w tH liie'Plans and Specifications. 1.1. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. ' 12. ,RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the ' executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, ' methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ' 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and incase of -careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be ' replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 0 ' 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's ' Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work ' and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) ' calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by 'the -Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may ' deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the ' proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications ' provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE ' The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate ' supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. I The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. ' The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING ' It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be ' encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or ' Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in -Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. OBSERVATION AND TESTING ' The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the ' time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has ' previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at ' a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. ' All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. ' If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and ' approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. ' 4 11 fl 7 C 7 Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated; -or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. it is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph ' shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, 'together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other ' insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's ' Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership ' Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, ' overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall ' be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless drdered n writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive ' compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and ' the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of ' any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS ' It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these ' contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands ' the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and ' specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. ' 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of ' work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. ' If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give ' reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 0 ' 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an ' insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable ' provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection ' with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. - ' The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, ' are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. ' 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of ' Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and ' its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in ' conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such ' insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance ' specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as an additional insured, or in the ' alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. A. General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1.000.000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations � E � F i Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, �_Q Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $300.000.00 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 0% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $0on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500.000.00. 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with ' the Contractor and regardless of whether that erson has employees. This includes, without p limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a ' project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. ' 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. ' 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of .he coverage period, file a new ' certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: ' (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all ' persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage ' showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and ' for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially ' affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by ' the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a -person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. ' 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: ' (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the slate borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be .canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. 10 C� 7 u LJ J u (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;. (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on theproject that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall -be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE ' "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or ' materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;" and 11 ' (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; ' (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that ' the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that ail coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate ' insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, ' civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate ' of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the ' Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the ' project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project ' and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on ' the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as ' required by paragraphs (i) -(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. ' 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of ' 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 12 ' 30 0 PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS, MATERIALMEN. AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhol4 from the unpaid 0ortion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION ' The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular ' design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, ' agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's 'Representative prior to bidding. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES ' The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the ' Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the ' work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors ' perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. ' The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 13 J 0 0 C u 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the -contract documents. if the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $0Z� ERO) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages --for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. ' The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. ' 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this ' project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors ' employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty X20) calendar days 14 of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. ' 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such ' work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except ' where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. ' 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, ' area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material ' to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are ' expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, ' payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY ' The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be ' liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, ' against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. ' 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the ' specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all ' expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. ' 15 1 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the ' contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection ' with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. ' 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS ' On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial paymen if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a ' certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. ' The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the OwF.,�Irlsentative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be ets°t$fl�y::fint, r;ljs,II previ us payments and all f rth rs4ms th may be retained b Owinder the t�PU(* til"��t fiao t i„ � ,' y y ' Nil Y-;2 '. b ��,- t6� ],.. ' Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute�a��rer�by the miner o�"�`n�and'al �ne�r rights to ' enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. ' 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ' Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's ' Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. ' 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT ' The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, ' Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the ' obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 1E. 11 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative ' on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of ' other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. ' Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which ' shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. ' 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: ' (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the ' amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE ' It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed ' that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. ' 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after ' written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be ' delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. 17 L ' After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and ' equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for ' under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or ' otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: ' (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the ' sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or ' (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost ' under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be ' credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as ' provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, ' shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would ' have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, ' and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the ' Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the ' date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at -either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any 18 ' machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this ' paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. ' 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually ' performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the ' project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so ' furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS ' In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. ' 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the ' work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to ' direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and ' vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. ' 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at ' the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 19 1 L! 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS ' Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in ' any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in ' the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least ' twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) ' days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shaa be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 1 20 Ll n 7 CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 RE: RESOLUTION NO. 6262, ITEM NO. 39, APRIL 8, 1999 EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Hourly Rate Acoustical Ceiling Installer 11.50 Air Conditioner Installer 12.50 Air Conditioner Installer -Helper 6.25 Asbestos Worker 9.00 Asbestos Supervisor 12.50 Bricklayer 12.50 Bricklayer -Helper 7.00 . Carpenter 11.00 Carpenter -Helper 7.00 Cement Finisher 8.00 Drywall Hanger 11.00 Electrician 13.75 Electrician -Helper 7.00 Equipment Operator -Heavy 9.50 Equipment Operator -Light 8.50 Floor Installer 9.50 Glazier 10.50 Insulator-Piping/Boiler 11.50 Insulator -Helper 7.00 Iron Worker 11.00 Laborer -General 6.00 Mortar Mixer 6.00 Painter 9.50 Plumber 12.50 Plumber -Helper 7.00 Roofer 9.00 Roofer -Helper 7.00 Sheet Metal Worker 10.00 Sheet Metal Worker -Helper 7.00 Welder -Certified 11.00 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Asphalt Heaterman Aspha!t Shoveler Concrete Finisher Concrete Finisher -Helper Electrician Flagger Form Setter Form Setter -Helper Laborer -General Laborer -Utility Mechanic Mechanic -Helper Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine Bulldozer Concrete Paving Machine Front End Loader Heavy Equipment Operator Light Equipment Operator Motor Grader Operator Roller Scraper Tractor Truck Driver -Light Truck Driver -Heavy 2 Hourly Rate 9.00 6.00 8.00 7.00 12.00 6.00 7.00 6.25 6.00 6.75 8.00 7.00 7.75 8.00 7.75 7.25 8.00 7.25 9.50 6.75 7.25 7.25 6.50 7.00 EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the fair Labor Standards Act. 3 SPECIFICATIONS tal ��sT � J! } n �Ftn'�t rtp F.•�i',1, t5 83 /01 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 0 NEW ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING - NEW EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING FOR THE CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES City of Lubbock `,��oED IkR Lubbock, Texas {r.? Adling Associates Architects Project Number 583/01 October 8, 2001 TABLE OF CONTENTS Following is the enumeration of the Specifications, Drawings and Addenda which form a part of this Contract as set forth in Article 1 "General Provisions" of the General Conditions of the Contract for Constzvction. BOUND HEREIN Pages Tableof Contents....................................................................................... 4 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01.031 Cutting, Patching and Alteration Procedures........................................7 01.500 Temporary Facilities................................................................3 DIVISION 2 SITE WORK ' Section 02.110 Site Demolition and Clearing .................................................... 3 02.200 Earthwork........................................................................... 8 02.210 Site Grading......................................................................... 2 ' 02.514 Concrete Walks...............................................................................4 02.760 Traffic Control Markings......................................................... .2 ' DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03.300 Concrete Work..................................................................... 16 i i r_ ' 583/01 TABLEOFCONIENTS Page 2 ' DIVISION 4 MASONRY ' Section 04.200 Unit Masonry Work...........................................................................8 04.230 Reinforced Unit Masonry ...................................................................8 IDIVISION 5 METALS ' Section 05.120 05.210 Structural Steel.......................................................................7 Steel Joists.............................................................................4 05.300 Metal Roof Decking.................................................................4 ' 05.500 Metal Fabrications.................................................................. 4 ' DIVISION 6 CARPENTRY AND WOODWORK Section 06.100 Carpentry Work..................................................................... 4 ' 06.400 Architectural Woodwork...........................................................3 ' DIVISION 7 MOISTURE AND THERMAL PROTECTION ' Section 07.180 Concrete Sealer......................................................................3 07.190 Water Repellents..............................................................................4 ' 07.210 07.212 Building Insulation..................................................................2 Roof Insulation.......................................................................5 07.520 Modified Bitumen Roofing........................................................7 ' 07.610 07.900 Metal roofing System...............................................................6 Caulking and Sealants . 6 I DIVISION 8 DOORS WINDOWS AND GLASS Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ............................................... 4 ' 08.210 Wood Doors........................................................................ . 08.331 Overhead Doors...............................................................................2 08.410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts............................................4 ' 08.700 Finish Hardware.................................................................... 7 08.800 Glass And Glazzing................................................................ 3 ' DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09.260 Gypsum Wallboard Systems.....................................................6 ' 09.510 Acoustical Ceilings...... .4 09.650 Resilient Flooring...................................................................3 ' 09.900 Painting............................................................................. 7 ' 583/01 TABLEOFCONIENIS Page 3 ' DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES ' this Contract) Plumbing Systems.......................................3 Section 10.155 Toilet Partitions ................... ........3 ' 10.500 Metal Lockers................................................................................3 ' 10.520.. Fire Extinguishers ................ ...1 Bridge Crane..................................................................................9 10.650 Wire Mesh Partitions ...............................................................2 ' 10.800 Toilet Accessories.....................................................................2 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT ' (Not in this Contract) ' DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (Not in this Contract) Plumbing Systems.......................................3 15.411 DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION ' Section 13.122 Metal Building Systems............................................................ 11 DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS Insulation..............................................................................2 Section 14.470 Bridge Crane..................................................................................9 ' DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL Section 15.010 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical ............................ 11 15.110 Site Utilities..........................................................................5 ' DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16.010 Basic Electrical Requirements.....................................................4 ' 16.110 Raceways.............................................................................6 i 15.211 Piping and Accessories.............................................................5 ' 15.310 Plumbing Systems.......................................3 15.411 Air Distribution......................................................................4 15.511 Hangers and Supports..............................................................3 15.660 Insulation..............................................................................2 15.710 Equipment............................................................................6 ' 15.810 Compressed Air System............................................................2 Testing, Adjusting Balancing Mechanical Systems 15.901 and .......................2 ' DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16.010 Basic Electrical Requirements.....................................................4 ' 16.110 Raceways.............................................................................6 i ' 583101 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4 ' S-1 Plans, Sections, Details, and Notes (Equipment Operations Building) ' 16.120 Wires and Cables................................................................... 4 16.130 Boxes..................................................................................2 ' 16.140 Wiring Devices......................................................................3 16.170 Grounding and Bonding............................................................4 16.195 Electrical Identification.............................................................3 ' 16.441 Safety Switches......................................................................3 16.460 Dry -Type Transformers............................................................4 ' 16.470 16.477 Panelboards...........................................................................4 Fuses...................................................................................2 ' 16.510 Lighting...............................................................................3 ' 16.670 Lighting Protection System........................................................3 i DRAWINGS BOUND SEPARATELY ' Sheet A1.0 Site Plans, Noted and Details A2.0 Floor Plan, Notes and Schedules (Electrical Shop Building) ' A3.0 Exterior Elevations, Section and Wall Sections (Electrical Shop Building) A4.0 Roof Plan, Ceiling Plan, Interior Elevations and Details (Electrical Shop Building) ' A5.0 Floor Plan, Roof Plan, Schedules and Notes (Equipment Operations Building) S-1 Plans, Sections, Details, and Notes (Equipment Operations Building) ' S-2 Plans, Sections, Details, and Notes (Electrical Shop Building) S-3 Roof Framing Plan, Sections and Notes (Electrical Shop Building) ' MPE1 Site Utilities Plan and Details Mi Mechanical Plan, Schedules and Legend (Electrical Shop Building) 1 M2 Details P1 Plumbing Plan and Legend (Both Buildings) ' P2 Details and Schedules ' E1 E2 Lighting Plan, Notes and Schedules (Electrical Shop Building) Electrical Power -Communication, Notes and Schedules (Electrical Shop Buildings) ' E3 Lighting -Power plans and Electrical Site Plan (Equipment Operations Building) ADDENDA AS ISSUED ' End of Table of Contents I583/01 CUTTING PATCHING AND ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES Section 01.031 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and of the Agreement and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. Definition: "Cutting and patching" includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the installation or performance of other work and subsequent filling and patching required to restore surfaces to their original ' condition. 1. "Cutting and patching" shall be performed for coordination of the work, to uncover work for access or inspection, to obtain samples for testing, to permit alterations to be performed or for other similar purposes. 2. Cutting and patching performed during the manufacture of products, or during the initial fabrication, erection or installation process is not considered to be "cutting and patching" under this definition. ' Drilling of holes to install fasteners and similar operations are also not considered to be "cutting and patching." 3. "Demolition" is recognized as a related -but -separate category of work which may or may not require cutting and patching as defined in this section. ' B. Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, required to complete the Work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. ' 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Join new work to existing work in place. 5. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation piping and electrical conduit. C. In addition to Contract requirements, upon written instructions of A/E: ' 1. Uncover work to provide for A/E's or Owner's Representative's observation of covered work. 2. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. D. Refer to other sections of these Specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements and limitations ' applicable to individual units of work. Unless otherwise specified, requirements of this section apply to mechanical and electrical work. E. Alterations procedures: The procedures and administrative requirements of this section apply to all sections of the Specifications which are involved in alterations to existing construction: 1. Extent notes: Cut into or partially remove portions of existing building (as necessary) to make way for ' new construction. Include such work as: a. Cutting, moving or removal of items shown to be cut, moved or removed. b. Cutting, moving or removal of items not shown to be cut, moved, or removed, but which must be cut, moved, or removed to allow new work to proceed. Work or items which are to remain in finished ' work shall be patched or reinstalled after their cutting, moving or removal, and their joints and finishes made to match adjacent or similar work. c. Removal of existing surface finishes as needed to install new work and finishes. d. Removal of abandoned items and removal of items serving no useful purpose, such as abandoned ' piping. e. Repair or removal of dangerous or unsanitary conditions resulting from alterations work. ' F. Payments: Costs caused by ill -rimed or defective work, or work not shown or specified in the Construction Documents shall be incurred by party responsible for ill-timed, rejected or non -conforming work. 583/01 CUTTING PATCHING AND ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES Section 01.031 Page 2 G. Work performed shall be in accordance with applicable codes, regulations and ordinances having jurisdiction. H. Existing warranties: Perform replacing, patching and repairing of material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with material so as not to void, in any way, warranties or bonds required under this Contract or in force on existing work (or work performed under other contracts). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural work in a manner that would result in a reduction of load -carrying capacity or of load -deflection ratio. B. Before cutting and patching structural members obtain the A/E's approval to proceed with cutting and patching as described in the procedural proposal for cutting and patching. C. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operational elements or safety related components in a manner that would result in a reduction of their capacity to perform in the manner intended, including energy performance, or that would result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or decreased safety. D. Visual requirements: Do not cut and patch work exposed on the building's exterior or in its occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the A-E/Owner's opinion, result in lessening the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that would result in substantial visual evidence of cut and patch work. Remove and replace work judged by the A-E/Owner to be cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. Use a recognized experienced and specialized firm to cut and patch exposed work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit a written request to the A/E well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Work of the Owner or any separate Contractor. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of the Project. 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. B. Content: Request shall include: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Description of affected work. 3. The necessity for cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. Effect on work of Owner or any separate Contractor, or on structural or weatherproof integrity of Project. 5. Description of proposed work: a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. Extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternates to cutting and patching. 7. Written permission of any separate Contractor whose work will be affected. 8. List utilities that will be disturbed or otherwise be affected by the Work, including those that will be relocated and those that will be out -of -service temporarily. Indicate how long utility services will be disrupted. 9. Where cutting and patching of structural work involves the addition of reinforcement, submit details and engineering calculations to show how that reinforcement is integrated with the original structure to satisfy requirements. 10. Approval by the A-E/Owner to proceed with cutting and patching work does not waive the A/E's right to 1 n Section 0 1.03 1 require at a later date complete removal and replacement of work found to be cut and patched in an unsatisfactory manner. 1.05 MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, or as directed by the A-E/Owner, use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available, or cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal -or -better performance characteristics. B. Should conditions of Work or the schedule indicate a change of products from original. installation, the Contractor shall submit a request for substitution. 1.06 INSPECTION A. Carefully examine the premises to determine the extent of work and the condition under which it must be done, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting and patching. No extra payments will be allowed for claims for additional work that could have been determined or anticipated by such inspection. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products. B. Field conditions: Check and verify Contract Documents and field conditions before proceeding with work. If there are any questions regarding these or other coordination questions, the Contractor is responsible for obtaining clarification from the A/E before proceeding with work or related work in question. C. Before cutting, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which the work is to be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding with work. D. Before start of cutting work, meet at work site with all parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict between the various trades. Coordinate layout of work and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding with the work. 1.07 PREPARATION ' A. Temporary supports: To prevent failure provide temporary support of work to be cut. The responsibility for the safety of persons and property is the Contractor's during work of this Contract. n 7 B. Protection: Protect adjacent improvements and other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for that part of the project that may be exposed during cutting and patching operations. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. Take precautions not to cut existing pipe, conduit or duct serving the building (but scheduled to be relocated) until provisions have been made to bypass them. 1.08 PERFORMANCE A. General: In performing the work prescribed herein, it will be the Contractor's responsibility to repair all existing construction disturbed, relocated, damaged or altered an all new construction installed, as required to hide all evidence of work and to refinish this construction to match existing finish and appearance. B. Damage: Contractor shall be responsible for the repairs of any accidental damage the Contractor inflicts upon the existing work to remain. If, for any reason, damage to existing work or utilities is considered to be unavoidable, submit written notification. The Contractor assumes full responsibility for damage and the cost of satisfactorily repairing or replacing the damaged work. C. Workmanship: Contractor and Subcontractors shall cooperate fully in performance of work. Cutting of new work shall be avoided. However, if cutting, patching, repairing, removing and/or replacing is necessary, it shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. In all cases, exercise care 583/01 CUTTING PATCHING AND ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES Section 01.031 Page 4 in cutting operations. Perform operations under supervision of competent mechanics skilled in applicable trade. D. Cutting: Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work. 1. In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum saw or core drill to ensure a neat hole. Cut holes and slots neatly to sizes required with existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Bypass utility services such as pipe and conduit before cutting where such utility services are shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. After bypassing and cutting, cap, valve or plug and seal tight remaining portion of pipe and conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter. E. Patching: Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work. Where no tolerances are specified, patchwork shall match existing work and existing tolerances. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate inte¢rity of work. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and, where necessary, extend finish restoration into retained adjoining work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 1.09 ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING BUILDING A. General: 1. Work Sequence: List required scheduling or sequence for project. 2. Security: When keys to locked areas are needed to perform work, obtain from staff member designated by Owner. Return keys at end of each workday. 3. Maintenance of Access and Operations: a. During period of construction, the Owner will continue to perform normal activities in existing building. Maintain proper and safe access to the Owner -occupied areas at all times. b. Schedule demolition and remodeling operations with Owner in such a manner as to allow Owner operations to continue with minimum interruption. c. During period of construction, do not obstruct in any manner existing exit passageways of Owner - occupied areas. Maintain existing fire doors in an operable condition. 4. Maintenance of Existing Services: a. Maintain environmental control in existing buildings, especially temperature, humidity and dust control b. Provide temporary lines and connections as required to maintain existing mechanical and electrical services in building. c. Schedule utility interruptions with the Owner's Representative. B. Extent: 1. Cutting and removal work shall be performed so as not to cut or remove more than is necessary and so as not to damage adjacent work. 2. Conduct work in such a manner as to minimize noise and accumulation and spread of dirt and dust. 3. Drill holes for conduit and piping using core drills. 4. All penetrations in slab, columns, etc., to be pilot -drilled to determine the exact location and possible interference with any other items. (For example rebar, piping, anchors, etc.) Joists, beams and columns are not to be cut, drilled or modified without prior written approval. C. Shoring, Bracing and Capping: Provide shores, needling, and bracing as needed to keep building structurally secure and free of deflection in all its parts, and as needed for installation of new structural members. D. Responsibility and Assignment to Trades: 1. Contractor shall assign the work of moving, removing, cutting, patching and repairing to trades under 583/01 CUTTING PATCHING AND ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES Section 01.031 Page 5 Contractor's supervision to cause the least damage to each type of work encountered, and to return the building as much as possible to the appearance of new work. 2. Patching of finished materials shall be assigned to mechanics skilled in the work of the finish trade involved. E. Protection: 1 1. Protect remaining finishes, equipment, and adjacent work from damage caused by cutting, moving, removing, and patching operations. Protect surfaces which will remain a part of the finished work. 2. Protect existing facilities and features within designated construction limits and along corridor access routes to construction areas. ' 3. During demolition, cutting and construction, provide positive dust control by wetting dusty debris and by completely sealing openings to Owner -occupied areas with temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 4. After materials, equipment and machinery are installed, properly protect Work until final acceptance. ' 5. Any damage resulting from construction operations shall be repaired by the Contractor (or responsible Subcontractor as applicable) without cost to the Owner. 6. During non -working hours, provide continuous security at openings cut into existing exterior roofs. ' F. Temporary Barricades/Partitions: Maintain temporary and dust partitions to seal openings to Owner -occupied areas. ' 1. Provide temporary guardrails/barricades. 2. Dust control: The dust resulting from cutting and patching shall be controlled to prevent the spread of dust to occupied portions of the building and to avoid creation of a nuisance in the surrounding area. Use of water will be permitted as indicated. Provide drop cloths or other suitable barriers to prevent dust from ' traveling to other portions of the building. Seal off all return air registers or other mechanical systems to prevent dust from entering such systems. ' G. Debris: 1. Remove debris promptly from the building and deposit in Contractor -furnished dumpster containers. Removed material, except that listed or marked by the Owner for retention, becomes property of the ' Contractor. Contractor shall remove dumpster stored debris and materials and shall dispose of removed material legally. Do not burn on site. Do not allow debris to enter sewers. 2. Do not let piled material endanger structures. 3. During cutting and coring operations, use metal lined wood box secured tight against surface, to catch ' falling debris and water. 1.10 PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING FOR ALTERATIONS WORK ' A. Skill: Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of matching the existing quality of workmanship. ' B. Patching: 1. In areas where any portion of an existing finished surface is damaged, lifted, stained or otherwise made or found to be imperfect, patch or replace the imperfect portion of the surface with matching material. ' 2. Provide adequate support or substrate for patching of finishes. 3. When existing surface mounted fixtures, such as, but not limited to, pipes, grills, ducts, electrical boxes, conduit, etc., are shown to be removed or are no longer required for the new work, and such surface mounted items occur in existing walls, floors, or ceiling which are indicated as the finish for the new ' work, Contractor shall patch, seal or otherwise cover all penetrations resulting from the removed item using materials and textures to match adjacent finishes. ' C. Quality: 1. No concerted attempt has been made to describe each of the various existing products that must be used to 583/01 CUTTING PATCHING AND ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES Section 01.031 Page 6 patch, match, extend, or replace existing work. Obtain all such products in time to complete the work on schedule. Such products shall be provided in quality which is in no way inferior to the existing products. 2. The quality of the products that exist in the building as apparent during prebid site visits shall serve as the Specification requirement for strength, appearance, and other characteristics. D. Transitions: 1. Where new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work make transitions as smooth and workmanlike as possible. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so as to make the patch or transition invisible to the eye at a distance of 3 feet. 2. Where masonry or other finished surfaces are cut in such a way that smooth transitions with new work are not possible, terminate the existing surface in a neat fashion along a straight line at a natural line of division and provide trim appropriate to the finished surface. E. Matching: 1. Restore existing work that is damaged during construction to a condition equal to its condition at the time of the start of the Work. F. Overall Requirement that the Work be Complete: 1. Where a product or type of construction occurs in the existing building and it is not specified as a part of the new work, provide such products or types of construction as needed to patch, extend or match existing work. 2. These Specifications will generally not describe existing products or standards of execution, nor will they enumerate products which are not a part of new construction. Existing product is its own specification. 3. The presence of any product or type of construction in the existing work shall cause its patching, extending, or matching to be performed as necessary to make the work complete and consistent to identical standards of quality. 1.1 l REPAIR IN CONJUNCTION WITH ALTERATION WORK A. Replace work damaged in the course of alterations, except at areas approved by the A-E/Owner for repair. B. Where full removal of extensive amounts of almost suitable work would be needed to replace damaged portions, then filling, spackling, straightening, and similar repair techniques, followed by full refinishing, will be permitted. C. If repaired work is not brought up to the standard for new work the A/E will direct that it be cut out and replaced with the new work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.12 REMOVAL AND RELOCATION A. Items indicated for removal and relocation shall be assigned to mechanics skilled in the particular trade involved. All items shall be cleaned prior to relocation. B. Each Successive Trade: 1. As each trade finishes its work on each part of the alterations work and related new work, it shall clean up its work area and make work surfaces ready for the work of the succeeding trades. 2. Spillage, overspray, collections of dust or debris, and damage of Owner -occupied spaces shall be cleaned- or leanedor remedied immediately by the responsible trade. C. Each area as it is completed: 1. As soon as work in each area of the alterations is complete, clean all surfaces, remove equipment, salvage and debris, and return in condition suitable for use by the Owner as quickly as possible. 583/01 CUTTING PATCHING AND ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES Section 01.031 Page 7 D. Each trade and subcontractor shall deposit debris in Contractor furnished dumpster containers on site. Contractor shall remove containers from site and dispose of trash legally. Take precautions to eliminate blowing or spillage of debris onto the site. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Does Not Apply) PART 3 EXECUTION) (Does Not Apply) End of Section ' 583/01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES Section 01.500 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 PROSECUTION OF WORK ' A. Contractor shall furnish measures for prosecuting work of this project including, but not limited to, structural engineering, cranes, hoists, chutes, movement of personnel, materials, equipment, temporary heating, and operation and maintenance of such facilities. ' 1.03 TOILETS ' A. The Contractor shall provide adequate temporary toilet facilities for all workers. The temporary toilet facilities shall be on die as directed by the Superintendent of Schools. placed project grounds 1.04 SECURITY A. Construction period security is die responsibility of the Contractor; however, the Owner shall have the right of access to the construction site. ' 1.05 WATCHMAN A. The Contractor may, at die Contractors option, employ a watchman service when work is not being carried on. However, no liability shall attach to the Contractor in this respect except in the protection of his own interest. 1.06 WATER A. Utility costs for temporary water for construction purposes will be provided and paid for by die Owner. The Contractor shall make all required connections to and extensions of all required water to the point of service. ' 107. ELECTRICITY A. The Contractor shall provide for all temporary connections and utility costs for all temporary ' electrical power required for die work of this Contract. B. The Contractor shall provide for all temporary connections to keep the School in full electrical power for die duration of the project. The School District will pay the utility costs for the electrical power which serves die areas of die school not under construction. 1.08 SCAFFOLDING, BARRICADES, ENCLOSURES A. The Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain for the duration of the work as required, all scaffold, ' runways, guardrails, platforms and similar temporary construction as may be necessary for the performance of die Contract. Such facilities shall be of die type and arrangement as is required for their specific use and shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations of die Occupational Safety and Health Act. 583/01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES Section 01.500 Page 2 B. The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain for the duration of die work all necessary barricades, warning signs and signals, and shall take all other precautions to safeguard persons, adjoining property, including improvement thereon, against injuries and damages of every nature whatsoever. C. Parts and structures and other work in place that are subject to injury because of the operations being carried on adjacent thereto, shall be covered, boarded up or substantially enclosed with adequate protection. 1.09 GUARDRAILS AND BARRICADES A. Provide guardrails, handrails, and covers for floor, roof and wall openings and for stairways installed or constructed by the Contractors forces. B. If movement of these protective facilities is required to perform work, it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to replace the said protections in a satisfactory manner. C. Provide all barricades required to protect all natural resources and site improvements. 1.10 STAIRS, LADDERS, HOISTS, ETC. A. Provide temporary stairs, scaffolding and ladders as may be required for die use of all workmen and inspectors. B. Install and operate such materials hoists as may be necessary to properly and expeditiously perform die work. 1.11 REGULATIONS A. Comply with governing regulations and utility company regulations and recommendations for construction of temporary facilities and services; including (but not necessarily limited to) code compliances, permits, inspections, testing, and health and safety compliances. 1.12 PROJECT SIGNS A. The Contractor shall not erect or post any signs or notices of any kind any place on the project unless approval is secured from the Superintendent of Schools. 1.13 CLEANUP DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The Contractor shall maintain the buildings and sites clear and free of all debris and trash and shall furnish a suitable trash container for the use of all trades and contractors on the project. Each Contractor shall clean and remove all trash and debris occasioned by the Contractors work to die trash container which will be removed from die site by die General Contractor as required. B. The Contractor will have die prime responsibility of keeping die building and site in a clean, neat and safe working condition during die entire construction period. C. The School District's trash receptacles shall not be used for construction debris. 1.14 PROTECTION OF SITE A. The Contractor shall furnish measures for protection of public, workmen and property, including structural engineering, maintenance and operation of such facilities. 583/01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES Section 01.500 Page 3 1.15 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES A. The Contractor shall protect existing facilities during construction activities. 1.16 EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES A. Existing underground lines occur in the site where the work is to be done. The Contractor shall visit the site and determine the location of all utility lines. Existing lines shown on the drawing are not guaranteed as to size and location or for completeness. Any utility line which interferes with new construction shall be relocated or rerouted by die Contractor as directed by the Superintendent of Schools and Owner. End of Section C 11 583/01 SITE DEMOLITION AND CLEARING Section 02.110 Page 1 PARTI GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of site demolition and clearing is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All above and below grade obstructions conflicting with new construction shall be removed under this heading. Site clearing operations required in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Removal of vegetation and topsoil. 2. Removal of surplus materials. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall take precautions to protect existing facilities and features to remain. Any damage caused by the Contractor shall be repaired immediately at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Does not Apply) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION A. Demolition includes the complete wrecking of structures and the removal and disposal of demolished materials, as shown on the Drawings and herein specified. B. The Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of structures and items to be demolished. C. The use of explosives will not be permitted. D. Conduct demolition operations and the removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. E. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. F. Ensure the safe passage of persons around the area of demolition. Conduct operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities and persons. G. Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations at no cost to the Owner. H. Maintain existing utilities, indicated to remain, keep in service and protect against damage during 583/01 SITE DEMOLITION AND CLEARING Section 02.110 Page 2 demolition operations. I. Demolish existing structures completely and remove from the site. Use such methods as required to complete the work within the limitations of governing regulations. J. Break up and remove concrete slabs -on -grade, walks, roots, debris, rubbish, and all other items found on the site. Remove all existing below grade foundations and other obstructions not scheduled to remain. K. Completely fill below -grade areas and voids resulting from the demolition of structures as required under Section 02.200 "Earthwork". L. After fill placement and compaction, grade the surface to meet adjacent contours and to provide flow to surface drainage structures. M. Remove iom the site debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations. N. Burning of removed materials from demolished structures will not be permitted on the site. 3.02 SITE CLEARING A. Remove all other items not designated to remain such as shrubs, grass, weeds, other vegetation or obstructions that interfere with the installation of new construction. Also, remove such items elsewhere on the site or premises as specifically indicated. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered, and in such manner so as to prevent intermingling with the underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. C. Topsoil is defined as Amarillo fine sandy loam soil found in a depth of not less than 18". Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones and other objects over 3/4" in diameter, and without weeds, roots and other objectionable material. D. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil materials, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6" loose depth and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground. E. All above and below grade obstructions conflicting with new construction shall be removed under this heading. 3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Report to the Architect all active utilities encountered which are not indicated on the Drawings. Notify the respective utility companies of any damage caused to active utilities and protect active utilities pending instructions for proceeding with the work. B. The Contractor shall repair, at the Contractor's expense, damage to the active utilities to the satisfaction of the respective utility company. 3.04 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS 583/01 SITE DEMOLITION AND CLEARING Section 02.110 Page 3 A. Burning of combustible, cleared and grubbed materials is not permitted on the Owner's property. B. Remove all combustible and non-combustible waste materials completely from the Owner's property and dispose of all materials in strict accordance with the authorities having jurisdiction. End of Section f' n 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General ' Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of earthwork is shown on drawings. B. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements is included as part of this work. C. Backfilling of trenches within building lines is included as.part of this work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of ' governing authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service ' 1. Employ, at Contractor's expense, testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations. The testing laboratory shall ' comply with the requirements of ASTM D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil or Rock Used In Engineering Design and Construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Test Reports: Submit following reports directly to Architect from the testing services, with copies to Contractor and Engineer. ' 1. Test reports on existing or borrow material for each type of soil encountered. a. Atterberg Limits b. Linear Shrinkage C. Optimum moisture/maximum dry density curve 2. Field density test reports of subgrades and compacted fills. Reports shall indicate soil type or ' change of soil if any other is used. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS ' A. Site Information 1. A subsurface soils investigation at the site has been made. Logs of borings and test data are ' available for Contractor's information and for his interpretation as to soil and water conditions that may be encountered at the site. 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 2 2. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that the Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. Data are made available for the convenience of the Contractor. 3. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no cost to Owner. B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. C. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted. D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. 1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, CL, SM, SW and SP. B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups CH, ML, MH, OL, OH, and PT. C. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed sand. D. Topsoil shall be fertile, natural soil of loamy character, free of clay lumps, stones and debris. E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter. Fill materials shall have a liquid limit between 4 and 30 and the plasticity index shall be between 4 and 12. r— I C r i J 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing required finish grade elevations. B. Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock excavation or unauthorized excavation. C. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as wellas remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense. D. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Architect. E. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. F. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect who will make an inspection of conditions. 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. G. Stability of Excavations Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. H. Shoring and Bracing Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as uprights, stringers and cross -braces, in good serviceable condition. 2. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 4 Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. I. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. J. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. K Excavation for Structures 1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection. 2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. L. Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and grades as shown. M. Excavation for Trenches Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups. 3. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required elevation and backfill with a 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. 4. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe. ri 0 LI 1 7 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 5 Backfill trenches with lean concrete where trench excavations pass within 18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass under wail footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footings. Concrete is specified in Division 3. 7. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. N. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F. (1 degree C.) 3.02 COMPACTION A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification. B. Percentage of Minimum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of minimum dry density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor); and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship. Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. 2. Building Slabs and Steps: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. 3. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum dry density. 4. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill materials at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. 5. Pavements: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density for cohesive soil material. C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. 2. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 6 3.03 BACKFILL AND FILL A. General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area classification listed below. 1. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 2. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 3. Under walks and pavements, use subbase materials, or satisfactory excavated or borrow material, or combination of both. Under steps, use subbase material. -'tender building slabs, use satisfactory borrow material. B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of trash and debris. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. C. Ground Surface Preparation 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 2. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. D. Placement and Compaction Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 9" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. 2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. '583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 7 3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly ' around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. 3.04 GRADING ' A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. ' C. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows: ' 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface ' not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation. 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with ' finish surface not more than 1/2" above or below required subgrade elevation. D. Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. E. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum ' density for each area classification. 3.05 PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE ' A. General: Subbase course consists of placing subbase materials, in layers of specified thickness, over subgrade surface to support a pavement base course. ' B. See other Division 2 sections for paving specifications. C. Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross -slope of subbase course. D. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course to prevent lateral movement. Construction shoulders of acceptable solid materials, placed in such quantity to compact to thickness ' of each subbase course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12" width of shoulder simultaneously with compacting and rolling of each layer of subbase course. ' E. Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting subbase material during placement operations. 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 8 F. When a compacted subbase course is shown to be 6" thick or less, place material in a single layer. When shown to be more than 6" thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6" or less than 3" in thickness when compacted. 3.07 A. B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Quality Control Testing During Construction 1. Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed 2. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (Sand Cone Method) or ASTM D 2167 (Rubber Balloon Method), or ASTM D 2922, (Nuclear Gage Method) as applicable. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade 1. Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests. Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the previous compacted layer has been tested and approved by the testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer. C. If, in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense. 3.08 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of Graded Areas 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Deep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re -shape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. 3.09 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Removal from Owner's Property 1. Remove waste materials, including dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02.200 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. material, trash and debris, and 1 u C 7 f C� 583/01 SITE GRADING Section 02.210 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Work of the section includes the providing compacting and finish grading of topsoil within the limits of grading shown on the site plan. B. Provide all materials, equipment and services required to meet the requirements of this section. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall take precautions to protect existing facilities and features to remain. Any damage -caused by the Contractor shall be repaired immediately at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil is defined as Amarillo fine sandy loam soil. B. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones and other objects over 3/4" in diameter, and without weeds, roots and other objectionable material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TOPSOIL A. Provide a minimum depth of 6 inches of topsoil over all site areas which are not shown to be paved within the limits of grading. 3.02 COMPACTION A. Compact top 6 inches of topsoil at 90 percent maximum dry density. 3.03 GRADING A. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading, including adjacent transition areas. B. Provide uniform, compacted grading between new elevations. C. Provide uniform, compacted grading between new elevations and existing grades at the limits of grading. D. Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. 3.04 GRADING TOLERANCE 583101 SITE GRADING Section 02.210 Page 2 A. Finish areas receiving topsoil shall be graded and compacted to not greater than 0.10 foot above or below the finish grades shown on the Drawings. 3.05 EXCESS MATERIALS A. Remove all excess materials from the site. End o: S'ection u 0 0 7 583/01 CONCRETE WALKS Section 02.514 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of concrete walks is shown on the Drawings. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Forms: 1. Either steel or wood, of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use forms that are straight and free of distortion and defects. Bent, twisted, split or defective form materials are not permitted. 2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. 3. Coat forms with a non -staining, clear, paraffin base form oil that will not discolor or otherwise deface the surface of the concrete. B. Concrete: Exterior concrete shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days, and shall contain six (6) sacks (564 lbs.) of cement per cubic yard of concrete, 6.0 percent of entrained air (± 1.0%), coarse aggregate 1 inch or smaller, and shall be placed with a slump of 5 inches (- 1"). C. Fibrous Concrete Reinforcement: 1. General: 100 percent virgin polpropylene fibrillated fibers specially manufactured for use as concrete reinforcement, containing no reprocessed olefin materials. Fibrous concrete reinforcements shall be equivalent to that manufactured by Fibermesh Company, 4019 Industry Drive, Chattanooga, TN 37416. Use in all exterior concrete not otherwise detailed. 2. Physical Characteristics: a. Specific Gravity: 0.91 b. Tensile Strength: 70 to 110 ksi c. Fiber lengths: 1/2", 3/4', 1 1/2", 2" per manufacturer. D. Expansion Joints: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, '/4" thickness by depth of slab. At curbs and gutters, furnish special section to meet local curb and gutter specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove all loose material from the uniformly compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 583/01 CONCRETE WALKS Section 02.514 Page 2 3.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Set forms to the required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient lengths of forms to allow continuous progress of the work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Tops of walks and paving shall slope 1/8" per foot. B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerances: 1. Top of form units: Not more than 1/8" in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face: Longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4" in 10 feet. C. Clean forms after each use, and coat with form oil as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.03 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched in amounts in accordance with approved submittals for this type of concrete. Mix batched concrete in strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion. 2. Do not place concrete until subgrade and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subgrade as required to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they have been brought to the required grade and alignment. 3 Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of the mix, and with as little rehandling as possible. Consolidate concrete along the face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand - spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. Do not over vibrate. 4. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. Sections less than 15 feet in length between transverse joints will not be permitted. Remove such sections if directed by the Architect. 3.04 JOINTS A. General: Construct expansion, weakened -plane (contraction), and construction joints true -to -line with face perpendicular to surface of the concrete, unless otherwise shown. Construct transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise shown. B. Weakened -Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened -plane (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on the Drawings. Construct weakened -plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness as follows: C. Tooled Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. D. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at the end of all pours and at locations where placement operations are stopped for a period of more than 1/2 hour except where such pour terminates at expansion joints. 1. Construct joints as shown, or if not shown, use standard metal keyway section forms. 1 I583/01 CONCRETE WALKS Section 02.514 Page 3 E. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks and other fixed objects. t 1. Expansion joints shall be at 20 feet o.c., unless otherwise shown. 2. Extend joint fillers full -width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2" or more than 1" below finished surface. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for the full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. Form top edge of filler to ' conform to top profile of concrete. 3. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after both sides of joint are placed. F. All joints at abutment of concrete walks with adjacent walking surfaces shall be level. A �/a inch wide expansion joint shall be provided at all such locations, including where new concrete abuts curbs or walls. ' 3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Finishes: Unless indicated otherwise, items of concrete to be finished as follows: 1. All sidewalks, concrete aprons and porches shall have float finish, brushed as directed to provide a non- slip finish. ' 2. Curbs, gutters and driveway approaches shall be finished with a stiff -bristled broom to provide non -slip finish. Provide sample for approval. ' B. The following finishing procedures shall be observed: 1. After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth the surface by screedmg and floating. Do not use "Jitterbugs". Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust the floating to compact the surface and produce a uniform mixture. 2. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 foot straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous, smooth finish. ' 3. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2" radius, unless otherwise shown. Eliminate any tool marks on concrete surface. 4. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared complete surface finishing as follows: ' a. Broom Finish: Broom finish, by drawing a fine broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to the Architect. b. On inclining slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with a stiff -bristled broom. ' 3.06 CURING ' A. Protect and cure finished concrete walks, curbs and gutters and paving. Use moist -curing methods for the first 24 hours, then apply curing compound. 3.07 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect. ' B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with polysulphide-epoxy binder, or with polysulphide resin grout, complying with FS MMM -G -650B CANC. 583/01 CONCRETE WALKS Section 02.514 Page 4 C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Sweep concrete pavement and walks free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material just prior to final inspection. End of Section ' 583/01 TRAFFIC CONTROL MARKINGS Section 02.760 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ' A. The extent of painted traffic markings shall be painting stripes on concrete slabs and other locations as marked on the Drawings. 1.03 RELATED WORK tA. Section 02.514 Concrete Walks ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for all materials furnished under this section.. ' B. Submit two sets of color samples for selection by the Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Traffic Markings: ' 1. Paint shall be equivalent to a chlorinated rubber base traffic paint, factory mixed, quick drying with FS- TT-P-115, Type III ' 2. Volume Solid 43% 3. Vehicle: Alkyd 4. Thinning: mineral spirit 5. Flash point 110° F. closed cup 6. VOC: AE C 200 ' 7. Paint shall be applied to a 15 mil wet thickness. ' B. Paint shall conform to the requirements of FS TT-P-85 for traffic line paints, complying with TxDOT requirements. C. Paint shall dry in two to four hours. ' D. Paint meeting the requirements of the Specifications may be obtained from any one of the Following: ' 1. Adams Paint Manufacturing Company 2. Kelly Moore 3. Sherwin Williams 4. PPG ' E. Colors on concrete: 1. Yellow for parking lines ' 2. Blue for accessible parking lines, access aisles, and concrete curbs at curb ramps. 3. Yellow for pedestrian crossings. 01134 TRAFFIC CONTROL MARKINGS Section 02.760 Page 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 1.01 APPLICATION A. The equipment used to apply the paint shall be specifically designed and manufactured for that purpose and, before the application of the paint is begun, the Architect shall be satisfied that the equipment and procedures proposed for use will be able to apply the paint properly to the width and thickness. B. Apply markings according to a layout approved by Architect. Lines shall be applied in two (2) coats by means of mechanical markings equipment. Lines shall be straight, at proper angle and of uniform width. C. Access aisles lines shall be 2 inches wide, applied at a 45° angle 12 inches apart. D. Parking space lines shall be 4 inches wide. E. Pedestrian crossing lines shall be 12 inches wide, 24 inches apart. 3.02 PRECAUTIONS A. Do not lay paint in inclement weather, or when the ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. All painting shall be free from defects. C. Curbs, gutters, walks and walls of buildings, etc., shall be free of paint overspray. These items shall not be cracked, chipped or marked by heavy equipment used in painting operation. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove from site all rubbish and unused materials. Leave site in a good, clean and neat condition. End of Section '583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified ' in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1 A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings. ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Concrete Curbs, Walks and Paving - Section 02.514 ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and ' standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". ' 2. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete'. ' 3. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". 4. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". ' 5. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". ' 6. MSP -1-97 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice". B. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient ' concrete as directed by the Architect. C. Design and Testing: ' 1. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder ' breaks, with all information being reported to the Architect. A proven, established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix. ' 2. All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be borne by the Contractor. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 2 3. Job site cylinders shall be taken when the Architect so directs. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory when test cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care and handling including breaking of same at laboratory. 4. The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory designated by the Contractor and acceptable to the Architect and the Owner. 5. Test results shall be furnished to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor. 6. Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further tested. If further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never meet strength requirements, the under strength concrete will be replaced with new as directed by Architect. D. Tests for Concrete Materials: Test aggregate by method of sampling and testing of ASTM C 33. 2. For portland cement, sample the cement and determine the properties by the methods of test of ASTM C 150. Submit written reports to the Architect, for each material sampled and tested, prior to the start of work. Provide the project identification name and number, date of report, name of contractor, name of concrete testing service, source of concrete aggregates, material manufacturer and brand name for manufactured materials, values specified in the referenced specification for each material, and test results. Indicate whether or not material is acceptable for intended use. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, chemical floor hardeners, dry -shake finish materials, and others as.requested by the Architect. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS: J 0 n C 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 3 A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or "good -as -new". B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS -1 "B -B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight. fit. ' D. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square � s t o� to , re c.wra{o t e Drawings ]}13 1 1 0t 1.v [ %f I 44 3 f� }., �'F ',� �4•, 1f! ,6S i'i { 9,.fi> R1IF�i ,� z>;.j.)�$�Fw'.).Y+x'��`:�'0��a.;;� ��y3• 7�1.`, A. Reinforcmg�rs:�A A 615, Grade 60, except No. 3 bent ties and stirus may ail 40. ' B. Dowels for load transfer in floors shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A 675, Grade 80 or ASTM A 499. ' C. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for ' spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. ' 2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. ' 3. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot/dip galvanized plastic protected or stainless steel protected. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS: ' A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C 150, Type I, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 4 B. Fine Aggregate: 1. ASTM C 33. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: a. Not larger than one-fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles or bars. b. These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids. D. Fly Ash: The contractor may use ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F fly ash, replacing a maximum of 20% of the cementitious materials content. E. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable. F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. G. Evaporation Reducer: The contractor may use an evaporation reducer equal to "Confilm" as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc., on concrete floor slabs -on -grade. H. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. I. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows: Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating. J. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by Architect. ' 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 5 ' K. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. ' 2.04 RELATED MATERIALS: ' A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Pre -molded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab. B. Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 sections. C. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. ' D. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. ' 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. ' 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap. E. Concrete Sealer/Hardener: Equal to SealTite Dust -Gard as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. ' or Intraseal by Conspec. The sealer/hardener shall harden and dust -proof in one easy operation. 2.05 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES: A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality ' control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. tB. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211. 1, ACI 301, and ACI 318. ' 1. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 192 and conduct strength ' tests in accordance with ASTM C 39, specified in ACI 301. Establish a curve showing relationship between water -cement ratio (or cement content) and compressive strength, with at least 3 points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required. ' Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days, or an earlier age when acceptable to the Architect, to establish each point on the curve. 2. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete ' proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301. Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical average for 2 ' groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 6 3. If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are available, select proportions to produce an average strength of at least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive strength of concrete. 4. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the job, using ACI 214 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency of an average of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100. C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect. D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules: 1. 3000 psi 28 -day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum {non -air -entrained), 0.46 maximum (air -entrained). 2. See Section 02.514 for additional requirements for concrete mix design for site work concrete. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using in the work. 2.06 ADMIXTURES: A. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. B. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. C. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits: 5.5% with 1 1/2" maximum aggregate 2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate D. Use admixtures for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. u Fj C 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 7 E. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control 2.07 SLUMP LIMITS: A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3". 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3". 3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition of HRWR to verified 2"-3" slump concrete. 4. All Other Concrete: Not more than 4". - 5. Slumps greater than those specified above must be approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to any concrete pour. 2.08 CONCRETE MIXING: A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and as herein spec'if'ied. B. Control of Mixing Water: When concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, water may be added only if neither the maximum permissible water -cement ratio nor the maximum permissible slump is exceeded. The drum shall be turned an additional 30 revolutions, or more if necessary, until the added water is uniformly mixed into the concrete. C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required. D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 11/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. IPART 3 EXECUTION C C 3.01 FORMS: A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Forms shall not leak cement paste. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 8 D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for clean out, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snap -off metal form ties, designated to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. H. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least 1 1/2" inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. I. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. J. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Re -tighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. 3.02 PLACING REINFORCING: A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. ' 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 9 ' E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. 3.03 JOINTS: ' A. Construction Joints: 1. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the Drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect. 2. Provide key -ways at least 11/2" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs and between walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. ' 3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement acrass construction joints. B. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: 1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. ' Form edge of pours with wood forms having keyway as detailed on the Drawings. If optional saw cut control joints are used, they shall be made with a power saw fitted with an abrasive or diamond blade. Saw cuts must be one-fourth the slab thickness. Sawing shall begin as soon as the concrete surface is firm enough so that it will not be torn or damaged by the blade. This will be within 4 to 12 hours after the concrete hardens. ' C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. ' 3.04 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS: A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. ' B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type ' screeds. 3.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES: ' A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor ' adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 10 B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT: A. General: 1. Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. 2. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to re- handling or flowing. B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work, cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mut. D. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. '583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 11 3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. E. Cold Weather Placing: 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. ' 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of placement. ' 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subo ade containing frozen materials. ' 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. ' F. Hot Weather Placing: 1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of ' concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 3 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below a i. 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the n ' concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing. ' 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete. ' 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 3.07 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES: tA. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having ' the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks. ' B. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed -to -view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is the as -cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and ' patched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and smoothed. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 12 C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than the day after form removal. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown. 3.08 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION: A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. Provide moisture curing by following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water -fog spray. b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows: a. , Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). FJ 1 f� 0 u CSI 7 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 13 b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during curing period. C. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. D. Cluing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor toping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing. 1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by methods specified above, as applicable. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. E. Applying Concrete Sealer/Hardener: Apply on all concrete slab floors scheduled to be left exposed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Concrete shall have cured for at a least 14 days. 2. Concrete shall be clean and dry prior to application, with oil stain, ,grease, etc. removed. 3. Apply by spray or brush applicator to approximate coverage of 500 square feet per gallon. 4. Do not apply if the temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 3.09 REMOVAL OF FORMS: A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have bee} arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.10 RE -USE OF FORMS: A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 14 B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Architect. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS: A. Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with comers, intersections and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on the Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of the manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. D. Reinforced Masonry: Provide masonry grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where indicated on the Drawings and as scheduled. Masonry grout shall comply with ASTM C476. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during grout placement. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS: A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to Architect. 2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 15 2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that adversely affect ' the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. 2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of ' concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable. conditions. ' 3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface ' finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to Architects. ' S. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with ' clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend ' with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry -pack method. ' Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling ' and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. ' D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by Architect. E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. ' 3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION: A. The Contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 16 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Slump: One test for each set of compressive strength test specimens taken at point of discharge. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. 5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. C. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. C. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7 -day tests and 28 -day tests. D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and 34XQ4*( additional testing as may be OF required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. r oP� E, .. t E,�4-q► END OF SECTION 03.300 de . This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. C.V :. SU RENDRAN �.....,.. ::� �. 33870 , �,. n I583101 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 1 ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of each type of unit masonry work is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Work under this section includes the providing and installing of all unit masonry work, complete with ties, anchors, reinforcing and all incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the work. B. The work includes the providing for installation of materials specified under other sections of the work which are ' to be built into the work of this section. C. Provide and install concealed flashings at window sills, window and door heads, and at other locations indicated ' on the Drawings. 1.03 RELATED WORK e do 230 ed in t s F 3 i lir: a� r�l� , ij Ri rj F p3 ip y " B. .SeGt10600 11 s all 311eet,. 04 QUAjj,,IT, STaTR r '; Pb!t,,- A. V`aration from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1/4" in 10', or ' 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 20', nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. IB. Variation from Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more. D. Variation of Linear Cross -Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do ' not exceed minus 1/4" nor plus 1/2". 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified requirements. Include ' instructions for handling, storage, installations and protection. 1.06 SAMPLES ' A. Provide a minimum of 10 bricks each representing the shades of the existing face brick blend on adjacent buildings. These bricks shall be furnished loose to the job site, and shall be labeled for shade identification. ' B. Submit actual samples of required reinforcing and anchors. C. Submit samples of manufactured weeps. 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 2 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall provide a one (1) year warranty from the Date of Substantial Completion for all workmanship and materials in this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer when possible, of uniform texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related area. 2.02 MATERIALS A. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 1. Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, comers, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. 3. Hollow Loading -Bearing CMU: ASTM C 90-75, Grade "N". 4. Weight: Provide lightweight units using aggregate complying with ASTM C 331 producing dry net unit weight of not more than 105 lbs. per cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated. 5. Curing: Cure units in a moisture -controlled atmosphere or in an autoclave at normal pressure and temperature to comply with ASTM C 90-75, Type I. a. Limit moisture absorption during delivery and until time of installation to the maximum percentage specified for Type I units for the average annual relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest the project site. B. FACE BRICK 1. Face Brick shall be equivalent to masonry products manufactured by Acme Brick Company, matching the existing face brick blend on the adjacent buildings. 2. Provide solid brick where noted on the Drawings, or where holes would otherwise occur on exposed faces. 3. Brick shall be modular size: 3 5/8" deep x 2 '/a" high x 7 5/8" long. 4. Color and blend of brick soldier courses and rowlock courses shall be selected by the Architect. Bond shall be Running Bond. C. MORTAR MATERIALS 1. Conform to latest editions of ASTM. 2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, one sack 94# net, considered one cubic foot. 3. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91 furnished in sacks containing one cubic foot each, marked with the weight. One sack considered one cubic foot. Masonry cement shall be manufactured by Atlas, Lehigh, Lonestar, Trinity or an approved equal. 4. Sand: (Fine Aggregate) 80# damp, considered one cubic foot ASTM C144 of acceptable color graded within the following limits: SIEVE NO. PERCENT OF SAND RETAINED Max. (By Weight) Min. 4 0 0 8 5 0 I 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 3 1640 0 30 65 30 50 85 65 100 98 85 ' 5. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil acids, soluble salts and organic impurities. ' D. MORTAR 1. Mortar shall be type ' 2. Color shall be natural grey. 3. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents. 4. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. ' E. MASONRY HORIZONTAL REINFORCING 1. Continuous wire reinforcing and ties for masonry: a. Provide truss -type welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10' with matching ' corner and tee units. Fabricate from cold -drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross -rods, and a unit width of 1-1/2" to 2" less than thickness of wall or ' partition. 2. Provide units fabricated as follows: a. Truss type fabricated with single pair of 9 ga. side rods and 9 ga. continuous diagonal cross -rods spaced not more than 8" o.c. t b. Hot -dip galvanize after fabrication with 1.5 oz. zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class B2. c. For multi-wythed or cavity exterior walls with concrete masonry back-up fabricate units with additional side rods spaced for embedment in inside face of back-up wythe. ' F. ANCHORS AND TIES 1. Provide straps, bars, bolts and rods fabricated from not less than 16 ga. sheet metal or 3/8" diameter rod stock, unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. For devices which extend into exterior wythe, fabricate from steel with hot -dip galvanized coating, ASTM A 153, Class B1, B2, or B3. 3. For cavity walls, provide equivalent to "Double -eye" truss -rectangular type hook and eye adjustable wall ' reinforcing manufactured by Southern Construction Products, Inc. Provide the proper sizes and widths to fit the conditions encountered. Adjustable wall tie eye sections shall be welded to the truss reinforcing at 16 inch centers. 4. Ties for face brick to drywall backup shall be equivalent to #760 -"ES" Series, 12 gauge, manufactured by Southern Construction Products, Inc. Ties shall be placed at a minimum spacing of 16 inches on center both horizontally and vertically. ' G. FLASHINGS FOR MASONRY 1. Provide concealed flashings to be built into masonry. ' 2. Provide concealed flashings as follows: a. Asphalt -Coated Copper: Copper coated both sides with flexible fabricated asphalt, equivalent to "Copper Fabric Flashing" manufactured by Polytite. b. Fabricate with 3 oz. copper, unless otherwise indicted. H. MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES ' 1. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 of the sizes shown. 2. Metal Expansion Joint Strips: Provide the following formed to the shape shown. 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 4 a. Bond Breaker Strips: 15 -lb. asphalt roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, or 15-1b., coal -tar roofing felt complying with ASTM D 227. b. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Solid rubber strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral stability in masonry wall, size and configuration as indicated. 3. Weeps shall be equivalent to #343W Louvered Weep Hole manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Ft.Worth, TX, telephone 817/625-9781, gray color. 4. Weep tubes at cast stone heads and sills shall be equivalent to #341 manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., 'A inch diameter by 4 inches long, white color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECAUTIONS A. Do not lay masonry in freezing weather unless suitable means are provided to heat materials, protect work from cold and frost and ensure that mortar will harden without freezing. No anti -freeze ingredient shall be used. B. Protect masonry materials during storage and construction from wetting by rain, snow or ground water and from soilage or intermixture with earth or other materials. C. Do not use metal reinforcing having loose rust or other coatings, including ice, which will reduce or destroy bond. D. Protect partially completed masonry against weather, when work is not in progress, by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, non -staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2' down both sides of walls and hold securely in place. E. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. For masonry which is to be wetted, comply with BIA recommendations. F. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing. G. Do not apply uniform roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or columns. H. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. I. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. J. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. 3.02 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION A. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch. B. Remove all masonry determined to be frozen or damaged by freezing conditions. C. Perform the following construction procedures while the work is progressing: 1. When air temperature is from 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) to 32 deg. F (0 deg. C), heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) and 120 deg. F (49 deg. Q. 2. When air temperature is from 32 deg. F (0 deg. C) to 25 deg. F (-4 deg. C), heat sand or water to produce mortar temperature between 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) and 120 deg. F (49 deg. C); maintain temperature of mortar 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 5 ' on boards above freezing. 3. When air temperature is from 25 deg. F (4 deg. Q to 20 deg. F (-7 deg. C), heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) and 120 deg. F (49 deg. C); maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing; use salamanders or other heat sources on both sides of walls under ' construction; use wind breaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph. 4. When air temperature is 20 deg. F (-7 deg. C) and below, heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) and 120 deg. F (49 deg. C); provide enclosures and auxiliary heat ' to maintain air temperature above 32 deg. F (0 deg. C); do not lay units which have a surface temperature of 20 deg. F (-7 deg. Q. D. Perform the following protections for completed masonry and masonry not being worked on: 1. When the mean daily air temperature is from 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) to 32 deg. F (0 deg. C), protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with weather -resistive membrane. When mean daily ' temperature is from 32 deg. F (0 deg. C) to 25 deg. F (4 deg. C), completely cover masonry with weather - resistive membrane for at least 24 hours. 2. When mean daily air temperature is 20 deg. F (-7 deg. C), completely cover masonry with insulting blankets or similar protection for at least 24 hours. 3. When mean daily air temperature is 20 deg. F (-7 deg. C) and below, maintain masonry temperature above 32 deg. F (0 deg. C) for 24 hours using enclosures and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared ' lamps, or other acceptable methods. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL ' A. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single-wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. B. Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for the work of other trades. Provide not less than 8" of ' masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. C. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units ' as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. ' D. Do not wet concrete masonry units. E. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in a running bond, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe bonded by lapping not less than 2". Bond and interlock each course of each ' wythe at comers, unless otherwise shown. F. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform widths and to properly locate ' openings, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half size units at comers, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. G. Lay-up walls plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. H. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 'h masonry unit length in each course; no not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar ' prior to laying fresh masonry. I. Built -In Work: As the work progresses, build in items specified under this and other sections of these Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 6 1. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod.mortar or grout into core. 3.04 MORTAR BEDDING JOINTING A. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight, such that the required proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained. Measurement of sand exclusively by shovel will not be permitted. B. Mix mortars with the maximum amount of water consistent with workability to provide maximum tensile bond strength within the capacity of the mortar. C. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Use eater clean and free of deleterious materials which would impair the work. Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or if more than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. Retemper mortar during 2-1/2 hour period as required to restore workability. D. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed, head and collar joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. E. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells; also bed webs into mortar in starting course on footings and foundation walls and in all courses of piers, columns and plasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or to be filled with concrete or grout. F. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 3/8" joints. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. Exposed joints at face brick shall be flush. G. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound comers at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 3.05 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTI-WYTHE MASONRY A. Use continuous joint reinforcing embedded in horizontal joints for bond tie between wythes. Install at not more than 8" o.c. vertically as specified. Provide continuity at corners and intersections using prefabricated "L" and "T" units. 3.06 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING A. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6" at ends of units. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing, as otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. B. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows: 1. For multi-wythe walls where continuous horizontal reinforcing also acts as structural bond or tie between wythes, space reinforcing as required by code but not less than 16" o.c. vertically. 2. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise indicated. 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 7 ' C. Reinforce masonry openings greater than V-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, both immediately above the lintel and below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 2"-0" beyond jambs of the opening, bridging control joints where provided. ' 3.07 ANCHORING MASONRY WORK ' 1. See Division 7 sections for sealants. 2. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4" in direction of flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any. 3. Build -in flanges of factory -fabricated expansion joint units, specified in a Division 7 section. 4. Build -in joint fillers where shown, specified in a Division 7 section. ' D. Control Joint Spacing: If location of control joints is not shown, place vertical joints spaced not to exceed 35'-0" o.c. for concrete masonry wythes if reinforced, or 30'- 0" o.c. if not reinforced. ' 3.10 TUCKPOINTING A. To reduce subsequent shrinkage in tuckpointed joints, the material shall be mixed with just enough water to make a damp mixture. This semidry mixture shall be left untouched for 1 to 2 hours, after which it shall be remixed and ' water added to obtain proper workability. 3.11 WEEPS ' A. Locate weeps in veneer head joints in first course above flashings, and at base of wall. L A. Provide anchoring devices of the type shown and specified. If not shown or specified, provide standard type for ' facing and back-up involved. B. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1" in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. ' 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with metal ties embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie sections, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Space wachors as shown, but not more than 16" o.c. horizontally. ' 3.08 CONCEALED FLASHINGS A. Concealed flashings shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Apply concealed flashings at sills and other locations embedded in a full covering of cold applied mastic applied at the minimum rate of one gallon to 40 square feet of sheeting area. Flashing shall not be crimped or otherwise installed to promote cracking of the flashing. ' C. Flashings shall have end dams at all window and door heads, window sills, and similar installations. 3.09 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS ' A. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build -in related masonry accessory items as the masonry work progresses. ' 1. See Division 7 sections for sealants. 2. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4" in direction of flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any. 3. Build -in flanges of factory -fabricated expansion joint units, specified in a Division 7 section. 4. Build -in joint fillers where shown, specified in a Division 7 section. ' D. Control Joint Spacing: If location of control joints is not shown, place vertical joints spaced not to exceed 35'-0" o.c. for concrete masonry wythes if reinforced, or 30'- 0" o.c. if not reinforced. ' 3.10 TUCKPOINTING A. To reduce subsequent shrinkage in tuckpointed joints, the material shall be mixed with just enough water to make a damp mixture. This semidry mixture shall be left untouched for 1 to 2 hours, after which it shall be remixed and ' water added to obtain proper workability. 3.11 WEEPS ' A. Locate weeps in veneer head joints in first course above flashings, and at base of wall. L 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 8 B. Place weeps in joints at a maximum spacing of 24 inches on center. C. Install manufactured weeps in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.12 PARGING A. All below grade masonry installations shall be fully parged. 3.13 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds. C. Clean exposed unit masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. On completion of all masonry work, fill all holes and imperfections or defects and leave joints completely filled and neatly pointed with all mortar droppings removed. Use mild acid for cleaning agent only if approved by Architect, otherwise use stiff fiber brushes and clean water. D. Remove all debris and unused materials resulting from the work of this section from the site. End of Section 583/01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 1 ' PART1 GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified ' in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ' A. Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Requirements of Section 04200, Unit Masonry, apply to work of this section. ' 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protect partially completed masonry against weather, when work is not in progress, by covering top ' of walls with strong, waterproof, nonstaining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2 feet down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place. B. Protect masonry against freezing when the temperature of the surrounding air is 40 degrees F. and falling. Heat materials and provide temporary protection of completed portions of masonry work. Comply with the requirements of the governing code and with the "Construction and Protection Recommendations for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" of the Technical Notes on Brick and Tile Construction by the Structural Clay Products Institute. C. Frozen Materials and Work. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or ' frost. For masonry which is specified to be wetted, comply with the SCPI recommendations. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing. ' D. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents. E. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or masonry grout. 1.04 WORKMANSHIP A. It is the express intent of the contract documents to require a first-class masonry job throughout the ' entire project. Appearance shall be consideration as well as soundness in judging overall quality and workmanship. B. The Contractor shall engage, and keep on project at all times during masonry operations, an experienced and qualified masonry Foreman or Superintendent, satisfactory to the Architect. C. It shall be the duty of the aforementioned individual to layout all masonry work, expedite, and keep all masonry operations under continuous surveillance to ensure the required class of workmanship herein specified. ' D. Should defects become apparent, same shall be immediately noted, corrected and if necessary, halt masonry operations until corrective measures can be agreed upon. 583101 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 2 Defects are defined as, but not necessarily limited to, unequal joints {horizontal and vertical); surfaces in and out of plane; striation of highlights and shadows with parallel lighting; excessive chips; use of distorted units; bunching of blends; jumping bond; displacement of units after initial setting; surfaces out of plumb; staining; use of off color or off texture units; use of units with manufacturers defects; change of mortar color; toothing; excessive racking; lean or unsound mortar; improper bonding and anchoring; and improper pointing and cleaning. 2. If one or more of the aforementioned defects become apparent and corrective measures cannot remedy said defect, the Contractor shall replace any area or areas of defective masonry without any additional cost to the Owner. Any replaced areas shall be made in even units of surface such as vertical joint to a corner, whole wall or otherwise to prevent a "patched" appearance in any one surface area. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified requirements. Include instructions for handling, storage, installations and protection. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing bars. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Manufacturer: Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas. B. Masonry Unit Characteristics: Provide units complying with standards referenced and requirements indicated. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) A. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" wide x 8" high (15 5/8" x 7 5/8" x 7 5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated. B. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, comers, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. C. Hollow Load -Bearing CMU: ASTM C 90 where shown as "CMU" and as follows: 1. Weight Classification: Lightweight units unless otherwise indicated. (Less than 105 lbs. per cu. ft., oven dry weight of concrete). 1 G 0 583/01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 3 D. Cure units in a moisture -controlled atmosphere or in an autoclave at normal pressure and temperature to comply with ASTM C 90, Type 1. E. Limit moisture absorption during delivery and until time of installation to the maximum percentage specified for Type 1 units for the average annual relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest the project site. F. Exposed Faces: Provide manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. Provide natural color. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type S. C. Aggregate for Masonry Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4" use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve. D. Aggregate for Masonry Grout: ASTM C 404. E. Water: Clean and potable. 2.04 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A 615 and as follows: 1. Provide Grade 60, except that No. 3 bent ties may be Grade 40. 2. Where No. 2 bars are shown, provide plain, round, carbon steel bars, ASTM A 675, Grade 80. 3. Shop -fabricate reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. B. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing and Ties for Masonry: 1. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with matching corner ("L") units. Fabricate from cold -drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods, into units with widths of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls as required to position side rods for full embedment in mortar coverage of not less than 1/2" elsewhere. Joint reinforcing to meet the following requirements: a. Truss type with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. b. Number of Side Rods: Single pair for single wythe masonry and as indicated for multi-wythe masonry, or if not otherwise indicated, one side rod for each brick wythe and one side rod for each face shell of each concrete masonry wythe. C. Wire Sizes: Fabricate with 9 -gauge side and cross rods, unless otherwise indicated. d. Joint reinforcing to be hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating (1.5 oz. per sq. ft). 583/01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 4 2.05 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not lower the freezing point of mortar or masonry grout by use of admixtures or anti -freezing agents. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or masonry grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use Type S, ready -mixed masonry cement for all masonry. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to masonry cement. C. Masonry Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 for masonry grout for use in construction of reinforced and nonreinforced unit masonry. Use masonry grout of consistency indicated or if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement which will completely fill all spaces intended to receive masonry grout. 1. Fine Aggregates complying with ASTM C404, Size No. 1. 2. Coarse Aggregates complying with ASTM C404, Size No. 8 or Size No. 89. 3. Air -Entraining Admixtures will not be permitted in masonry grout. 4. Water -Reducing Admixtures will not be permitted in masonry grout. 5. Grout slump shall be between 10 and 11 inches. 6. Mortar or concrete shall not be substituted for masonry grout. 7. Grout samples shall be taken and tested as per ASTM C1019 for each 5000 sq. ft. of masonry. 8. A grout sample shall be taken and tested whenever there is any change in mix proportions, methods of mixing, or materials used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single-wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. B. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, un -chipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. C. Do not wet concrete masonry units. D. Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and ' 583/01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 5 ' bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8" joints. ' E. Where solid CMU units are shown, lay with full mortar head and bed joints. F. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2 -masonry unit length in each course; do not tooth. ' Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose units and mortar to laying fresh masonry. masonry prior G. Built -In Work: As the work progresses, build -in items specified under this and other sections of ' these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. H. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. ' I. Fill CMU cores with masonry grout under bearing plates, beams, posts, lintels and similar conditions unless otherwise indicated. J. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork. ' K. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. L. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during ' construction. M. Allow not less than 10 days to elapse after completion of masonry beams and lintels before removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period. ' WALLS AND GROUTING 3.02 A. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown, or if not shown, lay in running bond ' with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Bond and interlock each course at corners, unless otherwise shown. Use special -shaped units where shown, and as required for comers, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. ' Match coursing, bonding, color and texture of new masonry work with existing work, where indicated. ' B. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half size units at comers, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. C. Lay-up walls plumb and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. D. Non -load-bearing Interior Partition Walls: Build full height of story to underside of solid structure above, unless otherwise indicated. E. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to 583/01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 6 provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. F. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or modify units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcing bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non -reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms. G. Use "Fine Grout" for filling spaces less than 4" in both horizontal directions. H. Use "Coarse Grout" for filling 4" spaces or larger in both horizontal directions. I. Use low -lift grouting techniques subject to the requirements which follow: 1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in. in vertical cores to be grouted. 2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet. 3. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 4 feet height, or if bond beam occurs below 4 feet height, stop pour at course below bond beam. 4. Pour grout using container with spout or by chute. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 11/2" below top course of pour. 5. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 11/2" below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. J. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper position. Clean top surfaces of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures to resist grout pressures. K. Grout Placing: 1. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations. 2. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are acceptable to the Architect. 3. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more than 583/01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 7 one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 4 feet. Allow not less than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation. 4. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam course to within 1" of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry. 5. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1 1/2" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required. ' 3.03 JOINTING 1 7 F, L A. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 3/8" joints. Cut joints flush for masonry wall which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. B. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 3.04 PLACING REINFORCING A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater). C. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the Architect. Provide lapped splices with the minimum lap shown. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie. D. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimum mortar cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. E. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6". Provide continuity at corners by use of prefabricated "L" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically unless otherwise indicated. 583/01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 8 F. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structures as indicated. 3.05 LINTELS A. Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joint:,, enlarge any voids or iLoles, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds. C. Clean exposed CMU masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. Comply with recommendations in NCMA TEK Bulletin No. 28. END OF SECTION 04.230 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. OF 7f ,SSB � gyp,.,,.... .q C. V. S+�RE!VDRAN ........................ ti... CooP.. 33870 6 OP't.. -7 fir - d1 0 n 'i J f 0 J J 283/01--- STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05.120 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK. A. The extent of structural steel work is shown on the Drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required. B. Structural steel is that work defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on the Drawings. ro 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Reinforcing Steel - Section 03.300 B. Steel Joists - Section 05.210 C. Metal Roof Decking - Section 05.300 D. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications - Section 05.500 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following except as otherwise indicated: 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings." 2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design", Ninth Edition, and including the "Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued. 3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. AWS D1.1 - "Structural Welding Code - Steel". 5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use". 283/01 STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05.120 Page 2 B. Qualifications for Welding Work: 1. Qualify weS g processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. If re -certification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's responsibility. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 2. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply. D. Design of Members and Connections: 1. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at the site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. 2. Promptly notify the Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings, Structural Steel: 1. Submit shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a registered professional engineer including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, and details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. 2. Architect's review of shop drawings will be for general considerations only. Compliance with requirements for materials fabrication and erection of structural steel is the Contractor's responsibility. 3. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. Fil ' STEEL 283/01 STRUCTURAL Section 05.120 Page 3 ' be in cast -in-place concrete or B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to embedded masonry, in ample time to not delay that work. eC. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials t from erosion and deterioration. D. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as ' directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes: ASTM A 992 or A36. ' indicated. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade C, or A36, nonheaded type unless otherwise ' C. Headed Stud Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold finished carbon steel; with dimensions complying with AISC Spec'if'ications. D. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low -carbon steel bolts and nuts. 1. Provide either hexagonal, or square, heads and nuts, except use only hexagonal units for ' exposed connections. hexagon E. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: 1. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A 325 ' F. Concrete Expansion Anchors: Wedge type anchors meeting Federal Specification FF -S-325 INT AMD 3, Group II, Type 4, Class 1. G. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code. H. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility ' with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; equal to Tnemec 10-99 (Red) or UE705 Fleet Line Red Oxide Metal Primer by Adams Paint Company, complying with performance requirements for FS TT -P-636 (red oxide). I. Non -Metallic Non -Shrink Grout: Pre -mixed, non-metallic, non -corrosive, non -staining product ' containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CE CRD -C 621. 283/01 STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05.120 Page 4 2.02 FABRICATION: A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown. 2. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces on members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. B. Connections: 1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. 2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are shown. C. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only the bolted connections of secondary framing members to primary members (including purlins, girts and other framing members taking only nominal stress) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection. D. High -Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts". Install flat hardened washers over slotted holes occurring in the outer ply of connections. E. Welded Construction: 1. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. F. Stud Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer of the stud connectors. Shop weld stud connectors, as shown, to bearing or embedded plates. Use automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. G. Holes for Other Work:- Provide ork: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final shop drawings. Provide '283/01 STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05.120 Page 5 ' threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. 2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. H. Splicing: Splicing of beams shall be as shown on the Drawings. All other splicing shall be made only ' with the written consent of the Architect and/or Engineer. When approved, copies of weld tests shall be furnished to the Architect and Engineer. ' 2.03 SHOP PAINTING: A. General: 1. Shop paint all structural steel work, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on the exposed portions and the initial 2" of embedded areas only. ' 2. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction -type connections. ' 3. Do not paint surfaces, which are scheduled to receive sprayed -on fireproofing. ' 4. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted. Remove ' loose rust, loose mill scale, and splatter, slag or flux deposits. Solvent clean steel to remove all soluble contaminates followed by power tool cleaning to remove all insoluble contaminates in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: ' 1. SSPC-SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning", or ' 2. SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or 3. SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or ' 4. SSPC-SP 7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning". C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance ' with the manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and all exposed surfaces. J 283/01 STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05.120 Page 6 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. 3.02 ERECTION: A. General: Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein specified. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete the work. D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. 2. Refer to Division 3 of these specifications for anchor bolt installation requirements in concrete, and Division 4 for masonry installation. E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. 3. Tighten the anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions, or as otherwise required. ' 283/01 STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05.120 Page 7 F. Field Assembly: 1. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in ' elevations and alignment. 2. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified AISC tolerances. ' 3. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on the mean operating temperature of the structure. Make allowances for the difference between temperature at time of erection and the mean temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in service. 4. , Splice members only where shown or specified. ' G. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. ' H. Comply with AISC Specifications: For bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. ' 1. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. J. Gas -Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the ' structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to the Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. ' K. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for shop ' painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. L. Shear Connectors: All areas to which studs are to be attached must be free of all foreign material, such as rust, oil, grease, paint, etc. When the mill scale is sufficiently thick to cause difficulty in ' obtaining proper welds, it must be removed by grinding or blasting. M. Stud connectors shall be installed on all bearing or embedded plates. Number of shear connectors ' required is shown on the plans. Use automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION 05.120 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. C. V ........................ �URIENDRAN o fsA % 33870 • r 1 I C 583/01 STEEL JOISTS Section 05.210 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of steel joists is shown on the Drawings, including basic layout and type of joists required. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Provide joists fabricated in comp iance with the fcHowing, and as herein specified 1. SH "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables" for: a. K Series Open Web Steel Joists b. KCS -Series Open Web Steel Joists B. Qualification of Welding Work: 1. Joint connections and splices of joist members shall be made by welding and shall comply with the SJI "Standard Specifications" and "Technical Digest #8 - Welding of Open Web Steel Joists". 2. Joists welded in place may be subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of the steel joists for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove and replace any work found to be defective and provide new acceptable work. ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data, Steel Joists: ' 1. Joist manufacturer shall be a member of the Steel Joist Institute. 2. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation ' instructions for each type of joist and its accessories. Include manufacturer's certification that joists comply with SH "Standard Specifications". Indicate by transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been distributed to the Erector. ' B. Shop Drawings, Steel Joists: 1. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, special connections, jointing and ' accessories. Include the mark, number, type, location and spacing of joists and bridging. 583/01 STEEL JOISTS Section 05.210 Page 2 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver, store and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI "Standard Specifications". Handle and store joists in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses. B. Joists shall be delivered to the jobsite in an upright position and shall be unloaded with a two point sling on a winch line from a crane or winch truck. Allowing joists to fall from the bed of a truck will not be permitted. C. Store joists in an upright position with blocking spaced not more than 15 feet on center. Brace joists in an upright position until hoisted onto structure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Standard Specifications" B. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular hexagon type, low carbon steel. C. Steel Prime Paint: Comply with SH "Standard Specifications", except asphalt type paint not permitted. 2.02 FABRICATION: A. General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications". B. Bridging: Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for "open web" joists, complying with SJI "Standard Specifications". 2. Provide bridging anchors for ends of all bridging lines terminated at walls or beams. C. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages to secure joists to adjacent construction, complying with SJI "Standard Specifications", unless otherwise indicated. D. Shop Painting: Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories before application of shop paint. 2. Apply one shop coat of steel joist primer paint to steel joists and accessories, by spray, dipping, or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil. t 583/01 STEEL JOISTS Section 05.210 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which steel joists are to be installed and notify ' the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. ' 3.02 ERECTION: A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications", final shop drawings, and as herein specified. B. Bearing Plates: 1. Furnish bearing plates to be built into the concrete and masonry construction. a. Refer to Division 4 sections for installation of bearing plates set in masonry. C. Placing Joists: 1. Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured. Place ' joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently fastening. 2. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction. D. Bridging: 1. Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before any construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminated at walls or beams. ' E. Fastening Joists: 1. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SH "Standard specifications" for the type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with the placing of joists. ' 2. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications" for the type of joists used. ' 3. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for bolted connections, unless otherwise indicated. 583/01 STEEL JOISTS Section 05.210 Page 4 F. Touch -Up Painting: After joist installation, paint all field bolt heads and nuts, and welded areas, abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting. Use the same type of paint as used for shop painting. END OF SECTION 05.210 + �p�..... .... B This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. y:.• ' .:.............. ................. C. V. SLUR—NDRAN 33870 t ' DECK 583/01 METAL ROOF Section 05.300 Page 1 ' PART GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified ' in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: layout deck A. The extent of metal roof decking is shown on the Drawings, including basic and type of units required. ' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: T ' A. Steel Joists - Section 05.210 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise shown or specified: ' 1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members". 2. AWS S1.3 -' Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steer'. ' 3. SDI "Steel Roof Deck Design Manual'. B. Qualification of Welding Work: ' 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators for welding sheet steel in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". ' 2. Decking welded in place is subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of decking for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and provide new acceptable ' work. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Uplift Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading of 45 lbs. per sq. ft. at eave overhang and 30 lbs. per sq. ft. for other roof areas. ' 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout of deck panels, anchorage details and every condition requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, special jointing or other I accessories. 583/01 METAL ROOF DECK Section 05.300 Page 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Steel for Painted Finish: ASTM A 611, Grade C. B. Paint for Non -Galvanized Deck: Deck unit manufacturer's baked -on, rust -inhibitive paint, for application to metal surfaces which have been chemically cleaned and phosphate chemical treated. C. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 992. D. Flexible Closure Strips for Deck: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. 2.02 FABRICATION: A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports with flush, telescoped or nested 2" end laps and nesting side laps, unless otherwise indicated. Provide deck configurations complying with SDI "Basic Design Specifications", and as specified herein. B. Wide -Rib Deck: Depth approximately 11/2"; ribs spaced approximately 6" o.c.; width of rib opening at roof surface not more than 21/2'; width of bottom rib surface not less that 13/4". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which metal roof decking items are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install roof deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and final shop drawings, and as specified herein. Suspended ceilings, light fixtures, ducts, or other utilities shall not be supported by the steel deck. B. Placing Roof Deck Units: Place roof deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends bearing on supporting members and accurately aligned end to end before being permanently fastened. Lap ends not less than 7. Do not stretch or contract the sidelap interlocks. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive deflection. 2. Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured properly and is dry. 3. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in placing and locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. 583/01 METAL ROOF DECK Section 05.300 Page 3 4. Do not use deck units for storage or working platform until permanently secured. C. Fastening Deck Units: 1. Permanently fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members as detailed on the drawings. ' 2. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal -arc welding, the appearance and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting welding work. ' 3. Lock side laps between adjacent deck units at intervals not exceeding 36" o.c. by mechanical fasteners. ' D. Cutting and Fitting: 1. Cut and fit roof deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the roof decking, as shown on the Drawings. Provide neat, square and trim cuts. ' 2. Openings not shown on the Drawings, such as those required for stacks, conduits, plumbing, vents, etc., shall be cut (and reinforced, if necessary) by the trades requiring the openings. 1 E. Reinforcement at Openings: 1. Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking and support of other work, unless otherwise shown. 2. Reinforce roof decking around openings less than 15" in any dimension by means of a flat steel sheet placed over the opening and fusion welded to the top surface of the deck. Provide steel sheet of the same quality as the deck units, not less than 20 gage, and at least 12" wider and longer than the opening. Provide welds at each corner and spaced not more than 12" o.c. along each side. F. Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at all open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking, and in the voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete ' decking installation. G. Roof Insulation Support: Provide metal closure strips for the support of roof insulation where the ' rib openings in the top surface of roof decking occur adjacent to edges and openings. Weld closure strips into position. ' 3.03 TOUCH-UP PAINTING: A. After roof decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on the ' top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. B. Touch-up shop painted surfaces with the same paint used in the shop, as recommended by the deck manufacturer. 583/01 METAL ROOF DECK Section 05.300 Page 4 C. In areas where touch-up painted surfaces are to be exposed, apply the paint to blend into the adjacent surfaces in a manner that will minimize visual discontinuity in the coatings. END OF SECTION 05.300 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. ................1............. . C. V. SURENDRAN10 I ............................... 33870 i 583/01 METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05.500 Page 1 PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. r 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The eluent of miscellaneous metal work is shown on the Drawings and includes items fabricated from metal shapes, plates, angles, lintels, tubes, and pipe which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems in other sections of these specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: ' A. Concrete Work - Section 03.300 B. Structural Steel - Section 05.120 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete for installation of miscellaneous metal work. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1. See Section 03.300, Concrete Work, for installation of inserts and anchorage devices. C. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings, Miscellaneous Metal: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal assemblies. Include plans, elevations, details, sections and connections. Show anchorages and accessory items. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. r 583/01 METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05.500 Page 2 B. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. C. Steel Tubing: Hot -formed, welded or seamless, ASTM A 501. D. All galvanizing shall be hot dipped galvanizing, ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 386. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; type as selected; Grade A; black finish unless galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise shown or specified. F. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; equal to Tnemec 10-99 (Red) or UE705 Fleet Line Red Oxide Metal Primer by Adams Paint Company, complying with performance requirements for FS TT -P-636 (red oxide). y -- 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL: A. Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of work. B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges: Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. C. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS Code. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown, or if not shown, phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. E. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide adequate support for intended use. F. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as required to receive finish hardware and similar items. G. Shop Painting: Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise specified. 2. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning". 'J 583/01 METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05.500 Page 3 3. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" or SSPC- SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or SSPC-SP 7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning". 4. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS: A. `>arpenter's Iron Work: Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting ' woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware are required under other sections. B. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. ' C. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: ' 1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise ' shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered comers, welded brackets and splice plates and minimum joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. D. Perimeter Angles: Furnish and install continuous angles at edge of roof decks where indicated, and tE. frame all openings in same as noted or detailed. Furnish all necessary clips or supports. Floor Edging: At the termination of floor slab under Overhead Type Doors, furnish angles as noted to provide a weatherseal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Anchorages: Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 583/01 METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05.500 Page 4 B. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal items to in-place constructions; including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. C. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal items. Set work accurately in location alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing of anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. F. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. END OF SECTION 05.500 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. ,x,20 . of 583/01 CARPENTRY WORK Section 06.100 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Carpentry work includes carpentry not specified as a part of other sections of these Specifications and which generally is not exposed to view unless otherwise Detailed or Scheduled. Work under this section includes: 1. Wood Forming. V l� t 2, W n G . d� > it rs ocking. i 4j I � ; 'JI } ''' 11LI SURAN .�{ ,fir i " >i '" #�t; �- sHl . &I W, �e iiij�r&s � rr AtK� pt A. Lumber standards shall comply with PS 20 and with the aplcale's of e�p� ac I f inspecting agencies for species and products indicated.I a B. Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency, except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate that materials have been inspected and graded in accordance with grading standards if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. C. Keep materials dry during delivery, storage and handling. Store lumber and plywood in stacks with provision for air circulation. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp surfaces. Protect exposed materials from weather. D. Coordinate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports so that attached work will comply with design requirements. E. Shop -fabricate carpentry work to the extent feasible and where shop fabrication will result in better workmanship than feasible for on-site fabrication. F. Treat lumber as specified. G. Fit carpentry work to other work. Scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. ' H. Time delivery and installation of carpentry work to avoid delaying other trades whose work is dependent on or affected by the carpentry work and to comply with protection and storage requirements. I. Keep carpentry materials dry during delivery. Store lumber and plywood in stacks with provision for air circulation within stacks. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp or wet surfaces. Protect exposed materials against weather. J. Do not store dressed or treated lumber outdoors. 583/01 CARPENTRY WORK Section 06.100 Page 2 K. Store materials for which a maximum moisture content is specified, only in areas where relative humidity has been reduced to a level where specified moisture content can be maintained with a tolerance of plus or minus 1 %. L. Advise Contractor of heating or cooling requirements for installation areas and for maintaining required temperature until Owner's acceptance of the work. M. Deliver, store and handle exterior gypsum sheathing in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Western Wood Products Association, "Grading Rules for Western Lumber". B. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading rules for Southern Pine Lumber". C. Product Standard of NSB, "Product Standard P3-166 for Softwood Plywood/Construction and Industrial". D. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards". 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for proper use of each type of treated material. Indicate by transmittal form that copy of each instruction has been distributed to the Installer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Provide lumber complying with lumber producer's inspection agency grading rules certified as conforming to the "National Grading Rules for Dimension Lumber" by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC). Dress dimensional lumber S4S unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 FRAMING A. Roof and Floor Joists shall be No. 2 Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum moisture content. B. Studs shall be Stud Grade, Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum moisture content. C. Other Framing Material shall be No. 2 Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum moisture content. D. Grounds and Nailer shall be No. 2 Douglas Fir -Larch, 19 % maximum moisture content. 2.03 FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES A. Provide size, type, materials and finish for each application, complying with the following: u i u i 583/01 CARPENTRY WORK Section 06.100 Page 3 1. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel. 2. Nails and Staples: FS FF -N-105. 3. Tacks: FS FF -N-103. 4. Wood Screws: FS FF -S-111. 5. Bolts and Studs: FS FF -B-575. 6. Nuts: FS FF -N-836. 7. Washers: FS FF -W-92. _ 8. Lag Screws or Lag Bolts: FS FF -B-561. 9. Expansion Shields, Expansion Nails and Drive Screw Devices: FS FF -S-325. 10. Toggle Bolts: FS FF -B-588. 11. Bar or Strap Anchors: ASTM A 575 carbon steel bars. 2.04 WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Treat wood, including lumber and plywood, shown or scheduled as "Exterior Treated" or specified herein to be treated, to comply with the applicable requirements of the American Wood Preservers Institute (AWPI). B. Pressure treat the following items with water -borne preservatives for above ground use, complying with AWPI-LP-22: 1. Nailers, blocking, stripping and similar members in connection with roofmg and flashing systems. 2. Kiln -dry wood to a maximum moisture content of 15 % after treatment with water -borne preservatives. 2.05 FIRE -RETARDANT TREATED A. All wood concealed in wall, ceiling or roof framing construction required to have a fire -rated assembly shall be fire -retardant treated. Wood must pass U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1 and No. 32-7 and must not have a flame spread of over 25. B. Exposed wood for paint or transparent finish shall not be fire -retardant treated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION 583/01 CARPENTRY WORK Section 06.100 Page 4 A. Installer must examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the carpentry work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. B. Anchors shall be installed where specified or shown on the Drawings to anchor carpentry to masonry or concrete. Anchors for wall partition sills may be 1/2" bolts 12" long spaced 6 fee o.c. or power driven nails at 3 feet o.c. C. A moisture seal or barrier shall be placed under or around wood members which bear on or are embedded in concrete or masonry. Seal shall be asphalt mastic, or other approved type. D. Provide wood grounds and blocking of size and shape required for plaster work, for securing toilet accessories, finish hardware, door stops, and -trim for chalkboards, tackboards, etc. Install true to line, level plumb, and well secured in place. Wood blocking or nailers on dry wall metal framing systems shall be bolted in place. 3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Contractor shall perform such work in his line as is usually required for plumbing, heating, electrical or other mechanics. He shall also furnish, of required sizes and forms, all furring at otherwise shown or specified, rough brackets, forms, etc., as required to properly carry out the intent of the work as shown by Drawings and Specifications. 3.03 TEMPORARY CLOSURES A. Protect all door openings, and other openings except windows when so required, with temporary batten doors, in plastered portions where conditions require. 3.04 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall do all work necessary to cover and protect all masonry window sills and metal and wood door jambs and protect all new carpentry work or material from damage of any character. B. Any work damaged through neglect of above causes or by any other means shall be replaced by Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. End of Section 583/01 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06.400 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this 1 section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of each type of architectural woodwork is shown on the Drawings and in Schedules. B. "Architectural Woodwork" is defined to include (in addition to items so designated on the Drawings) all miscellaneous exposed wood members commonly known as Finish Carpentry or Millwork, unless such items are specified under another section of these Specifications. C. The types of architectural woodwork include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: ' 1. Casework for transparent finish. 2. Plastic laminate for casework and trim. I1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with specified provisions rh tx al Woodwork{ , # t Institute (AWn "Quality Standards". �� T IT 1:pproved woodwork manufacturer must have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall � q��i�llgted comparable work. The Architect reserves the rit to a rove the woodwork it atseici Y� garnish all of the woodwork. pp 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment and joinery, methods of construction and material selections. B. Submit three (3) samples of each piece which is to receive transparent finish at job site. Each sample shall be 8 inches square. 1.05 FIELD DIMENSIONS A. The woodwork manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions, and ' shall show on the shop drawings all required field measurements to be furnished by the General Contractor. The General Contractor and the woodwork manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions. ' 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas which meet the requirements specified for installation areas. Section 06.400 Page 2 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the work under this section is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do no proceed with work under this section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Advise the Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for woodwork installation areas. do not install woodwork until the required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized in installation areas. C. Maintain temperature and relative humidity as required for a tolerance of plus or minus 1 % of the specified optimum moisture content until woodwork receives specified finishes. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions until acceptance of the work by the Owner. D. Protect installed woodwork from damage by other trades until Owner's acceptance of the work. Advise Contractor of required protection procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Red Oak Casework for transparent finish. 1. AWI Section 400, premium grade. 2. Red Oak, plain sawn at all exposed and semiexposed surfaces. B. Laminated Plastic 1. Plastic Laminate shall be equivalent to the Wilsonart and Nevamar products listed in the finish schedule and specified in this section. Reference the finish schedule and the Room Finish Schedules bound in these Specifications immediately following section 01010. 2. Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400B "Laminate Clad Cabinet". 3. Horizontal surfaces shall be GP -50 (0.050 inch nominal thickness). 4. Color to be selected by Architect. C. Casework Hardware 1. All finishes shall be US 10 or brass. 2. Drawer Slides: equivalent to K&V 1429. 3. Door and Drawer Locks: equivalent to K&V 986-8 required. 4. Hinges: equivalent to Grass 1200 series with backplate, to fit conditions encountered. 5. Pulls: equivalent to Hasele 117-28-331, black. 6. Self Supports and Standards: equivalent to K&V 255BR and 256R BR. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. B. Backprime woodwork on all surfaces which will be concealed with one coat of wood primer. Schedule delivery to allow time for application and drying of backprime coat before installation of woodwork. 3.02 INSTALLATION GENERAL 583/01 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06.400 Page 3 A. Install, level, distortions. Shim plumb, true and straight with no as required using concealed shims. B. Cut to fit unless specified to be shop -cut to exact size. Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and ' cut for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners. iassembled ■ C. Distribute defects allowed in the quality grade specified to the best overall advantage, when installing job woodwork items. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Trim and Moldings: Install in single, unjointed lengths for openings and for runs less than 10'. For longer runs, use only one piece less than 10' in any straight run. Stagger joints in adjacent members. cope at returns and miter at corners. B. Attach securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building movements. C. Blind nail where possible. Use fine finishing nails where exposed. Set exposed nail heads for filling, except for exterior wood which is to receive a natural finish (if any). D. Secure woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. E. Screw attach where noted on Drawings, to provide Owner -access to attic or wall chases. F. Clean woodwork and fill nail holes in preparation for finishes specified under Painting Sections of these Specifications. Where woodwork is to receive a transparent finish, use matching wood filler. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CASEWORK A. Install casework in a manner consistent with the specified Quality Grade to be plumb level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as using concealed shims. B. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, conceal end fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work. ' 3.05 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Repair damaged or defective work as directed by the Architect. B. Clean exposed interior and exterior surfaces. C. Clean shop finished woodwork, touch-up finish as required and remove and refinish damaged or soiled areas of finish. ' End of Section 583/01 CONCRETE SEALER Section 07.180 Page 1 ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this section includes the preparation work and the furnishing and application of a concrete sealer over all surfaces of interior concrete paving, ramps and slabs. B. Furnish all materials, tools, accessories, labor and services required to provide a complete, satisfactory and watertight installation. C. All applications of sealer shall be performed during weekends or after hours when the parking areas around the building are empty. No sealer shall be applied while vehicles are parked in the parking areas adjacent to the ' building. 1.03 RELATED WORK tA. Section 02.514 Concrete Curbs, Walks and Paving B. Section 03.300 Concrete Work C. Section 07.190 Water Repellents D. Section 07.920 Caulking and Sealants 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Applicator shall have a minimum of five years experience in commercial applications of the quality and scope specified in this section, and shall be a certified applicator by the manufacturer. The Applicator shall submit a copy of the manufacturer's certification with the quotation for this work. B. All materials be furnished by shall a single manufacturer. C. Test a small area of surface before starting general application to ensure desired results. Low pressure airless spray ' tip (pressure not to exceed 10 lbs.) is recommended for best application. Brush may also be used. 1.05 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit for review complete product data for each product required in this section. ' B. Submit manufacturer's instructions for handling, storage and application for each product required in this section. C. Submit manufacturer's maintenance and repair instructions. D. Submit material certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying thateach material complies with the requirements of this section. ' 1.06 WARRANTY A. At the completion of the project, the Applicator shall submit three copies of an unlimited one (1) year warranty 583/01 CONCRETE SEALER Section 07.180 Page 2 covering materials and workmanship. The submitted warranty shall include the manufacturer's material warranty. B. The warranty period shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. C. The warranty shall cover the following conditions which result from either material or workmanship defects: 1. Moisture penetration through the coating to the substrate. 2. Peeling or flaking of the water repellent coating. 3. Unsightly surface appearance, such as moderate to severe darkening of the surface appearance or an irregular pattern of values on the surface. D. The warranty coverage shall include all materials, services, labor, equipment, tools and accessories to return the sealer to a watertight condition at no cost to the Owner. E. The warranty shall not be subject to a deductible, and shall not be prorated. F. The materials specified for the application shall be equivalent to those manufactured by HARRIS SPECIALTY , CHEMICAL, INC. The manufacturer must be notified at least two (2) weeks prior to application that a warranty will be required. Warranties are issued by HARRIS CHEMICAL, INC. on an individual job basis. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver sealer materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, new, unopened packages and containers bearing the manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Contents by volume. 4. Thinning instructions (if permitted). 5. Application instructions. 6. Handling instructions and precautions. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 ° F. (7°C.) in a well ventilated area. Maintain containers used in storage of coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Protect sealer materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measurers to ensure that workmen and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application. D. The sealer material shall be thoroughly stirred before and occasionally during use. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Surface, air and material temperatures shall not be lower than 45° F. or higher than 100°F. during application. B. Weather shall be clear. There shall be no precipitation during application or expected for 12-24 hours following application. C. Areas not subject to natural ventilation shall have positive ventilation provided throughout the application. D. Surfaces to be treated can be slightly damp, but for best results, a dry surface is recommended. E. Personnel shall be warned against contact of materials with skin or eyes. J 583/01 CONCRETE SEALER E. Section 07.180 Page 3 F. Protect surfaces to remain uncoated during application. Use drop cloths or masking if required. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. Concrete Sealer shall be equivalent to THOROSEAL SPECIAL as manufactured by HARRIS SPECIALTY B. CHEMICAL, INC., Jacksonville, Florida, 1-800.322-7825. PART 3 EXECUTION t3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS End of Section A. All materials handling, preparation work and application work shall be in strict accordance with Concrete Sealer Manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Notify Architect in additional to application. writing of any conditions requiring preparation prior 3.03 PREPARATION A. Joint sealant work shall be complete and fully cured prior to the application of water repellent penetrating sealer. B. Keep sealer products from freezing in containers. C. Clean all surfaces to receive sealer. 3.04 INSTALLATION ' A. Apply one coat of sealer. Completely flood entire surface. B. Material should be applied to saturation, with a controlled rundown, maximum of 8 inches. ' C. Provide a mist coat before general application to help break surface tension to ensure maximum penetration of saturation coat. J D. Coverage rates shall comply with the recommendations of the manufacturer's technical services. E. Coverage rates shall be appropriate for the porosity and finish of the substrate, and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 CLEANING ' A. Clean all other finish surfaces which are coated or oversprayed with sealer. B. All debris and extra materials resulting from the work of this section shall be removed from the site. End of Section J C 0 J i ii G 11 11 u LJ 583/01 WATER REPELLENTS Section 07.190 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this section includes the preparation, materials, services, and equipment required in conjunction with the application of a clear water repellent on all above grade, vertical and horizontal, exterior exposed surfaces of CMU, concrete and brick. B. Similar work used for exposed finishes is excluded by definition, and if required, is specified as roofing, flashings, vapor barriers, special coatings, or other appropriate category of work. C. Sealants and other moisture protection items are specified under other sections of these Specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval manufacturer's technical literature, specifications, sample warranty and application instructions for all types of water repellent materials. B. Submit certification stating that Applicator has a minimum of three (3) years successful experience applying the specified product. Provide a list of several most recently completed projects where the specified material was used. Include the project name, location, architect and method of application. Identify the application equipment that will be used, and certify that it is well maintained and in good working order. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: A firm with no less than ten (10) years experience in manufacturing principle material required for work. B. Applicator Qualification: Applicator shall have a minimum of three (3) years successful experience applying the specified product. C. Mock -Up: 1. Apply water repellent per manufacturer's application instructions to not less that 20 square feet of substrate material which matches actual job conditions. Determine the optimum coverage rate required for application. 2. After sample treatment has cured (approximately 12 to 24 hours), water test to verify that substrate is coated with sufficient water repellent to effectively repel moisture from the surface. 3. Verify that application of water repellent materials will produce no surface stains or discoloration, and . obtain Architect's approval. D. Preapplication Meeting: Convene a preapplication meeting two weeks prior to the start of application of the specified material. Attendance by a representative of each of the following organizations is required; the application firm, the architectural firm, the water repellent manufacturer. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY 583101 WATER REPELLENTS Section 07.190 Page 2 A. Deliver materials to the job site in original sealed containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name, and type of material. Verify the product matches that of the original sample applied on the mock-up wall. B. Store materials inside if possible, away from sparks and open flame. Store in a secure area to avoid tampering and contamination. Water based materials must be kept from freezing. Store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Surface must be free of cracks, dirt, oils, paint or other contaminants which may effect the appearance or performance of the water repellent material. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Air and substrate temperature must be above 40° F (50C) or below 95° F (35° C) unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer. 2. Do not proceed with application if the substrate is wet or contains frozen water. 3. Do not apply material when rain is predicted within 48 hours; or earlier than five days after the substrate became wet. 4. Do not apply materials in high or gusty winds. C. Protection: 1. Special precautions shall be taken to avoid vapor transmission (fumes) from entering the building being treated. Ventilation systems and fresh air intakes shall be turned off, closed and sealed with 6 mil plastic, with all edges and openings sealed. 2. Protect shrubs, metal, wood trim, glass, stone, asphalt and other building hardware during application from overspray. 3. Do not permit spray mist or liquid to drift onto surrounding properties. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Architect shall be notified not less than 48 hours before each application of water repellent is scheduled. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Each type of water repellents shall be guaranteed by the water repellent manufacturer against leakage of water, excessive deterioration, discoloration, staining, or otherwise failing to perform as required within the warranty period, due to failure of materials. B. Each type of water repellents shall be guaranteed by the Applicator against leakage of water, excessive deterioration, discoloration, staining, or otherwise failing to perform as required within the warranty period, due to faulty workmanship. C. Submit completed manufacturer's written "Request For Warranty Form" to manufacturer ten (10) days prior to application. D. After substantial completion of the project, submit manufacturer's written "5 Year Warranty Application" to manufacturer for processing. Upon receiving validated warranty, submit three (3) copies to Architect and Building Owner. E. The period of warranty for materials shall be for 5 years beginning on the Date of Substantial Completion. i� 7 11 ri 583/01 WATER REPELLENTS Section 07.190 Page 3 F. The period of warranty for the workmanship shall be for one year beginning on .the Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Masonry water repellent shall be equivalent to PRIME A PELL H2O Brick and Precast Formula manufactured by Chemprobe Technologies, Inc. B. Water repellent shall be a water based siloxane water repellent suitable for use on vertical surfaces C. All products must contain siloxane. No fillers, stearates, or paraffins are allowed. Products containing Siloxane only, must have a range of three (3) to even (7) percent solids. Silane-Siloxane blend product must have a minimum of twenty (20) percent solids. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. All concrete, stucco, brick, CMU, etc. to receive the specified water repellent must be cleaned of all loose particles of dust, dirt, oil, wax, detergent, soap excess mortar, or any other foreign matter. All surfaces must be completely dry and clean before application. New masonry and mortar must cure a minimum of twenty-one (21) days before application. Apply water repellent after installation of joint sealants. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Application shall be made by a professional waterproofing company with at least three years experience. Material must be applied using low pressure application equipment designed for water repellent application. Apply material as shipped by the manufacturer. Do not dilute. Apply treatment evenly until surface is totally saturated. Coverage rates are dependent on substrate material. Only one saturation coat is required. Refer to manufacturer's published application instruction for complete details B. Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetration work has been completed. Installer shall not commence work until all substrate and other conditions are acceptable to the Applicator for a satisfactory installation. C. Proceed with work under this heading only when weather conditions comply with manufacturer's recommendations. D. All products shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Architect shall be contacted 48 hours prior to application. The Architect will inspect the progress as the work proceeds. B. After water repellent has dried (24 hours — low humidity — medium temperature (70° - 90° F) and 48 hours — high humidity — low temperature (500 - 69° F)), all surfaces shall be tested with a water spray. Recoat any area that indicates water absorption. 3.04 CLEANING 583/01 WATER REPELLENTS Section 07.190 Page 4 A. Remove all debris, tools, and unused materials from the site at the completion of this category of work. B. Dispose of water repellent containers according to state and local environmental regulations. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect shrubs, metal, wood trim, glass, stone, asphalt and other building hardware during application from overspray. Do not permit spray mist or liquid to drift onto surrounding properties or parking lots. Avoid contact with automobile paints and windshields. Clean up immediately after application using a solvent based cleaner or mineral spirits. End of Section 1 I583/01 BUILDING INSULATION Section 07.210 Page 1 ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide batt type insulation at interior walls and ceilings where shown on the Drawings. B. Provide rigid type insulation on exterior C.M.U./brick walls as shown on the Drawings. ' C. Provide all materials, accessories, labor and services required for a complete and satisfactory installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS tA. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of insulation required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. t1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Do not allow insulation materials to become wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for ' handling, storage and protection during installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. Batt type insulation shall be unfaced fiberglass sound attenuation batt insulation as manufactured by CertainTeed, thickness and R values as noted on the Drawings. B. Insulation in exterior masonry walls shall be equivalent to Celotex Corporation "Thermax" Cavity Wall Insulation 610C rigid glass reinforced polyisocyanurante board with standard plain aluminum foil facers on ' both sides. The insulation thickness shall be 1.0 inches, as noted on the Drawings. The aged U valve @ 75° F. mean temperatuere is 21.6. Sheet size shall be 16" wide. ' C. Mechanical and adhesive anchors for attachment of the rigid insulation to the CMU substrate shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until substrate is satisfactory. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case; including method of support or anchorage to the substrate, as appropriate for each application indicated. If printed ' instructions are not available or do not apply to the conditions of the project, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. 583/01 BUILDING INSULATION Section 07.210 Page 2 C. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire surface to be insulated. Insulation shall extend to the roof deck. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. D. Apply a single layer of insulation of the thickness indicated. Attach units to substrate to provide permanent placement and support of units. E. Insulation shall be butted tightly together. End of Section 1 u r u 0 583/01 ROOF INSULATION Section 07.212 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of roof insulation work is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. The work includes the mechanical fastening of rigid polyisocyanurate insulation over a metal roof deck where indicated on the Drawings. C. The work includes the mopping of rigid perlite insulation over the polyisocyanurate insulation where indicated on the Drawings. D. Furnish all incidentals necessary for the satisfactory completion of the work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The roof insulation work shall be done by a single firm so that there will be undivided responsibility for the specified performance of all component parts specified in Sections 07.212, 07.520, 07.610 and 07.900. B. All work shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions for the indicated conditions. C. All materials, work and systems shall be in accordance with the requirements of the roofing system manufacturer to permit the issuance of the ten (10) year unlimited guarantee specified in Section 07520 Modified Bitumen Roofing. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for the roofing insulation products required. Include data substantiating that the materials comply with specified requirements, including evidence of required "R" values. Indicate that the Installer has received a copy of the manufacturer's instructions. B. Submit a sample section of all required roof insulation materials. C. Submit manufacturer's product specifications for mechanical fasteners including installation instructions and data substantiating that the fastener meets the requirements of this section. Submit manufacturer's specifications for each type of fastener required for each type of structural deck substrate encountered. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store insulation materials on wood pallets above the ground in a manner which will ensure that there is no possibility of significant moisture penetration into the materials. Store in a dry, well ventilated, weathertight place. Is C. Do not store roofing materials on the roof deck in concentrated areas which will impose excessive stress on the deck or structural members. 583/01 ROOF INSULATION Section 07.212 Page 2 1.06 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D41 - asphalt primer used in roofing, dampproofing, and waterproofing. B. ASTM D312 - asphalt used in roofing. C. National Roofing Contractors Association (NBCA) - roofing and waterproofing manual. D. NBS-55 - preliminary performance criteria for bituminous membrane roofing. E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - fire hazard classifications. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section for a period of not less than 5 years. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and approved by the Manufacturer to construct and repair the Manufacturer's guaranteed roofing systems. 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for roof assembly fire hazard requirements. B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Class A Fire Hazard Classification. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Primer shall conform to ASTM D-41. B. Bitumen shall be airblown asphalt manufactured especially for roofing purposes complying with the current edition or latest revision of ASTM specification D-312, Steep Grade, Type 111, 185-205 degrees F. softening point. C. Rigid Polyisocyanurate insulation shall meet FS HH - I - 1972, RIC/TIMA, equivalent to Schuller U1traGard, 2 inch minimum thickness, tapered '/a inch in 12 inches. D. Rigid Perlite Insulation shall be equivalent to Fesco Board perlite insulation manufactured by Schuller of Denver, Colorado. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be 3/a inch, with an R value of 2.08. E. Fasteners shall be appropriate for the conditions encountered and approved by both Factory Mutual and insulation manufacturer. Furnish lengths required for thickness of material and type of roof deck. Fastener selection, spacing and installation shall resist a wind uplift force of 90 pounds per square foot of deck area in accordance with UL 1897. F. Furnish and install all other materials and accessories to provide a complete and satisfactory installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ' 583/01 ROOF INSULATION Section 07.212 Page 3 ' A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secured. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, and properly sloped. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, and cant strips, nailing strips and reglets are in place. 3.02 INSULATION APPLICATION OVER METAL ROOF DECK A. The metal roof deck shall be cleaned prior to application of the rigid insulation. B. Mechanically fasten one layer of rigid polyisocyanurate insulation over the enure surface of the metal roof deck. C. Mechanical fasteners, fastener patterns and insulation panel patterns shall be in strict accordance with the insulation manufacturer's written requirements and recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION/GENERAL A. All roof insulation work shall be done in strict accordance with the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. ' B. Do no overload the building structure with the storage of materials or use of equipment on the deck. C. Do not proceed with the installation of insulation unless the materials, equipment and tradesmen required for ' the installation of the roofing insulation and membrane over the insulation are on the project site and ready to follow with this work immediately (same day) behind the work. Do not install any more insulation each day than can be covered with waterproof membrane by the end of that working day. ' D. Prepare the substrate so that it is dry, clean, relatively smooth and otherwise satisfactorily prepared to receive the roof insulation board. E. At all multiple -layer applications, offset all joints of each layer a minimum of b inches from all joints of the preceding layer. IF. Extend insulation full thickness over the entire surfaces to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. ' G. Form slight depressions at roof scuppers and roof drains with insulation approximately 1" less in thickness than for adjacent roof areas so that finished roofing will not be above adjoining areas. H. All insulation application shall resist a wind uplift force of 90 pounds per square foot of deck area in ' accordance with UL 1897. I. The Contractor is cautioned that any insulation that becomes wet for any reason shall be removed from the project site. 583/01 ROOF INSULATION Section 07.212 Page 4 3.04 PERLITE INSULATION APPLICATION OVER POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION A. Embed one layer of perlite insulation over the polyisocyanurate insulation into a full mopping of hot bitumen in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. B. Lay insulation boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. C. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with base ply membrane in same day. D. Mopping asphalt shall be heated to between 375 degrees and 425 degrees F. at the point of application (mop bucket, mechanical mopper or felt layer). Asphalt shall not be heated above 525 degrees F. nor held above 500 degrees F. for more than 4 hours. E. Cut and fit insulation boards where roof deck intersects vertical surfaces. Cut board 1/4 inch from vertical surface. F. Each board of insulation shall be walked into place and shall be physically checked by workmen for proper adhesion. G. The long dimension of the insulation boards shall generally run perpendicular to. the roof slope and the short joints shall be staggered. H. The insulation shall be butted together with no gaps greater than 1/4 inch. Gaps greater than 1/4 inch shall be filled with the same material. Maximum elevation variation between insulation boards at joints shall be 1/8 inch. I. Adhere each layer(s) with a uniform and continuous application of asphalt at a rate of thirty-three (33) lbs. per 100 sq. feet. J. Promptly spread any bitumen pools that may accumulate on insulation surface to achieve smooth surface for roofing installation. K. Install insulation into a full width mopping of hot asphalt applied at an approximate rate of 33 pounds per 100 square feet of deck area. Insulation joints shall be staggered a minimum of 6 inches from the joints of the first layer of insulation. 3.05 TEMPORARY WATER CUTOFFS A. The Contractor shall install temporary water cutoffs at the end of each day's work. B. The water cutoff shall consist of a minimum of one ply of modified base sheet installed in a full mopping of hot asphalt extending onto the deck and insulation a minimum of 6 inches. C. The water cutoff must not lap onto the granule surfaced cap sheet. D. When roofing work is to be resumed, the temporary water cutoff shall be removed cleanly from the insulation (top surface and vertical joint) and from the deck to ensure tight insulation joints and level insulation surfaces. E. Any in-place roofing which becomes wet from the Contractor's failure to install a temporary water cutoff or a faulty temporary water cutoff installation shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor as directed by the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. 583/01 ROOF INSULATION 3.06 CLEANING Section 07.212 Page 5 A. At completion of work under this section, all rubbish accumulated by these operations shall be removed from the site. End of Section ' 583/01 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING Section 07.520 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK tA. The extent of modified bitumen roofing work is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. The work includes membrane roofing over a lightweight insulating concrete roof deck, or rigid insulation applied over a metal roof deck, and all associated flashing materials and miscellaneous items specified in this section. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The membrane roofing work shall be done by a single firm specializing in the types of roofing required so that there will be undivided responsibility for the specified performance of all component parts specified in sections 07.520, 07.610 and 07.900. ' B. All work shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions for the indicated conditions. 1.04 SYSTEM ' A. Roofing system over rigid insulation board shall be equivalent to TAMKO Roofing Products modified bitumen specification # 107FR. tB. All membrane flashings shall be torch applied. C. The following roofing systems are approved for the work of this section provided that all other conditions of ' this Section 07520, including the system warranty and membrane warranty specified in other portions of this Specification, are met and warranties issued: ' 1. GAF system with Ruberoid MB Plus FR finish ply membrane. 2. US Intec, Inc. system with Brai/Flex M FR finish ply membrane. ' 3. GS Roofing Products system with GMS 250 FR finish ply membrane. 4. Schuller system with DynaKap FR finish ply membrane. 5. The reinforcing mat in the modified bitumen membrane shall be partially or wholly constructed of polyester and shall weigh a minimum of 250 grams per square meter. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to Contract award, submit three (3) copies of a letter from the proposed roofing manufacturer confirming that the bidder is an acceptable Contractor authorized to install the proposed system. 583/01 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING Section 07.520 Page 2 B. Prior to Contract award, submit three (3) copies from the proposed roofing manufacturer stating that the proposed application will comply with the manufacturer's requirements in order to quality the project for the specified guarantee. C. Submit the manufacturer's product specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. D. Submit three (3) copies of the manufacturer's certification indicating that bulk bituminous materials delivered to the project comply with the required standards. E. Submit three (3) copies of the Roofing System Manufacturer's published recommendations and guidelines for proper maintenance of the specified roof system, including inspection schedules, penetration addition policies, temporary repairs and procedures for reporting leaks. 1.06 GUARANTEES A. At the completion of the project and prior to final payment, the Contractor shall furnish three (3) copies of the Roofing System Manufacturer's unlimited ten (10) year guarantee covering materials and workmanship for the roofing and base flashing systems, equivalent to that issued by TAMKO Roofing Products. Guarantee shall cover leaks which result from either material or workmanship defects, shall not be subject to a deductible, and shall not be prorated. The guarantee coverage shall include all repairs to the roofing system to the extent necessary to return the roofing system to a watertight condition at no cost to the Owner. B. Provide three (3) copies of a twelve (12) year product guarantee for the modified bitumen membrane material from the Roofing System Manufacturer. Guarantee shall cover leaks which result from material defects, shall not be subject to a deductible, and shall contain no maximum penal sum. C. The Roofing System Applicator shall provide three (3) copies of a two (2) year guarantee covering all membrane roofing, membrane flashing, metal flashing and sealant applications in conjunction with the roofing work. The guarantee shall not be subject to a deductible, and shall not be prorated. The guarantee coverage shall include all repairs to the roofing, flashing and sealant work to the extent necessary to return the work to a watertight condition at no cost to the Owner. The guarantee period shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.07 MATERIAL STORAGE A. Store roofing materials on wood pallets above the ground in a manner which will ensure that there is no possibility of significant moisture penetration into the materials. Store in a dry, well ventilated, weathertight place. Do not leave unused felts on the floor overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. Store rolls of felts and other sheet materials on end. B. Do not store roofing materials or equipment on the roof deck in concentrated areas which will impose excessive stress on the deck or structural members. 1.08 INSPECTIONS A. In addition to the warranty inspection by the roofing system manufacturer's technical representative, a minimum of two (2) progress inspections by the roofing system manufacturer's technical representative is required. These inspections shall occur during the installation of roof insulation board, the base ply, the modified bitumen membrane, the parapet flashing systems and the temporary water cutoff. B. These inspections shall be coordinated and scheduled with the Architect a minimum of two (2) days prior to the inspection. 1 I583/01 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING Section 07.520 Page 3 C. The manufacturer's inspector shall be a person specially trained and experienced in roofing system technology and installation procedures and shall be an employee of the roofing system manufacturer. Independent consultants retained by the manufacturer are not acceptable for the purposes of this inspection. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. All materials shall be acceptable to the manufacturer of the roofing system installed. B. Provide roofing materials which comply with the following general standards or as recommended by the roofing system manufacturer. C. Roofing System Materials: ' 1. Bitumen shall be airblown asphalt manufactured especially for roofing purposes complying with the current edition or latest revision of ASTM Specification D 312, Steep Grade, Type III. ' 2. Base Sheet shall be equivalent to TAMKO AWAPLAN VERSA -BASE. 3. Finish Ply shall be equivalent to TAMKO AWAPLAN PREMIUM FR granule surfaced modified bitumen membrane, ceramic granule color shall be white. 4. Torch Applied Flashing Ply shall be equivalent to TAMKO AWAPLAN HEAT WELDING granule surfaced modified bitumen membrane, color shall be white. ' D. Miscellaneous Materials: ' 1. Plastic Cement shall be equivalent to TAMKO TAM -PRO Q-15. 2. Concrete Primer shall comply with ASTM D 41. 3. Fasteners shall be galvanized or non-ferrous type, size and design as required to suit application. 4. Preformed Cant shall be 4" x 4" with a 5" face at a 45 degree angle. Cant material shall be molded ' asphalt impregnated organic fiber or fire resistant perlite. 5. Protection Sheets, where required, shall be equivalent to TAMKO Awaplan Premium modified bitumen sheet. 6. Termination Bars, where required, shall be minimum 1 1/2" wide x 3/16" thick aluminum with predrilled holes for fasteners at 6" o.c. and 1" from ends. 1 i E. G 7. Pourable Filler shall be equivalent to Sonolastic SL 1 by Sonneborn Building Products; Minneapolis, MN, a single component of pouring consistency, exhibiting no weathering or cracking when tested according to ASTM D 920 Type S. Provide all additional materials required by the roofing system manufacturer to allow the issuance of the Ten (10) Year Unlimited Roofing System Guarantee. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All modified bitumen roofing materials and construction shall be done in strict accordance with the 583/01 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING Section 07.520 Page 4 manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. If printed instructions are not obtainable or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. 3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. Before ply application is started, prepare surface by removing trash, debris, grease, oil, water moisture and contaminates affecting bond of asphalt to surface. B. Verify that surfaces are dry per respective manufacturer's or applicator's published instructions. C. Prepare other surfaces according to respective manufacturer's or applicator's published instructions. D. Use cleaning materials necessary to render an acceptable surface. E. Use compatible materials on voids and joints so finished deck surface will be even and smooth. F. Protect adjacent areas with tarpaulin or ut mer durable materials. G. Prepare properly for flashing and secure in position any projections through the roof deck. Install new metal flashings, fascias, gravel guards and other items as required. Ensure roof drains, etc., are at proper height to permit water to drain properly without ponded water. H. Inspect all parapet walls, roof edges, etc. prior to application of roofing to make sure that proper provisions have been made to install metal roof edges, etc. I. Do not apply roofing if damp weather is imminent or if any other conditions exist that will not permit proper application. Do not apply roofing when moisture is present in the deck. Apply concrete primer over the concrete deck and allow to dry before beginning the base sheet application. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Protect any lifting point on the roof or deck where roofing materials are transferred from one container to another with two sheets of 4' x 8' x 5/8" plywood laid with long edges together covered with base sheet overlapping all sides four feet and up and over the parapet. B. Repair any damaged areas of base sheet by applying a patch with mopping of hot asphalt overlapping the damaged area 12" on each side. C. Furnish a thermometer for checking temperature of asphalt in the kettle and at the point of application to the roof deck. D. Asphalt heating and application: 1. ASTM D312 Type III Steep Asphalt shall not be heated above 525 degrees F. nor held above 500 degrees F. for more than 4 hours, and shall be applied at temperatures between 375 degrees F. and 425 degrees F. unless specifically instructed otherwise by the roofing system manufacturer. E. Provide temporary water cut-offs at the end of each day's work. Remove temporary water cut-offs cleanly when work is resumed. 3.04 MEMBRANE ROOF INSULATION OVER RIGID INSULATION BOARD A. Starting at the low point of the roof, embed one layer of base ply with a minimum of 2" side laps and a ' 583/01 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING Section 07.520 Page 5 minimum of 4" end laps into a full mopping of hot steep asphalt at a minimum of 23 pounds per square feet. Broom to obtain embedment of the base ply. B. Starting at the low point of the roof, solidly adhere one layer of finish ply by mop applying with minimum 4" laps and minimum 6" end laps. All laps shall be checked and sealed while the modified bitumen is still in ' a semi -fluid state from roll application. A minimum of %" flow of asphalt must extend beyond all edges. Asphalt application rate shall be a minimum of 30 pounds per 100 square feet. Asphalt temperature shall not be less than 425 degrees F. at point of application. Do not mop more than 4 feet in front of roll. Remove ' factory splices of modified asphalt sheet materials prior to installation or cover factory splices in the field with modified asphalt sheet material set in hot asphalt. C. Apply membrane without wrinkles or tears, free from air pockets. ' D. Extend membrane up cant strips and a minimum of 2 inches onto vertical surfaces. ' E. At the end of each day install water cut-off consisting of two plies of felts or one ply of coated base sheet installed in a mopping of asphalt extending onto the deck a minimum of 6 inches. Cover all exposed edges of insulation. Completely remove cut-off before resuming roofing. - ' F. Seal membrane around roof penetrations. 3.05 FLASHINGS ' A. All base and parapet flashings shall be torch applied material and system except at combustible substrates. ' B. Apply membrane base flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements. Extend a minimum of 6 inches onto field of roof surface and a minimum of 8 inches up vertical surface being flashed. Secure top edge at 8 inches on center. ' C. Apply modified bitumen parapet flashing in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written requirements and recommendations. D. Termination bars shall be bedded in sealant and shall be anchored 6" on center and within 1" of the end of ' each bar. Abutting bars shall be spaced 1/4" to 1/2" apart. A continuous bead of sealant shall be placed along the top of all termination bars. ' E. At roof drains, terminate courses of membrane and hot bitumen at edges of drain. Trim surface of insulation or deck where necessary so that roofing is flush with ring of drain. ' F. Set metal flanges as recommended by the roofing materials manufacturer. G. See Section 07600 for miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items to be installed in the work. ' H. Provide all accessories and materials to provide a complete and watertight installation of the expansion joint cover. ' 3.06 PROTECTION SHEETS A. Provide protection sheets where shown on the Drawings, at each service side of all mechanical roof -mounted ' equipment and at other locations required by the Roofing System Manufacturer. B. Adhere pads to the modified bitumen membrane in a full mopping of hot asphalt. Do not provide the flood coat and aggregate surfacing over the pads. 3.07 PITCH PANS 583/01 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING Section 07.520 Page 6 A. Pitch pans will be allowed only if specifically approved by the Architect. B. Completely clean the metal penetration of all roofing materials. C. Clean any residual oil shop coatings from the inside wall of the pitch pan using Naphtha solvent. The pitch pan wall shall then be etched using a 5 % acetic acid solution. D. Completely prime the flange of the pitch pan And allow to dry prior to installation. E. After the base ply has been applied, set the flange in mastic and secure to the deck. F. Strip -in the flange using the base ply material, extending a minimum of four (4) inches beyond the edge of the flange. G. Fill the pitch pan with a non -shrink grout to a level approximately 1-1/2 - 2 inches below the top rim. H. Install duct tape around the pitch pan wall to act as a form for the pitch pan filler. I. Proper mixing if required of the pitch pan filler should follow manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. J. Slowly and carefully fill the pitch pan to the top level of the duct tape, ensuring the finished level is above the top rim. K. Apply the finish ply, terminating at the flange -pitch pan wall juncture. Apply a continuous bead of sealant along the edge of the finish ply. L. Install a watertight umbrella to the penetration, completely covering the opening of the pitch pan. 3.08 CLEANING A. At completion of work under this section, all rubbish accumulated by these operations shall be removed from the site. B. Remove all stains of every nature from all surfaces stained by the roofing operations. If stains cannot be removed, the affected areas shall be replaced with new material matching the existing material. C. Remove all equipment, tools and excess materials from the site. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces from damage. End of Section ' 583/01 METAL ROOFING SYSTEM Section 07.610 Page 1 tPART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in ' this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 4. ASTM A792-AZ50: Specifications for steel sheet, aluminum -zinc alloy coated (galvanized by the ' A. The extent of the metal reroofing work is shown on the Drawings. B. Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, and services for all preformed metal roofing and related ' work as indicated on the Drawings. ' C. Coordinate with the work of all other trades. ' D. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. ' framing and metal roofing systems required by these Contract Documents. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Shop drawings: 1. Submit complete shop drawings and erection details to Architect for review. Do not proceed with ' manufacture prior to review of shop drawings. Do not use drawings prepared by Architect for shop A. Applicable standards: 1. SMACNA: "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc., latest edition. ' 2. RISC: "Steel Construction Manual" American Institute of Steel Construction, latest edition. 3. AISI: "Cold Form Steel Design Manual", American Iron and Steel Institute, latest edition. 4. ASTM A792-AZ50: Specifications for steel sheet, aluminum -zinc alloy coated (galvanized by the ' hot dip process, general requirements (galvalume). B. Manufacturer's qualifications: ' 1. The Manufacturer is required to have a minimum of three years of satisfactory experience in manufacturing panels and components of the type and quality required by these Contract Documents. ' C. Installer's qualifications: 1. The Installer shall have a minimum of three years of satisfactory experience in installing metal ' framing and metal roofing systems required by these Contract Documents. D. All work shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and ' recommendations for the indicated conditions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Shop drawings: 1. Submit complete shop drawings and erection details to Architect for review. Do not proceed with ' manufacture prior to review of shop drawings. Do not use drawings prepared by Architect for shop 583/01 METAL ROOFING SYSTEM Section 07.610 Page 2 or erection drawings. 2. Shop drawings shall show methods of erection, elevations, and plans of roof and wall panels, sections and details, anticipated loads, flashings, roof curbs, vents, sealants, interfaces with all materials not supplied and proposed identification of component parts and their finishes. 3. Roof slopes shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Design roof live load shall be 20 psf. 5. Roof system shall meet UL Class 90 wind uplift rating. 6. Shop Drawings shall show locations of all end laps and shall provide end lap details. B. Samples: 1. Submit samples and color chips for all proposed finishes. a. Submit one 8 in. long sample of panel. b. Submit two sets of 3 in. x 5 in. color chip samples for selection by the Architect. c. Submit fasteners. C. Manufacturer's letters: 1. Prior to Contract award, submit three (3) copies of a letter from the proposed Roofing System Manufacturer confirming that the bidder is an acceptable Contractor authorized to install the proposed system. 2. Prior to Contract award, submit three (3) copies from the proposed Roofing System Manufacturer stating that the proposed application will comply with the manufacturer's requirements in order to qualify the project for the specified warranty. 3. Submit three (3) copies of the Roofing System Manufacturer's approval of the shop drawings submitted by the Roofing Contractor, ensuring that the shop drawings describe a system which will allow the issuance of the specified Roofing System Manufacturer's warranty. 4. Provide the manufacturer's certification and construction number that demonstrates that the system meets the UL class 90 requirement. D. Product data: 1. Submit eight (8) copies of the manufacturer's product specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirement. 2. Submit three (3) copies of the Roofing System Manufacturer's published recommendations and guidelines for proper maintenance of the specified roof system, including inspection schedules, penetration addition policies, temporary repairs and procedures for reporting leaks. E. Warranties: 1. Submit four (4) sample copies of the required warranties. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. At the completion of the project and prior to final payment, the Contractor shall furnish three {3) copies ' 583/01 METAL ROOFING SYSTEM ' Section 07.610 Page 3 of the Roofing System Manufacturer's no dollar limit twenty (20) year watertightness warranty covering materials and workmanship for the roofing and flashing systems, equivalent to that issued by MBCI. The warranty period shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. A sample copy of the required warranty is bound into these specifications for reference at the end of this section. 1. Warranty shall cover leaks which result from either material or workmanship defects, shall not be ' subject to a deductible, and shall not be prorated. 2. All repair or replacement costs covered under the warranty shall be borne by the Roofing System ' Manufacturer and Roofing Contractor. 3. The warranty coverage shallinclude include all repairs to the roofing system to the extent necessary to ' return the roofing system to a watertight condition at not cost to the Owner. B.- The Roofing Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of a two (2) year warranty covering all metal ' roofing, metal flashing and sealant applications in conjunction with the roofing work. The warranty shall cover all gutters, valley flashings and all other incidental work. The warranty shall not be subject to a deductible, and shall not be prorated. The warranty coverage shall include all repairs to the roofing, flashing and sealant work to the extent necessary to return the work to a watertight condition at no cost to ' the Owner. The warranty period shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. C. The metal panel manufacturer, shall furnish three (3) copies of a warranty covering bare metal against rupture, structural failure, and perforation due to normal atmospheric corrosion exposure for a period of ' 20 years. Warranty period shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. D. The metal panel manufacturer shall furnish three (3) copies of a warranty covering panel finish against ' cracking, checking, blistering, peeling, flaking, chipping, chalking and fading for a period of twenty (20) years for wallpanels and twenty (20) years for roof panels. Warranty period shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. ' 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver panels to jobsite properly packaged to provide protection against transportation damage. Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original sealed and labeled containers and in quantities required to allow continuity of application. ' B. Handling: Exercise extreme care in unloading, storing and erecting panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. ' C. Storage: Store all material and accessories above ground on well skidded platforms. 'Store under waterproof covering. Provide proper ventilation to panels to prevent condensation build-up between each panel. ' 1.07 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements ' 1. Precipitation: Do not apply roofing materials during precipitation or in the event there is a probability of precipitation during application. Take adequate precautions to ensure that materials, ' applied roofing, and building interiors are protected from moisture damage or contamination. 583/01 METAL ROOFING SYSTEM Section 07.610 Page 4 B. Roof Loading 1. Do not stack materials in concentrated areas on the existing roof structure, causing the structure to deflect or weaken due to loading stress. 1.08 MATERIAL TESTING A. Testing of materials delivered to the project site will be tested for conformance with the requirements of this section as determined by the Architect. B. The Contractor shall cut and furnish samples for testing as directed by the Architect. The Architect has the authority to select samples from materials installed in the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 - 2.01 MATERIALS A. Panel profile: 1. 1 3/4 high seam by 12" wide panel equivalent to MBCI Lokseam. 2. Soffit panel shall match roof panel. B. Gauge: 1. 24 gauge (##UL -90 rated - Underwriters Laboratories). C. Texture: 1. Smooth D. Finish 1. Signature 300 with Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resin (20 year warranty). E. Color: 1. Color to be selected by Architect. F. Fasteners: 1. Shall match panel material and color. Shall have EPDM gaskets. Shall be of the type and size recommended by the Roofing System Manufacturer. G. Acceptable manufacturer: 1. MBCI, or equivalent. 0 7 583/01 METAL ROOFING SYSTEM Section 07.610 Page 5 PART 3 EXECUTION. 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examination: 1. Inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to a point where this work may continue. 2. Verify that installation will be made in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. B. Discrepancies: 1. In event of discrepancy, notify Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have been resolved. 3.02 FABRICATION A. Material shall be in-line tension leveled prior to roll forming finished panel profile. B. Roll form panels in continuous lengths, full -length of detailed runs. It is recommended that panels should be factory rolled. C. Standard panel length shall be no more than 45 feet. D. Fabricate trim, flashing and accessories to -detailed profiles. E. Fabricate trim and flashing from same material as .panel. F. End laps will be acceptable if accomplished in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. G. Factor applied mastic to panel sidelaps. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install panels so that they are weathertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, allowing for expansion and contraction. B. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings. C. Provide anchors at all panel attachment locations. D. Install panels plumb, level, and straight with seams and ribs/battens parallel, conforming to design as indicated. E. No work shall be performed that cannot be weathersealed at the end of each day's work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any water damage to the building's interior resulting from an inadequate weatherseal in all areas where work is being performed. 583/01 METAL ROOFING SYSTEM Section 07.610 Page 6 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall be liable for any property damage caused by the Contractor's failure to prevent water entry into the building below. B. Clean work in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Protect work against damage until final acceptance. Replace or repair to the satisfaction of the Architect any work that becomes damaged prior to final acceptance. D. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions. E. Remove all debris, unused materials, tools and equipment from the site. End of Section ' 583/01 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 1 ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ' A. The work of this section includes miscellaneous interior and exterior caulking and sealant work not specifically covered by other sections of these Specifications. Dow Corning Corporation 3. General Electric Company 4. B. All junctures of dissimilar finish materials shall be caulked or sealed to provide a finished condition. ' C. All through floors penetrations walls, or ceilings that are not required to be fireproofed shall be completely sealed to reduce sound transference through the assemblies. ' D. Fumish all materials, and perform all work required to complete the joint preparation, joint or filler, packing priming, caulking and sealing indicated by the Drawings and specified herein. ' E. The work of this section includes the sealing of new thresholds installed under section 08.710. F. The work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, sealing all of the following conditions: ' 1. Intersections of masonry walls to masonry walls. 2. Intersections of concrete paving to vertical surfaces. 3. Expanse joints in concrete walks and paving. 4. Joints where concrete paving abut dissimilar materials. 5. Intersections of aluminum frames and masonry or steel. 6. Intersections of aluminum window frames and masonry or steel. ' 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 02.514 Concrete Walks. ' B. Section 06.400 Architectural Woodwork. C. Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames D. Section 09.260 Gypsum Wallboard Systems ' E. Section 09.900 Painting 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Sealant material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable provided it complies with the requirements of this section. 1. ChemRex, Inc. ' 2. Dow Corning Corporation 3. General Electric Company 4. Gibson -Homans Company ' 5. W. R. Grace and Company 6. Mameco International, Inc. 583/01 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 2 7. Morton International, Inc. 8. Products Research and Chemical Corporation 9. Sika Corporation 10. Sonneborn Building Products, Inc. 11. Tremco 12. USG B. The Caulking and Sealant Contractor shall employ personnel skilled in the caulking and sealant application conditions required for this project. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA. B. TRC - Tremco Research Center, Tremco Inc., Cleveland, OH. C. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Northbrook, IL 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's published data for caulking and sealants. B. Submit material safety data sheets. C. Submit two sets of cured sealant color samples for selection by the Architect. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of materials: 1. Deliver materials to the job site in new, dry, unopened, and well -marked containers showing product and manufacturer's name. 2. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work. B. Do not order project materials or start work before receiving product data review comments from the Architect. C. Storage of materials: 1. Store materials marked "keep from freezing" in areas where temperatures will remain above 40°F. 2. No materials may be stored in open or in contact with ground. 3. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises. D. Material handling: 1. Material handling equipment shall be selected and operated so as not to damage existing construction. Do not operate or situate material handling equipment in locations that will hinder smooth flow of vehicular or pedestrian traffic. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Field measurements and material quantities: 1. Applicator shall have sole responsibility for accuracy of all measurements, estimates of material ' 583/01 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 3 ' quantities and sizes and conditions that will affect work. B. Safety requirements: ' 1. All application, material handling and associated equipment shall conform to and be operated in conformance with OSHA safety requirements. 2. Comply with federal, state, local and Owner fire and safety requirements. 3. Advise Owner whenever work is expected to be hazardous to Owner, employees, and/or operators. ' 4. Maintain fire extinguisher within easy access whenever power tools are being used. . C. Environmental requirements: ' 1. Do not work in presence of water. 2. Do not work in temperatures below 40°F. 3. Do not install materials marked "keep from freezing" when daily temperatures are scheduled to fall ' below 40°F. 4. Do not perform masonry work below 40°F. 5. Remove any work exposed to freezing. ' 6. Advise Owner when volatile materials are to be used near air ventilation intakes so that they can be shut down or blocked as Owner requires. ' 1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS A. When a particular make or trade name is specified, it shall be indicative of the quality standard required. Bidders may propose substitutes in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform General Conditions and ' Supplementary General Conditions and section 01600. 1.10 WARRANTY ' A. Submit a warranty covering all materials and workmanship for work furnished and installed under this section. ' B. Warranty shall be unlimited, covering both materials and workmanship. C. Warranty shall cover leaks which result from either material or workmanship defects, shall not be subject to ' a deductible, and shall not be prorated. D. The warranty period shall be for one (1) year, and shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL ' A. Comply with quality control, references, specifications and manufacturer's data. Products containing asbestos are prohibited on this project. Use only asbestos -free products. ' B. Use products with personal protection. User must read container label and material safety data sheets prior to use. ' C. Compatibility: Provide sealers, fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by testing and field 583/01 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 4 experience as warranted, by one manufacturer. D. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealant, as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Up to three colors will be selected. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General Purpose shall be equivalent to Vulkem 116 polyurethane sealant as manufactured by Mameco International, Inc. of Cleveland, Ohio. B. Exterior Paving Joint (or "Traffic Grade") Sealant, shall be equivalent to Sonnebom SL2 polyueredme sealant by ChemREX, Inc. (for horizontal exterior paving to horizontal exterior paving surfaces). C. Exterior Paving Joint (or "Traffic Grade") Sealant, shall be equivalent to Thiokol 2p polysulfide sealant by Morton International (for horizontal exterior paving to exterior vertical surfaces). D. Exterior Wall Joint Sealant shall be equivalent to Dow Corning 790 Silicone Building Sealant. E. Exterior Aluminum Frame to Masonry Joint Sealant shall be equivalent to Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant. F. Exterior sealant at applications coming in contact with modified bitumen roofing shall be equivalent to Black Jack # 1010 Neoprene Flashings Cement as manufactured by the Gibson -Homans Company of Twinsburg, Ohio, or as recommended by the roofing system manufacturer. G. Interior Caulk shall be equivalent to Sonnebom Sonolac, siliconized acrylic latex caulk. Caulk shall be acceptable to paint manufacturer for receiving the scheduled latex or oil base paints. H. Sealant shall be used in conjunction with gypsum drywall sound or fire seals shall be recommended by the Architect. I. Backing Rods shall be closed cell polyurethane as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the application conditions encountered. J. Caulk shall be equivalent to Sonnebom Sonolac, siliconized acrylic latex caulk. Caulk shall be acceptable to paint manufacturer for receiving the scheduled latex or oil base paints. K. Sound Sealant shall be equivalent to USG Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant. L. Sealant Primer shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each type of surface application and condition encountered. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine all surfaces to receive caulking or sealant and report all conditions which are not acceptable to the General Contractor. Installation shall be deemed as acceptance of the surfaces. B. Clean all surfaces thoroughly, removing all foreign matter, dust, oil, grease, water surface, dirt, frost, old caulking material and previously applied paint or primer. For all metal and glass surfaces that are to be sealed with a silicone sealant, use isopropyl alcohol as a cleaning liquid. Pour or squirt the liquid onto a clean cloth. Wipe vigorously to remove surface contaminants. Rotate the cloth to a clean area and rewipe until no dirt or oily material is evident on the cloth. Immediately wipe the liquid cleaned area with a second clean, dry cloth. Clean only as much as can be sealed in one hour. Change cloths frequently as they become r r 583/01 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 5 dirty. C. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.02 APPLICATION OF SEALANTS A. Follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding preparation, priming, application life and application procedure. B. Apply masking tape where required in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge. Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed. C. Apply sealant under pressure with gun having nozzle of proper size, or other appropriate means. Provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints. D. Neatly point or tool sealant to provide proper contour. Use clean water -wet tool or tooling solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored sealant. E. Use clean water -wet tool or tooling solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored sealant. F. Sealants shall slop away from vertical substrates. M. Ensure a''/< inch minimum thickness of sealant over all backer rods. ' 3.03 JOINT SIZES v A. The width of a sealant joint shall not be less than 1/8 inch. B. In joints up to 1/4 inch wide, sealant depth shall be V4 inch. C. In joints from '/< inch to %2 inch wide, the depth of the sealant shall be equal to the width. D. For joints wider than % inch, but not exceeding 2 inches, the depth shall be maintained at %2 inch. E. For joints wider than 2 inches, consult with the sealant manufacturer's technical services department. F. In all joints '/4 inch or wider, the sealant shall be applied over a backing rod. 3.04 APPLICATION OF CAULKING A. Caulk joints before final coat of paint is applied to adjacent surface. B. Apply caulking with a pressure gun having nozzle of proper size to fit joint. C. Completely fill joint and firmly tool against backing to make a smooth, convex bed, and ensure good adhesion. D. Caulking shall develop a firm skin prior to applications of paint. 3.05 APPLICATION OF SOUND CONTROL SEALANT A. Minimum sealant depth shall be 3/8 inch minimum, and shall completely seal all openings around and between penetrations. Section 01.000 Paye 6 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant excesses or smears. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Leave all finished work in a neat and clean condition. C. Remove all debris and extra materials resulting from the work of this section from the site. End of Section 7 I� C L G 583/01 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08.150 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of hollow metal doors and frames is shown on the Drawings and Schedules; all shall be custom hollow metal work. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 08.700 Finish Hardware 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide hollow metal doors and frames manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work. B. The Contractor shall not submit any hollow metal manufacturer for the Architect's approval without first verifying that the proposed manufacturer's facilities are adequate to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The manufacturer shall have been in the business for at least five years and shall have a record for financial responsibility and for doing work of the quality required by the Contract Documents. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. SDI -100 - Recommended Specifications -Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel Door Institute. B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and Factory Mutual (FM), as applicable to fire rated hollow metal door frames. C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, General Requirements. D. ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon, Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. E. ASTM A591 - Steel Sheet, cold -Rolled, Electrolyte Zinc Coated. F. ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and erection of hollow metal doors and frames. Includes details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, locations and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements and details 583/01 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08.150 Page 2 of joints and connections. Show anchorages and necessary items. B. Samples 1. Submit 12" x 12" sample corner section of typical frame showing details of construction and finish. 2. Submit 12" x 12" sample comer section of typical door showing details of construction and finish. 3. Submit samples of all accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is accepta7blc provided it complies with the contract Documents. L HOLLOW METAL Steelcraft Overly Manufacturing Company Williamsburg Steel Products Company Superior Door & Sash Company Republic Steel Corporation Hol -O -Met, Inc. Tex -Steel Corporation 2.02 MATERIALS A. METAL: ASTM A366, gauges as specified for each particular member. B. PAINT: Zinc -Chromate Alkyd resin primer for baked primer, Fed. Spec. TT -P-645. C. INSULATION: Mineral wool batt insulation, thickness as required for door thickness. 2.03 FABRICATION A. DOORS 1. Fabricate doors from cold rolled, pickled and oiled, stretcher leveled steel; 18 gauge face sheets. Use16 gauge for channel frame and 22 gauge for interlocking vertical channels or "z" shaped member reinforcing. 2. Construct doors rigid, neat and free from defects, with continuous welded joints at door edges dressed smooth and invisible. No joints shall occur on face of the door. 3. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap with templates, frames to receive all mortise hardware. Provide reinforcing plates for surface applied hardware. Reinforce for hinges with 7 gauge steel; for locks and other hardware cutouts with 12 gauge steel; for surface applied hardware with 12 gauge steel. 11 583/01 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08.150 Page 3 ' 4. Provide 1/8" clearance at jambs and heads; 3/16" at meeting stiles of pairs of doors; 3/8" at sills, except fire doors and where indicated otherwise. Bevel lock edge of stiles 1/8" in 2". ' B. FRAMES 1. Form metal frames to size and shapes indicated from cold rolled, pickled and oiled steel sheets with ' clean smooth surfaces. Fabricate all frames from 14 gauge steel. 2. Construct frames strong, rigid, neat and free from defects, true and fully welded unit type ' construction at joints. Miter joints and continuously arc -weld full depth and width of frames. Dress smooth and invisible, welds of joints on exposed surfaces. t 3. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap with templates, frames to receive mortise hardware. Provide reinforcing plates for surface applied hardware. Reinforce for hinges with 7 gauge steel; for locks and other hardware cutouts with 12 gauge steel; for surface applied hardware -.frith 12 gauge steel. 4. Provide 26 gauge galvanized cover boxes in back of all hardware cutouts. Punch frames for rubber or vinyl silencers; three on lock side of single doors and one for each leaf in heads of double door frames. ' 5. Provide jamb anchors for frames set in metal stud partitions, welded to back of frames, not less than 18 gauge, of design required for type of stud, 4 anchors for openings up to 7'-6" and one additional anchor for each additional 30" height or part thereof. Locate anchors immediately above each hinge ' reinforcing plate and one below the top hinge reinforcing on both sides. 6. Provide 16 gauge steel fixed floor clips fastened to bottom of each jamb member and drill for 3/8" ' anchor bolts for floor connection. 7. Provide temporary steel spreaders fastened across bottom of frames. Label each frame before shipping with metal or plastic tags to show their location, size door swing and other pertinent ' information. 2.04 SHOP PAINTING ' A. Clean ferrous metal and treat chemically to prepare for maximum paint adhesion. Apply coat of rust - inhibitive metal primer by spraying or dipping. Bake or oven -dry prime coat to secure hard, abrasion - resistant finish. Finish surfaces smooth and free from irregularities and rough spots. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer's ' data, and as herein specified. B. Leave shipping spreaders on frames until complete wall system surrounding the frame is rigidly secured ' to frame, floors and ceilings. Set bottom anchors of frame to floor with power -driven fasteners or expansion bolts (not lead shields). C. Hang doors in frames as scheduled. Welding of hinges to doors or frames will not be permitted. Follow 1 i Section 08.150 Page 4 recommendations of the manufacturer for installation of the hardware. Install hardware in location as provided by door manufacturer. D. Coat contact surfaces of any dissimilar metals with bituminous, base paint and let dry before installation. E. Install all surface mounted hardware taking care that all attachment devices are anchored in their reinforcement materials inside the door frames. F. After installation, adjust all hardware items for correct, easy and efficient operation. G. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames, within the following clearances: Jambs and Head: 3/32". Bottom at Threshold or -Carpet: Bottom: 3/8" where no threshold or carpet. H. Install hollow metal frames plumb and square, in correct location indicated on drawings and with a maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16 inch. Ensure frames are securely and rigidly anchored to adjacent construction. I. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust all operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove all smudge, dirt, oil, grease or adhered materials which might affect painting. Remove all excess materials and debris from Site. End of Section 0 LI 0 583/01 WOOD DOORS Section 08.210 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent and location of each type of wood door is shown on the Drawings and in schedules. B. The type of doors required include the following: 1. Solid core flush wood doors. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect wood doors during transit, handling and storage to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Package doors in heavy cartons and shrink wrap plastic with identifying marks; slit plastic wrap on site to permit ventilation, but do not remove from cartons until ready to install. C. Store doors upright with at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) between doors, in protected, dry area. D. The installer shall advise the Contractor of proper procedures required for protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of the work. E. Cut and trim openings through doors and panels as shown. Comply with the applicable requirements of NWMA 1.S.1 for the kind and quality of doors shown and specified. 1.04 RELATED WORK A. Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08.700 Finish Hardware. C. Section 09.900 Painting. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings indicating the location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and all other pertinent data. B. For information only, submit 2 copies of door manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of wood door required, including other data as may be required to show compliance with the specified requirements. Indicate by transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been transmitted to the. Installer. 1. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for openings, and similar components. C. Submit 2 copies of written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by the Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped -(bow, cup or twist) or ff 583/01 WOOD DOORS Section 08.210 Page 2 which show photographing of construction below in face veneers, as defined in NWMA Standard Door Guarantee, except the NWMA provision for refunding the price received by the door manufacturer for any defective door shall not apply. The guarantee shall also include finishing and reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. Guarantee shall be in effect during the following period of time after the date of acceptance. 1. For Solid Core Flush Interior Rated Doors: Five Years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The Maiman Company. B. Curtis Companies, Inc. C. Paine Door Company. D. Sun -Dor -Co. E. Weyerhauser Roddis Plywood Corporation. 2.02 VENEERS AND EDGES A. Doors scheduled for clear finish shall have plain sawn red oak veneers, with matching edges. 2.03 INTERIOR FLUSH DOORS A. Where interior flush doors are shown or scheduled, provide doors complying with applicable requirements of NWMA 1.S.1 and as herein specified. B. Quality Grade: All interior doors shall be 1-3/4" thick, AWI Quality Standards, section 1300, custom grade. C. Core type shall be solid wood particle board, or mineral with wood lock blocks, as required by manufacturer to comply with fire rating and guarantee period. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with requirements of AWI Quality Standards, section 1300, custom grade. B. Fabricate doors scheduled to be fire rated to UL labeling requirements. C. Prepare doors to receive hardware and weatherstripping. D. Make cut-outs and provide stops for glass, if required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging. I 583/01 WOOD DOORS Section 08.210 Page 3 B. Fit doors to frames and machine for hardware, to whatever extent not previously worked at the factory. C. Install wood door in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as shown. Adjust for proper fit and ' uniform clearance at each edge. D. Install wood doors plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16 inch. E. Install hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08.700. F. See painting sections of these specifications for requirements for finishing wood doors. Coordinate delivery and ' storage to comply with the requirements for sealing tops and bottoms of wood doors immediately upon delivery to project site. ' G. Fit wood doors accurately in their respective frames within the following clearances: 1. Jambs and head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum-' between door and frame. ' 2. Sills without thresholds: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum between door and top of finish floor. 3. Sills with thresholds: 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum between door and top of threshold. 4. Meeting stiles of pairs: 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum between doors. 5. Lock edge: Bevel 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm/50 mm). ' H. Seal the top and bottom of the doors with two (2) coats of clear varnish upon arrival on the site and after trimming. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN ' A. Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely as directed by the Architect. B. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation as directed by the Architect. ' C. Advise the Contractor of proper procedures required for protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of work. ' End of Section i 0 J ' 583/01 OVERHEAD DOORS Section 08.331 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General ' Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of overhead doors is shown on the Drawings and schedules. ' B. Furnish all accessories required for a complete and satisfactory installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit manufacturer's product literature, operating instructions and installation instructions. B. Submit data substantiating overhead doors meets the requirements of this section. ' C. Submit shop drawings detailing installation and sizing, including anchoring devices. Shop drawings shall detail and list all accessories to be furnished. Details shall include framing members, required clearances, anchors, and accessories. Include relationship of adjacent materials. ' HANDLING 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND A. Deliver materials to jobsite in their original, unopened packages with labels intact. Inspect materials for ' damage and advise manufacturer immediately of any unsatisfactory materials. B. Package door assemblies in individual corrugated cartons so no portion of the doors have contact with the outer ' shell of the container. Package and ship frames preassembled to the greatest possible extent. a. RELATED WORK ' A. Opening preparation, miscellaneous or structural metal work, access panels, finish or field painting, field electrical wiring, wire, conduit, fuses and disconnect switches are in the Scope of Work of other divisions or trades. 1.06 WARRANTY ' A. Provide three (3) copies of a written warranty signed by the Door Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to replace, at no cost to the Owner, any doors or components which fail in materials or workmanship within the warranty period. Failure of materials or workmanship includes: excessive deflection, faulty operation of doors, deterioration of finish and defects in hardware installation. The warranty period shall be ' one (1) year from the Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OVERHEAD DOORS A. Overhead Coiling Doors shall be equivalent to Model 625 series insulated Rolling Door manufactured by ' Overhead Door Corporation of Dallas, Texas. 7 583/01 OVERHEAD DOORS Section 08.331 Page 2 B. Salt profile shall be flat, 22 gauge, insulated, painted steel, color to be selected by Architect. C. Insulation will be a rigid, foamed -in-place, polyurethane core free of CFC's and HCFC's and will be fully encapsulated in nonpermeable materials to prevent loss of thermal efficiency over time. D. All doors will be constructed with an air infiltration rating of .08cfm per square foot of door at 15mph and .13cfm per square foot of door at 25mph. (ASTM -E-283-73) E. End stiles will be 16 gauge steel. F. Hinges and fixtures will be galvanized steel. Full floating ball bearing rollers will have hardened steel races. Roller sizes will be adequate for design requirements and limitations. G. Track is 2" standard, or 3" optional, and angle mounted. H. Lock will be interior mounted slide lock. - I. Weatherstrip between sections will be EPDM rubber tube seals fitted inside every joint. Bottom weatherstrip will be EPDM rubber bulb -type strip. J. Bottom bar shall be primed steel. K. Guides shall be primed steel. L. Rollers shall be of polyurethane. M. Operation shall be by electric motor. N. Lock shall be cylinder lock. O. Furnish to fit openings indicated on the Drawings and in schedules. P. Furnish complete with curtain, weatherseals, guides, brackets, barrel, counterbalance, hood and all accessories to provide a complete and satisfactory installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead doors by an authorized distributor in the location and condition shown on the Drawings in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Upon installation, doors shall be tested for proper operation. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove all debris, excess materials and tools resulting from the work of this section from the site. B. Clean doors prior to Owner's acceptance. End of Section I583/01 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08.410 Page 1 ' PART I GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this ' section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK I A. The extent of aluminum entrances and storefronts is shown on the Drawings, and is specified herein. FSI B. Glazing of aluminum entrances and storefronts shall be under Section 08.800 Glass and Glazing. C. Hardware shall be furnished under Section 08.700 Finish Hardware. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements for aluminum windows, and terminology and standards of performance and fabrication workmanship are those specified and recommended in ANSI A 134.1 (AAMA 302.8), and applicable general recommendations published by AAMA and AA. B. Provide aluminum doors and frames produced by a single firm, capable of showing prior successful production of units similar to those required. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and standard details for aluminum units, including fabrication, finishing, hardware and other components of the work. Include certified test laboratory reports as necessary to show compliance with requirements. B. Submit shop drawings including all elevations at '/a" scale, typical unit elevations at 3/a" scale and full size detail sections of every typical composite member. Show anchors, hardware, operators and other components not included in the manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details. C. Submit 3 copies of written warranty signed by the manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to replace aluminum units which fail in materials or workmanship within 3 years of date of acceptance. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include (but not limited to) excessive leakage or air infiltration, excessive deflections, faulty operations of sash, deterioration of finish or metal in excess of normal weathering, and defect in hardware, weather-stripping and other components of the work. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the job site in original protective packaging with manufacturer and product names -clearly indicated. B. Handle and sore products according to manufacturer's recommendations and in a manner to prevent damage, deterioration and contamination. C. Protect aluminum surfaces from contact with lime, mortar, cement, acids and other harmful substances as well as from damaged by careless handling of tools, machinery and materials. Section 08.410 Page 2 1.06 COORDINATION A. Examine substrate and condition which aluminum work is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of any detrimental conditions. Do not proceed with work until conditions are acceptable to installer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. The use of proprietary terms or numbers on Drawings or specified herein is to establish the type and quality of window system required for this project. Products or other established manufacturers will be acceptable if equal to quality appearance, weight and depth of sections, features and performance. B. Unless designated otherwise, all window materials are manufactured by Kawneer Company, Inc. of Niles, Michigan. 2.02 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM A. Aluminum Storefront Framing System shall be equivalent to Kawneer Trifab II 450 or 451 System, 1 3a" x 4 'h" or 2" x 4'/2". B. Aluminum finish for frames installed in exterior walls shall be selected by the Architect. C. Aluminum finish for frames installed on the interior of the building shall be mill finish. D. Furnish all parts and accessories required for a complete and satisfactory installation. E. Extrusions shall be 6063-T5 alloy and temper (ASTM B21 allot G.S. 10A -T5). Fasteners, where exposed, shall be slum, stainless steel or zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A 164. Perimeter anchors shall be aluminum or steel, provided the steel is properly isolated from the aluminum. F. Steel Reinforcement and Brackets shall be manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated stainless steel units, of shapes, plates or bars. G. For required anchorage into concrete or masonry work, furnish inserts of stainless steel. H. Expansion Anchor Devices shall be stainless steel expansion bolt anchors. 2.03 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS A. Flush Aluminum Doors shall be equivalent to Flushline series manufactured by Kawneer, 1 3/a inch thick, size as shown on Drawings. B. Extrusions shall be 6063-T5 alloy and temper (ASTM B21 allot G.S. 10A -T5). Fasteners, where exposed, shall be slum, stainless steel or zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A 164. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Vertical and horizontal framing members shall have a nominal face dimension of 1 '/2". Overall depth shall be 4". ' 583/01 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08.410 Page 3 B. Complete the cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of all metal work prior to cleaning, finishing, treatment and application of coatings. C. Weld by methods recommended by the manufacturer and AWS to avoid discoloration at welds. Grind exposed ' welds smooth and restore finish. Remove arises from cut edges and ease edges and corners to a radius of approximately 1/64". ' D. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible, except as otherwise shown. E. Fit and assemble all the work at the shop to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble only as required for ' shipment and erection. Maintain true continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joints, with hairline fit of contacting members. F. Reinforce the work as necessary for performance requirements, and for support to the system. Separate ' dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or performed separators which will prevent corrosion. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for the installation of windows units and other components of the work. B. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Anchor securely in place. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources or corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. ' C. Set sill members and other member in a bed of compound as shown, or with joint fillers or gaskets as shown, to provide weathertight construction. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of the work. ' 3.02 DOORS AND HARDWARE A. Accurately drill and cut for entrance door hardware and finish hardware. Reinforce frames, door stiles and rails ' to receive finish hardware according to the door manufacturer's recommendations. B. Erect door frames installing hardware according to the manufacturer's installations. Provide doors which move ' smooth throughout their full swing and close on frame with uniform contact. Check and adjust weather- stripping to provide seal at door edges. ' C. Adjust closers after installation of glass for normal operation with check and back -check, easing door to its closed and open positions. D. Thresholds shall be in full bed of sealant. Cut off excessive sealant and removes smears from finished work. ' E. Tight Metal Joints to be sealed with sealant. ' 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adjust entrances for proper operation and appearance. I T 583/01 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08.410 Page 4 B. Clean spoiled surfaces according to manufacturer's recommendations and leave ready for Owner's final acceptance. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. After installation, the General Contractor shall adequately protect exposed portions of aluminum surfaces from damage by grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement or other contaminants. B. The General Contractor shall be responsible for final cleaning. End of Section 08.700. Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the Drawings ' and/or specified herein, including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for their completion. Any item of finish hardware not specifically mentioned, but which is necessary for proper completion of the work shown on the Drawings shall be provided with additional cost to the Owner. Any ' omission shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to bid opening; otherwise the Drawings and Specifications shah be considered complete. ' B. The Contractor shall furnish cylinders and keying for each lockset to conform to the Owner's existing system. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. ' B. Section 08.210 Wood Doors. 1.04 REFERENCES ' A. ANSI A115.1 - Door and Frame Preparation for Mortise Door Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. B. ANSI Al 15.2 - Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. ' C. ANSI A115.4 - Door and Frame Preparation for Lever Extension Flush Bolts. D. ANSI A115.5 - Frame Preparation for 181 & 190 Series Deadlock Strikes. ' Offset Hung, Single Acting. E. ANSI A115.9 - Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, ' F. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges. G. ANSI A156.2 - Locks and Lock Trim. ' H. ANSI A156.3 - Exit Devices. I. ANSI A156.4 - Door Controls (Closers). J. ANSI A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim. ' K. ANSI A156.7 - Template Hinges. ' 1.05 SUBMITTALS Section 08.700 Page 2 A. As soon as practicable and not later than 10 days after award of General Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval, copies of the finish hardware schedule complete with all details and a sample of each individual item as may be requested. The General Contractor shall not award contract for finish hardware until samples and schedules have been approved by the Architect. B. Finish Hardware Schedule shall be a complete detailed list of hardware required to meet requirements of the drawings and specifications. C. Provide the Architect with manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for proper maintenance of hardware. D. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The furnishing of finish hardware shall be subcontracted only to recognized and experienced supplier and who has employed an experienced hardware consultant who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work for project hardware consultation to the Owner, Architect and Contractor. 1.08 UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES REQUIREMENTS A. All hardware for openings requiring UL label shall be furnished and installed in strict accordance with the requirements of Underwriter's Laboratories. 1.08 TEMPLATES A. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames, and other work to be factory -prepared for the installation of hardware. Check the shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use of doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information in the contract documents. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the times and to the locations (shop or field) for installation, as directed by the Contractor. 1.10 SECURITY A. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. 1.11 QUANTITIES A. Contractor shall verify the number of doors and other parts requiring hardware listed under an item and make i I P, I C �1 Section 08.700 Page 3 his own quantities in making his quotation, as he will be required to furnish hardware in accordance with the actual requirements of the Drawings. In case of any omission or error in the hardware as scheduled, furnish hardware identical to that required for similar openings, as approved by the Architect. 1.12 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The Hardware Schedule is not complete with respect to the thickness of doors, hand and backset of hardware items, method of fastening and other detail requirements. B. Thoroughly check the Drawings and Door Schedules and provide all required hardware for all openings. 1.13 KEYING A. All locksets shall be keyed by the Contractor to the existing keyway system. B. Provide 4 keys to each lockset installed in this Contract. C. All keys shall be nickel silver. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturer's is acceptable, provided it complies with the Contract Documents. 1. LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS Sargent 2. HINGES Roton 3. CLOSERS Sargent LCN 4. PLATES, STOPS AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS Triangle Brass, Pemko, MAG 2.02 HARDWARE A. Provide items as listed in schedule at end of this section, complete to function as intended. 2.03 CLOSERS A. All closers shall be parallel arm mount. 583/01 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. B. Adjust and check each operating items of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite -type if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the appii.ation made. C. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and relubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. D. If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3.5 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. E. The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall be as follows: 1. Fire doors shall have a minimum opening force allowable by the appropriate administrative authority. 2. Other Doors: a. exterior hinged doors: 8.5 lbf b. interior hinged doors: 51bf C. sliding or folding doors: 5 lbf 3. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that may hold the door in a closed position. 4. Forces for pushing or pulling doors open are measured with a push-pull gauge under the following conditions: a. Hinged Doors: Force applied perpendicular to the door opener or 30 in (760 mm) from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: Force applied parallel to the door at the door pull or latch. c. Application of Force: Apply force gradually so that the applied force does not exceed the resistance of the door. Air -pressure differentials may require a modification of this specification in order to meet the functional intent. 0 583/01 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 5 1 F. Door closers shall be mounted parallel arm unless specifically approved otherwise by the Architect. ' G. Unless directed otherwise, all hardware shall be mounted at heights as recommended by the hardware industry. The hardware schedule submitted to the Architect shall slow proposed mounting heights or locations of each hardware item. 3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all required hardware although not specifically mentioned; trim such openings with hardware of equal ' quality and design to that specified for similar openings. No claims for extras will be allowed for any services or materials which, in the Architect's opinion, should have been foreseen by the Contractor and included in the ' Proposal. B. Where the exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to the finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having as nearly as practicable the same operation and quality as the ' types specified. C. Hardware supplier shall make an inspection of each items, and after completion, notify the Contractor, in writing, with a copy to the Architect, of any hardware that has been improperly installed, it being understood ' that the Contractor is entirely responsible for satisfactory performance of the completed work. ' 3.03 FASTENINGS A. Furnish hardware complete with all necessary screws, through -bolts and other fastenings of suitable type and size to assure a permanent concealed attachment and of finish to harmonize with the hardware. ' B. Provide concealed fastenings wherever possible. Where exposed, use countersunk Phillips oval -head type screws, (flat head for hinges) and match finish of hardware being attached. Do no attach hardware to metal frames with self -tapping or sheet metal screws. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF WEATHERSTRIPPING ' A. All weatherstripping shall be installed by experienced mechanics in accordance with methods recommended by manufacturer. B. All weatherstripping shall be continuous and not pieced in any run. Fasten all materials under this heading ' with screws or other fasteners to match adjacent background finish. ' C. Adjust weatherstripping so that installation will be permanently weathertight, permitting no infiltration of air or dust when doors are in a closed position. Leave all weatherstripping in perfect working order upon completion. Set threshold units level and accurately aligned with the frames and doors, and at the proper elevations for door operation. Shim, if necessary, for full continuous support of threshold at each edge and ' intermediate legs, if any. Use non -corrosive shims of metal or plastic set in adhesive or otherwise anchored against dislocation from impact forces of traffic upon the threshold. D. Notch thresholds and saddles at all jambs to ensure full width opening in one piece. Set in a bed of sealant as specified in Section 07.900 to completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture from every source. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant. 0 583/01 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 6 3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HDWE SET #1 DOORS: #101, 109 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 EACH HINGES T4A3786 5 X 4 lh 652 MCK 1 EACH EXIT 8813 ETL 630 SGT 1 EACH CLOSER EN351-CPSH X TB 689 SGT 1 EACH K.P. 10" X 2" LDW 630 RWD 1 EACH THRESHOLD 170A 719 PMKO 1 EACH DOOR BOTTOM 18061 CP 719 PMKO 1 SET W/STRIPPING 45061 CP 719 PMKO HIDWE SET #2 DOOR: #102 DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES T4A3786 5 X 4 lh 652 MCK 1 LOCK 8205 LW1L 630 SGT 1 STOP 409 630 RWD 3 SILENCERS 1229A TRCO HDWE SET#3 DOORS: #103, 104, 106, 107, 108 (EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BLDG #101, 102) EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 EACH HINGES T4A3786 5 X 4 1/2 652 MCK 1 EACH LOCK 8225 LW11, 630 SGT 1 EACH CLOSER EN 351-CPSH X TB 689 SGT 1 EACH K.P. 10" X 2" LDW 630 RWD 1 EACH THRESHOLD 170A 719 PMKO 1 EACH D/B 18061 CP 719 PMKO 1 SET W/STRIPPING 45061 CP 719 PMKO HDWE SET #4 DOOR: #105 DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES T4A3786 5 X 4 1h 652 MCK 1 LOCK 8265 LW 1 L 630 SGT 1 CLOSER EN 351-CPSH X TB 689 SGT 1 K.P. 10" X 2" LDW 630 RWD 1 THRESHOLD 170A 719 PMKO I D/B 18061 CP 719 PMKO 1 SET W/STRIPPING 45061 CP 719 PMKO HDWE SET #5 DOOR: #110 DOOR TO HAVE: 1 LOCK 8204 LW1L BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER HDWE SET #6 DOORS: #111, 112 ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER Note: Coordinate Keying with the Owner. End of Section Section 0$ 630 SGT i2e 7 - Section C Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. 1.04 A. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Glass and glazing for wood doors and hollow metal frames. RELATED WORK Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. Section 08.210 Wood Doors. WARRANTY Provide a written ten year warranty on new materials and installation. Provide documentation that glass meets these specifications. .a 1all U P}MM},,��{{) �'ry� VI b i r17ioliji.kini�toln only, stu it c tes of ut c rer c o an satoristi actions for achy e r , of glass required. Include test data substantiating that glass complies with specified requirements. Indicate that Glazier has received a copy of handling and glazing instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The following manufacturers produce glass complying with the requirements of this section: ' 1. ASG Industries, Inc. 2. CE Glass Division of Combustion Engineering, Inc. ' 3. PPG Industries, Inc. 4. Libbey Owens Ford B. Mirrors shall be a minimum '/a inch thick polished plate glass with an applied white polyvinyl safety backing, polished edges, with a continuous j -mold polished aluminum trim around the perimeter, meeting ANSI 297.1, Category 1 ASTM D-1709. Provide continuous clips for secure attachment to substrates. Provide sizes and quantities indicated on the drawings. ' 2.02 GLASS ' A. Where noted on the Drawings, glass shall be 1/4 inch thick clear polished plate glass, tempered where required by code. ' 2.03 GLAZING MATERIALS 583/01 GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08.800 Page 2 A. Provide type and hardness of materials as recommended by the manufacturer for the required application and condition of installation in each case. Provide only compounds which are known (proven) to be fully compatible with surfaces contacted. B. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. C. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Protect glass from edge damage at all times during handling, installation and operation of the building. B. Glazing channels are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable tolerances. The Glazier is responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and necessary dimensions established. C. The Glazier must examine the framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing removable stop design, and the conditions under which the glazing is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Glazier. D. Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and .except where manufacturer's technical representatives direct otherwise. E. Comply with "Glazing Manual" by Flat Glass Marketing Association, except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by manufacturer of the glass and glazing materials. F. Clean the glazing channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coating which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. G. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer. H. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and eliminate any which have observable edge damage or face imperfections. I. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from the glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of the channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. J. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discoloration. K. Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. L. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in any other way during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. M. Maintain glass in a reasonable clean condition during construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive 583/01 GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08.800 Page 3 action and will not contribute (by wash -off) to the deterioration of glazing materials and other surfaces. N. All exterior glazing shall be installed watertight. O. Install mirrors plumb, square, level and true with wall or other substrates. 3.02 CLEANING A. After installation, mark clear glass with "X" by using tape or removable paste. B. Immediately remove droppings from finished surfaces. Remove labels after work is completed. C. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to Owner's acceptance of the Work in each area. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations for all cleaning materials and procedures. End of Section ' 583/01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS Section 09.260 `Page 1 ' PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Metal framing and accessories required for gypsum board. ' B. Gypsum board. ' C. Batt type insulation in interior walls. D. Taped and sanded joint treatment. --- 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 06.100 Carpentry Work. ' B. Section 09.900 Painting. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform gypsum wallboard systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C754 unless otherwise specified in this section. ' 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASTM C754: Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing ' Board, or Water -Resistance Backing Board. 1.06 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit certification and test results that clearly states and indicates that each and every individual element or component of fire rated drywall system partitions is approved and appropriately rated for the specific required rated assembly in which it is to be used, and that the use of such individual element or component would in no ' way jeopardize the required rating of the entire assembly. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE ' A. Deliver materials to the job site in their original unopened packages, containers, and bundles bearing the manufacturer's name and brand name. ' B. Store material in an enclosed space protected from damage and exposure to the elements. Remove damaged material from the premises. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS ' A. Provide metal framing materials in accordance with ASTM C 645-81, hot dipped galvanized. 583/01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS Section 09.260 Page 2 B. Studs: Screw-type Cee -shaped standard 25 gauge, or as required for wall heights shown. C. Runners: Galvanized, channel type, screw type, width as required by stud width, same gauge as stud. D. Fasteners and Anchorages: Self -tapping, self -drilling, as recommended by drywall manufacturer. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable, provided it complies with the Contract Documents. 1. DRYWALL SYSTEMS The Celotex Corporation The Flintkote Company Georgia-Pacific Corporation Kaiser Gypsum National Gypsum Company United States Gypsum Company B. Drywall systems for fire rated partitions, if required, shall be constructed using either, all component parts of one manufacturer or, individually approved and rated components which are totally compatible with the entire required rated assembly and which would in no way jeopardize the rating of the entire assembly. Drywall system shall meet test requirements approved by the Local Building Officials. All exit corridor walls shall be of one hour fire rated construction. C. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36, Type "X", tapered edge, 5/8 inch thick, fire rated at fire rated assemblies, unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Lathing Channels: 16 gauge cold rolled steel, black asphaltum painted, 3/4" and 1 '/z". B. Screws: Self -drilling, self -tapping, type as recommended by the Drywall Manufacturer. C. Nails: ASTM C380, annular ring type. D. Corner Bead: Galvanized steel, perforated flange, USG Dur -A -Bead. E. Edging and Casing: Galvanized steel for painting. USG 200B, size as required for gypsum wallboard thickness. F. Control Joint Casing: USG #093. G. Adhesive: As recommended by wallboard manufacturer. ASTM C475. H. Sealant: USG Acoustical Sealant. I. Wire: Galvanized, 9 -gauge hanger wire, 16 -gauge tie wire. J. Reinforcing tape, Joint Compound, Water, Fasteners: As recommended by Manufacturer. K. Batt type insulation shall be unfaced fiberglass sound attenuation batt insulation as manufactured by CertainTeed, thickness and R values as noted on drawings. ' 583/01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS Section 09.260 Page 3 L. Sound Control Batts: Equivalent to CertainTeed Fiber Glass Sound Control Batts, unfaced, 3-1/2 inches thick, ' or as indicated on the Drawings. M. Furring Channels: USG hat -shaped 25 ga. metal furring channels. ' PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 DRYWALL PREPARATION A. Examine spaces and correct defects that could interfere with proper installation. Starting work shall be construed as acceptance of spaces. ' B. Maintain in cold weather uniform controlled range temperature between 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. during the installation. Provide adequate ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture. ' C. Install gypsum drywall systems in accordance with the Gypsum Drywall Contractors International, Underwriters Laboratory and the manufacturer of the Drywall material. ' 3.02 METAL STUD FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754. ' B. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. ' C. Floor and Ceiling Runner Tracks: Align runner tracks to the partition layout at both floor and ceiling. Secure runner tracks as recommended by the stud manufacturer for the floor and ceiling construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o.c. spacing for nail or power -driven fasteners, nor 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. ' Provide at all corners and ends of runner tracks. D. Use full length studs between runner tracks wherever possible. If necessary, splice studs by nesting with a minimum lap or 8" and fasten laps with 2 screws through each flange. Friction fit studs to runner tracks by ' positioning and rotating into place. Provide positive attachment to runner tracks for studs located at partition corners and intersections, and adjacent to openings, using 3/8" self -tapping screws or stud clinching tool on both flanges of studs. ' E. Size and Spacing: Use studs of the sizes shown and install at the spacing shown. Provide 16" o.c. spacing unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. ' F. Provide additional studs to support inside corners at partition intersections and corners, and to support outside corners, terminations of partitions and both sides of control joints (if any). G. Provide rough framing at openings consisting of double full-length studs adjacent to jambs and horizontal ' header and sill tracks. Cut horizontal tracks to length and split flanges and bend webs at ends for flange overlap and screw to jamb studs. Install cut -to -length, intermediate studs between jamb studs at head and sill sections, at same spacing as full-length studs. ' H. At door frames, provide rough framing as required for door frame dimensions and tolerances. I. Tops of all partitions not continuing to roof deck shall be solidly braced to overhead or adjacent construction ' by means of steel channels (1 ''/z" minimum) or other means approved by Architect. Wood construction shall not be used. ' J. Provide 2 x 6 fire retardant treated wood blocking in drywall where toilet accessories or other items are scheduled to be attached. Verify the heights of the blocking with the requirements of the Drawings and the 583/01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS Section 09.260 Page 4 manufacturer of the item to be attached. All wood blocking shall be fire -retardant treated wood in compliance with Uniform Building Code Standard Number 42-1. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A. Comply with the requirements recommended by the manufacturer. The term "Manufacturer" defines the gypsum wallboard manufacturer unless otherwise noted. Comply with all requirements for specified fire -resistance ratings. B. Provide drywall of the thickness shown on the Drawings. C. Provide additional framing and blocking as required to support gypsum board at openings and cutouts, and to support built-in anchorage and attachment devices for other work. D. Form control joints in drywall construction where shown. All l continuous opening between edges of adjacent drywall board to all for insertion of control joint trim accessory. E. Partition/Walls: apply gypsum board vertically or horizontally at Contractor's option, with vertical joints located over supports, but offset at least one stud on opposite faces of partition/walls. Stagger joints of adjacent sheets of gypsum boards if applied horizontally. F. Fasten gypsum wallboard with screws. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for fastening, but do not exceed 12" o.c. spacing. G. Caulk sides and backs of electrical boxes to completely seal openings and joints. H. Apply wallboard to ceilings before applying to vertical surfaces. Install wallboard to ceilings with long edge perpendicular to supports using longest pieces practicable. Stagger end joints and provide support for all edges. Apply sealant at joint between edge of wallboard at floor and at ceiling. I. Fit wallboard snugly into steel door frames. Cut wallboard neatly to fit around all outlets and switch boxes. Install metal edge trim along top edge of all wallboard at ceiling and wherever wallboard edge is exposed, or abuts another material. Install corner bead at all exterior comers. J. Use moisture resistant gypsum wallboard in all toilet rooms. K. Apply second layer of gypsum board sheets, if required, perpendicular to base layer. 3.04 CEILING INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install the suspension system per the recommendation of ASTM C636. Deflection of any component must not exceed 1/360 of the span. B. Suspend main beams spaced 4'-0" on center from structure with wire hangers spaced 4'-0" on center. Install main beams level within 1/8 inch in 12 feet with hanger wire taut and tightly wrapped to prevent vertical movement or rotation. Do not make local kinks or bends in hanger wires as a means of leveling. C. Install cross tees at right angles to main beams, space at T-0" on center and join to main beams with positive interlock. Install cross tees to within 1/32 inch of their required location and within 0.015 inch of the same horizontal plane as main beam, and never below continuous member. D. Lay ends of main beams and cross tees on angle moldings at vertical surfaces. Provide additional hanger wires at each comer of recessed light troffers and other concentrated load conditions to prevent deflection. E. Install cross tees at right angles to beams and cross tees to support ends of recessed light fixtures, diffusers or ' 583/01 Li Y YJ UM W A1.LJJUAIVJ 3 11,-3 1 DIV13 Section 0.260 Page 5 ' grilles. 3.05 CONTROL JOINTS t A. Locate control joints as indicated but not to exceed 50'-0" in either direction for ceilings and not to exceed 30'-0" on center for partitions. Locate control joints where wallboard abuts any dissimilar wall or ceiling assembly and where wallboard construction changes within the same plane. ' B. Install control joint casing where control joint occurs in continuous wall surface. Make joint 1/4" wide with supports noncontinuous over joint. Install metal edging where wallboard abuts any structural element or dissimilar material. Make joint 1/8" wide and fill with sealant. ' 3.06 DRYWALL FINISHING ' A. Do not install joint treatment compounds unless installation areas comply with minimum temperature and ventilation requirements recommended by the manufacturer and conditions are acceptable to the Installer. B. Finish exposed drywall surfaces with joints, corners and exposed edges reinforced or trimmed as specified, and ' with all joints, fastener heads, trim necessary flanges and surface defects filled with joint compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for a smooth, flush surface. Drywall finishing work will not be considered acceptable if corners or edges do not form true, level or plumb lines, or if joints fastener heads, and angles. Set tape in joint compound then apply skim coat over tape in one application. E te a D. Outside corners and joints shall be floated a minimum of 18 inches in each direction from the corner or joint to t provide a level drywall surface which completely masks the comers and joints. E. Where open spaces of more than 1/16" width occur between abutting drywall units, (except at control joints), prefill joints with joint compound and allow prefill to dry before application of joint tape. F. Reinforce external corners of drywall work with specified type of comer bead. G. Securely fasten metal corner beads as recommended by the manufacturer. Do not use fastens which cannot be fully concealed by joint compound fill applied over flanges. H. Provide specified type of metal casing bead trim. Install in single unjointed lengths unless run exceeds longest available stock length. Miter corners of semi -finishing type trim. I. Use only compatible compounds from one manufacturer. After mixing, do not use joint compounds if recommended pot -life time has expired. ' 3.07 SOUND CONTROL BATTS A. Install sound control batts full thickness, tightly butted, in drywall construction where noted on the Drawings. ' Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.08 STC RATINGS A. Provide construction in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations to meet the required STC rating for the walls noted on the Drawings. 583/01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS Section 09.260 Page 6 B. Any completed wall system which does not pass a sound transmission test for the required STC rating shall be reconstructed under this section of the work to meet the required rating at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.09 CLEANING AND PATCHING A. Clean exposed surfaces of wallboard of all soil and stains that would affect finish. Repair or remove and replace defective work. Remove excess materials and debris from Site. End of Section ' 583/01 AUUUN HUAL UhIL11NUb Section 09.510 Page 1 I PART 1 GENERAL ID. Warranty: 1. The Contractor shall furnish a written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from defects of ' materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the Date of Substantial Completion, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the Warranty. 2. The following shall be adjudged as defective work: Loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping, ' cracking, settling, chipping, spotting, and loss of acoustical properties of materials. 3. Furnish three copies of the Manufacturer's warranty for a period of two (2) years from the Date of Substantial Completion. ' 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontract the acoustic ceiling and related work to an Installer acceptable to the manufacturer of primary ' acoustic materials. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. OF WORK 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish materials, labor and equipment, as required by the Contract Documents, to provide and install acoustical ' ceilings. 1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Acoustical Materials Association: ' 1. "Specifications for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceiling Suspension Systems." 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Samples: 1. 12 inch x 12 inch sample of each type of acoustical unit. ' 2. 12 inch samples of suspension system including: a. Main beam b. Cross tee connection ' c. Angle moldings B. Product Data: ' 1. Manufacturer's data showing compliance with the Contract Documents. C. Maintenance Instructions: ' 1. Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning and refinishing each type acoustical unit. 2. Include precautions against materials and methods detrimental to finishes and acoustical efficiency. ID. Warranty: 1. The Contractor shall furnish a written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from defects of ' materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the Date of Substantial Completion, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the Warranty. 2. The following shall be adjudged as defective work: Loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping, ' cracking, settling, chipping, spotting, and loss of acoustical properties of materials. 3. Furnish three copies of the Manufacturer's warranty for a period of two (2) years from the Date of Substantial Completion. ' 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontract the acoustic ceiling and related work to an Installer acceptable to the manufacturer of primary ' acoustic materials. Section 09.5 10 Page 2 B. Subcontract the installing of suspended acoustic ceiling materials to the Installer of the ceiling suspension systems for single responsibility. C. The Installer must examine the condition under which acoustic ceiling work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the acoustic ceiling work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. D. Deliver acoustic ceiling materials to the job site in original, unopened packages, bearing manufacturer's name and label identifying each type of acoustic unit. E. Coordinate layout with other work which penetrated or is supported by ceiling suspension system. F. Comply with acoustic material manufacturer's recommendations for storage of units to be used in the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.03 MATERIALS A. Exposed suspension grid system for acoustical panels: 1. Suspension system shall be equivalent to USG Centricitee (DX) 15/16" face, white, 2'x2' grid, non fire rated. B. Wire Hangers: 1. Not less than 12 gauge (0. 106" diameter), galvanized carbon steel wire per ASTM A 641. 2. Where hanger wires cannot be directly wire -tied to structural or intermediate framing members, provide attachment devices designed for the type of construction used in the work and with a carrying capacity of not less than 3 times the design loads involved. C. Acoustical Panels: 1. Acoustical Panels shall be equivalent to USG Sandrift # 808, 2'x2'x3/4" (SL), white, non fire rated. D. Retention Clips as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION . A. Examine spaces and correct defects that could interfere with proper installation. Installed ceiling system shall meet requirements of "Specifications for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceiling Suspension System," published by the Acoustical Materials Association. B. Install acoustical treatment after moist materials have been installed. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating the interior conditions which will exist when the building is occupied but not less than 50 degrees or more than 85 degrees F. before, during and after installation. C. Prior to start of acoustic ceiling work, consult other trades and contractors involved to determine areas of potential interference. Do not start installation of suspension systems until interferences have been resolved. 3.02 LAYOUT ' 583/01 AUUUJiIIUAL k-hIL11NVJ Section 09.310 Page 3 A. The acoustical panels shall be installed as shown on the Reflected Ceiling Plans on the Drawings. Unless shown ' otherwise on the Reflected Ceiling Plans, in general, the acoustical panels shall be symmetrical about the center lines of the room in both directions and edge panels on opposite sides of each room shall be equal in width. ' 3.03 SUSPENSION A. Suspension Systems: "Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems 1. Suspension system shall comply with ASTM C 635, for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings." Suspension system shall be classified "intermediate" duty. ' B. Molding: 1. Install angle molding around perimeter of room at proper level. 2. Miter angle molding at exterior corners; 3. Cut flanges and bend web at interior corners; 4. Exposed leg shall be in same plane as bottom flange of main beam and cross tees. ' C. Hangers: 1. Hang main beams at 4 feet on centers with hangers spaced at 4 feet on centers. ' 2. Wrap hangers around beams or joists and twist at least 3 full turns. 3. Where hanger wires cannot be wrapped around structural members, provide: a. Attachment devices for the type of construction (Vertical screws up into wood are not acceptable.) ' b. With a carrying capacity of at least 5 times the design loads. 4. Space hangers not more than 6 inches from each end. 5. Provide additional hangers for support of other items to be supported by the suspension system, including all light fixtures. 6. Hangers shall be plumb: a. If splayed hangers cannot be avoided; ' b. Provide counter splay, bracing or other suitable offsetting members. 7. Hang beams level: a. Do not make kinks or bends in hanger wires to level. 8. Tightly wrap beams to prevent vertical movement or rotation. ' a. Twist wires at least 3 full turns. D. Grid: 1. Install cross beams at right angles to main beams. 2. Space 2 feet on centers. 3. Join beams to positive interlock. ' a. Within 1/32 inch of required location. b. Within 0.015 (1/64) inch of horizontal plane. c. Never below a continuous member. ' 3.04 ACOUSTICAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General ' 1. Position acoustical units on flanges of inverted tees. 2. Cut and fit acoustical units closely and accurately around recessed light fixtures, grilles or other ceiling ' items. 3. Throw away and replace units that are damaged. 583/01 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09.510 Page 4 B. Shall be by an applicator who is an authorized representative of the manufacturer of the units. C. Do not install acoustic ceiling until installation areas meet the following criteria. Exterior openings have been closed and roofs are weathertight. Concrete, terrazzo, plastering and painting work has dried out. Mechanical, electrical and other work above ceilings have been completed. Wet work has been installed and completed. Temperature and relative humidity have reached levels which comply with acoustic material manufacturer's recommendations for the units to be used in the work and are acceptable to the Installer. D. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and other recommendations applicable to the work. E. All acoustical unit surfaces shall be true and free from irregularities; joints shall be straight and continuous. All units at walls, columns and openings shall be scribed accurately. 3.05 RETENTION CLIPS A. Provide and install retention clips at all vestibules at all exterior doorways to hold the panels in place during wind and pressure change conditions. 3.06 FURRING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ITEMS A. All Mechanical and Electrical items occurring immediately below acoustical ceilings: 1. Shall be furred in with the acoustical ceiling materials whether shown on the Drawings or not. 2. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical drawings for a complete description of items. 3.07 COOPERATION A. This Contractor shall consult and cooperate with trades whose work precedes and follows ceiling installation, to permit orderly procedure in executing work under this Contract. Installation of tile shall not start until foundation work to receive the tile has been completed and inspected, and the Architect's approval has been obtained to proceed. The Contractor shall give the Architect advance notices for inspection. 3.08 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Touch-up or replace damaged ceiling grids'. B. Replace damaged and stained acoustical panels. C. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage. D. Remove all debris, tools and extra material resulting from the work of this Section from the site. End of Section n L� C 0 C 583/01 RESILIENT FLOORING Section 09.650 Page ,1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Resilient flooring, related materials and accessories generally consist of the following: 1. Vinyl Composition Tile. 2. Resilient Base. 3. Reducer Strips and Edge Moldings. B. The work includes preparing all substrate surfaces for the complete and satisfactory installation of resilient flooring. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. For information only submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, product data, and installation instructions for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. Indicate by transmittal that a copy of each installation instruction has been distributed to the Installer. B. Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's written instructions for recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient material. C. Submit two complete sets of color samples for vinyl composition tile, resilient base, resilient stair treads, and reducer strips and edge moldings for selections by the Architect. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Installer must thoroughly examine the substrate and the conditions under which resilient flooring is to be ' performed. Notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. ' B. Surfaces shall be smooth, level and at required finished elevations and without more than 1/8" in 10'-0" variation. Cracks, holes, seams or low spots shall be filled with approved patch or filler material. 1.05 WARRANTY ' A. The resilient flooring supplier and installer shall warrant the work of this section against defects in materials or workmanship for a one year period beginning on the Date of Substantial Completion. ' B. Submit the manufacturer's warranty for each product used in this specifications section. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS IA. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) shall be equivalent to Armstrong Imperial Texture Vinyl Composition Tile as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries of Parsippany, N.J. Tile shall be 1/8 inch 583/01 RESILIENT FLOORING Section 09.650 Page 2 gauge, 12 x 12" size. Color to be selected by Architect. B. Resilient Cover Base 2 (RB) shall be equivalent to Armstrong 4" Cove Type as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries of Parsippany, N.J., 1/8" thick, 4" high, with extended toe cove type, furnished in 120" continuous rolls. The color is to be selected by Architect. C. Reducer Strips and Edge Moldings shall be equivalent to items as manufactured by Mercer Plastics Company, Inc., in shapes and sizes as recommended by the manufacturer and as required for the complete and satisfactory installation of all new resilient flooring. Color(s) to be selected by the Architect. D. Adhesives shall be waterproof, stabilized type, as recommended by the manufacturer. Emulsions and other non - waterproof type adhesives are not acceptable. E. Concrete Slab Primer shall be non -staining, as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Prior to laying flooring or other resilient materials, float out imperfections in the subfloor, broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered and inspect subfloor. Start of flooring installation will indicate acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed work. Remove existing finish on concrete floor as required for a permanent and satisfactory installation. B. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. C. Continuously heat areas to receive flooring to 70 degrees F. for at least 48 hours prior to installation, when project conditions are such that heating is required to raise the temperature to 70 degrees F. Maintain 70 degrees F. temperature continuously during and after installation as recommended by manufacturer, but for not less than 48 hours. D. Install flooring and other resilient items after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by manufacturer. E. Place resilient materials with adhesive cement in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings and edgings. Scribe as necessary around obstructions and to produce neat joints, laid tight, even and straight. Extend into toe spaces, door reveals and into closets and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non -permanent marking device. G. Install flooring around covers for floor type telephone and electrical outlets and other such items as occur within finished floor areas. Maintain overall flow of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed around covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers. H. Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks or other surface imperfections. I. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of the area be of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 3" at perimeters. 1 M. ' 3.02 ' 3.03 A. Section 09.650 Paae 3 Lay tile square to wall axis, unless otherwise shown. Match tile for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. Cut tile neatly to and around all appurtenances. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tile are not acceptable. Lay VCT with in directional pattern as directed by the Architect. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Bond tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. At base installations on masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular surfaces, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. CLEANING AND PROTECTION. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed materials from damage with suitable protective covering. FINISHING After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. ADD1V wax and buff, with type of wax, number of coats (no less than two), and buffing procedures in l� } �{ End of Section Ll C' 0 C 583/01 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 1 1 GENERAL PART ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in ' this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of painting work is shown on the Drawings and schedules, and as herein specified. B. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems, materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and filler and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. C. Paint all exposed surfaces whether or not colors are denoted in schedules, except where the natural finish of the material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, the Superintendent of Schools will select from standard colors available for the materials ' systems specified. D. The following categories of work are not included as part of the field -applied finish work, or are included in other sections of these specifications: ' 1. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under the various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, and similar items. ' 2. Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory -finishing or Installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) prefinished partition systems, acoustic materials, ' architectural woodwork and casework, finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets, doors and equipment. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed ' areas and generally inaccessible areas. 4. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar tfinished materials will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Do not paint over any code -required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. ' E. The required painting on the tennis court surface is specified in section 02.440. ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application instructions for each materials proposed for use. Transmit a copy of each ' manufacturer's instructions to the paint applicator. B. Submit samples for Superintendent of Schools' review of color and texture only. compliance with all Section 09.900 Page 2 other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Provide a listing of the material and application for each coat of each finish sample. 1. On 12" x 12" hardboard, provide two samples of each color and material with texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit each sample as requested until acceptable sheen, color and texture is achieved. C. Submit two sets of Architectural Color samples with paint chips suitable for mounting on color boards for the Superintendent of Schools' use. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable. 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacturer. 4. Manufacturer's name. 5. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Color name and number. B. Store materials and equipment in a single lockable area of project site. Provide adequate means to protect floors and adjacent surfaces of this area from damage. C. Store clean rags, paint and solvents in closed metal containers located in designated area. Dispose of soiled rags daily. D. Comply with applicable health and fire regulations. 1.05 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds and stages necessary to complete work. B. Protect completed finish and painted work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work. 1.06 EXTRA PAINT A. Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Owner one (1) gallon of each color of latex and enamel paint used. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. This contractor shall guarantee all work performed under this contract for a period of one (1) year from the Date of Substantial Completion. Cracking, peeling and scaling of paint shall be judged as defective work. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS Y 1 Section 09.900 Page 3 t A. Apply paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees and 90 degrees F., unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's ' printed instructions. B. Do not apply paint when the relative humidity exceeds 85 %; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless ' otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. 1.09 COLORS AND FINISHES ' A. Paint finishes are indicated in the schedules of the contract documents. ' B. Prior to beginning work, the Architect will furnish a color schedule for surfaces to be painted. 1. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. ' 2. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job. C. Color Pigments to be pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit the substrates and service indicated. ' D. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify the Superintendent of Schools in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. ' 2 PRODUCTS PART ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. Products specified in Schedule of Painting are as manufactured by Pittsburgh Paint Company unless otherwise indicated; equivalent products of Pratt and Lambert, DuPont, Sherwin-Williams, Glidden, ' Devoe, Cook, TCI and Kelly -Moore may be furnished in lieu of those listed, provided that they are of equal type and quality. B. Materials selected for coating systems shall be products of a single manufacturer unless otherwise ' specified. ' C. jecondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be first line quality products of a reputable manufacturer. D. Lead Free Paint: All paint specified for use under this section shall be lead and mercury free and shall ' be in full compliance with Federal Hazardous Substances Act. E. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard, ' best -grade product will not be acceptable. F. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners 583/01 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 4 approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 2.02 MIXING AND TINTING A. Accomplish job site tinting and mixing only when approved by the Superintendent of Schools. Use tinting colors recommended by paint manufacturer for specific type of finish. B. Thin paints only when specifically allowed by manufacturer: do not exceed thinning directions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of firish work, and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through normal preparatory work. B. Notify the Superintendent of Schools in writing of such unacceptable conditions. C. Do not proceed with surface preparations or coating applications until conditions are suitable. D. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint firm. E. Application of paint or finish to surfaces shall constitute acceptance of that surface. 3.02 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. The intent of these specifications is to produce highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. B. Floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as surfaces to be painted shall be clean before painting. C. Clean surfaces free of foreign matter before applying paint or finishes. D. Do not paint masonry surfaces with a moisture content exceeding 12%. E. Provide a minimum of 20 foot candles illumination for surfaces to be painted or finished. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects with putty after first coat. Color to match finish. B. Wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt, oil or grease before applying primer. Remove rust or scale by wire brushing or sanding clean before painting. Clean marred shop coats and touch-up with primer. C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. ' 583/01 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 5 D. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. ' 3.04 APPLICATION A. Final coat of paint shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or hidden corner molds. ' B. Apply paint, stain, and varnish with suitable brushes, or rollers, as recommended by manufacturer. Spray application will be allowed only upon written approval of the Superintendent of Schools. ' C. Allow previous coats to thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats. D. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. E. Slightly vary color of successive coats. ' F. Sand and dust between each coat as required to remove visual defects. G. Each coat of paint applied shall be inspected by the Superintendent of Schools before application of succeeding specified coats. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of ' coats. Provide the Superintendent of Schools with a report of each coat applied when completed for inspection to comply with above. The Superintendent of Schools reserves the right to make revisions ' within color range of paint prior to final coat. H. Apply each coat of paint uniformly to minimum wet file (MWF) thickness specified in Schedule, or as recommended by manufacturer. Additional coats shall be applied if required to produce full coverage. ' PATCHING AND PROTECTION 3.05 CLEANING, A. Upon completion of work, remove paint and varnish spots from floor, glass and other finished surfaces. ' Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials. Leave work in clean, orderly, and acceptable conditions. ' B. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing. Otherwise, re -coat entire section to comers or visible stopping point. ' C. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the tSuperintendent of Schools. D. Provide Wet Paint signs as required to protect newly -painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings proved by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. E. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. ' 3.06 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING A. The kinds and brands of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be those listed below. 583/01 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 6 B. Exterior Exposed Ferrous Metal: 1. Primer Coat: To be applied in the shop or field. a. Description: Fast curing, VOC compliant zinc -rich primer. b. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP6 according to manufacturer's product data sheet. C. Color: Standard reddish gray. d. Finish: Flat. e. Solids Content: 63 % solids by volume. f. Zinc Content: 83 % zinc in the dried film. g. Application Rate: One coat @ 3.0-4.0 mils dry film thickness. h. Acceptable Product: Tnemec Series 90-97 Tnemec-Zinc. 2. I-�termediate Coat: To be applied in the field. a. Description: High -build polyamide epoxy. b. Surface Preparation: clean and dry according to manufacturer's data sheet. c. Color: As selected by Architect. d. Finish: Semi -gloss e. Solids Content: 56% solids by volume. f. Application rate: One coat @ 4.0-6.0 dry mils. g. Acceptable Product: Tnemec Series 66 HB Epoxoine. 3. Finish Coat: To be applied in the shop or field. a. Description: High -solids high-performance, fast drying aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating. b. Surface Preparation: clean and dry according to manufacturer's data sheet. c. Color: As selected by Architect. d. Finish: Semi -gloss e. Solids Content: 72% solids by volume. L Application rate: One coat @ 3.5-4.5 mils dry film thickness. g. Surface burning: Conform to NFPA 101 Class A requirement for flame spread and smoke density. h. Acceptable Products: Tnemel Series 75 Endurashield C. Interior and Exterior Metal: 1. First Coat: PPG 6-208 Speedhide Rust Inhibitive Primer 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide Gloss Enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide Gloss Enamel D. Galvanized Metal: 1. First Coat: PPG 6-209 Galvanized Steel Primer 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Speedhide Gloss Enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Speedhide Gloss Enamel E. New Gypsum Board: 1. First Coat: PPG 6-2 Speedhide Primer Sealer 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 583/01 PAINTING Section 09.9.00 Page 7 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-510 Series Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-510 Series Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel F. Interior Wood: For transparent finish: 1. First Coat: Rez 77 line Semi -Transparent Satin (dark "mahogany" colored stain will be required) 2. Second Coat: PPG Speedhide 6-10 Sanding Sealer 3. Third Coat: Rez 77-9 Satin Polyurethane Varnish G. Interior CMU 1. First Coat: PPG 6-7 Spedhide Masonry Block Filler 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-2 Latex Sealer 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-90 Series Speedhide Low Sheen Oil Based enamel 4. Fourth Coat: PPG 6-90 Series Speedhide Low Sheen Oil Based Enamel End of Section u ' 583/01 TOILET PARTITIONS Section 10.155 Page 1 ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ' A. The extent of the toilet partition work is shown on the Drawings and is specified herein. B. The types of toilet partitions include the following: ' 1. Overhead -braced partitions and doors. C. Provide all materials, fittings and labor to provide a complete and satisfactory installation. ' D. Manufacturers offering products to comply with the requirements for toilet partitions include the following: 1. Global Steel Products, Deer Park, NY. 2. General Partitions Mfg. Corp., Erie. Pennsylvania. 3. Flush Metal Partition Corp., Maspeth, NY. 1.03 GENERAL 1 dimensions by field A. Verify measurements before fabrication without delaying the project. B. Preassemble units at the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize any field cutting, joints and assembly of ' units. C. All doors and hardware shall meet the Texas Accessibility Standards, effective April 1, 1994. SUBMITTALS 1.04 A. For information only, submit 2 copies of the manufacturer's detailed specifications and installation instructions. ' Include catalog cuts of hardware, anchors fastenings and other data as required. Indicate by transmittal that copy of each instruction has been distributed to the Installer. ' B. Submit shop drawings for the fabrications and erection of toilet partition assemblies, to the extent not fully described by the manufacturer's data sheets. Include plans and elevations at not less than 3/8" or 1/2" to 1'-0" scale, and details at not less than 3" to P-0" scale. Show all anchorage, accessory items and finishes. Provide ' location template drawings for bolt hole locations in supporting members for attachment of partitions. C. Submit 2 sets of samples of partition stainless steel. Samples will be reviewed by the Architect for color, texture and reflective surface only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the ' Contractor. 1.04 WARRANTY ' A. The Contractor shall guarantee all work, supplied or installed, against defects resulting from the use of inferior materials, hardware, or workmanship, for a period of ten (10) years from the Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS i 583/01 TOILET PARTITIONS Section 10.155 Page 2 2.01 MATERIALS A. Toilet partitions and doors shall be equivalent to General Series 40 floor supported with headrails, stainless steel. B. The toilet partitions shall be 1 1/4" thick with two sheets of #304 Stainless Steel No. 4 Finish, bonded before attaching die drawn stainless steel molding to both sides. Same construction as panel specification outlines above. Pilasters are to be anchored to floor with heavy gauge angle. Top of pilasters to be securely braced with extruded aluminum headrail with integral crown loafer rail. C. Headrail to be 1 7/8" x 1 5/32" x 1/16" with integral crown loafer rail, extruded aluminum heat-treated and anodized with necessary fittings. D. Provide manufacturer's standard Hardware and Accessories, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories required for a complete and satisfactory installation, as follows: 1. Non-ferrous cast alloy with polished chrome finish. 2. Provide easy -to -operate and easy -to -grasp hardware meeting the requirements of the Texas Accessibility Standards, effective April 1, 1994. a. Concealed latch (No. 2000D), hinge brackets (No.1250D), and doorstop and keeper (No. 2060DO heavy castings non-ferrous alloy, chrome -plated. Concealed hinge (No. 1000D), works on opposing nylon cams under spring tension. Top pivot pin, mounted within door having bearing points above and below hinge bracket. 3. Fittings — wall connection brackets for panels and pilasters to be high strength heavy chrome plated. Pilaster trim to be 3" high, .031 stainless steel. All hardware and fittings to be secured with chrome -plated one-way vandal -proof sex bolts or No. 14 plated -steel metal screws of proper lengths. E. Anchorages and Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel of chromium plated steel or brass, with finish to match hardware. Use theft resistant (one-way) type heads and nuts for exposed screws. Provide concealed anchors of hot -dip galvanized, cadmium plated, or other rust resistant protective - coated steel. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Provide standard doors and panels, fabricated for the partition system in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications, unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide concealed reinforcement for installation of hardware, fittings, brackets and required accessories. C. Provide 36" wide doors, except as otherwise indicated, for stalls required to be accessible. D. Provide hardware and accessories for each door in the partition system, as follows: 1. Hinges shall be constructed of 16 gauge metal, either surface -mounted or cutout insert type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type, or spring action cam type, or concealed, torsion rod type, to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Latch and Keeper shall be Manufacturer's latch unit, with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide latch unit equipped for emergency access. provide latch unit design for use by physically impaired (see the State of Texas Program for the Elimination of Architectural Barriers). 3. Coat Hook and Bumper shall be combination unit with hook and rubber -tipped pin. Install as recommended by the Manufacturer. 4. Anti -grip headrail for partition. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 583/01 TOILET PARTITIONS Section 10.155 Page 3 ' 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions rigidly, straight, plumb and level with the panels laid out as shown. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2" between pilasters and panels and not more than 1" between panels and walls. Secure panels to ' walls with not less than 2 stirrup brackets, attached near top and bottom of the panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure panels to supporting walls with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices, as indicated on final shop drawings or in manufacturer's instructions. tB. Overhead -braced Partitions shall have secure pilasters to the supporting floor with the specified anchorage device. Level, plumb, and tighten the installation with the leveling device. Secure the overhead brace to face sheets with not less than 2 fasteners per face. Set tops of doors parallel with the overhead brace when doors are in the closed ' position. C. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation after installation. ' D. Set hinges on out -swing doors to return to the fully closed position. 3.02 PROTECTION, CLEANING AND FINAL ADJUSTMENTS ' A. Protect units during delivery, storage and after erection so that there will be no indication of use of damage at the time of acceptance by the Owner. Replace damaged work as directed. ' B. Perform all final adjustments to pilaster leveling devices, door hardware, and other operating parts of the partition assembly just prior to final inspection. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings and accessories, ' using materials and methods recommended by the partition manufacturer. I End of Section 7 r Iff I 583/01 LOCKERS Section 10.500 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work ' specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ' A. The extent of metal lockers is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Provide seventy-eight 12" x 12" x 30" high double tier lockers. Four (4) of those lockers shall be ' accessible. Do not provide the accessibility symbol on the accessible lockers. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide locker units in colors selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. ' Unless otherwise shown or specified, non -exposed surfaces may be manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect. ' 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide lockers which comply with performance characteristics of, and are capable of successfully ' passing the impact and loading test of, FS AA -L486. 1.05 SUBMITTALS ' A. For information only, submit three copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for metal locker units. Indicate by transmittal that a copy of each instruction has been forwarded to the Installer. ' B. Submit two metal staples on metal, of each color and finish that are required for lockers. Architect's review will be color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is ' exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for metal lockers, verifying dimension affecting locker installations. Show locker detail, method installation, fillers, trim, base and accessories. ' 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ' A. Do not deliver metal lockers until building is enclosed and ready for their installation. Protect from damage during delivery, handling, storage and installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 LOCKERS A. Provide metal lockers equal to Standard Lockers # 5242, manufactured by Lyon Metal Product, Inc. of Aurora, Illinois. B. Material: Prime high grade Class 1 mild annealed, cold -rolled steel free from surface ' imperfections. 583/01 LOCKERS Section 10.300 Page 2 C. Body: 24 gauge steel, flanged to give double thickness of metal at back vertical corners. D. Door Frame: 16 gauge formed steel channels. Vertical members shall have an additional flange to form continuous door strike. Corners shall be lapped and welded into a rigid assembly. Top and bottom cross members shall provide support for front edge of locker top and bottom. E. Door: One-piece, 16 gauge steel on a single, double and triple tier with both vertical edges formed into channel -shaped formation: top and bottom shall be flanged at 90° angle. F. Ventilation: Louvers shall be provided as per manufacturers. G. Door Jambs: Shall have two jambs welded to side of door frame to engage locking device. Design and gauge of jamb shall prevent freeing of locking device by prying. Each jamb shall have safety reverse nose to eliminate hazard of sharp -pointed edges protruding into the locker. H. Hinges: Shall be not less than 2" high, full loop forming double thickness on each leaf. Hinges to be set in slot in door and frame and projection welded to frame and securely attached to door. I. Quiet Locking Device: Channel shaped locking device shall be a quiet design with nylon coated metal latches to eliminate any metal to metal contact. Lock bar shall be enclosed on three sides and operate with the channel formation of the door. Locking device shall be prelocking so mechanism can be locked in open position — door locking automatically when closed. Doors also to be provided with lock hole filler to permit use of built in key or combination lock. Handles: All parts shall be chrome plated, die-cast zinc alloy with a tensile strength of no less than 40,000 psi. No moving parts are to operate against outside surface of locker. Padlock attachment to be integral part of lift which shall be attached directly to locking bar and protected by fixed handle housing. Handle to provide built in padlock strike. Lockers shall be equipped with a 16 gauge door pull with padlock attachment when not used with built in locks. The recessed handle shall be 4 1/8"w x 6 1/6"h x 1 '/e "d and constructed of die cast zinc alloy, nickel plated, with a minimum tensile strength of 40,000 psi. K. Coat Hooks: Lockers shall have double prong (ceiling) hook and three single prong wall hooks. All hooks to be zinc plated or subjected to a comparable rust retardant treatment and attached with two bolts. L. Number Plates: All lockers shall have 3/8' high number plates attached near top of door. M. Standard Finish: Exposed steel parts shall be thoroughly cleaned, given a bonding and rust inhibitive phosphate treatment and then electostatically sprayed with a heavy coat of high quality enamel. Color to be selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Installer must examine the substrates and conditions under which the specialty signs are to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been convected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install metal lockers at the locations shown in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for a plumb, level, rigid and flush installation. 583/01 LOCKERS Section 10.500 Page 3 B. Space fasteners about 48" oc and apply through suitable reinforcing plates where necessary to prevent metal distortion. Conceal all fasteners whenever possible. Use suitable anchors to provide secure anchorage. C. Touch up any maned finishes, or replace as directed by Architect. Use only materials and finishes as recommended or furnished by the locker manufacturer. D. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without bind. Verify satisfactory operations of integral locking devices. E. When required, provide metal filler panels for closure to adjacent surfaces, factory -finishes to match lockers. End of Section ' 583/01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Section 10.520 Page 1 ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this ' section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ' A. Perform all work required to complete the Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets indicated by the Contract Documents and furnish all supplementary items necessary for their proper installation. ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS _ . A. Submit for approval samples of typical accessories showing construction and finish specified if requested by the ' Architect. B. Submit manufacturer's literature and mark sufficiently to indicate compliance with these Specifications. Show locations, methods of supporting, methods of anchoring and finishes of each accessory. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable, provided it complies with the Contract Documents. 1. J.L. Industries 2. Larsen's Manufacturing, Co. 3. Muckle Mfg. Co. - Division of Technico, Inc. ' 4. Profile International, Inc. 5. Seco Mfg., Inc. ' 2.02 MATERIALS A. ABC FIRE EXTINGUISHERS: Equal to J.L. Industries "Cosmic 5E", 5 pound nominal capacity, with ' Panorama aluminum 1012P48 cabinets with ADAC option. Furnish and install four (4) sets of extinguishers and cabinets. ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's latest written requirements, details and recommendations. B. Install in locations and heights directed by the Architect. t End of Section 1 ' 583/01 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS Section 10.605 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this ' section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ' A. The work of this section includes the furnishing and installing of wire mesh partitions as indicated on the Drawings. ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. ' B. Product Data: Four (4) copies of Manufacturer's printed data on products to be furnished. C. Shop Drawings: Complete layout and fabrication drawings. ' D. Samples: Finish color samples for selection. E. Cylinders: Submit Sargent Cylinders and four (4) sets of blank keys. The Owner will key the cylinders and return them to the Contractor for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: Miller Wire Works, Inc., P.O. Box 610280, Birmingham, Alabama 358261-0280 Telephone: ' (205) 592-0341, Facsimile: (205) 592-3725 2.02 COMPONENTS -STANDARD DUTY PARTITIONS ' A. Wire mesh partitions, ceiling partitions and gates shall be configured as shown on Drawing. B. Wire Mesh Partitions: Factory -assembled modular interchangeable units that allow expansion without waste ' of components, complete with all components, accessories, hardware, and fasteners. 1. Style: Full Mesh 1-1/2" Diamond -Intermediate Crimped. 2. Provide fixed sections unless otherwise indicated. ' 3. Provide special width panels to achieve partition dimensions indicated. 4. Panel frames bolted together and to posts at 12 inches (305 mm) on center vertically. 5. Height: As indicated on plans. ' 6. Finish: Hot -dip galvanized. C. Ceiling Partitions: Factory -assembled modular interchangeable units that allow expansion without waste of ' components, complete with all components, accessories, hardware, and fasteners. 1. Style. Full Mesh 1-1/2" Diamond -Intermediate Crimped. 2. Provide fixed sections unless otherwise indicated. ' 3. Provide special width panels to achieve partition dimensions indicated. 4. Panel frames bolted together and to beams at 12 inches (305 mm) on center. 583/01 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS Section 10.605 Page 2 5. Finish: Hot -dip galvanized. D. Wire Mesh Panels: Steel channel frames with wire mesh securely clinched through holes in channels; frame joints mortise and tenoned. I. Wire Mesh: 10 gauge steel wire woven into 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diamond mesh. 2. Frame Member: Cold rolled steel "C" -section channels. 3. Vertical Frame Members: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) by 5/8 inch (16 mm); extend below bottom horizontal to form feet post. 4. Horizontal Frame Members: 1 inch (25 mm) by %z (13mm). 5. Provide intermediate horizontal stiffener bars of same dimension as horizontal frame members at approximately 36 inches (915 mm) above floor level and at no more than 60 inches (1830 mm) apart vertically; wires woven through stiffener bars. E. Hinged Door Sections: Matching Wire Mesh Pane 1. Hinge Side, Top and Bottom Frame Members: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) by''/z inch (1-3 mm) chamiel with 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) by 1/8 inch (3 mm) flat bar cover. 2. Lock Side Frame Members: 1-3/8 inch (35 mm) by 3/4 inch (19 mm) by 1/8 inch ( 3 mm) angle, riveted. 3. Single Door Width: 48 inches ( 1220 mm). 4. Hinges: 3 butt hinges riveted to door panel and frame 5. Lock: Mortise cylinder lock operated by key outside, recessed knob inside. F. Flat Bars: 5/16 (8 mm) thick flat steel bars; provide between each section of partition. 1. Panels over 19 feet 8 inches (5994 mm) High: 3 inches (76 mm) wide posts. 2. Panels 14 feet 8 inches (4470 mm) to 19 feet 8 inches (5994 mm) High: 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) wide posts. 3. Panels 12 feet (3657 mm) to 14 feet 8 inches (4470 mm) High: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) wide posts. G. Floor Sockets: 1 '/4 " x I '/< " x 2 '/a " high deductible Iron, (weldable). H. Top Bar: Continuous steel channel stiffening length of partition run. 1. Size: 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) by 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Anchored to panel frames with''/4 inch (6 Trim) U -bolts at 28 inches (7 10 mm) on center. 3. Anchored to adjacent structure as indicated on the Drawings. I. Color: color to be selected by Architect.. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install plumb, level, and securely anchored to floor and to other structural members where indicated. C. Adjust doors and service windows for smooth, easy operation. End of Section 583/01 TOILET ACCESSORIES Section 10.800 Page 1 ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on the Drawings and scheduled herein. ' B. The type of toilet accessories required includes the following: 1. Paper Towel Dispensers 2. Soap Dispensers ' 3. Toilet Tissue Dispensers 4. Grab Bars ' 5. Waste Receptacle C. Mirrors shall be furnished and installed under the work of section 08.800. t1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's literature for each product. Mark sufficiently to indicate compliance with these ' specifications. Indicate locations, methods of supporting, methods of anchoring and finishes of each accessory. 1.04 GENERAL tA. Use concealed fastenings. B. Verify type of mounting surfaces; provide proper anchors or fasteners to ensure permanent mounting. ' C. Provide locks where keying specified; provide same throughout for all accessory units. ' D. All mounting locations and heights shall meet the State of Texas Program for the Elimination of Architectural Barriers. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide a one (1) year warranty from the Date of Substantial Completion for all materials and workmanship. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' A. Products manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable, provided they comply with these Specifications: ' 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Co. 2. Bradley Corporation B. Proprietary references used herein are to serve as guidelines for establishing style, type and quality of ' accessories to comply with requirements of this project. Other accessories will be considered provided same are, in the opinion of the Architect, equal in weight, finish, size, appearance and dispense same type of goods or 583/01 TOILET ACCESSORIES Section 10.800 Page 2 services. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Toilet Tissue Dispensers: Equivalent to Bobrick #B-2740, surface mounted, multi -roll toilet tissue dispenser. Provide one unit at water closet. B. Soap Dispensers: Equivalent to Bobrick #B4112 Contura Series, surface mounted soap dispenser for liquid soap. Provide 1 unit at each toilet room lavatory. C. Paper Towel Dispensers: Equivalent to Bobrick # 4262 Contura Series, surface mounted paper towel dispenser. Provide one unit as shown on Drawings. D. Grab Bars: Equivalent to Bobrick B-550 (1 1/4" diameter) polished ends, peened gripping surface, concealed mounted with 4 setscrews. Clearance between the grab bar and the wall shall be 1 1/2". Mounting shall be as shown on the Drawings. Furnish in lengths noted on the Drawings. E. Recessed waste receptacle for 4" wall shall be equivalent to type 304 (18-8) #B-3644 by Bobrick, stainless steel welded construction with satin finish. Flange shall be 22 gauge, one piece, seamless construction. Capacity 1.6 cu. ft. keyed like other Bobrick equipment. F. All dispensers shall be located for accessibility in strict accordance with ADA and the State of Texas Elimination of Architectural Barriers Program (TAS). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All accessories shall be located for accessibility in accordance with ADA and the State of Texas Elimination of Architectural Barriers Program B. Install accessories according to manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Install accessories plumb, square, level and true with wall or surfaces. C. Install grab bars where scheduled to support a minimum load of 300 pounds downward pull. D. Frames of recessed accessories shall neatly trim the opening. Gaps and voids between frames and finished walls will not be allowed. Exposed and concealed fastening shall match finish of fixtures and shall be stainless steel, theft -proof type. E. Install concealed anchor plates to wall construction for mounting all accessories. Provide grounds or rough bucks to rigidly secure accessories. F. All controls, dispensers or other operable equipment shall be mounted no higher than 48 inches above the floor. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove all manufacturer's temporary labels or marks of identification. Clean and polish to remove all oil, grease and foreign material. Leave accessories in a neat, orderly and clean condition. End of Section ' 2. Aluminum windows and frames are specified in Division 8 Section "Aluminum Windows". 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS ' 4. Section .23.122 Page 1 5. Steel doors and frames are specified in Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames". PART GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General ' Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified ' 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: in this section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. This section includes a single -story, single -span, rigid frame type of pre-engineered metal building of the nominal length, width, eave height, and roof pitch indicated. ' 1. Exterior walls are covered with field -assembled corrugated wall panels attached to framing members using exposed fasteners. Endwalls are not expandable. ' 2. Roof system consists of the manufacturer's standard lap -seam insulated roof. B. Included as a part of the building system are structural framing (columns, rafters, struts, purlins, ' girts); pre -finished roofing and siding; roof and wall insulation; metal flashings; trim; gutters and downspouts; diagonal bracing; fasteners, anchorages and connectors; anchor bolts; overhead coiling doors; pedestrian doors; windows; accessories and other components and materials required for ' complete and watertight installation. C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Concrete floor and foundations and installation of anchor bolts are specified in Division 3 Section Concrete Work ' 2. Aluminum windows and frames are specified in Division 8 Section "Aluminum Windows". 3. Sealants and caulking are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers". ' 4. Roof and wall insulation are specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation". 5. Steel doors and frames are specified in Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames". "Finish 6. Finish hardware and provisions for master keying are specified in Division 8 Section Hardware". ' 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: ' A. General• Engineer, design, fabricate and erect the pre-engineered metal building system to withstand loads from winds, gravity, 3 ton overhead crane, structural movement including movement thermally induced, and to resist in-service use conditions that the building will experience, including exposure to the weather, without failure. Design each member to withstand stresses resulting from combinations of loads that produce the maximum allowable stresses in that member as prescribed in MBMA's "Design Practices Manual." J 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 2 B. Structural design for the pre-engineered metal building shall be by a Professional Engineer, registered in Texas, employed by the manufacturer, and all shop and erection drawings for the pre-engineered metal building for this project shall bear his seal and signature. C. The engineer employed by the metal building manufacturer shall have no responsibility for foundation design but shall provide the Architect with loads on the foundation from the metal building plus any special requirements of his building system on the construction of the foundation. D. Design Loads: Basic design loads, as well as auxiliary and collateral loads, are indicated on the Drawings. 1. Design each member to withstand stresses resulting from combinations of loads that produce the maximum allowable stresses in that member as prescribed in MBMA's "Design Practices Manual". 2. Basic design loads include live load, wind load, and seismic load, in addition to the dead load. 3. The Metal Building shall be designed to meet or exceed the criteria for 80 mph wind speed, Exposure C, as specified in the 1997 Uniform Buildin Code 4. Auxiliary loads include dynamic live loads such as thou genera#ed by cranes and material handling equipment. 5. Collateral loads include additional dead loads over and above the weight of the metal building system such as roof -supported mechanical systems and light fixtures. E. Structural Framing and Roof and Siding Panels: Design primary and secondary structural members and exterior covering materials for applicable loads and combinations of loads in accordance with the Metal Building Manufacturers Association's (MBMA) "Design Practices Manual" except that wind loads shall be based on the 1997 Uniform Building Code as called out on the Drawings and the roof live load of 20 psf shall be non-reducible. F. Structural Steel: Comply with the American Institute of Steel Construction's (AISC) "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings' for design requirements and allowable stresses. G. Light Gage Steel: Comply with the American Iron and Steel Institute's (AISI) "Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" and Design of Light Gage Steel Diaphragms" for design requirements and allowable stresses. H. Welded Connection: Comply with the American Welding Society's (AWS) "Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" for welding Procedures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Condition of the contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data consisting of metal building system manufacturer's product information for building components and accessories. i 7 n C n 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 3 C. Shop drawings for metal building structural framing system, roofing and siding panels, and other metal building system components and accessories that are not fully detailed or dimensioned in manufacturer's product data. 1. Structural Framing: Furnish complete erection drawings prepared by or under the supervision of a professional engineer legally authorized to practice in Texas. Include details showing fabrication and assembly of the metal building system. Show anchor bolts settings and sidewall, end wall, and roof framing. Include transverse cross-sections. 2. Crane girders and supports: Provide layout of crane girders, beam size, channel size, connections, center to center distance of the rails, and girders. 3. Roofing and Siding Panels: Provide layouts of panels on walls and roofs, details of edge conditions, joints, comers, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings closures, and special details. Include transverse cross-sections. 4. Budding Accessory Components: Provide details of metal building accessory components to clearly indicate methods of installation including the following: a. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide layouts at 1/4 -inch scale. Provide details of gutters, downspouts, and other sheet metal accessories at not less than 1-1/2 inch scale showing profiles, methods of joining, and anchorages. D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts or chips showing fall range of colors, textures, and patterns available for metal roofing and siding panels with factory -applied finishes. E. Samples for verification purposes of roofing and siding panels. Provide sample panels 12 -inch long by actual panel width, in the profile, style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips, battens, fasteners, closures, and other panel accessories. F. Installer certificates signed by the metal building manufacturer certifying that the installer complies with requirements included under the "Quality Assurance" Article. In addition, after erection of the metal building components, a registered Professional Engineer with the manufacturer shall visit the site and give written certification that the erection is in accordance with the manufacturer's standards and instructions. G. Professional engineer's certificate prepared and signed by a Professional Engineer, legally authorized to practice in Texas, verifying that the structural framing and covering panels meet indicated loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction. Include therewith a listing of design loads, load combinations and other criteria upon which the design was based. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer to erect the pre-engineered metal building who has specialized in the erection and installation of types of metal buildings systems similar to that required for this project and who is certified in writing by the metal building system manufacturer as qualified for erection of the manufacturer's products. 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 4 B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide a pre-engineered metal building manufactured by a firm experienced in manufacturing metal buildings systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain the metal building system components, including structural framing, wall and roof covering, and accessory components, from one source from a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. D. Design Criteria: The Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of the pre-engineered metal building. Metal building systems having equal characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver prefabricated components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package wall and roof panels for protection against transportation damage. B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall and roof covering panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weather tight ventilated covering. Store metal wall and roof panels so that water accumulations will drain freely. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage. 1.07 WARRANTY: A. Roofing and Siding Panel Finish Warranty: Furnish the roofing and siding panel manufacturer's written warranty, covering failure of the factory -applied exterior finish on metal wall and roof panels within the warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. Warranty period for factory -applied exterior finishes on wall and roof panels is 20 years after the date of Substantial Completion. 2. The Metal Building System and accessories shall be warranted for a one year period beginning on the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS: A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish at least 5 percent over required amount of nuts, bolts, screws, washers, and other required fasteners for each metal building. Pack in cartons labeled to identify the contents and store on the site where directed. 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 5 1.09 COORDINATION: A. The General (Prime) Contractor and the Metal Building Contractor shall have a complete understanding as to the furnishing of their respective items of construction to avoid duplication or omissions in their work. Also there shall be the fullest cooperation between the aforementioned and the work of other trades. B. PART 2 PRODUCTS i 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Shall be subject to compliance with requirements as outlined above under "Quality Assurance". The dimensions, details and materials specified herein and shown on the Drawings are based on those manufactured by the Star Building Sysiems Division of H. H. Robertson. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. ' 2.02 MATERIALS: ' A. Hot -Rolled Structural Steel Shapes: Comply with ASTM A 36 or A 529. B. Steel Tubing or Pipe: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, ASTM A 501, or ASTM A 53. ' C. Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: Provide 50,000 psi minimum yield strength. Comply with ASTM A 570, or ASTM A 572. D. Steel Members Fabricated by Cold Forming: Comply with ASTM A 607, Grade 55. E. Cold -Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 366 or ASTM A 568. ' F. Hot -rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 568 or ASTM A 569. G. Structural Quality Zinc -coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Comply with ASTM A 446 with G90 ' coating complying with ASTM A 525. Grade to suit manufacturer's standards. H. Bolts for Structural Framing: Comply with ASTM A 307 or ASTM A 325 as necessary for design ' loads and connection details. I. Thermal Insulation: Glass fiber blanket insulation, complying with ASTM C 991, of 0.6 lb per cu. ft. density, 3" thickness as indicated, with UL flame spread classification of 25 or less, and 2 inch wide ' continuous vapor -tight edge tabs. 1. Fiberglass insulation facings shall be laminated on one side with vinyl film facing. 2. Retainer Strips: 26 -gage (0.0179 -inch) formed galvanized steel retainer clips colored to match the insulation facing. 3. For roof installation, furnish patented Roll Runner System including steel banding support system. 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 6 J. Paint and Coating Materials: Comply with performance requirements of the federal specifications indicated. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, compliance with compositional requirements of federal specifications indicated is not required. 1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead-free, abrasion -resistant, rust -inhibitive primer selected by the manufacturer for compatibility with substrates with types of alkyd finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. Comply with FS TT -P-86, Types I, II, or III. 2. Shop Primer for Galvanized Metal Surfaces: Zinc dust -zinc oxide primer selected by the manufacturer for compatibility with substrate. Comply with FS TT -P-641. 2.03 STRUCTURAL FRAMING: A. Rigid Fi ames: Fabricate from hot -rolled structural steel shapes. Provide factory -welded, shop -painted, built-up "I -beam" -shape or open -web -type frames consisting of tapered or parallel flange beams and tapered columns. Furnish frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field -bolted assembly. Provide length of span and spacing of frames indicated. Slight variations in length of span and frame spacing may be acceptable if necessary to meet manufacturer's standard. B. Secondary Framing: Provide the following secondary framing members: Roof Purlins, Side Wall and End Wall Girts: "C" -or "Z" -shaped sections fabricated from shop -painted roll -formed steel. Purlin spacers shall be fabricated from cold -formed galvanized steel sections. 2. Eave Struts: Unequal flange "C" -shaped sections formed to provide adequate backup for both wall and roof panels. Fabricate from shop -painted roll -formed steel. Flange and Sag Bracing: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inch angles fabricated from 16 -gage (0.0598 -inch) shop -painted roll -formed steel. 4. Base or Sill Angles: Fabricate from 14 -gage (0.0747 -inch) cold -formed galvanized steel sections. 5. Secondary endwall structural members, except columns and beams, shall be the manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from 14 -gage {0.0747 -inch) cold -formed galvanized steel. C. Wind Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing using threaded steel rods; comply with ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 572, Grade D. Locate bracing only where indicated. D. Bolts: Provide shop -painted bolts except when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofing and siding panels. Provide zinc -plated or cadmium -plated bolts when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofing and siding panels. 2. Corrosive (rust) inhibitive primer. ' 3. "Starcote" color finish; 1.0 mil dry film thickness (plus or minus 0.2 mil), in color selected, for weather side of wall panels and 0.5 mil dry film thickness (plus or minus 0.1 mil) white color wash coat on interior surface of wall panels. 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 7 E. Shop Painting: Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other matter precluding paint bond. Follow procedures of SSPC-SP3 for power -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP7 ' for brush-off blast cleaning, and SSPC-SP1 for solvent cleaning. 1. Prime structural steel primary and secondary framing members with the manufacturer's ' standard rust -inhibitive primer. 2. Prime galvanized members, after phosphoric acid pretreatment, with manufacturer's standard zinc dust -zinc oxide primer. PANELS: 2.04 ROOFING A. The ribbed roof panel shall be precision roll -formed to provide 36" net coverage from minimum 24 - ' gage, 80,000 PSI minimum yield steel. The panels shall have 11/8" high major ribs at 12" o.c. with two minor ribs symmetrically spaced between the major ribs. Panel sidelaps shall be formed by lapping major ribs at the panel edges. The underlapping nb shall have full bearing legs to support ' the sidelap. Panel end splices shall be over a structural member and shall be a 6" minimum lap. Panels shall be longest length possible to minimize endlaps. Perimeter trim, ridge panel and transition flashing will be provided as required for a weather tight installation. Fastener spacing and type to be determined manufacturer's standard offering. Match existing profile. Form panels of minimum 24 -gage (0.0239 -inch), Grade C, factory -painted steel sheets. Color to be approved by architect. ' 2.05 WALL PANELS: A. Corrugated Roll Formed: Precision roll -formed minimum 26 gage steel (ASTM A 446, Grade D; minimum Fy of 55,000 psi, with ASTM A 525 G90 zinc coating) panels with 36" wide net coverage, four (4) 1-1/8" high major corrugations at 12" centers, two (2) minor ribs located symmetrically between major ribs, and support bearing leg on one (1) lap corrugation to support panels at sidelaps. Provide in manufacturer's maximum length panels to minimize number of end joints, complete with ' all required trim, flashings, panel closures, and other components required for complete weather tight installation. Product shall be equal to "DuraRib" wall panels as manufactured by Star Building Systems. Foran panels of minimum 24 -gage (0.0239 -inch), Grade C, factory -painted steel sheet. ' Color to be approved by architect. 2.06 PANEL FINISHES: ' "Starco&' A. Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard baked -on siliconized polyester finish in Antique White over galvanized finish. B. Wall Panels: Manufacturer's standard baked -on siliconized polyester finish in "Starcote" color as selected by the Architect. Finish procedure steps to be as follows: ' 1. Factory pre-treatment. 2. Corrosive (rust) inhibitive primer. ' 3. "Starcote" color finish; 1.0 mil dry film thickness (plus or minus 0.2 mil), in color selected, for weather side of wall panels and 0.5 mil dry film thickness (plus or minus 0.1 mil) white color wash coat on interior surface of wall panels. 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 8 4. Baking in multi -stage baking oven. 5 Uniform wax coating for protection during transit and handling, and lubrication during roll -forming. 2.07 PANEL FASTENERS: A. Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets, self-locking bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design load. Provide metal-backed neoprene washers under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of panels. 2. Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners for exterior application and galvanized or cadmium -plated fasteners for interior applications. 3. Locate and space fastenings in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer. 4. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of roofing or siding sheets by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating. 2.08 PANEL ACCESSORIES: A. Provide the following sheet metal accessories factory -formed of the same material in the same finish as roof and wall panels: 1. Flashings. 2. Closers. 3. Fillers. 4. Metal Expansion joints. 5. Ridge covers. 6. Fascias. B. Flexible Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded cellular rubber, self -extinguishing flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of roofing and siding sheets. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. C. Sealing Tape: Pressure -sensitive 100 percent solids grey polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non -sag, nontoxic, non -staining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. D. Joint Sealant: One -part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone rubber sealant as recommended by the building manufacturer. ' 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 9 E. Baked Enamel Finish: Provide the manufacturer's standard shop applied baked enamel finish to galvanized steel roof and wall panels, and related trim and accessory elements. For roofing and siding, apply finish coat on exterior facings and manufacturer's standard wash coat on revers face. 1. Clean galvanized steel with an alkaline compound, then treat with a zinc phosphate conversion coating, and seal with a chromic acid rinse. 2. Apply baked -on thermo-setting modified acrylic enamel to pretreated steel sheets, in one or more coats as standard with the manufacturer to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. 3. Color: As selected by the architect from the manufacturer's standard colors. 2.09 PERSONNEL DOORS ' A. Exterior hollow metal doors and frames by building supplier, meeting the requirements of Section 08.150. Finish hardware shall not be furnished under this section. ' 2.10 SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES: A. General: Provide coated steel sheet metal accessories with coated steel roofing and siding panels. ' B. Gutters: Form in 8 -foot -long sections, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Size in accordance with SMACNA. Join sections with riveted and soldered or sealed joints. Provide expansion -type slip joint at center of runs. Furnish gutter supports spaced 36 ' inches on center, constructed of same metal as gutters. Provide bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball strainers at outlets. Finish to match roof fascia and rake. C. Downspouts: Form in 10 -foot -long sections, complete with elbows and offsets. Join sections with 1 -1/2 -inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 5 feet on center in between. Finish to match wall panels. 2.11 FABRICATION: ' A. General: Design prefabricated components and necessary field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly and disassembly. 1. Fabricate components in such a manner that once assembled, they may be disassembled, repackaged, and reassembled with a minimum amount of labor. 2. Clearly and legibly mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously ' prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals. B. Structural Framing: Shop -fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with base ' plates, bearing plates, and other plates required for erection, welded in place. Provide holes for anchoring or connections shop -drilled or punched to template dimensions. 1. Shop Connections: Provide power riveted, bolted, or welded shop connections. 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 10 2. Field Connections: Provide bolted field connections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION: A. Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level base plates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures. Use a non -shrinking grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than 7 days after placement. B. Purlins and Girts: Provide rake or gable purlins with tight -fitting closure channels and fascias. Locate and space wall girts to suit door and window arrangements and heights. Secure purlins and girts to structural framing and h6ld rigidly to a straight line by sag rods. C. Bracing: Provide diagonal rod or angle bracing in roof and sidewalls as indicated. 1. Movement -resisting frames may be used in lieu of sidewall rod bracing, to suit manufacturer's standards. 2. Where diaphragm strength of roof or wall covering is adequate to resist wind forces, rod or angle bracing will not be required. D. Framed Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to building structural frame. 3.02 ROOFING AND SIDING: A. General: Arrange and nest sidelap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. Protect factory finishes from damage. 1. Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Provide weatherseal under ridge cap. Flash and seal roof panels at eave and rake with rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather. B. Roof Sheets: Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of ribbed or fluted roof sheets and between roof sheets and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to clean, dry surface of the weather side of fastenings on end laps, and on side laps of corrugated nesting -type, ribbed, or fluted panels and elsewhere as needed to make roof sheets weatherproof to driving rains. C. Wall Sheets: Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal sill member and top of concrete and elsewhere as necessary for waterproofing. Handle and apply sealant and backup in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations. ' 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 11 _J 1. Align bottom of wall panels and fasten panels with blind rivets, bolts, or self -tapping screws. ' Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self -tapping screws. Fasten window and door frames with machine screws or bolts. When building height requires two rows of panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over wall panels at eave height. ' 2. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 3. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Install gutters, downspouts, louvers, and other sheet metal accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting. Adjust operating mechanism for precise operation. E. Thermal Insulation: Install insulation concurrently with installation of roof panels in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths with both sets of tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor barrier. 1. Roof Installation: The fiber glass blanket roof insulation shall be installed using the patented Roll Runner Insulation System, including the steel banding support system. Provide two rows of band iron in each purlin bay and extend one run at right angles to the purlins directly over each roof beam. Band iron shall be stretched tight, wrapped around end wall eave beams and crimped together with special joining tab. The insulation shall be pulled taut over the purlins and spacer blocks installed before attaching the roof panels. The facing shall face toward the ' interior of the building. 2. Wall Installation: The fiber glass blanket wall insulation shall be pulled taut over the girts ' before attaching the wall panels. The facing shall face toward the interior of the building. Tabs shall be sealed in accordance with standard accepted practices to effect a continuous vapor barrier. tF. Overhead Coiling Doors: Set doors and operating equipment with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold stops, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Adjust moving hardware for proper operation. G. Cleaning and Touch -Up: Clean component surfaces of matter that could preclude paint bond. Touch up abrasions, marks, skips, or other defects to shop -primed surfaces with same type material as shop primer. END OF SECTION 13.122 ' This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. 4 ; • p ,eC. V. SLJHENDRANI ...:..........................:...e fi 33870 4�,; `. t�t\ -/UhtAs�O1 t�G � av-o/ 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. This specification covers the Manufacturer's requirements for the mechanical design, fabrication, testing, inspection, and shipment of one single girder, top running bridge and under hung trolley, electrically powered, pendant controlled, overhead traveling bridge crane complete with auxiliary equipment. The bridge crane shall be installed at the Equipment Operations Building for the City of Lubbock, Water Utilities Department, Lubbock, Teicas. ' B. Design should be based on a plant elevation of 3200 feet above mean sea level, maximum ambient temperature of 104° F and minimum of 40° F with +40° F being used as the minimum temperature for equipment installed indoors. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The Contractor and/or Manufacturer shall include only standard equipment of his own manufacture ' and of other reliable established manufacturers in connection with this installation. The equipment shall be the product of a nationally recognized manufacturer of the type of equipment who has had one or more similar installations now in operation for a period of at least ten (10) years. ' B. Only a licensed Contractor currently and regularly installing cranes shall perform this work. C. The materials shall be as specified herein. Material not definitely specified shall be of the best ' quality used for the purpose in commercial practice. Material shall be free from all defects and imperfections that may affect the finished product. All parts shall be new and unused. ' D. Structural steel shall be of good commercial quality conforming to ASTM specifications designation A36 or shall be an accepted type for the purpose for which the steel is to be used or for the operations to be performed. issue AWA D14.1, "Specification E. All welding designs and procedures shall conform to the current of for Welding Industrial and Mill Cranes." ' SUBMITTALS: 1.04 ' A. Submit copies of Product Information on all materials and equipment. B. Submit copies for Shop Drawings showing size, location, weights and any other information related to Bridge Cranes, Hoists and Trolleys. C. Submit copies of materials specification with chemical and physical properties of all major components. 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION D. The crane shall be in accordance with Specification 74 (Revised 1999) of the Crane Manufacturers Association of America, Inc., "Specifications for Top Running and Under Running Single Girder Electric Traveling Cranes" utilizing under running trolley hoist unless stated otherwise herein. Where no preference is shown, manufacturer's standard will be satisfactory. E. All mechanical parts of the crane system shall be designed to have a minimum factor of safety of five (5) (with capacity load) based on the ultimate strength of the material used. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SCOPE OF MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall supply an overhead bridge crane complete with, but not limited to, the following components: Cranes, Trolleys, Hoists, Motors, Controls, Runway Conductors, Runway Rails (40 lb. ASCE), Rail Stops, Splices and Clamps, Erection, Special Tools, and Touch-up Paint. 2.02 BRIDGE DETAILS A. The bridge structure comprising the girders, end trucks and drive unit, shall be designed and fabricated as a complete integral structure with only such parts removable as required to facilitate the shipping, erection, or maintenance of equipment. B. The crane girders shall be welded structural steel box sections, wide flange beams, standard I -beams, reinforced beams or sections fabricated from structural plates and shapes. The manufacturer shall specify the type and the construction to be furnished. Camber and sweep should be measured by the manufacturer prior to shipment. C. The girders shall be attached to the end trucks in such a manner as to positively insure the necessary rigid connection between the two. D. End trucks shall be equipped with double flanged wheels with treads accurately machined or ground to size in pairs. Wheels shall be steel with hardened threads, or graphite impregnated cast iron, designed to carry the maximum rated load under normal conditions without undue wear. Proper clearance shall be allowed between the wheel flanges and the rail head. The wheel base of the end trucks shall be properly proportioned to the span. No open, grease lubricated gearing on bridge or trolley drives. The bridge end trucks shall be constructed of structural steel forming a box section, heavily reinforced to provide a rigid structure. Safety stops shall be provided to prevent excessive drop in case of axle failure. Substantial guards shall be provided in front of each wheel and shall project below the top of the runway rail. The bridge trucks shall be provided with extended bumpers at each end to engage stops on the crane runway. E. The crane shall be driven by two (2) electric motors (CMAA drive arrangement No. A-4) connected to self-contained, self-lubricating gear reducer units and equipped with solenoid operated brakes. Limit switches shall de -energize the drive motors near both ends of the crane runway. 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 3 BRIDGE END TRUCK ' F. The crane bridge shall be carried on end trucks designed to carry the rated load when lifted at one end of the crane bridge. The wheel base of the end truck shall be 1/7 of the span or greater. G. End trucks may be of the rotating axle type as specified by the crane manufacturer. ' H. The bridge end trucks should be constructed of structural steel or other suitable material. Provision shall be made to prevent the end truck from dropping more than one inch in case of axle failure. Guards shall be provided in front of each outside wheel and shall project below the top of the runway rail. ' 2.03 TROLLEY FRAMES A. The trolley frame shall be constructed of structural steel and shall be designed to transmit the load to the bridge rails without deflection which will impair functional operation of machinery. ' B. Provision should be made to prevent a drop of more than one inch in case of axle failure. ' 2.04 BRIDGE RAILS. A. All bridge rails shall be of first quality and conform to all requirements set forth in the specifications of the ASCE, ARA, AREA or any other commercial rolled sections with equivalent specifications. B. Bridge rails shall be joined by standard joint bars or welded. The ends of non -welded sections shall be square and sections joined without opening between ends. Provision shall be made to prevent ' creeping of the bridge rails. C. Bridge rails shall be securely fastened in place to maintain center distance of rails. 2.05 RUNWAY CONDUCTORS A. The runway conductors shall be installed in accordance with Article 610 of the National Electric Code and comply with all applicable codes. B. Contact conductors shall be guarded in a manner that persons cannot inadvertently touch energized ' current -carrying parts. Flexible conductor systems shall be designed and installed in a manner to minimize the effects of flexing, cable tension, and abrasion. ' C. The runway conductors shall be festooned type suitable for use. D. The conductors shall have sufficient ampacity to carry the required current to the crane, or cranes, when operating with rated load. The conductor ratings shall be selected in accordance with Article ' 610 of the National Electrical Code. E. The nominal runway conductor supply system voltage, actual input tap voltage, and runway ' conductor voltage drops shall result in crane motor voltage tolerances per Section 5.13 (Voltage Drops) of CMAA Specification, #74. 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 4 HOIST DETAILS F. Drum and sheaves shall be as recommended in the Crane Manufacturers Association of America Specification 74. Drum and sheaves shall be accurately machined and smoothly finished. Grooving dimensions and tolerances shall be within standards as recommended by the wire rope manufacturer for maximum rope lift. Drum shall be grooved and shall be of sufficient size to maintain two wraps on the drum when the hook is in the lowest position. No over -wrapping of cable on drum will be permitted. Hoist is to be double reeved for true vertical lift. G. Load breaking in compliance with C.M.A.A. Specification 74, Section 4 shall be used. H. Hoist shall have a primary two position geared type limit switch with adjustable upper and lower limits, and a secondary upper paddle limit switch as a back-up system. I. Hoisting rope shall be a 6 x 37 strand improved plow steel: The hoisting rope shall be of proper design and construction for crane service, The rated capacity load plus the load block weight divided by the number of parts of rope shall not exceed 20 percent of the published breaking strength of the rope. J. Load -Blocks: The load block frame shall be of steel construction. A drop forged steel hook shall be supported on a ball or roller thrust bearing. The hook shall rotate freely on this bearing. The hook shall be equipped with a latch. 2.06 CONTROLS A. All movements of the crane shall be controlled from the floor via a festooned pendant control box. B. A separate, non -electrical, cable shall support the pendant control box. A green wire in the control cable shall ground the control box to the bridge. C. A bridge mounted track and trolley system shall be provided to allow movement of the pendant control along the length of the bridge. D. Control circuits shall be 120 volts AC. Control transformers shall be liberally sized for all control functions. E. Mainline contactor pushbuttons shall be provided on the pendant to completely de -energize the crane. F. A warning horn shall be provided on the crane with the actuating pushbutton located on the pendant. 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 5 G. The pendant shall have an eight (8) button control. 1. Power - On 2. Power - Off 3. Hoist - Up 4. Hoist - Down 5. Trolley - West 6. Trolley - East 7. Bridge - North ' 8. Bridge - South 2.07 BUMPERS A. The bridge bumpers shall be capable of stopping the crane (not including the lifted load) at an average rate of deceleration not to exceed C.M.A.A. requirements. B. The trolley bumpers shall be capable of stopping the trolley (not including the lifted load) at an average rate of deceleration not to be exceeded by C.M.A.A. requirements. 2.08 CRANE RAILS A. Runway rails shall be ASTM A759 for crane service. B. Runway rails shall be ASCE 40 pound/yard light rails. The runway rails shall be straight, parallel, level, and at the same elevation. C. Rails shall be arranged so that joints on opposite runway beams will be staggered with respect to each other and with respect to the wheel base of the crane. Rail joints shall not coincide with runway beam splices. D. Runway rails should be furnished in standard lengths with one short piece on each side to complete a run. The short piece should not be less than 10'-0" long. E. Runway rails shall have bolted splices with tight joints (finished by milling or grinding) and special rail drilling and joint bar hole punching. Rail separation at joints should not exceed 1/16". 2.09 CRANE STOPS A. Crane stops shall be designed by the crane manufacturer for all lateral forces. B. Stops to be located at each end of crane runway and field verified for exact location. 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 6 C. Stops to be located so as to stop the Bridge Crane structure from hitting any existing or new structure at each end of runway. 2.10 LUBRICATION A. A manufacturers standard maintenance platform shall be provided on the cranes for lubricating parts not sealed. 2.11 PAINTING A. All surface preparation, prime, and finish coat painting shall be by the Contractor, prior to shipment. All structural members shall be given a commercial sandblast (SP -6) and one coat of iron oxide primer (P-7). All structural and mechanical components shall be given one finish coat of exterior gloss alkyd enamel. B. The finish coat color shall be Manufacturer standard. The load block, hook, and pendant shall be painted safety yellow. C. Manufacturer shall supply, with the crane, sufficient quantity of finish coat paint for field touch-up by Contractor after field erection and assembly. D. The rated load capacity of the crane shall be indicated on each side of the crane bridge in easily read figures painted on by the Manufacturer. The hoist unit shall have its rated capacity marked on the bottom block. In addition, capacity labels should be marked on the hoist body. 2.12 SHOP TESTS A. Manufacturer shall perform his standard, no load running, shop test and inspection on each unit. 2.13 FIELD TEST A. After installation, each bridge crane shall be put through all of its operations using 125% of normal operating load, in the presence of the crane Manufacturer's Representative, Project Contractor and the Architect. General Contractor will furnish weights and power for tests. Visual inspection will be made for proper installation, operating, alignment and lubrication. B. Locate the bridge crane over column supports during the test. 2.14 NAMEPLATE A. Manufacturer shall provide a permanent corrosion resistant metal nameplate for each major component. The applicable items as a minimum listed below shall be included on each nameplate: 1. Manufacturer's Item Number 2. Manufacturer's Name 3. Manufacturer's Size and Type 4. Serial Number 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 7 5. Design Capacity f6. Design Speed 7. Design Horsepower 2.15 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT A. All equipment shall be protected to withstand outside storage at the job site for at least three months. Contractor shall make every effort possible to store equipment inside and protect it from outside elements. The equipment covered by this specification shall be shipped in assembled ' sections of convenient size. The crane shall be taken apart only to the extent necessary for shipment and all parts shall be carefully match -marked. All shipping units shall be securely crated or provided with skids. The manufacturer shall attach a permanent corrosion -resistant tag on the outside of each separately shipped item showing item number, purchase order number, and identification of contents. B. Manufacturer shall indicate the degree of dismantling necessary for shipment and amount of field ' assembly that will be required. C. The minimum acceptable preparation shall consist of: ' 1. Clean all surfaces. All exposed faces of finished parts of machinery shall be coated with a suitable rust preventative. ' 2. All internal surfaces of the equipment shall be flushed with a suitable rust preventative. 3. All miscellaneous openings shall be sealed with the manufacturer's standard metal or plastic ' closures. 2.16 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ' A. Number Of Bridge Cranes Required One (1) B. Rated Capacity 3 Tons ' C. Length Of Runway (Approximate) (Verify) 100'-0" ' D. Span Centerline -to -Centerline Of Rails (Verify) 451-211 E. Total Height From Floor To Top of Runway Rail (Verify) 14'-111/2" ' F. Hook Travel To Floor Level G. Size of Runway Rail 40 lb. ASCE ' H. Operation Indoor I. Atmosphere (area classification) Non hazardous 2kL•',7[�`A'�k$ C��J ilk i!! {_ �lJ� .9 � y � f. {t ! { iUk a ssxs'{' a c� t: �� } f, . ztx'.:•...-5�-'Sieet�' z.• �: �I�'i k c4 t� 3 m � ',� L :�� y� d� � � s- ��' '.t� � r ' ! �' �:` Y �?.;'� ��;rs �::qJ 3e }�=fa gj` Y ,.},r�� l � sa �i �.�A �,'t3$t� .. �F� �n 'i � 'i�'.t�� art}��`•� a w�)u�t; Nt {,.� '": i • >�k ;3•? -;.y:: {s t ° '.3:.1 )F x� u �rrt P 7 FE P Pi i3 Illy 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 8 J. Type of Material To Be Handled Electrical and Mechanical Equipment K. Service Moderate Service L. Service Classification CMAA Class C M. Type of Crane Top Running - Single Girder, Dual Drive N. Type of Trolley Under Running O. Number of Trolleys/Hoists One (1) P. Trolley Rated Capacity 3 Tons Q. End Trucks Type Enclosed Gearing R. Control (All Operations) Floor Operated Pendant Control Pushbutton Station 1. Bridge One (1) Speed Magnetic 2. Trolley One (1) Speed Magnetic 3. Hoist One (1) Speed Magnetic S. Pendant Elevation (To Centerline) Y-6" (Approximate) above F.F. T. Power: 460 V, 3 Phase, 60 Hz AC 1. Bridge Electric Motor With Motor Brake 2. Trolley Electric Motor With Brake 3. Hoist Electric Motor With Brake U. Speeds (Feet per Minute): 1. Bridge 60 fpm 2. Trolley 50 fpm 3. Hoist 16 fpm V. Safety Control Control Voltage at Pendant shall be 110 V W. Safety Factor Not Less Then Five (5) X. Bridge Overload Field Tested to 125% Nominal by Manufacturer Y. Construction Bolted or Welded Steel I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 9 Z. Conductors: 1. Main Runway 2. Cross Bridge AA. Collectors END OF SECTION 14.470 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. Insulated Bar, Copper Festooned Cable Shoe Type, Tandam, Heavy Duty OF t"kN%t ,e C. V. SURENDRAN 33870 04� .0;7"200..01 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 1 PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SPECIAL NOTE A. The Architectural and Structural Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical and electrical plans, and shall be complied with in every ' respect. All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is on file at the Architect's office, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of drawings. B. Where the Supplementary General Conditions conflict with the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern. 1.02 CHECKING DOCUMENTS A. The. drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings ' and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will reli ve the Contractor of his duty to 11 work required by the complete contract documents `j3 li ik.j )F , -r -i3 :.�H} `s'1 t;1 ; ti1; ��}l�su.,;; ��F :r �atk iJ.}`� ta.:a�rit€}!,',.'3"$.}'} ,1�{ �`�3 ::; }�r¢Y2,,±:;t,,w•t1 3 �� T,,fsaas.;`?1tj 1�. i l,.i.rts;nt.;, i'SY}z,4 .)''3ILNV, )a0e 'Cal I �• t a t . x � r.. i °�a t� 1� ; �'1 ��`4_ ��1. l ��` �� a ts�. s>>� ��-�y 3 ;r : � i • n� : tart II } 3 t y �. .. f , A. In e e lines and duc S"to b'e stiatle b the vario trad s unoer these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where ' the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in ' finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required. ' D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. ' E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as ' required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact ' locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 2 G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he'shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. J. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. O. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" & "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. I GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 3 ' 1.04 DIMENSIONS A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including A. elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. ' 1.05 INSPECTION OF SITE A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations. The ' bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 15 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional ' payments in connection with removing or nkadifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors new work. ' 1.06 ELECTRICAL WIRING A. All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for ' communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. ' B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and 1.08 installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the ' responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. t1.07 MOTORS AND CONTROLS A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on ' the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 15 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. ' C. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. ' 1.08 PROGRESS OF WORK A. The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper ' time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner. 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 4 1.09 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.10 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding. C. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual N- inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, 'registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. 1.11 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. Within 30 days of being awarded the Contract for any section or sections of the work under this heading, the Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. If the material is not submitted within 30 days of the contract signing, the Contractor shall furnish the specified materials. C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. i GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ' Section 15.010 Page 5 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS tA. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that ' no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and ' secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. ' B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract ' documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. ' C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. ' D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. i E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. ' 1.13 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new ' apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. ' 1.14 PERMITS, FEES, ETC A. The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including sewer, water, gas and electric services as applicable. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and ' these specifications. 1.15 TESTING ' A. The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 6 1.16 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.17 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install", and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.18 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from the Architect, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. 1.19 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location ' GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 7 7. Control devices and details ' B. Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc. C. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish. ' D. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be ' replaced by the Contractor at his expense. E. All items specified under Divisions 15 and 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically ' placed in relation to the work of other trades. 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING ' A. The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of ' this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other trades before bidding. B. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. t C. The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. ' D. Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under the respective section with all trades. ' E. In all spaces where new work under Division 15 and 16 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. ' F. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. 1.21 PAINTING ' A. Painting for Divisions 15 and 16 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one tcoat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous metal. ' 3. Paint all exposed sheet metal. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 8 4. Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. Surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. B. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or insulation surface is visible. 1.22 SEALING A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors by packing fire resistant rope and fire resistant cement. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.23 ACCESS PANELS A. Wherever mechanical and/or electrical equipment is installed and where future access is required through either walls or ceilings and such cannot be obtained through the removable ceiling or through other means, the Contractor shall provide Milcor Style "M" access doors at least 12 inches by 12 inches in size or larger if required for access. Provide access doors for all fire dampers, smoke dampers, valves, etc. 1.24 USE OF SYSTEMS A. It is considered that it will be necessary to operate the mechanical systems to provide heating and ventilation in portions of the building that are enclosed. As systems or portions of systems become operable, they shall be operated as required to maintain habitable conditions in enclosed portions of the building that are still under construction and portions that are fully complete as may be required to properly protect installed piping, equipment and finishes. B. In order to provide protection to ducts, plenums, etc. install temporary filters over or in return air openings until all finished painting is completed. Protect supply outlets, coils, etc. as necessary in each case. C. Except for operation of cooling equipment to prove its performance and to adjust and balance the systems, that equipment will not be operated for comfort of construction workers. D. During warm weather the Contractor shall arrange for the operation of systems to supply 100 percent outside air. The systems controls shall be reset to their normal cycle of operation in each case during the times that heating is required and when the cooling equipment is operated. E. Immediately prior to the time that the systems are to be accepted by the Owner, each system shall be carefully examined and if ductwork is dirty, it shall be carefully cleaned by men skilled in that type of work. All filters shall be put in first class condition by replacement of filters and/or other procedures as directed. F. The use of the equipment for maintaining environmental and/or protective temperature conditions shall in no way constitute acceptance of that equipment and the connected piping, ducts, insulation, finishes, etc. by the Owner. Furthermore, it shall in no way shorten the guarantee period hereinafter specified. The Contractor shall either secure extended warranties from the vendors of equipment or shall purchase insurance to provide proper coverage on the equipment through the guarantee period and shall file with the Architect substantiating affidavits from equipment manufacturers or a copy of the insurance policy covering the equipment through the guarantee period. The personal underwriting of the Contractor for equipment manufacturers' warranties is not acceptable, but his personal underwriting of piping, ductwork, insulation and associated materials is acceptable subject to the provisions of the contract. G. The Contractor shall provide such labor as may be required in the operation of the systems and shall pay all costs. ' GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 9 ' 1.25 OWNERS OCCUPANCY A. It shall be understood that the building in which the work is to be done is a necessary part of the Owner's operation, and shall continue in use throughout the construction period without interruption. Take all ' precautions required by the Owner for the protection of his equipment and property. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the owner in scheduling areas in which work is permitted. Owners schedule will govern. 1.26 SCHEDULE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall program his work in such manner as to interfere as little as possible with the normal routine of the Owner. It must be understood that the Owner will continue to function throughout the construction period. All water, electrical and sanitary facilities shall therefore be continued in operation with a minimum of interruption and the Contractor shall make any temporary connections necessary to comply with ' this requirement. 1.27 WORKING TIME A. Where new connections are to be made into existing lines, present lines must be relocated or rerouted, present equipment items relocated or other work accomplished that would affect the operation of the present building, the work shall be carried on at such times as to cause a minimum of interference with the normal operation of that building. In certain cases the work may be accomplished during normal working hours during certain designated seasons or times of the year. In other cases the work may have to be executed during times of the day outside of the normal working period, on holidays, etc. Each individual case presents a separate decision ' as to the time during which it shall be performed. The Contractor involved shall present each case to the Architect for his decision, which will be made after due consultation with the Owner. No additional compensation for overtime will be granted for compliance with these requirements. 1.28 EXISTING WASTE AND DRAIN LINE A. Special care and precaution shall be used where existing waste or drain lines are to be opened. The following ' procedure shall be adhered to at all times when opening existing waste or drain lines: Before opening, prepare a solution of one part household bleach to nine parts water. At every inlet to the affected piping run, add 2 gallons of the solution to flush out the piping. Any worker who has cuts or open skin breaks shall be prevented from working with the waste or drain piping. Workers shall wear approved face shields, gloves, aprons, boots, etc. for protection. In addition, existing piping shall be thoroughly washed inside and out with bleach solution prior to handling by unprotected persons. The safety director or Owner's representative shall be notified prior to commencing work on any existing waste or drain lines. 1.29 SALVAGE MATERIALS ' A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment, piping, duct, grilles, conduit, wire, junction boxes, light fixtures and other items associated with the mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems where shown on the drawings. Where such items are exposed to view or uncovered by any cutting or removal of general construction and has no continuing function (as determined by the Architect), they shall be removed by the contractor under the section in which the item normally falls. B. Existing items (see above) where concealed in/above construction which is not disturbed, abandon in place. ' Plug, cap, disconnect or otherwise render harmless all such items. L GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 10 C. All items or materials removed from the project shall be made available for the Owner's inspection. The Owner retains the option to claim any item or material. Contractor shall deliver any claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated by the Owner. All item not claimed become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site. 1.30 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.31 MARKING OF PIPE A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers. C. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (" Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 %2 1-1/2 to 2 '4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 1.32 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING: A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF -1, EF -2, etc.; AC Units will be AC -1, AC -2, etc. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3 -ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: I GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 11 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 1. Boilers ' 3. 2. Chillers 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 3. Pumps Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. 4. AC Units 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 5. Convertors ' 9. 6, Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items 1.33 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the ' Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. 1.34 OPERATING MANUALS ' A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. ' 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 8. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. 1.35 GUARANTEE A. Unless a longer period is specified elsewhere, the contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. ' 1.36 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: I . Accurate "as built" drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. tEND OF SECTION SITE UTILITIES Section 15.110 Page PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General ' Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. ' 1.03 SCOPE A. Perform all layout, trenching, excavation, backfill, shoring and similar work and provide and install all materials and appurtenances necessary for the installation and final connection of all utilities. 1.04 EXISTING UTILITIES ' A. Prior to beginning work, manually locate and stake all utility lines existing at the site. B. The Contractor shall not rely solely on the scale drawings in determining the scope of the work. C. The drawings are not certified surveys and are not guaranteed for accuracy of location or elevation of existing lines or completeness. Before bidding, each bidder shall by personal examination of the project satisfy himself as to the existing conditions which prevail. D. Reasonable differences in actual jobsite dimensions and the drawings shall not be considered justification for a change in the contract sum. E. Interruptions: Conduct operations to minimize service outages. When interruptions is unavoidable, schedule the interruption in consultation with the Architect and Owner to occur at a time of least demand for the utility. ' Notify the Owner of requested interruption time at least 24 hours in advance of outage. F. Disconnections: The Contractor shall arrange with the City for disconnections indicated on the drawings. Where not so indicated provide disconnections at appropriate locations as selected by the Contractor to facilitate his work. Cap terminal ends of active utility branches. Pay any charges levied by the City for these services. G. Utilities to Remain: Protect from damage due to construction operations. Repair or replace portions so damaged as directed by the Architect. H. Utilities Abandoned In Place: Outside the limits of construction on the site, except as specified above, abandon in place all disconnected utility lines. Plug ends of utility lines which are abandoned in place, and insure that no active services are connected to them. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All piping materials for every purpose shall be furnished and installed as hereinafter specified. B. All pipe and fittings shall be new and unused unless specifically indicated otherwise. SITE UTILITIES Section 15.110 Page 2 C. Underground steel piping shall be cleaned and primed with Humble 'Rust -Ban" and wrapped with a double thickness of 3M Scotch "51" vinyl tape over pipe and fittings. D. Factory coated pipe "X -Tru -Coat" or epoxy coated pipe with wrapped fittings will be considered equal. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER A. PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D3034 type PSM with a maximum SDR of 35 with elastomeric joints complying with ASTM D3212. PVC may be used on all exterior sanitary sewer lines except under vehicular areas. 2.03 WATER LINES A. PVC Piping: ASTM D-2241, SDR -17, Class 150, bell and spigot 4" and up only with ASTM D-1869 rubber gasket, Johns -Manville Blue Brute. 2.04 GAS LINES A. Plastic Gas Piping: Polyethylene, Type III, Grade 3, (PE 3406-3408), resin conforming to ASTM D1248 -7A, pipe construction conforming to ASTM D2513 (SDR 11). B. Mechanical Joints: Where steel lines connect to plastic lines 2" and smaller in size, use Continental Style 5 extra heavy duty malleable iron couplings with stiffeners. C. Flanges: Where steel lines valves or accessories connect to plastic lines 2-1/2" and larger, use polyethylene and steel flat face flanges with full face gaskets. D. Casing: Encase plastic lines under streets in schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe extending 36" beyond paving with a vented riser on both ends. E. Service Risers: General Plastic "Corrosion Guard" type CGR 2. F. Plastic marking tape shall be acid and alkali -resistant polyethylene film, 6 inches wide with minimum thickness of 0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1750 psi lengthwise and 1500 psi crosswire. The tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil backing or other means to enable detection by a metal detector when the tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. The tape shall be of the type specifically manufactured for marking and locating underground utilities. The metallic core of the tape shall be encased in a protective jacket or provided with other means to protect it from corrosion. Tape shall bear a continuous printed inscription describing the specific utility. 2.05 GATE VALVES IN EXTERIOR WATER LINES A. Buried Valves: Buried valves shall meet the requirements of AWWA standard C500-61. Design working pressure shall be 175 psi and the valves shall be double disc gate valves with non -rising stems. Valves shall have mechanical joint ends except where flanged ends are shown on the drawings. Valve stems shall be furnished with o -ring seals. All valves shall open by turning counter clockwise. An affidavit of compliance as specified in paragraph 31 of AWWA Standard C500 shall be furnished. B. Valve Boxes: Cast iron valve boxes shall be furnished for each underground valve. 6" cast iron pipe sections shall be used for box extensions where required. Each box shall have a cast iron cover and shall have a flange type base, approximately 4" larger in diameter than the outside diameter of the barrel and provided with a locking device as shown on the drawings. Anchor valve boxes with a flush 18"xl8"x8" reinforced concrete collar. SITE UTILITIES ' Section 15.110 Page 3 ' C. Extension Stems: Extension stems shall be provided for all buried valves where the top of the operating nut is 18" below fmished 36" or more below finished grade. Top of the extension stems shall be not more than grade. D. Collar: Provide a protective concrete collar, square, dimension equal to valve cover frame plus 12" and no less than 8" thickness. Use 3,000 PSI concrete with reinforcing. Set top of cover flush with fmish paving and ' I " above finish grade level. 2.06 EXTERIOR CLEANOUTS A. Provide and install cleanouts in exterior sewer lines where shown or as required by ordinance but not greater than 100 ft. apart. Cleanouts shall consist of a concrete encased special fitting with sewer pipes extending therefrom upward, terminating in a concrete slab. A brass countersunk cleanout ferrule shall be set on this slab in such manner as to be flush with fmished grade and to provide access, through its cover, to the cleanout. ' Cleanouts shall be the same size as the sewer, up to 6" in size, and 4" on 6" and larger sizes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LAYOUT OF UTILITY LINES ' A. Before starting excavation Contractor shall: 1. Uncover and determine the elevation at beginning and end terminals of each line. 2. Compute and verify depth of all lines and grade of sewer lines and submit figures in writing. 3. Stake route of each line. 4. Arrange utility connections with authorities. 5. Locate and identify any conflicting underground structures and adjust grade or routing to accommodate ' installation of the lines. 3.02 LAYING PIPE ' A. Lay pipe to the lines and profiles required by conditions at the site and the drawings. Keep pipe trenches free of water and dry during the bedding, laying and jointing operations. Install fittings and valves at the required locations, with joints centered and with valve stems vertical. Handle pipe carefully to avoid damage to dimensioned ends. Remove pipe with damaged ends which cannot be suitably repaired. Keep interior of piping and accessories clean. B. Proximity of Water and Sewer Lines: Unless otherwise required by drawings, lay parallel water lines and sewer lines in separate trenches at least 10 feet apart. Insofar as possible place water line at a higher elevation than the sewer. Where water lines and sewer lines cross each other, the water line shall be at least 3 feet above the sewer, or if this is not possible, amount of clearance between the lines may be reduced to 12" out to out ' clearance provided the sewer line is cast iron for at least 10 feet on each side of the water line. 3.03 BACKFILLING A. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until the utilities systems as installed conform to the requirements specified hereinafter. The trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavation materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft j shale, or other approved materials free from large clods of earth or stones deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6" layers, until the pipe has a cover of not less than one foot for water mains and two feet where possible for other lines. SITE UTILITIES Section 15.110 Page 4 carefully rammed 6" layers, until the pipe has a cover of not less than one foot for water mains and two feet where possible for other lines. B. The remainder of the backfill material shall then be thrown into the trench, moistened and tamped in one foot layers. Blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, and large boulders shall not be used as backfill material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and will be a requirement when so directed. Any trenches improperly backfilled or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and mounded over, and smoothed off. C. Open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved shall be backfilled as specified above, except that the entire depth of the trench shall be backfilled in 6" layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density at least equal to that of the surrounding earth in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value, so that paving of the area can proceed immediately after backfilling is completed. Along all other portions of the trenches, the ground shall be graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounding over the trenches left in a uniform and neat condition. 3.04 BORED CROSSINGS UNDER WALKS A. Crossings beneath walks may be bored rather than open -cut but casing is not required. The trench may be ` open cut to within three feet of the edge of the pavement. Boring shall proceed from a pit provided for the boring equipment and workmen. The use of water or other fluids in connection with the boring operation will be permitted only to the extent required to lubricate cuttings. Jetting will not be pe7pi �d Cf g ha be taken all s to keep the boreonp o 1 eqp DIV ,}1, } #ga $$ji 1� 3.05 OPENING AND RE S G PAVEMENTi .. Ui A. Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets, drives or other existing pavement, that pavement shall be cut as required to install new lines and to make new connections to existing lines. The sizes I of the cut shall be held to a minimum, consistent with the work to be completed. B. When the excavation has been backfilled, the paving shall be patched, using materials to match those cut out. The patches shall thoroughly bond with the original surfaces and shall be level with them. Quality of the patch shall be equal to or better than adjacent paving. 3.06 DISINFECTING WATER LINES A. After installation of water lines has been completed, thoroughly flush the lines to remove foreign material. After flushing fill the lines with a chlorine solution of 200 PPM for lines 4" in diameter and smaller or 100 PPM for lines greater than 4" in diameter. Fill lines in manner to prevent formation of air pockets. Leave chlorine solution in lines no less than 24 hours before wasting. Flush until residue is 0.2 PPM or less. 3.07 UTILITY SERVICES A. Water Service: The Contractor shall secure water service from the city main as indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall make all arrangements with the city for domestic water service, including the tap, meter and meter box, and pay all charges levied by the city. Beginning at the termination of the city work, the contractor shall provide and install all water piping, fittings, valves, valve boxes, etc. shown on the drawings. Meter box shall be concrete with a manhole, conforming to municipal requirements. B. Sanitary Sewer: The contractor shall arrange with the city for sewer service at the point shown on the drawings. Pay any charges levied by the city for this connection. SITE UTILITIES Section 15.110 Page 5 C. Gas: Refer to the drawings for details of gas service. ' 3.08 TESTING A. Sewer: 1. Prior to testing for leakage the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving ' the joints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be corrected regardless of leakage test results. 2. Test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 2 feet is provided above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipe line to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand until the pipe has reached its maximum absorption, but not less than 4 hours. After absorption, the head shall be re-established. The hour test period shall be measured. 3. Leakage shall not exceed 0.4 gallons per inch diameter per 100 feet of pipe line per hour. When leakage exceeds the maximum amount specified, satisfactory correction shall be made and retesting accomplished. Correction and retesting shall be made at no additional cost. B. Water Lines Soldered or Flanged: Test under hydrostatic pressure of 200 PSIG for 4 hours with no leaks and no pressure drop. C. Gas: Before backfilling, test under air pressure at 50 PSIG for 24 hours. There shall be no pressure drop, ' except for correction for temperature variation. If any pressure drop occurs, soap test every joint, correct the leaks and retest. END OF SECTION J L� PIPING AND ACCESSORIES Section 15.211 Page 1 ' PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General ' Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. ' 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and ' incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. tA. 1.04 INSPECTION during the of the All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and course work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. 1.05 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all by times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage freezing. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV ' Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe ASTM C564 Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe Fed. Spec. HH -P-117 Type 1I No Hub Joints ASTM D3183 PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3034, Type PSM Max. SDR = 35 Copper Tubing ASTM B88 Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22 Cast Bronze Solder Fittings ANSI B16.18 Steel Pipe ASTM A120, A53, A106 Butt Weld Fittings ANSI B 16.9 Socket Weld Fittings ANSI B 16.11 Steel Flanges ANSI B16.5 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings PVC Water Pipe Push On Joints for PVC Water Pipe Flange Bolt, Sets PIPING AND ACCESSORIES Section 15.211 Page 2 ANSI B16.3 ASTM D1584 Type 1120 ASTM D1585, AWWA C900 ASME Pressure Piping C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Maloney. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. 2.02 VALVES A. General Service Valves: 3" and smaller, all bronze, screwed; 3-1/2" and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Fluid Pressure Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Above 125 PSIG Gate 3" and smaller 428 424 Gate 3-1/2" and larger 465-1/2 7-1/2 E Globe 3" and smaller 1 14-1/2 P Globe 3-1/2" and larger 351 21E Angle 3" and smaller 2 16-1/2 P Angle 3-1/2" and larger 353 23E B. Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Provide extended stems for valves in insulated line, so that the handle clears the insulation and jacket. C. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. D. Check Valves: Use "Silent" check valves at the discharge of circulating water pumps. Unless specifically noted to the contrary, use horizontal swing check valves in all other locations. E. Silent Check Valves 1-1/2" and Smaller: Bronze body; bronze trim; stainless steel spring; equal to Combination Pump Valve Company No. 36. F. Silent Check Valves 2" and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, equal to Combination Pump Valve Company No. I OB or 20B up to 125 psi I IB, or 21B up to 250 psig. G. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and O -rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be three piece break away for in-line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems to clear the insulation and jacket. PIPING AND ACCESSORIES ! Section 15.211 Page 3 H. Gas Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to Nordstrom Fig. 143 in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Valves ' 2" and smaller equal to Crane No. 270 threaded gas stop. 1. Pipe Flexible Connections: Flexible connections shall be molded expansion joints as manufactured by Proco ' Series 240. Construction shall include_ neoprene cover and tube elastomer, retaining flanges and control rod plate. ' 2.03 GAUGE COCKS AND GAUGES A. Where gauge connections are installed in insulated lines, install a ConBraCo No. 41-380 T -handle gauge cock on a nipple of sufficient length that the cock handle will be free of the pipe insulation, and position each cock in relation to surrounding piping and equipment so that the gauge may be easily read, and so that a gauge having a 6" diameter dial can be screwed into and out of the cock. B. Install gauge cocks at pumps as close to pump suction and discharge connections as possible. Where drilled ' and tapped gauge connections are provided in the pump casing by the manufacturer, use these tappings. C. Pressure Gauges: Phosphor bronze, seamless Bourdon spring type with phosphor bronze bushed rotary ' movement and link; 4-1/2" dial, nickel plated ring, free standing cast aluminum case; equipped with micrometer adjustment pointer. Furnish each gauge with scale range suitable for the duty. D. Water Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-I with cast aluminum case; Weksler, Weiss, and Trerice ' acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and ' size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to ' provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building ' structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit ' valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not ' be permitted. PIPING AND ACCESSORIES Section 15.211 Page 4 G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.02 FLASHING A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than 4 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. Flashing at roof drains shall be 36" square. 3.03 PITCH PANS A. Small lines thru the roof shall be installed thru pitch pans. Pans shall be 18 gage galvanized, welded, 3" deep, 8" X 8" or larger, packed with lead wool and filled with pitch. 3.04 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS A. Cast Iron Pipes, Caulked Joints: Make joints in cast iron bell and spigot pipe by centering the spigot within the bell, packing the joint with oakum closely compacted, and then pouring the remaining space in the bell full of molten lead. When the lead has cooled, thoroughly caulk at least three times around the joint using caulking tools of the proper width. B. No -Hub Joints: Install according to manufacturer's instructions. Rubber sleeve shall be neoprene. Clamps and bolts shall be stainless steel. C. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. D. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder (95% tin, 5% antimony) or Silvabrite 100 solder (95.5% tin, 4% copper, .5% silver composition) for all copper tubing. Under no circumstances will solder with any lead content be permitted on the jobsite. E. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1/8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. PIPING AND ACCESSORIES Section 15.211 Page 5 ' 3.05 REPAIR OF LEAKS A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: ' 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. 3. Leaks in caulked joints may be stopped by additional caulking of the joint; but if that fails, remake the joint. 4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base metal and ' grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100% penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 4" in length. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 3.06 HANDLING OF MATERIAL ' A. Hauling: All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be delivered and distributed at the site by the Contractor. ' B. Loading and Unloading: Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be loaded or unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. Each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed. No material shall be unloaded where it will block any road, drive, building entrance, or walkway or where it will be a hazard to safe vehicular or pedestrian traffic. C. Care of Pipe Coating and Lining: Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining shall not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. If satisfactory repair cannot be made, the Contractor shall replace the damaged pipe. 3.07 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the ' required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. ' B. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. END OF SECTION PLUMBING SYSTEMS ! Section 15.310 Page I ! PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. ' 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. ! 1.03 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, ' transportation, tools and -appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. ' PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: Refer to Section 'Piping and Accessories". A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings, piping inside of, under and within 10'0" of the building or other structures shall be bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphaltum or coal tar pitch and4ea�aving .} 7 ) ' the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. Type "L" copper insb may be used where space is restricted. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. B. Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service weight cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings for all lines 2" and larger and standard weight galvanized steel, Type L or heavier weight copper, red brass, or lead for lines smaller than 2" except that the same class of material shall be used throughout, insofar ' as practicable. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. C. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Where connections are made between copper tubing and cast iron pipe, use adapters. Copper tubing ' shall be assembled using solder joint fittings. No lead solder will be permitted. D. Gas Lines: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 lbs. banded malleable iron fittings. ' E. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. F. Compressed Air Lines: Type L hard copper with solder joint fittings. ' G. Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each stack, at each change in direction, and in each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil, waste, and drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be concealed behind chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W -8480-R or provided with other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance. Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with threaded adjustable housing, flanged female with cast iron plug and gasket and secured satin bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in finished tile floors PLUMBING SYSTEMS Section 15.310 Page 2 shall be Wade W -6000 -TS with square tile top; in carpeted areas Wade W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All cleanouts shall be the same size as the line served up to 4" size and shall be 4" for all larger lines. H. Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and no smaller than the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if sized in accordance with PDI recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ISOLATING VALVES A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving the riser. These isolation valves shall be installed at an accessible location. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or chase. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. 1. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. 2. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10" above the roof. 3. Water Lines: a. Grade to established Iow points and provide valved drains to completely drain the system. b. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins. 4. Gas Lines: a. All gas piping shall run exposed unless specifically detailed otherwise on the drawings, with special venting provisions. b. A drip pocket shall be installed at connection to an item of equipment and at each low point of the gas distribution system. Grade all lines to drip pockets. Drip pockets shall consist of a nipple and cap screwed to the bottom of the drop. c. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure regulator at each connection to a gas consuming appliance. d. All gas piping on the roof shall be supported on Miro Pillow Block pipe stands, Model 02 for 2" and below, Model 24-R for piping 2" to 4" and Model 48-R for 5" and above. Pans shall be mopped to roof. Pipes shall be strapped to supports with galvanized strap. 5. Identification: For other than black steel pipe, exposed gas piping shall be identified by a yellow label marked "Gas" in black letters. The marking shall be spaced at intervals not exceeding 5 feet (1524 mm). The marking shall not be required on pipe located in the same room as the appliances served. All tubing carrying medium -pressure gas shall be marked with a label at the beginning and end of each tubing section. 3.03 TESTING A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. ' PLUMBING SYSTEMS Section 15.310 Page 3 B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. ' C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the ' system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1" in 8 hours. ' D. Gas Lines: Test with 50 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except for temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and retest. 3.04 DISINFECTING A. After cleaning, flushing and testing, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the disinfection of all domestic pipe lines which shall be disinfected by the application of a chlorinating ' agent. The chlorinating agent may be a liquid chlorine, liquid chlorine gas water mixture, or a calcium hypochlorite solution, which shall be fed into the lines through a suitable solution feed device. ' B. The chlorinating agent shall be applied at or near the point from which the line is being filled and through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of the newly laid pipe. The water being used to fill the line shall be controlled to flow into the section to be disinfected very slowly. ' C. The chlorine dose applied to the water entering the lines shall be at least 40 to 60 parts per million. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe lines for a period of not less than 24 hours. At the end of the 24 hour retention period the chlorine residual shall be at least 20 ppm. All treated water shall be thoroughly flushed ' from the lines until the replacement water in the lines has a chlorine residual of not more than 0.2 parts per million. END OF SECTION r-, L ' AIR DISTRIBUTION Section 15.411 Page 1 ' PARTI GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. ' 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the. installation of apparatus casing, ductwork, plenums, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, relief air vents, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably ' implied therefrom. B. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those v 'os items o)f}} equipment and materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 4,- A 2.01 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK: �� i,' r� �,Et •3,� .r fi; s°' 3's " A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low ' pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended- construction ecommendedconstruction for low pressure ducts insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. t B. Duct construction details shall conform to "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", 1st Edition, (1985) published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Refer to the fan schedules (TSP) for system pressures. Construction shall be suitable for actual duct system ' pressures. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes ' in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of V in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate. E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at ' tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. AIR DISTRIBUTION Section 15.411 Page 2 2.02 DUCT LINER A. All sheet metal supply, return, and fresh air duct shall be lined. B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1" with Johns -Manville 'Termacote Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with immobilized antimicrobial impregnated acrylic surface coating on one side. C. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .25 btu-in./sq. ft. -degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. D. Duct liner shall comply with ASTM C1071 with an NRC not less than 0.70 as tested per ASTM C423. E. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuftbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2" greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. F. Use 100% adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. 2.03 DUCT SEALER A. All supply air ductwork from the air unit to the terminal units shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. 2.04 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a splitter damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off and additional volume dampers shall be installed where shown or required to achieve the final air balance. B. Splitter dampers and volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. The length of any splitter damper blade shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the smaller split in the duct, but shall be not less than 12". Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 18". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion. C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24", volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall be fitted with felts to insure tight closure. Felts shall be both glued and riveted to the damper blades. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. AIR DISTRIBUTION Section 15.411 Page 3 D. Each splitter or volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 896 concealed air split regulators. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. • E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets. 2.05 PLENUMS A. The Contractor shall fabricate and install all sheet metal plenums. Plenums shall be constructed and insulated as specified for "Low Pressure Ductwork." In addition as a minimum requirement, plenums shall be braced with 1-1/2 by 10 gauge angles 24 on center, all sides. When plenums are mounted on the floor there shall be an additional angle around the plenum secured to the floor. Caulk all seams air and water right. B. There shall be at least one door in each plenum 18" by 48" with two latches, 12" square Airsan Ductport, piano hinge, and gasket. All plenum doors shall be double metal clad with 1" thick internal insulation. Provide two Ventlock series 300 latches on each door. ' 2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and outlet of each fan. ' These connections shall in each case be long enough to permit a minimum separation of 3" between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least 1" slack in the flexible material itself. ' B. The material shall be of a vinyl coated woven nylon/polyester blend base fabric, 22 oz. per square yard, meeting NFPA 90A and B for flame spread and smoke developed. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and mildew -resistant. The material shall be equal to Excelon Fabric as manufactured by Duro-Dyne. 2.07 HOOD AND EXHAUST DUCTS A. Ductwork serving kitchen hoods shall conform to the requirements of low pressure ductwork with the tfollowing additional requirements and all requirements of NFPA 96. 1. Ductwork shall be 16 ga. black steel minimum. Ducts larger than 2 square ft. in cross section shall be 14 ' gage. 2. All duct shall be all welded construction only. 3. Bolted access doors shall be provided above the hood for cleanout. ' 4. Duct shall be sized for at least 1500 fpm velocity. 5. The Contractor shall make final connections to all equipment. Where black steel mates with stainless steel, use companion flanges gasketed and bolted. 2.08 LOUVERS - FIXED A. Provide louvers shown on the drawings. Provide with galvanized blades and frames to fit wall construction. Provide with inside insect screen on exhaust louvers and birdscreen on intake louvers. Louvers shall be 4" thick stormproof, Krueger series XY with K blades. Units shall be factory primed for painting on the job. B. Dimensions shown are nominal. Coordinate exact dimensions with the general construction. AIR DISTRIBUTION Section 15.411 Page`4 C. Provide automatic raintight, opposed blade dampers with neoprene seal as indicated on the drawings. END OF SECTION ' HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ' Section 15.511 Page 1 PART, GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General ' Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. ' 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, ' supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter-Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. ' MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 4" and Larger 364 copper plated Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 Hanger Steel lines 4" and larger 239 Hanger Outside Insulation-all lines 239 ' Hanger Cast Iron Lines 239 Hanger Plastic Pipe 108+109 Hanger Refrigerant Pipe 102 Hanger Glass Pipe 375 Wall Bracket All 150, 151, or 155 ' Saddles Steel Lines On Rollers 71, 1710, 1712, 172, 173 Cone. Inserts New Construction 185 Rollers Steel Piping 161,272 ' Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 241 Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Exp Shield Concrete 374 ' Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 Adjuster All 2381 2.02 HANGER RODS A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: C HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15.511 Page 2 Rod Diameter Size of Steel Pipe or Size of Cast Iron Copper Tube Supported Pipe Supported 3/8" 2-1/2" and smaller 3" and smaller 1/2" 3" and 4" 4" through 6" 5/8" 5" through 8" 8" through 10" 3/4" 10" and larger 12" and larger 2.03 HANGER SPACING A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or required by code. Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet 3/4" and smaller 5 1 " through 1-1 /2" 7 2" and larger 10 All cast iron lines 5 (Minimum two per joint) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U -braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. F. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists, piping may be suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts. On piping larger than 4", verify the joist strength before installation. G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed for sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ' Section 15.511 Page 3 lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest ' line supported on or from the trapezes. H. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material. ' 3.02 COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES A. Where pipes specified under different sections may possibly be racked on the same supporting structure, each ' trade shall cooperate with the others involved to properly locate the supporting members and shall furnish a proportionate share of the labor and materials involved in the installation. B. Any other special hangers and supports shall be provided and installed as indicated on the drawings, specified ' elsewhere herein or required by conditions at the site. 3.03 DUCT HANGERS ' -- A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. iEND OF SECTION 1 0 0 J L INSULATION Section 15.660 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. ' 1.03 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated ' unless specifically excepted. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MATERIALS A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described ' singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. ' D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. ' 2.02 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber fabric between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latexadhesive. B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville " Zeston" covers with taped seams. INSULATION Section 15.660 Page 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.02 APPLICATION OF INSULATION A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. 3.03 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. In the following, the word "exposed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in any room above the lowest floor in any building unit, exterior to the building and above ground, and/or in equipment rooms; the word "concealed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in other underfloor areas, ceiling spaces furrings and chases. 1. Domestic Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate with V thick Manville "Micro -Lok APT 650" molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with all purpose jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. 2. Domestic Cold Water Lines: All cold water lines throughout with those exceptions noted hereinbefore, shall be insulated with 1/2" thick Manville "Micro-lok APT 650" molded glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied vapor barrier jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. 3. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Armaflex. Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on during fabrication. 4. Water Heaters: Factory Insulated. 5. Duct Insulation: Refer to Section 'AIR DISTRIBUTION' for duct liner specification. END OF SECTION ju EQUIPMENT Section 15.710 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. 1.03 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - no. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6. Quantity IPART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. Motors with special operating conditions such as multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as specified under the equipment served. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. ' 2. Fractional larger than 1/6 HP: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 3. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as ' required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. EQUIPMENT Section 15.710 Page 2 4. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Power factor shall be 85% or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E -Plus. 2.02 MOTOR STARTERS A. The Division 15 Contractor shall furnish all motor starters (controllers) and control equipment for equipment specified under Division 15. The Contractor under this section of the specifications shall be responsible for coordinating starter sizes, characteristics, heater element sizes and all other details. B. All individual starters shall be the product of a single manufacturer and submitted for review at the same time. C. Where starters are specified with items of equipment, the starters shall be factory mounted and wired. D. Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual units, combination starter/molded case circuit breaker units, combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or combination starter/unfused disconnect switch units unless otherwise indicated. E. Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Federal or Gould manufacture with the proper enclosures. F. Provide pilot lights and either pushbutton stations or hand -off -automatic switches as required for the control of each item of equipment. Generally, pushbutton stations shall be used only where no interlock or remote functions are specified. Control devices shall be in the starter cover unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. H. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. I. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer," with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. Manual Starters: Where manual starters are indicated, they shall consist of a horsepower rated on-off switch, or hand -off -auto switch with a pilot light and overload element(s) in the same enclosure. Where the starter is installed in public areas, it shall be in a recessed box with a stainless steel coverplate. 2.03 FLUE VENTS A. Provide and install flue vents on all gas burning devices including water heaters, unit heaters and furnaces. B. All such flue vents shall be constructed of Metalbestos double wall metal conduit and shall be of the sizes recommended by the manufacturers of the devices vented. They shall be complete with all couplings and other required fittings and shall terminate 24" above the roof in a ventilator type weatherproof rainhead similar and equal to a Breidert Air-X-Hauster. Where any vent passes through combustible construction it shall be provided with a separation in accordance with the standards of the NFPA. All vents shall be flashed and counterflashed into the roofing construction to the satisfaction of the Architect and shall be watertight. 2.04 WATER HEATER A. Provide the water heater shown and scheduled on the drawings. It shall be a glass lined, jacketed, insulated package water heater. w J u EQUIPMENT Section 15.710 Page 3 B. The gas fired unit shall be complete with draft diverter, adjustable thermostatic control, gas pressure regulator and all standard accessories including a thermomagnetic safety pilot designed to shut off gas flow completely to both main burner and pilot burner, if pilot flame is extinguished. C. Provide in the outlet of each heater a Watts temperature and pressure relief valve, with a drain line therefrom full size to the floor drain. Size valve according to the applicable codes. D. Gas fired water heaters shall bear the ASME Stamp and shall be installed in accordance with the Boiler Code if the capacity is 120 gallons or more, or the input is 200,000 BTUH or more. Specifically, 2' of clearance is required on all sides, and 4' of clearance is required above the heater. E. Refer to drawings for capacities. 2.05 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER F. Electric water heater shall be a packaged electric water heater with welded steel, glass lined tank, factory insulated and jacketed. Provide with a drain. G. Heating elements shall be direct immersion elements, Incaloy sheathed. H. Control shall be automatic. Thermostat shall be immersion type. Thermostat shall operate the magnetic contactors. I. Master Control Panel: Prewired and factory installed to contain the contactors, wiring and terminals. J. Provide with magnesium anode. K. Provide a Watts T & P relief valve piped full size to floor drain. L. Unit shall be UL listed. M. Capacity shall be as scheduled on the drawings. 2.06 FANS A. The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. B. All v -belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that the specified fan performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for bidding purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified and if changing of the motor and drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the contract. C. Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v -belt drive shall be selected for a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified rpm. The motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit shall be flexible. D. Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of noise and vibration. E.'- Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled. F. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect. EQUIPMENT Section 15.710 Page 4 G. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. H. Fans shall have factory applied finish. I. Fan motors 1/8 HP and larger shall be permanent capacitor start type. 2.07 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS A. All roof mounted exhaust fans shall be of the low silhouette type with fan wheels mounted horizontally. All fan housings shall be corrosion resistant construction. All fans shall be equipped with ball bearings, permanently lubricated. Fans shall be resiliently mounted. B. Unless scheduled otherwise, all exhaust fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal wheels. C. All fans shall have backdraft dampers and bird screens. D. Refer to the drawings for special requirements. E. Curbs shall be factory fabricated and furnished with the unit. F. Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Jenn Aire Products Co. or Greenheck. 2.08 UNIT HEATERS - GAS FIRED A. Unit heaters shall be vented, gas-fired, horizonal unit heaters and shall be AGA approved and so labeled. They shall be suspended from the building construction at a height and in a manner as directed by the Architect. B. Unit heaters shall be complete with gas pressure regulator, manual firing cock, magnetic gas valve, safety pilot, high temperature limit control, thermostat, draft diverter and shall be suitable for burning the gas locally available. C. The fan shall be centrifugal or propeller as scheduled. D. Temperature controls are to be furnished by the unit manufacturer. E. Unit heaters shall be as manufactured by Trane, Lennox Industries, Modine, or Hastings and shall have cfin and btu outputs not less than those shown. 2.09 FURNACE - GAS FIRED A. Furnace shall have the heating and fan capacities scheduled. It shall be a Lennox steel forced warm air, gas fired winter air conditioner complete with heavy furniture steel casing, heat transfer element, burner, draft diverter, gas pressure regulator, automatic pilot and safety controls, squirrel cage fans with motors and v -belt drives, filter and all other standard accessories. B. Automatic controls at each unit shall include magnetic gas valves, remote room thermostats, limit controls, and thermostatic fan switch. Fan motors shall be provided with thermal overload protection. C. Temperature controls shall be furnished by the unit manufacturer. D. Similar and equal furnaces as manufactured by Carrier, Trane and Westinghouse are acceptable. ' EQUIPMENT Section 15.710 Page 5 ' 2.10 PACKAGED DX COOLING COIL FOR FURNACE A. Cooling coil shall fit the furnace. It shall be of the configuration indicated on the drawings. Provide complete ' with coil, casing, drain pan, expansion device and other accessories required. When performing with the furnace and condensing unit it shall deliver the scheduled capacity. B. Provide the refrigerant piping to completely connect the coils with the condensing units. The piping shall consist of precharged lines with quick couplings. Suction piping shall be insulated with foam plastic insulation threaded on and sealed. Support the piping with Unistrut hangers. C. Provide a liquid line filter dryer and a sight glass at each coil. D. Provide a drain line from each coil to the floor drain. ' 2.11 PACKAGED AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS A. The air cooled condensing units shall be of the self contained packaged type suitable for outdoor mounting. Each shall be factory assembled complete with refrigeration system, condensing coils, fans, controls, etc. all in a rigidly constructed and finished housing. The condensing unit shall be connected to the remote cooling coil. The units shall be mounted as shown on the drawings. B. The refrigeration system shall be of the hermetically sealed type utilizing Freon as a refrigerant. It shall be of the air cooled type with the refrigerant condensed in copper coils with aluminum fins. C. The fan in each unit shall be direct driven with motor of the permanently sealed lubrication type. D. Each unit shall have minimum performance characteristics as tabulated on the drawings. It shall be furnished with the manufacturer's standard thermostatic, manual, and safety controls, and shall be completely internally wired. Each shall be as manufactured by Lennox, Trane or Carrier. 1 E. Each compressor shall be guaranteed for 5 years. F. Hail Guard Screen: Entire condenser coil shall be covered with 18 gauge, 1/2" mesh galvanized wire screen. 2.12 HEAT PUMP — SPLIT SYSTEM A. Inside Unit: ' 1. Furnish and install where shown on the plans direct expansion fan coils equipped with electric heater either packaged or assembled from separate sections. Unit shall operate properly in vertical upflow position and is to be installed with ductwork. Capacities shall be as scheduled. ' 2. Unit enclosure shall be insulated and constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked enamel. Large front service access panels shall provide easy access to all components. Reversible filter rack shall have duct connection flanges and be equipped with permanent type filter that slides out for maintenance. 3. Fan shall be forward curved with double inlet, mounted on motor shaft, dynamically and statically balanced. The fan shall deliver scheduled cfm with required external static pressure. The multi -speed fan motor shall be factory lubricated, have internal overload protection and be resiliently mounted. Fan ' motor assembly shall slide out for service. 4. Cooling Coil shall have a face area scheduled and be constructed with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to nonferrous tubing with all joints brazed. Coil shall have factory installed; refrigerant metering ' EQUIPMENT Section 15.710 Page 6 device; refrigerant line fittings which permit mechanical connections; 2 condensate pans with primary and auxiliary drain connections on each. Electric heater shall be factory installed. Heater models over 10 kw shall have heating elements sequenced on and off in 5 kw increments, and shall be wired for 2 stage operation. All heaters shall be equipped with both thermal and current overload devices, and the required heating and cooling system controls including control circuit 24v transformer. B. Outdoor Unit: 1. Furnish and install an air to air electric heat pump with a Sound Rating Number (SRN) of 20 or less at full capacity. The unit shall be designed and tested for use with Refrigerant 22 and contain sufficient charge (R-22) for complete system. Brass service valves with refrigerant line fittings and service ports shall be located on exterior of unit. 2. Nominal unit electrical characteristics shall be as scheduled. 3. Total cooling capacity shall not be less than scheduled. Unit energy efficiency ratio (EER) shall be as scheduled or more at ARI conditions. 4. Heating capacity shall not be less than scheduled Btuh. 5. Outdoor coil shall be 2 rows deep with a nominal fm spacing of 16 fins per inch. Aluminum plate fins shall be mechanically bonded to aluminum tubing with all joints brazed. Coil shall be protected by vinyl coated grille. Factory installed coil refrigerant metering device shall be mounted on unit liquid service valve. Metering device internal components shall be removable for cleaning or replacement. 6. Outdoor unit fan shall be propeller type, direct driven, and arranged for vertical air discharge. Fan motor shall be factory lubricated, inherently protected and resiliently mounted. Twin speed fan motor shall automatically switch to high speed above 95 degrees F. and below 55 degrees F. outdoor temperature. 7. Compressor shall be of the welded hermetic type with internal vibration isolation and be covered with a shield to muffle operating sound. Compressor motor shall have both thermal and current sensitive overload device, and start assist device shall be standard on I phase units if required. Compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater and have internal high pressure protection. Compressor motor power input shall not exceed scheduled KW at specified conditions. 8. Controls shall be factory wired and located in a readily accessible location on unit swing out service door. Controls and protective devices shall include a liquid line low pressure switch, suction line accumulator and pressure relief device. An automatic defrost control shall be included to accomplish defrosting (only if coil saturated suction temperature indicated freezing temperatures) every 90 minutes for a period of not more than 10 minutes. Control wiring terminal board shall be designed to match indoor unit terminal board and accessory thermostat terminals for standardized point to point connection. 9. Accessories shall include indoor thermostat, outdoor thermostat, emergency heat relay, solid state time guard, service sentry, optimizer control, start capacitor and relay, coupler, liquid line filter dryer, precharged tubing packages. END OF SECTION I COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM Section 15.810 Page 1 ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, fixtures, trim, services, and accessories necessary and incidental to a complete system of compressed air piping throughout the areas as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. The system shall be connected to the air compressor and shall be run to the various outlets as shown on the drawings and as specified herein or ' required. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 PIPING ' A. Schedule 40 black steel with banded malleable iron 300# fittings. B. All compressed air lines, mains, branches, valves, risers and fittings shall be run approximately as is shown on the drawings and as specified herein. This Contractor shall provide suitable needle gate valves at all outlets and a threaded male nipple for attachment of owners equipment. Furnish and install dirt pockets with one half (1/2") valve blowdown at ends of air mains and other necessary points for removing condensation from piping. Brace all air piping. C. Special attention shall be given to leaks at fittings and valves, and all valves shall be thoroughly examined and tested for leaks at the stems. 2.02 AIR COMPRESSOR A. The air compressor shall be a single acting one or two stage reciprocating type. It shall be mounted on a receiver, belt driven, air cooled, and powered by an electric motor and shall be furnished with a hooded inlet filter and muffler. Cylinders shall be separately cast from each other and bolted to the crankcase for ease of maintenance. Valves shall be finger type and shall be readily accessible. A discharge line check valve shall rthe be included in the piping from unit. The compressor shall be unloaded every time the unit stops, regardless of cause of shutdown. The unloader mechanism shall operate as a function of speed. B. Delivery shall be 17 SCFM at 150 psig. Required compressor operating pressure shall be 150 psig. be drip induction 40 -degree C. Manufacture: Quincy or equal. The drive motor shall of the standard open proof C rise type. It shall be 7.5 HP suitable for the electrical characteristics noted. D. Regulation: Automatic start -stop control with raintight pressure switch. COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM Section 15.810 Page 2 E. Discharge Receiver: The compressor unit shall be mounted on an 120 gallon size ASME receiver. It shall include pressure gauge; safety service and drain valves; and a sturdy support base. Provide with a relief valve, and automatic drain valve with electric timer. F. Starter: Magnetic motor starter with overload protection in each phase. G. Provide crankcase heater for each compressor. H. Before starting compressor, this Contractor shall check to see that crankcase contains oil. 1. Motor shall be totally enclosed and fan cooled. J. Couplings: Couplings shall be Hansen 3000 quick couplings. K. Filter Dryer: Provide as shown on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEM A. All compressed air lines, mains, branches, valves, risers and fittings shall be run approximately as is shown on the drawings and as specified herein. This Contractor shall provide suitable needle gate valves at all outlets and a threaded male nipple for attachment of owners equipment. Furnish and install dirt pockets with one half (1/2) valve blowdown at ends of air mains and other necessary points for removing condensation from piping. Brace all air piping. B. Special attention shall be given to leaks at fittings and valves, and all valves shall be thoroughly examined and tested for leaks at the stems. 3.02 FABRICATION OF PIPING JOINTS A. Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. If tightening fails to stop leaks, remake the joint. 3.03 TESTING A. The Contractor shall pressure test the entire system at 150 psig for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. Repair all leaks. END OF SECTION I TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Section 15.901 Page 1 ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air and water, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory ' conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were 1 made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. 1 F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire 1 temperature survey period. G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated 1 for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: 1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. ' 4. Flow rate and temperature at each coil and heating device. 5. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. ' 6. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. I. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this ' shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Section 15.901 Page 2 When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.03 INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. In addition, provide schematic wiring diagrams of each piece of equipment framed under glass and mounted on the wall as directed. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. END OF SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 16.010 Page 1 ' PART1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE ' A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SCOPE A. The work included in Division 16 of the Specifications includes all electrical work, interior and exterior to the project. Provide all materials, labor, equipment, transportation, tools, permits, fees, and supervision to ' install, test and make operational the complete electrical systems. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide and install products in accordance with referenced standards. Comply with the standards listed in each section. ' B. Codes: The electrical work shall be in accordance with latest edition of the following codes: 1. National Electrical Code 2. National Electrical Safety Code ' 3. , Life Safety Code 4. Uniform Building Code 5. City of Lubbock Electrical Ordinance 6. State of Texas codes as applicable 7. National Fire Protection Association 8. Other codes as referenced in individual sections ' C. Material Standards: Materials and equipment shall be listed or labeled as defined in Article 100 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), by a testing agency acceptable to the Owner. Materials shall be marked for their intended use. D. Permits and Inspections: Obtain all permits and inspections for the installation of the work and pay all charges incident thereto. Deliver to the Owner all certificates of inspections issued by authorities having jurisdiction. ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Provide submittals for equipment as listed in each Section. B. Submittals shall include descriptive material, catalog sheets, diagrams, performance curves, and charts published by the manufacturer to show conformance with drawings and specifications. tC. Provide complete electrical for Lighting characteristics all equipment. submittals shall include photometric data. ' D. Submittals shall be clearly marked showing the individual item offered E. All electrical submittals shall be bound in a book, indexed by specification section, and certified that they ' have been checked by the contractor. F. Omissions from the submittal of any material which has been shown on the drawings or specified, does not ' relieve the contractor from famishing and installing the item. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 16.010 Page 2 1.05 WARRANTY A. The contractor warrants the material and equipment installed to be free from defects for a period of one year after acceptance by the owner. All defects in labor or materials occurring during this period shall be repaired or replaced. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. The electrical equipment specified and shown on the drawings is based on information available at the time of design. If the equipment furnished has different electrical requirements, the contractor shall make the required changes to the wire, conduit, controls, overcurrent protection, switchgear, and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the owner. The cost for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this Specification under which the equipment is furnished. 2.02 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be UL labeled where a Standard exists for the product. If the product does not bear the UL label, the manufacturer shall submit documentation from an independent testing laboratory, acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, showing evidence that the product is suitable for the installation. B. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products in current production of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. C. All materials shall be new and free from defects. Materials of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer. D. All material and equipment shall be installed, applied, and handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and standards. E. Where no specific material is mentioned, provide the required material from a reputable manufacturer. The material shall conform to the project requirements, and shall be suitable to the engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Fabricate, erect, and install the complete electrical systems in accordance with accepted good practice by qualified personnel who are licensed and experienced in such work. Proceed in an orderly manner so as not to impede the progress of the project. 3.02 DRAWINGS A. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic. Carefully coordinate the work with structural, architectural, and mechanical conditions. Make adjustments to avoid conflicts. B. The locations shown for electrical equipment is approximate and not intended to convey the exact details of installation. Exact locations are to be determined in the field by actual measurements. 'J f'. I I 7 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 16.010 Page 3 C. The contractor is responsible for fitting the equipment and material into the space. If the equipment furnished requires different space conditions than shown on the drawings, the contractor shall arrange for such space and shall submit a drawing indicating the exact details of installation prior to construction. D. Do not scale drawings. Layout electrical equipment using dimensions obtained from the manufacturer of the equipment and from field measurements. 3.03 SITE INVESTIGATION A. Prior to submitting bids, visit the site and become aware of existing conditions that may affect the cost of the project. Include in the bid the work required to remove, extend, relocate, reconnect or modify existing equipment or systems, and to restore them to their original condition. 3.04 MATERIALS HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Handle materials in accordance with the manufacturer's standards and recommendations. B. All materials, except those specifically designed to be installed outdoors, shall be stored in an enclosed, tarry building or trailer. Protect all stored equipment from damage. Remove damaged materials from the premises. C. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the environmental conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment and materials. They shall be protected from water, direct sunlight, cold and heat unless designed for such conditions. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Sleeve or cut all openings walls, floors, ceilings and roof required to install the electrical work. B. Do not cut structural members unless specific permission is granted by the structural engineer. C. Patch all openings after installation of the work, and repair any damage caused by this activity. Restore the surface to its original condition. 3.06 PAINTING A. Refer to PAINTING Section of these Specifications. B. Touchup scratched or marred surfaces of all electrical equipment with paint obtained from the equipment manufacturers specifically for that purpose. Remove all oil, dirt, grease and foreign material before painting and prepare the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where plywood backboards are used to mount equipment, paint backboards with two coats of light gray semi -gloss paint. 3.07 TESTING A. Provide all field-testing specified in the individual specification sections. 3.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide record documents as required in Division 1 of the specifications. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 16.010 Page 4 3.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance manuals as required in Division 1 of the specifications. B. Before final inspection, instruct the owner's personnel in operation of the systems under this Division. Use the Operation and Maintenance Manual as basis for the instruction. Review the contents of the manual in detail and explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Prepare and insert additional data in the manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. END OF SECTION 0 u RACEWAYS Section 16.110 Page I PART1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all conduits and fittings. 1.03 SCOPE A. Furnish and install all conduits, wireways, raceways, and fittings for all systems interior and exterior to the building. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Allied No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) d. C-80.1 Rigid Galvanized Conduit Killark C-80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Carlon UL 1 Flexible Metal Conduit 3. PVC UL 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings Robroy Industries UL 6 Rigid Metal Conduit UL 651 Rigid PVC Conduit UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing UL 1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit UL 360 Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) RN1 Externally PVC Coated GRS and IMC Conduit PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Metal Conduit and Fittings: a. Allied b. Wheatland c. Appleton d. Raco e. Killark f. O -Z / Gedney 2. PVC Conduit and Fittings: a. Carlon b. Certainteed 3. PVC Coated Metal Conduit: a. Robroy Industries RACEWAYS Section 16.110 Page 2 b. Levy 4. Support Channel: a. Unistrut b. Kindorf 2.02 METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS) : 1. Rigid, threaded, galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with protective coating inside. 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): 1. Rigid, threaded, thin wall steel, galvanized outside with protective coating inside. 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) : 1. Steel tubing, galvanized outside with slick corrosion resistant interior coating. 2. Steel set -screw couplings and connectors in dry locations; steel compression couplings and connectors in wet locations. D. Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips. Aluminum is not permitted. 2. Flexible conduit shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. 3. Connectors shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips with PVC cover extruded over the exterior to make the conduit liquidtight. 2. Shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. 3. Shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity, liquidtight. 2.03 PVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. PVC conduit shall be Schedule 40 unless noted otherwise. B. Exterior underground conduit encased in concrete ductbank shall be type EB. C. Conduit fittings shall be the same material as the conduit supplied by the same manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR RACEWAYS A. Types: Exposed exterior raceways shall be rigid galvanized steel, or intermediate metal conduit. Conduits containing underground branch circuits or control wiring shall be direct buried schedule 40 PVC, or wrapped galvanized steel. Underground conduits containing secondary service conductors shall be concrete -encased ducts or wrapped galvanized steel. 1 RACEWAYS Section 16.110 Page 3 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Perform all excavation work required in connection with the installation of the work under this Section. After the electrical work has been installed, tested and approved, backfill all excavations with suitable material under the direction of the Architect. Include the cutting of all sidewalks, streets, and other pavement and repairing the openings in them to return the surface to approximately its original condition. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND DUCTS A. Concrete between ducts and earth, and with 3 inches of concrete between adjacent ducts. Provide at least 30 inches of cover from top of concrete encasement to finished grade. Install with uniform slope for ' drainage, with no low pockets to collect water. B. Build up duct banks completely in the trench before any concrete is poured, using factory -fabricated plastic ' conduit spacers in staggered configuration to provide the proper horizontal and vertical spacings, and B. Perform all excavations of every description of whatever substances encountered and to the depths required for installation of the work under this Division. C. During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all excavated material not required or suitable for backfill. Control grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations, and remove any water accumulating therein by pumping. ' D. Make trenches the necessary width for proper installation of the lines. E. Grade the bottom of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for conduit or duct on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. F. Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets, drives or other existing pavement, cut the pavement as required. Hold the size of the cut to a minimum consistent with the work to be accomplished. After the installation of the new work is completed, and the excavation has been backfilled, patch the paving using materials to match those cut out. Take care that the patches are level with the original surfaces and thoroughly bond with them. 3.03 BACKFILLING A. Carefully backfill trenches with earth, sandy clay, soft shale or other approved material free from large ' clods of earth deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6-inck layers. B. Do not use broken concrete or pavement as backfill material. ' C. Settling the backfill with water is permissible and will be a requirement when so directed. D. Re -open any trenches improperly filled or where settlement occurs to the depth required for proper compaction, then refill, mound over and smooth off. E. Install continuous identification tape as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION. ' F. Backfill open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved as specified above except that the entire depth of trench shall be backfilled in 6 -inch layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density of not less that 95% Standard Proctor in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value and permit paving the area immediately after backfilling as completed. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND DUCTS A. Concrete between ducts and earth, and with 3 inches of concrete between adjacent ducts. Provide at least 30 inches of cover from top of concrete encasement to finished grade. Install with uniform slope for ' drainage, with no low pockets to collect water. B. Build up duct banks completely in the trench before any concrete is poured, using factory -fabricated plastic ' conduit spacers in staggered configuration to provide the proper horizontal and vertical spacings, and RACEWAYS Section 16.110 Page 4 securing the entire assembly with heavy twine or cord to insure rigidity during pouring. Do not use metal for this purpose. Assemble conduits with staggered adjacent couplings so that no two couplings will lie in the same transverse plane, in a vertical direction. Use solvent cement as directed by the duct manufacturer in making up all joints. C. Fabricate duct runs with standard factory -made fittings, elbows and accessories. Make all changes of direction, horizontal or vertical, with long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 feet, except that manufactured bends at or near the ends of the runs may be used on short runs of 100 feet or less. Make long sweep bends with one or more curved or straight sections of duct. Manufactured bends, where permitted, shall have a minimum radius of 10 times the nominal duct diameter. Where manufactured ducts of greater than a 30 -degree angle are required, use rigid hot dipped galvanized steel conduit bends. During construction, protect partially completed duct lines from entrance of dirt and debris by means of suitable factory -made duct plugs. After completion of installation, seal all ends of spare ducts with factory made duct plugs. D. Where ducts enter in or under buildings, change from plastic duct to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade outside the structure, using suitable factory adapters. At the point of change of materials, extend the concrete envelope to enclose at least 2 feet of steel conduit. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings buried in earth as specified elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits. E. Install the concrete envelope for a given duct run in one pour where possible. Use concrete of 3000 psi compressive strength. In pouring concrete, do not allow heavy masses of concrete to fall on ducts. Direct flow of concrete down sides of assembly to bottom, forcing it to flow to center of bank and then to rise up in middle, filling all spaces uniformly. Spade concrete liberally and carefully with a long, flat slicing bar between vertical rows to eliminate voids. Weight or brace the duct bank assembly if necessary, to prevent the assembly from floating. Because of the fact that plastic conduits may expand considerably during construction, each run and its concrete envelope shall be installed starting at one end and proceeding toward the other with any necessary adjustments to length being made at the end toward which the work is progressing. F. After ducts are installed, complete with envelope, and before pulling any cable, pull a mandrel through every duct to check for alignment and clear passage. Use an iron -shod mandrel with a diameter of 1/4 inch less than the nominal size of the duct and a length equal to the duct diameter. Mandrel shall have a leather or rubber gasket slightly larger than the duct hole. After testing the ducts with the mandrel, pull a stiff -bristled brush through each duct until it is clear of all particles of earth, sand or gravel; then install duct plugs immediately. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT A. Install at least 30 inches below finished grade unless noted to the contrary. Assemble and install raceways in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make joints with couplings and solvent cement. Fabricate bends of 30 degrees or more with factory -made elbows, or make field bends with proper heating equipment. Bends showing signs of overheating or flattening are unacceptable. Ream ends of all conduit before joining. B. "Snake" plastic conduit in trench, from side to side, with a complete cycle every 40 feet to allow for expansion and contraction. Maintain this configuration during backfilling. C. Where conduit turns up out of earth, or floor slabs, change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade and outside of such structures. Do not extend any plastic conduit above grade. Make similar change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit at connections to underground pull or junction boxes. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings buried in earth as specified elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits. ' RACEWAYS Section 16.110 Page 5 ' 3.06 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT A. All steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. Wrap such conduit with 3M Company 0.020 -inch thick No. 51 "scotchrap" vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double thickness wrap. Remove ' all oil, grease and dirt from conduit with a suitable solvent, and clean and dry conduit before wrapping. If conduit is pre -wrapped in the shop and then cut and joined on the job, wrap all joints on the job, overlapping pipe wrapping 3" on both sides of joints. ' 3.07 INSTALLATION OF PVC COATED CONDUITS A. During installation, visually examine the conduit for cuts. Patch these areas with a paste containing a PVC ' solvent obtained from the conduit manufacturer. The patch shall be built up to the original thickness of the coating and feathered out on all sides of the damaged area a minimum of 1/2 inch to provide a complete bonded seal over the damaged area. ' 3.08 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified ' otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, or on roofs shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit, intermediate metal conduits or electrical metallic tubing. Conduits installed below grade in slabs or buried in earth shall be PVC or PVC ' coated rigid galvanized steel or wrapped rigid galvanized steel. C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is ' crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final connections to all ' motors, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. ' E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1" from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. F. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by ' galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. G. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. ' H. Pull Lines: Install pull line in each empty conduit, including the conduits installed for telephone and computer data systems. t RACEWAYS Section 16.110 Page 6 Penetrations: 1. Fire Wall and Smoke Partitions: Penetrate fire walls through sleeves. Seal the opening between the conduit and sleeve with UL rated fire foam sealant to maintain the fire rating of the wall. 2. Roof. Conduits shall penetrate the roof in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and architectural specifications. Make penetrations in asphalt roof in pitch pocket filled with asphaltic compound. Coordinate locations of all roof penetrations with Architect and Division 15 contractor. J. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire -resistive and installed to meet requirements of the UL Fire Resistance Directory. 3.09 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. B. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. C. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. D. Dry -Wall Partitions: Conduits installed in dry -wall partitions shall be firmly secured to the studs. Where conduits rise vertically in the wall, secure at locations near the top and bottom of the run and at intermediate points as necessary to comply with NEC requirements. Support multiple conduits from metal studs using pre -assembled bar hanger assembly consisting of support bar, retaining clips and conduit straps. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect raceways as recommended by the manufacturer to insure coatings, finishes, etc. are not damaged. Repair or replace damaged raceways. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.11 CLEANING A. Upon completion, clean all installed materials of foreign paint, dirt and construction debris. END OF SECTION u WIRES AND CABLES ' Section 16.120 Page 1 PARTI GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, ' and Supplemental Conditions. ' 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data sheets on all conductors and cables and wire. ' 1.03 SCOPE A. Under this Section, furnish and install all building wires and cables (600 volts and below) complete with connectors and terminations. Exterior branch circuits and feeders are also included in this section. ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Referenced Standards. Provide products which comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) ' 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) UL 44 Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables UL 83 Thermoplastic -Insulated Wires and Cables UL 486 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs UL 510 Insulating Tape PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable. 1. Insulated Cable: a. Southwire Co. b. Senator Wire & Cable Co. c. Okonite d. Anaconda e. Pirelli Cable Co. ' 2. Electrical Spring Connectors: a. Scotch b. Ideal c. Buchanan ' 3. Compression Connectors: a. Burndy ' b. Scotch c. Ilsco 4. Mechanical Connectors: a. Burndy b. Scotch c. Ideal 5. Insulating Kits: ' a. Raychem b. Scotch WIRES AND CABLES Section 16.120 Page 2 6. Insulating Tape: a. Scotch 2.02 CONDUCTORS A. Type: Soft drawn copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, free from flaws and imperfections. Conductors no. 10 and smaller shall be solid. Conductors larger than no. 10 shall be stranded. B. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, otherwise specified in other Sections, or otherwise required by the National Electrical Code, conductors shall have type THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation. C. High Temperatures: Use type RHH or RHW-2 for wiring in proximity to boilers and other devices subject to high temperatures. D. Markings: Conductors shall be marked on the surface with rated voltage, size, type, and manufacturer. The size shall be repeated at intervals not exceeding 24 inches, with the remaining data repeated at intervals not exceeding 40 inches. E. Performance: Conductors shall be electrically continuous and free from shorts or grounds. All open or shorted conductors shall be replaced. All conductors with damaged insulation shall be removed and replaced with new conductors free from defects. F. Conductors and cables installed open in ceiling plenums shall be plenum -rated. 2.03 JOINTS AND SPLICES A. Solid Conductors (No. 10 AWG and smaller): U.L. approved, screw -on, electrical spring connectors, 600 volt, 105C, insulated. B. Stranded Conductors (No. 8 and Larger): Crimp type compression connectors properly selected for the conductor size and material. All connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools as recommended by the manufacturer. Insulate the splice with an insulating kit providing 600 volt, 90C rating. 2.04 COLOR CODING A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. 2. Equipment grounding conductors, no. 6 awg and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Sizes larger than no. 6 awg shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of green tape, or green adhesive labels. B. Neutral Conductors: 1. Neutral conductors shall be white or natural gray. 2. Sizes no. 6 awg, or smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of white tape or stripped tape or white adhesive labels. C. Phase Conductors: 1. Conductors no. 10 awg and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of colored tape, or colored adhesive labels. f' 7 L i i i WIRES AND CABLES Section 16.120 Page 3 2. 120/208 volt, 3 phase system: Phase A — Black Phase B — Red Phase C — Blue 3. 480 volt, three phase system: Phase A — Yellow Phase B — Brown Phase C — Orange PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING: Install all wiring in raceways unless specified otherwise. A. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Use U.L. listed cable pulling compound where necessary. B. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. C. Wire Sizing: 1. No wire shall be smaller than no. 12, except for signal and control circuits, or lighting fixture taps. 2. Receptacle and motor branch circuits — Use no. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. 3. 120 volt, 20 amp lighting branch circuits - Where the length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use no. 10 conductors; otherwise use no. 12. 4. Where more than three current -carrying conductors are installed in the same conduit or raceway, the conductors shall be increased in size as required to maintain the required ampacity after application of the adjustment factors of NEC Table 310-15(b)(2)(a). D. Joints and Splices: 1. Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes, wiring troughs and other enclosures permitted by the NEC. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. 2. Do not splice conductors in panelboards, safety switches, or motor control enclosures. 3. Conductors for use with insulated spring connectors shall be twisted together prior to application of the connector. E. Terminations: Tighten electrical connections and terminations in accordance with the manufacturer's published values. A calibrated tool shall be used to insure proper torque values. F. Bundling: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets, pullboxes and the like using nylon straps made for this purpose. Bundle conductors larger than no. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. G. Identification: Refer to ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION. 1. Mark conductors to clearly identify each circuit by number. Securely attach to each conductor in each junction box, pull box, panelboard, etc. 2. The cover of each junction box and pullbox shall be marked with the designations of each circuit contained therein. 3. Where colored plastic tape is applied to conductors for identification, use half -lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from the terminal points and in boxes where taps and splices are made. Apply the last two turns with no tension to prevent unwinding. Use 1 -inch wide tape applied to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. WIRES AND CABLES Section 16.120 Page 4 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. Tests and procedures shall be accordance with the applicable IPCEA standards. Furnish all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing. Submit test data to the engineer on data sheets in a format that can be compared with future testing. All test data shall be included in the project operating manual. 1. Test wires and cables for electrical continuity and short circuits. 2. Prior to terminating, check each service and feeder conductor with megohmmeter to determine the insulation resistance with respect to ground and other phases. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts do for 1 minute. 3. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturer's recommended values using calibrated torque wrench. 4. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. END OF SECTION BOXES ' Section 16.130 Page 1 PARTI GENERAL ' 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, ' and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. data for Submit catalog sheets all boxes. ' 1.03 SCOPE A. Furnish and install electrical boxes in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. I . National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) ' No. 514 Outlet boxes and fittings No. 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) ' No. OS 1 Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports No. FB 1 Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies PART2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable. 1. Sheet Steel Outlet and Device Boxes: a. Raco b. Steel City ' c. Appleton 2. Cast Metal Device Boxes: ' a. Crouse Hinds b. Appleton c. Pyle National 2.02 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. All boxes shall be UL listed. B. Sheet steel boxes shall be not lighter than 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication. C. Cast metal boxes shall be cast iron or cast alloy. D. Outlet boxes for switches, receptacles and communications use shall be 4" square with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the BOXES Section 16.130 Page 2 device requires a larger box. Box depth shall be as required by NEC for device and wiring volume requirements, but not smaller than 1-1/2 inches. E. Boxes for devices mounted flush in concrete block walls shall be single gang masonry boxes, 3-1/2" deep. F. Boxes installed in poured concrete shall be concrete -tight type. G. Boxes for surface mounted or pendant fixtures shall be 4"octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth. H. Boxes for flush mounted fixtures shall be 4" by 4" size with cover installed above the ceiling and accessible by removing ceiling panel or fixture. Connection to fixture shall be with flexible conduit. I. Boxes for interior exposed work shall be cast metal boxes (Cast iron or cast alloy). J. Boxes for outdoors shall be cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. 2.03 PULLBOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet steel galvanized inside and outside , with galvanized covers. B. Dimensions shall be as required by NEC for the number, size and locations of conduits entering the box. C. Boxes installed above ceilings shall be accessible by removing ceiling panels, installing access door in hard ceiling, or flush mounting the cover on the ceiling. D. Boxes installed flush in walls in finished areas shall have overlapping trim with hinged door and lock to match the appearance of electrical panelboard. E. All boxes shall have covers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. B. All pull and junction boxes shall be accessible after construction is complete. Install access panels in the construction as required to make the box accessible. C. Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. D. Where outlet box on grid ceiling supports surface or suspended fixture, provide box with fixture stud and secure the box to ceiling members with steel channel. E. Outlet boxes for devices shown back to back shall be offset a minimum of 6 inches. F. All boxes shall have covers and unused conduit openings shall be covered. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Circuit numbers shall be marked on junction box covers as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION section. END OF SECTION ' WIRING DEVICES Section 16.140 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, ' and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit product data sheets for all wiring devices. ' 1.03 SCOPE A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated complete with coverplates. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. ASSURANCE 1.04 QUALITY A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) ' 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices WD 6 Wiring Devices — Dimensional requirements 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) ' UL 20 General -Use Snap Switches PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Hubbell 2. Leviton 3. Pass & Seymour 4. General Electric 5. Bryant ' 2.02 CLASSIFICATION A. All wiring devices shall be UL listed. B. All wiring devices shall be specification grade. ' 2.03 COLORS A. All devices shall have white finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. WIRING DEVICES Section 16.140 Page 2 2.04 SWITCHES A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish switches in colors specified above even though the numbers listed may not contain the correct suffix. I . Single pole wall switch — 1221. 2. Three-way wall switch — 1223. 3. Four-way wall switch — 1224. 4. Pilot -lighted switch — 1221 -PLC. 5. Momentary contact switch — 1556. 2.05 RECEPTACLES A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish receptacles in colors specified even though the numbers listed may not contain the correct suffix. 1. Duplex receptacle: 20 amp, 125 volt, grounding (NEMA 5-20R) — No. 5362. 2. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacle (GFI) — No. GF -5362. 3. Special Receptacles: Furnish devices in the NEMA configuration listed on the drawings. 2.06 WEATHERPROOF DEVICES A. Provide the specified device in weatherproof cast box with gasketed coverplate. 2.07 COVERPLATES: Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, including telephone, signal outlets and other devices. Coverplates shall be one piece single or multi -gang type as required. A. Indoor Flush Devices: 1. Type 302 stainless steel. 2. Where installed in masonry walls, use jumbo plates. B. Indoor Surface Devices: For indoor devices use zinc -coated metal with rounded or beveled edges, same size as the box. C. Outdoor devices: TayMac PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring devices plumb and level. B. Install SPST wall switches with OFF position down. C. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. E. Install devices within outlet boxes to allow coverplates to be in full contact with the wall on all sides. F. Replace broken devices and plates with new. ' WIRING DEVICES Section 16.140 Page 3 ' G. Clean all paint, plaster and dirt from wiring devices and plates. 3.02 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. B. Devices noted to be installed above counters or millwork shall be installed above the backsplash. C. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by architect, install devices at the following heights ' above finished floor: DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHT Wall switch 48" Receptacle 18" Telephone outlet 18" ' 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. At each wiring device mark the inside of the coverplate with the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. Use black indelible marker. 3.04 FIELD TESTING ' A. Energize lighting circuits and operate each wall switch to verify proper operation. B. Energize receptacle circuits and test each receptacle with circuit tester to verify the device is energized and ' has correct polarity. C. Test TRIP and RESET buttons on GFI receptacles. In addition, test GFI receptacles with a GFI tester to verify it trips at 4ma of ground current. END OF SECTION GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 16.170 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, ' and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all grounding equipment. 1.03 SCOPE ' A. Furnish and install grounding equipment and systems as specified herein. Also refer to, and comply with specific grounding requirements contained in other Sections. ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) t Standard 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System ' 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Grounding Products: a. Chance / Hubbell b. Copperweld Corp ' c. Erico Inc. d. Ideal Industries, Inc. e. ILSCO ' f. Kearney / Cooper Power Systems g. Lyncoln XIT Grounding h. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. i. Thomas and Betts ' j. Raco, Inc. k. Bumdy ' 2.02 CONDUCTORS A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: ' 1. Use insulated conductors that comply with WIRES AND CABLES Section. 2. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 16.170 Page 2 3. No. 6 AWG and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of conductor. Larger sizes shall be identified with color -coded plastic tape at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. B. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Insulated stranded cable complying with WIRES AND CABLES Section. C. Underground Ground Conductors: Bare conductors installed underground shall be tinned, stranded complying with ASTM B8. 2.03 GROUND RODS A. Ground rods shall be one-piece or sectional type, copper -clad steel, 5/8" in diameter by 10 feet long. 2.04 GROUND CONNECTORS A. Compression Connectors: 1. Suitable for direct burial, embedded in concrete, or above grade applications, equal to Bumdy Hyground. ' 2. Connectors shall be equivalent in current -carrying capacity to the maximum size copper conductors being joined. 3. Equipment shall be in accordance with the connector manufacturers recommendation. This shall ' include cable preparation, installaimtoo li sand dies, and the required number of crimps. i p F � i 57 .51 s 1 CQ ne S!` x rig his g14iriF P 1�1 4 jr;?_.1 11x1 a1, a#s } 1 aTt 4.�LP:4il)n}�k f.. gt s �= r� �;,E & i . °a1 r�.;€.iti��'�lstedO .u} t 3 '1 i�, d }a 1161 ,m• t;t s 1 } �,. i � � i•1` �e 1 :3 2.Abovegrad'p 3. Provide equipmen accordance with connector manufacturers recommendations for the application. C. Welded Connectors: 1. Exothermic -welded type, UL listed for grounding connections. 2. Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes, conductors and other items to be connected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICE GROUNDING A. Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding in accordance with the NEC. B. Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a common point within the metallic enclosure containing the main service disconnecting means. From the common point of connection of the service ground and equipment ground, run in conduit a combined service and equipment grounding conductor (grounding electrode conductor) without joint or splice to the grounding electrode system. At each end point of connection, attach the metal conduit containing the grounding electrode conductor to the grounding electrode, or bond the grounding electrode conductor to its conduit as it exits the conduit with a fitting selected for this purpose. Separate bonding jumpers are not permitted for bonding the conduit to the electrode. 1 I GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 16.170 Page 3 3.02 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. Ground rods ' B. Building steel C. Counterpoise 3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless 1 3.06 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NEC are indicated. A. Inspection: B. Install a separate, green -insulated, equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and each branch conduit. Visually verify proper grounding connections at the service entrance equipment. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with related phase and neutral conductors, and connect Visually verify proper connections to the grounding electrode system. ' to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate Visually verify proper grounding connections of separately derived systems. raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect the grounding conductors to Visually verify proper grounding connections at distribution panels and branch circuit panels. bare grounding bars in panelboards, and ground busses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. C. Install equipment grounding conductors in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. D. Install equipment grounding conductors in all flexible metal conduit and liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Ground Rods: ' 1. Drive 2 inches below finished rods until tops are floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. B. Grounding Building Steel: The building structural steel frame shall be grounded to the grounding electrode system. 3.05 GROUNDING SEPARATELY -DERIVED SYSTEMS A. Transformers: ' 1. Ground the secondary neutral and housing of each dry -type transformer. Connect these points together and run a common grounding conductor from their point of connection to the grounding electrode system. 2. Where this grounding electrode conductor is installed in metal conduit, bond the conduit to the conductor at the point of exit with a fitting approved for this purpose. 3.06 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspection: 1. Visually verify proper grounding connections at the service entrance equipment. 2. Visually verify proper connections to the grounding electrode system. ' 3. Visually verify proper grounding connections of separately derived systems. 4. Visually verify proper grounding connections at distribution panels and branch circuit panels. GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 16.170 Page 4 B. Testing: 1. Perform ground impedance measurements using the fall -of -potential method described in IEEE Standard 81. Instrumentation utilized shall be specifically designed for ground testing. 2. The testing shall be performed before the electrical distribution system is energized, and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after rainfall, and without moistening the ground. 3. The impedance -to -ground of the main grounding electrode system shall be 5 ohms or less. 4. Where tests show an impedance to ground of more than 5 ohms, take action to decrease this value to 5 ohms by driving and interconnecting additional ground rods, installing ground plates, or installing chemical electrodes. END OF SECTION I ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section 16.195 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE 7 A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, ' and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SCOPE A. Provide and install electrical identification for electrical conductors and equipment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). ' B. Comply with UL Standard 969. C. Comply with ANSI C2. D. Comply with NEMA WC -1 and WC -2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ' A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable. 1. W. H. Brady 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. Seton Nameplate Co. t 4. Panduit Corp. 2.02 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. ' B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates: 1. Melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16" thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches, and 1/8" thick for larger sizes. 2. White letters on black face for equipment connected to normal power system. 3. Attach with self -tapping stainless-steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive can be used where screws can not or should not penetrate the surface. ' 2.03 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color -Coded Plastic Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1-1/2" wide. B. Identification Bands: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters to show circuit identification. 7 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section 16.195 Page 2 2.04 UNDERGROUND LINE WARNING TAPE A. Permanent, bright colored, continuous printed, vinyl tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend indication type of underground line. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical identification products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC and OSHA. B. For items attached with adhesive, degrease and clean the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where items attach to surfaces that require painting, attach after completion of painting. D. Install signs at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. E. Identification on Raceways and Boxes: 1. Every box containing circuit wiring shall have the circuit numbers marked on the outside cover of the junction box. Use indelible marker with wide tip. Markings for normal circuits shall be black. 3.02 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION A. Apply conductor identification on each conductor in each box, enclosure, cabinet and panel. B. Refer to Section 16120 for color -coding of conductors. 3.03 MARKING EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND LINES A. During trench backfilling for power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above the line at 12 to 16 inches below finished grade. 3.04 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install engraved, plastic laminate sign on each unit of electrical equipment. This includes power, lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems unless the units contain their own self-explanatory identification. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with '/2" high lettering on 1-1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required). C. Text shall match the notations used on the drawings for identification. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION OF PANELBOARDS, SWITCHBOARDS, AND SWITCHGEAR A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign containing 3 lines of text. The top line shall be the panel name. The center line shall indicate the panel voltage, and the bottom line shall indicate the source of supply. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section 16.195 Page 3 B. Signs for equipment fed from the normal system shall have white letters on black background. C. An example of the required identifications is: Panel 4HA 277/480 Fed From Panel 4DP END OF SECTION 1 ' SAFETY SWITCHES Section 16.441 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL ' 1.01 NOTE ' A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: Submit the following information for review: 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short circuit rating. ' 4. Cable terminal size. 5. Fuse rating and type. ' 1.03 SCOPE A. Provide, install, and connect all safety switches shown on the drawings or required by codes. ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. ' 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) ' UL 50 Enclosures for electrical Equipment UL 98 Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) ' No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment PART 2 PRODUCTS t2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: ' 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer ' 3. General Electric 2.02 HEAVY DUTY SWITCHES ' A. Requirements: Provide and install safety switches as shown on the drawings or as required by NEC. Where code requires the installation of safety switches that are not shown on the drawings, provide and install the required switches. ' B. All switches shall be heavy-duty type. C. Switches shall be fusible or non -fusible as noted on the drawings or as required by codes. tD. Provide switches with the voltage and current ratings as shown on the drawings. C SAFETY SWITCHES Section 16.441 Page 2 E. Where safety switches serve as motor or motor starter disconnects, provide horsepower rated switches with auxiliary contacts to disconnect all power and control circuits. F. Construction: 1. Switch blades and jaws shall be plated copper. 2. Switches shall have a handle that is easily padlockable in the OFF position. 3. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the handle is in the ON position. 4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure base. 5. Switches rated 100A to 600A shall have reinforced fuse clips. 6. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. 7. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasible, positive quick -make / quick -break type. 8. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment. 9. Switches shall have line terminal shields. 10. Switches shall have CU/AL mechanical lugs. G. Enclosures: 1. Where installed indoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA I, general purpose type unless otherwise noted. 2. Where installed outdoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA 3R, raintight type unless otherwise noted. PART 3 EXECUTION k 'i i ; 3.01 INSTALLATION 'i� �y till R A. Install safety switches in accordance with manufacturernins' ctto and NEC requirements. B. Install adjacent disconnects at the same height. C. Install disconnects to maintain the required NEC clearances and working space. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install engraved plastic sign on each safety switch as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. The sign shall contain 3 lines of text. The top line shall identify the load served. The center line shall indicate the voltage. The third line shall indicate the source of supply. D. An example of the required identification is: AHU #2 480 V Fed From Panel PP 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each switch for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. ' SAFETY SWITCHES Section 16.441 Page 3 2. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND ' CABLES Section. 3. Verify fusible switches contain proper type and size of fuses. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. ' 2. Operate each switch ON and OFF four times to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuit and verify proper operation. r r !l END OF SECTION I DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS Section 16.460 Page 1 ' PARTI GENERAL 1.01 NOTE ' A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: ' 1. Drawing showing dimensions, wiring diagram and weight. 2. Transformers ratings: a. KVA b. Primary and secondary voltages. ' c. Primary and secondary continuous currents. d. Taps e. Impedance ' f. Insulation class and temperature rise. g. Sound Level 3. Certification that the transformers are constructed and tested in accordance with the referenced Standards. 7 C r F] 7 C 1.03 SCOPE A. Furnish, install, and connect all dry -type transformers shown on the drawings. The transformers covered by this Section are those having primary and secondary voltages of 600 volts or less. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C57.12.50 Ventilated Dry -type Distribution Transformers C57.12.51 Ventilated Dry -type Power Transformers 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) ST 20 Dry -type transformers for General Applications 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) No. 506 Specialty Transformers PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS Section 16.460 Page 2 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All transformers shall be UL listed and bear the UL label. B. Transformers shall be two -winding, self -cooled type. C. Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated KVA, for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year operation, with normal life expectancy as defined by ANSI C57.96. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Insulation Systems: 1. 3 — 15 KVA: 185 degree C insulation system based upon 115 degree C rise in 40 degree C maximum ambient. 2. 15 KVA and above: 220 degree C insulation system based on 150 degree C rise in 40 degree C maximum ambient. B. Core and Coil Assemblies: 1. Transformer core shall be constructed with high-grade, grain -oriented silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Maximum magnetic flux densities shall be substantially below the saturation point. Core laminations shall be tightly clamped and compressed. Coils shall be wound of electrical grade aluminum with continuous wound construction. 2. On units rated 9 KVA and below the core and coil assembly shall be completely encapsulated to provide a moistureproof and shock resistant shield. Taps shall be two (2) steps below nominal voltage in 5% increments. 3. On units rated 15 KVA and above the core and coil assembly shall be impregnated with non - hydroscopic, thermosetting varnish and cured to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture. The assembly shall be installed on vibration -absorbing pads. Taps shall be two (2) steps above and four (4) steps below nominal voltage in 2.5% increments. 4. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor. C. Enclosure: 1. Enclosures shall be made of heavy -gauge sheet steel. Transformers shall be equipped with a wiring compartment suitable for conduit entry and large enough to allow convenient wiring. 2. On units rated 9 KVA and below (encapsulated), the enclosure construction shall be totally enclosed non -ventilated, NEMA 3R, with lifting eyes. 3. On units rated 15 KVA and above, the enclosure construction shall be ventilated, drip -proof with lifting holes. The ventilation openings shall be protected against falling debris. Where installed outdoors, provide weather shields over the ventilation openings. 4. Enclosures shall be finished in medium gray, weather -resistant enamel. D. Sound Levels: Transformer sound ratings shall not exceed the following levels for self -cooled ratings: KVA Rating Sound Level 9 KVA and below 40 dB 10 — 50 KVA 45 dB 51 —150 KVA 50 dB 151 — 300 KVA 55 dB 301 — 500 KVA 60 dB 501 — 700 KVA 62 dB 701 — 1000 KVA 64 dB I DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS Section 16.460 Page 3 I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Dry -type transformers larger than 15 KVA shall be floor mounted, unless wall or suspension mounting is indicated on the drawings. Transformers 15 KVA and smaller shall be wall mounted. ' B. Floor mounted transformers shall be mounted on neoprene pads 5/8" thick for vibration and noise control. Wall mounted transformers shall have vibration and noise eliminator pads installed between the mounting brackets and wall. ' C. Where transformers are indicated to be suspended, construct a mounting platform of welded or bolted angle iron. Support the platform from building construction with steel rod hangers, with spring type vibration and noise eliminators interposed between the rods and platform. All vibration isolators shall be properly selected by their manufacturer for the specific duty involved. D. Install all conductors to'and from each transformer in flexible metallic conduit not less than 24 inches long. ' E. Install transformers in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions. Unless otherwise directed, install transformers with a minimum of 12 inches clear on all sides for ventilation. ' F. Ground the secondary neutral of dry -type transformers as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. ' G. Adjust the tap settings to deliver nominal rated voltage. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Install engraved plastic sign for each transformer as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. ' B. The sign shall contain 3 lines of text. The top line shall the transformer name. The center line shall indicate the source of supply, and the bottom line shall indicate the panel served. C. An example of the required identification is: ' Transformer T 1 Fed from Panel HDP ' Serves Panel LDP 3.03 FACTORY TESTING A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed. All tests shall be in accordance with ANSI and NEMA Standards. ' 1. Ratio tests at rated voltage connection and at all tap connections. 2. Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection. 3. Applied potential tests. 4. Induced potential test. ' 5. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS Section 16.460 Page 4 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each transformer for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 2. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors at each transformer as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. 3. Visually verify proper clearance and ventilation space around each transformer. B. Testing: 1. Test cable connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings. Record voltage readings and tap setting. 3. Megger primary and secondary windings. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS Section 16.470 Page 1 PARTI GENERAL ' 1.01 NOTE ' A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit the following information for review: A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: ' 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer ' 3. General Electric 2.02 PANELBOARD REQUIREMENTS A. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. The building main panel shall be listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment". 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short circuit rating. 4. Cable terminal sizes. ' 5. Catalog product sheets. 6. Nameplate Identification. ' 1.03 SCOPE A. Provide, install, and connect all electrical panelboards shown on the drawings and specified herein. Panels shall be complete assemblies including enclosures, bussing, overcurrent protective devices, and trim. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) ' 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes UL 67 Panelboards UL 489 Molded Case Breakers / Enclosures ' 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) PB -1 Panelboards No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment AB -1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers PART PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: ' 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer ' 3. General Electric 2.02 PANELBOARD REQUIREMENTS A. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. The building main panel shall be listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment". PANELBOARDS Section 16.470 Page 2 C. Panels shall be arranged for flush mounting, surface mounting, or free-standing as indicated on the drawings. D. Panels shall have the voltage ratings, continuous current ratings, and interrupting ratings as scheduled on the drawings. E. All panelboard accessories and features scheduled or specified on the drawings shall be provided. F. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where the device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where the device is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. G. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic indicating type unless otherwise noted. H. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. I. Connect all overcurrent protective devices with sequence phasing. J. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a plastic covered cardholder on the inside of the panelboard door. K. Install laminated plastic nameplate for each panel as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Cabinets: 1. Rigidly constructed of galvanized sheet steel per UL 50 Standards. Corners shall be overlapped or welded with the edges turned over to receive trim. 2. Where two -section panels are required, both sections shall be same height, and have fully rated bussing in separate cabinets connected by conduit nipples. B. Trim: 1. Fabricated from sheet steel meeting the requirements of UL 50 Standards. Trim shall have medium gray enamel finish suitable to serve as the final finish, or suitable to receive field painting. 2. Trim door shall have rounded corners and edges free from bunts. 3. Surface trims shall be the same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box %" on all sides. 4. Furnish each door with substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. Doors more than 48" high shall have auxiliary fasteners. Provide each lock with 2 keys. All locks shall be keyed alike. 5. Unless noted otherwise, interior mounted panels shall have type 1 fronts (one piece with hinged door). 6. Exterior mounted panels shall be type 3R in accordance with UL 50 requirements. All doors shall be gasketed and be equipped with a tumbler type vault lock and two additional trunk type latches. C. Bussing: 1. All bussing shall be plated copper sized in accordance with UL Standards to limit temperature rise on any current -carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. ' PANELBOARDS Section 16.470 Page 3 ' 2. Main lugs and main breakers shall be UL approved for copper or aluminum conductors sized to accommodate the conductors to be terminated. Provide oversized lugs to terminate conductors that are increased in size due to voltage drop or temperature requirements. 3. A bolted ground bus shall be included in all panels. Where scheduled, an isolated ground bus shall also be included. ' 4. A full size (100%) neutral bar shall be furnished for panels shown with neutral. Neutrals shall have suitable lugs for each outgoing feeder requiring neutral connection. Where scheduled, provide 200% ' rated neutrals with lugs for oversized neutral conductors. 2.04 DISTRIBUTION PANELS — CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE A. Distribution panels with bolt -on devices contained therein shall have fully rated interrupting ratings to interrupt fault current values indicated on the drawings. Breakers shall be molded case type. ' B. Molded case circuit breakers shall provide overcurrent and short circuit protection with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. Also provide ground fault protection where scheduled. C. Circuit breakers shall operate by toggle -type handle and shall be quick make, quick -break switching mechanism that is mechanically trip -free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. ' 2.05 DISTRIBUTION PANELS — FUSIBLE SWITCH TYPE A. Distribution panels shall have fusible switches for fuses in the ratings shown on the drawings. B. Fusible switches shall be quick -make, quick -break design. Units 30 thru 600 amperes shall be rated not less than 200 kAIC with rejection -type fuse clips for Class R fuses. Units 800 and 1200 amperes shall be rated for 200 kAIC with Class L fuse provisions. C. Fuses shall be field installed. 2.06 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELS ' A. Bolt -in type, heavy duty, quick -make, quick -break, single- and multi -pole molded case circuit breakers with toggle handles that indicate when unit has tripped. ' B. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type with common handle for all multiple pole breakers. C. Breakers shall be UL listed as type SWD for lighting circuits. ' D. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency lights and fire alarm panels. ' E. Breakers shall be fully rated to interrupt the fault current values scheduled on the drawings. F. Provide breaker accessories as scheduled on the drawings. tG. Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42 branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes with each box containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices. PANELBOARDS Section 16.470 Page 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, NEMA PBLI and NEC standards. B. Panelboard enclosures shall be securely fastened to the structure with a minimum of four bolts or screws. C. Clean dirt and foreign paint from exterior and interior of all panels. D. Do not splice conductors in panels. E. Conductors not terminating in panelboard shall not extend through or enter panel enclosure. F. A single conductor shall terminate in each lug on a circuit breaker. Do not terminate multiple conductors under a single lug. G. During installation carefully balance the electrical loads between the various phases. This may require connecting loads to circuits different from the circuit numbers indicated on the drawings. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in panelboards as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install panelboard nameplate identification as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. Provide individual circuit identification for each circuit with a type -written directory of circuits mounted in a holder on the inside of the panel door. The directory shall identify the type or name of the load served along with the room names and numbers. The room names and numbers shall be the final names and numbers assigned to the space and not those used on the drawings. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each panel for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. 2. Visually inspect breakers and switches for broken parts and loose terminals. 3. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. 4. Visually verify panelboard trim fits properly with no gaps between the trim and panel enclosure. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Operate each breaker ON and OFF to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. 4. When the facility is under normal use, amperage measurements shall be taken on each phase conductor in each panel feeder, and any unbalances shall be corrected to a point that no conductor load shall be more than 5% high or low (maximum unbalance of 10%). END OF SECTION ' FUSES Section 16.477 Page 1 ' PART1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE ' A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Catalog data for each type fuse. ' 2. Time -current curves for fuses 3. Current limiting characteristics and let-thru current curves. ' 1.03 SCOPE A. Provide and install all fuses necessary for leaving the installation complete and in working order. ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) ' UL 198B Class H Fuses UL 198C Current -Limiting Fuses UL 198D Class K Fuses UL 198E Class R Fuses 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) FU -1 Low voltage cartridge fuses ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable. 1. Bussmann ' 2. Littlefuse 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Provide fuses of types, classes, and current ratings as required by NEC. Voltage ratings shall be suitable for the systems to which the fuses are applied. B. Fuses shall be UL listed and labeled. 2.03 FUSES C. Class L: Fuses larger than 600 amperes shall be Class L, current -limiting, time delay type, with minimum interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. FUSES Section 16.477 Page 2 D. Class RKI: 600 amperes and below, current -limiting, time delay type, minimum interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Unless otherwise noted, fuses larger than 600 amperes shall be Class L current -limiting, time delay type. Fuses 600 amperes and below shall be Class RKI, current -limiting time delay type. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in each fusible device after installation is complete and prior to energizing equipment B. Where the spacing of fuse clips in equipment is greater than required by the proper size of fuse, use suitable fuse reducers to fit the fuses. C. Place a fuse identification label showing type and size of the required fuses inside the door of each enclosure requiring fuses. END OF SECTION i ' LIGHTING Section 16.510 Page 1 ' PART1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE ' A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all lighting products. B. Submit complete photometric data for each fixture. 1.03 SCOPE ' A. This Section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete interior -and exterior lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. ' 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) No. 101 Life Safety Code 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C82.1 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts C82.4 HID Lamp Ballasts 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) ' LE 4 Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 542 Lampholders, Starters for Fluorescent Lamps UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 1 UL 1029 HID Lamp Ballasts UL 1570 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures ' UL 1571 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures UL 1572 HID Lighting Fixtures PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Ballasts: a. Advance b. Lutron ' c. General Electric d. Valmont 2. Lamps: ' a. Osram/Sylvania b. General Electric c. Philips LIGHTING Section 16.510 Page 2 2.02 LUMINAIRES A. Provide and install a lighting fixture on each lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations scheduled on the drawings. Should any designation be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes of suffixes corresponding to the feature called for. 2.03 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. Fixtures shall bear UL label. B. Lenses shall be 100% virgin acrylic with nominal thickness of 0.125 inches. 2.04 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Use ballasts from manufacturers listed above. Generic ballasts from other manufacturers are not acceptable. 1. General Requirements: a. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated for full light output. b. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10%. c. Sound Rating: A d. Power Factor: 95% minimum 2. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: a. CBM labeled b. Encapsulated c. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. 2.05 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Lamps: 1. Color Temperature: 3500 K 2. CRI: 86 or higher 3. Lamp types as scheduled on the drawings. B. HID Lamps: 1. Metal Halide Color Temperature: 3600 K 2. CRI: 70 or higher 3. Phosphor coated unless otherwise specified. 4. All metal halide lamps used in open fixtures where people may be exposed to ultraviolet radiation shall be the type that will automatically extinguish when the outer envelope is broken. This feature shall be provided regardless of the lamp code listed in the fixture schedule. 5. Provide HID lamps with correct burning position selected for the fixture orientation and mounting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached. ' LIGHTING Section 16.510 Page 3 ' B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Refer to the ceiling installer's layout for exact location. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels.' Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. ' C. Fixtures in Plaster Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster ceiling. ' D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. E. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. END OF SECTION 1 0 C� 1 ' LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Section 16.670 Page I ' PART1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE ' A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit data for all products. ' B. Submit shop drawings detailing the lightning protection system showing air terminal locations, conductor routing, connections and grounding. 1.03 SCOPE A. The work shall include the design and installation of a complete Master Labeled Lightning Protection System. Work includes layout, design, securing approval from all authorities having jurisdiction, and the furnishing and installation of all components. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) ' No. 780 Lightning Protection Code 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 96A Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems ' 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C2 B. The system shall be installed by a fun actively engaged in the installation of Master Labeled Lightning ' Protection Systems, and shall be so listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Robbins Lightning Protection Co. 2. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. ' 3. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. 4. Erico 5. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Corp, ' 2.02 MATERIALS A. All materials used in the installation shall be labeled or listed by Underwriters Laboratories for use in ' Master Labeled Lightning Protection Systems. 0 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Section 16.670 Page 2 B. Generally all materials shall be of copper and/or copper -bronze. In locations where system components are mounted on aluminum surfaces, aluminum materials shall be used to avoid electrolytic corrosion of the dissimilar metals. C. Materials shall be sized in accordance with the material requirements of NFPA 78 and UL 96A. Class I materials shall be used for systems on structures not exceeding 75 feet in height and Class II materials shall be used for systems on structures exceeding 75 feet above grade. 2.03 AIR TERMINALS A. Air terminals shall project a minimum of ten inches above the area protected and shall be located at intervals not exceeding 20'-0" along ridges and around the perimeter of flat or gently sloping roofs. Flat or gently sloping roofs exceeding 50'-0" in width shall be protected with additional air terminals located at intervals not exceeding 50'-0" in the flat or gently sloping area. Air terminals shall be location within two feet of roof edges and outside corners of protected areas. Air terminal spacings exceeding these dimensions are permitted so long as the area protected lies within a zone of protection. B. Air terminals shall be installed for stacks, flues, mechanical equipment, and other object not located within a zone of protection. Non-metallic objects or metal objects having a metal thickness of less than 3/16" require the installation of air terminals and required conductors. Objects having a metal thickness 3/16" or greater shall be connected to the lightning protection system per code requirements using main size conductor and connector fittings having 3 square inches of surface contact data. C. Air terminal mounting bases shall be of cast construction and securely fastened to the structure in accordance with code requirements. 2.04 CONDUCTORS A. Main conductors shall be sized in accordance with the material requirements above and shall provide a two-way path from each air terminal horizontally or downward to connections with ground terminals. Conductors shall be free of excessive splices and sharp bends. No bend of a conductor shall form an included angle of less than 90 degrees nor have a radius of bend of less than 8 inches. Conductors shall be secured to the structure at intervals not exceeding 3'-0". B. Down conductors shall be of copper and shall be concealed in the exterior wall construction. Down conductors shall be spaced at intervals averaging not more than 100 feet around the perimeter of the structure. In no case shall a structure have fewer than two down conductors. C. In the case of structural steel frame construction, down conductors may be omitted and roof conductors shall be connected to the structural steel frame at intervals averaging not more than 100 feet around the perimeter of the structure. Connections to the steel frame shall be made with bonding plates having 8 square inches of contact or by exothermic weld connections. D. Roof penetrations required for down conductors or for connections to structural steel framework shall be made using thru-roof assemblies with solid bars and appropriate roof flashing. Conductors shall not pass directly through the roof. Roof flashing compatible with the roofing system shall be furnished and installed by the roofing contractor. 2.05 GROUNDING A. Connect down conductors to ground rods connected to the counterpoise as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. B. Connections to the ground rods shall be exothermic welded connection. ' LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Section 16.670 Page 3 ' C. Common grounding of all ground mediums entering the building shall be ensured by interconnecting to the system using main size conductors and fittings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. Install lightning protection systems in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and in compliance with applicable installation standards. B. All wiring and down conductors shall be concealed within the building construction. Down conductors shall be installed in Schedule 40 PVC conduits. ' C. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections to avoid sharp bends and loops. D. The entire installation shall ' be made by an accredited installer of the manufacturer of UL listed lightning protection equipment. E. Upon completion of the installation furnish the Master Label issued by Underwriters Laboratories for this ' system. I END OF SECTION Resolution No. 2001-RO510 December 3, 2001 Item No. 38 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a contract for the water utilities electrical shop building & equipment operations, by and between the City of Lubbock and Hunter Construction Company of Lubbock, Texas, and related documents. Said contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 3rd day of December , 2001. 1 , INDY SI ON, A OR ATTEST: Rebecca Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Victor Kilman, rchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: William de Haas Contract Manager/Attorney gs:/ccdocs/Contract-Hunter Construction Co.res Nov 21, 2001 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP, BUII.LDI.NG-& EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING ITB #266-01/RS SCK T R A T I M-1 G LICENH-Dj) ')! TEXAS DATEIAP ey CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock Texas i 2 No Text ITB #266-01/RS, Addendum #2 City of Lubbock ADDENDUM #2 PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ITB #266-01/RS ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING .�+ 162513 TH STREET Water Utilities Electrical Shop LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 Building and Equipment Operations FAX:(806)775-2164 Building http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us MAILED TO VENDOR: November 6, 2001 CLOSE DATE: November 7, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. ARCHITECTURAL ITEMS: ITEM #1: SHEET A2.0, ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE, SHOP 100, there will not be a suspended ceiling in .-� this area, this area will be open to the structure above. ITEM #2: SPECIFICATIONS, METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS, 07.610, delete the entire section 1.05 WARRANTIES. This specification section ONLY applies to the metal canopies on the Equipment Operations Building. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: �., Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 266-01/Rsadd2 r— P" City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 162513 TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 hftp://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ITB #266-01/RS, Addendum #1 ADDENDUM #1 ITB .#266-01 /RS Water Utilities Electrical Shop Building and Equipment Operations Building MAILED TO VENDOR: November 2, 2001 CLOSE DATE: November 7, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. MPE ITEMS: 1. SHEET M2: GAS UNIT HEATER DETAIL, secure the hanger rods to the bottom of the new runway crane girder indicated on details 7/A3.0, 8/A3.0 and 3/S3. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us 266-01/Rsaddl THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Ron Shuffiel Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR TITLE: WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS ITB NUMBER: 266-01/RS PROJECT NUMBER: 9799.8107 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT INDEX ►* 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND 5. PERFORMANCE BOND r* 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT { 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 10. SPECIFICATIONS r� No Text r*+ NOTICE TO BIDDERS Oft ITB #266-01/RS Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 I" o'clock p.m. on the 7th day of November, 2001, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project with a budget ¢` amount of $400,000.00: .+ "WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. v Bids are due at 2.00 o'clock p.m. on the 7th day of November, 2001, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids on the 3rd day of December, 2001 at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or su erior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre-bid conference on 31 st day of October, 2001 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Engineering Conference Room 107, Lubbock, Texas. V Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at Lubbock City Hall, 1625 131h Street, Lubbock, Texas, Purchasing Department, Room L-04. Plans and specifications may be obtained by the bidder for a $100.00 refundable deposit per set. Plans and specifications may be obtained from Adling Associates Architects, 2529 74th Street, Lubbock, TX 79423, Phone: (806) 748-0880. Plans and specifications will be shipped at the bidder's expense. If bidder requires overnight or second day expedited method parcel shipment, the bidder will incur shipping charges and must furnish the name of the service to be used and the bidder's account number. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. "" The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre-bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775- 2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK VGVw I VICTOR KILMAN PURCHASING MANAGER GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID DELIVERY TIME & DATE 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later than 2:00 p.m. CST, the 7th day of November, 2001 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "ITB #266-011RS, WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: Victor kilman, Purchasing Manager City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing Department. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an addendum. PRE-BID MEETING For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non -mandator pre-bid meeting will be held at 10:00 a.m. October 31 st 2001 in Engineering Conference Room 107 Lubbock Texas. All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre-bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre-bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre-bid meeting. .-s 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department. Such addendum issued by the Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid (ITB) and will age having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO become part of the bid pack VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in 1 2.1 t 2.2 .-s 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department. Such addendum issued by the Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid (ITB) and will age having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO become part of the bid pack VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in 1 any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in preparing responses. 3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders. 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If bidder does not notify Purchasing Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 5 BID PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a bid. 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. €^" 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 6.2. The City .of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to ., release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal -v position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the { Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. 6.3 Marking your entire bid CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. 7 LICENSES, PERMITS, TAXES The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may be required to pay. *+ 8 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 8.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 2 w 8.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this bid. 9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 9.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 10 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 11 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 11.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. 11.2 NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: RON SHUFFIELD, SENIOR BUYER +* City of Lubbock 1625 131h Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 ^+ Fax: (806) 775-2164 Email: rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us 12 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 12.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within TWO HUNDRED SEVENTY (270) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. t ' 12.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, p p g, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. k 13 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. No Text r ®w 14 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements F" contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 15 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. i 16 GUARANTEES 16.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 16.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data .; (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be r recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 16..3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and r- under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. .� 16.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 17 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 18 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any PMR and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: """ 4 No Text (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 19 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 19.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 19.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 20 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the i. project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by r Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 21 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES t r The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, L and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of rl barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of � d acceptance of the project. 22 EXPLOSIVES 22.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use y utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. k - - 22.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. r. 22.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 23 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 5 No Text i P^ i..r 24 INSURANCE 24.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. r,= 24.2 The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the ,> alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 25 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 25.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The +` bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159x, Vernon's Annotated Civil I Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the Cit of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary t� P 1 9 Y Y P Y service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is t approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. �25.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 25.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such ti condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 26 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS a, t ' The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the PIN6 copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which _.> schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. "^ 27 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 28 PREPARATION FOR BID 28.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be f ' correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly .� and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. 28.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a „bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the farm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If t the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. jg. The bid shall be executed in ink. 28.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and p, endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 28.3.1 Bidder's name 28.3.2 Bid for (description of the project). 28.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 28.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. 29 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS °* Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. • 7 Q) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered r " incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 30 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS e� The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations w deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock �*+ reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the t City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: '^ (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. '* (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. e.. 31 BID AWARD 31.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole discretion. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid based on the total bid for Bid ., Items _through plus the sum of any Alternate Bids the City may select. 31.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may result in disqualification of the bid. 31.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to r determine possible Anti -Trust violations. 31.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. 31.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may be applicable. 31.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS INVITATION TO BID. No Text BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT DATE: November 7, 2001 r PROJECT NUMBER: #266-01/RS - WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING Bid of Hunter Construction Company (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar „�. with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and ,. labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. BASE BID #1: New Electrical Building 40 .-MATERIALS: 5,����Ct T�(+dt� ($k'n�J* SERVICES: in IFK .�G�� �'tt� �C O' Q+ �• TOTAL BASE BID #1:E -A Li—f4*01a- cry $ ��• ✓ ) `;• BASE BID #2: New Equipment Operations Building ;MATERIALS:forty-two thousand four hundred dollars--------------- ($ 42,400.00 ------------- ) SERVICES: TWenty-eight thousand four hundred dollars------------ ($ 28.400.00------------ ) TOTAL BASE BID #2: Seventy thousand eight hundred dollars-------- ($ 70.800.00------------- ) e y OPTION #1: Add one bay to the Electrical Shop Building. The end wall condition shall be part of the base bid. ,,MATERIALS: Sixteen thousand one hundred & sixty dollars---------- ($ 16,160.00--------------) SERVICES: Eleven thousand dollars------------------------------ ($ 1'1000.00------------- ) ""'TOTAL OPTION #1: Twenty-seven thousand one hundred & s; y dol larj 27,16n -nn ------------- OPTION #2: Add the bridge crane to the Electrical Shop Building. All structure for the bridge crane shall be a P -art of the base bid. MATERIALS: Fifteen thousand six hundred and ninety—five dollars ($15,695.00------=-------) ERVICES: Ten thousand dollars--------------------------------- ($10, 000.00------------- ) TOTAL OPTION #2:Twenty—five thousand six hundred & ninety—five --($ 25,695.00------------- ) ..PTION #3: Add the bridge crane to the Electrical Shop Building with the added bay under alternate #1. '"MATERIALS: Fifteen thousand six hundred & ninety—five dollars--- ($15,695.00------------- ) SERVICES: Ten thousand dollars-------------------------------- ($10, 000.00------------ ) OTAL OPTION #3: Twenty—five thousand six hundred & ninety—five-- ($ 25,695. 00 ------------ ) Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 270 (TWO HUNDRED SEVENTY) consecutive lendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to ay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $0 (ZERO) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set torth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract "documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the dding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days """*ter the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to ')mmence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on hich he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or ,rtified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable ithout recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all cessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for N/A Dollars ($ N/A ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Pierre PPrrPnt- of girl----------- Dollars ofR�,a ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the /ent the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of opoceipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the idersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract Documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. e►� Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be Date: Novepber 7, 2 O1 changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM �✓ /" PRIOR TO BID OPENING. CAutli� rized Signature ""kTTEST: Jim D Hunter Presidant (Printed or Typed Name) F.-Secr ry Joanne Thomasson Hunter Construction Company .. Company Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Post Office Box 2587 Address r'kddenda No. one Date 11 /2jLl Lubbock Lubbock kddenda No. Date City, County Addenda No. Date Texas 79402 ,,Addenda No. Date State Zip Code Telephone: poo - 7A9-4319 Fax: 81& 793-6367 M/WBE Firm: Woman Black American His anic American Asian Pacific American Native American Other (Specify) BIDDER• Hunter Construction Companj°" PC Box 2587 Lubbock, TX 79408-2587 r 3 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS �. Minority Owned Yes No 1 Lone Star Dirt & Paving X 2 Royal Concrete, Inc. X 3 3rd Generation Construction X Miller Construction X 4 RPM Drywall X 5. Cverhead Door Company X 6. 7 KK Glass, Inc. X 8. Hargrove Painting X C 9. ��� ����• 10. r 3 CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder And Attached to Bid Submittal —� 1, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If 1 am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within fifteen (15) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, -e furnish a valid inwanc certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. 7 _2'i- 74 �lr 7 f u Jim D. Hunter, President C ntr; ctor (Signature Contractor (Print) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: Hunter Construction Company (Print or Type ) ,., CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: P.C. Box 2587 Lubbock, TX 79408 Name of Agent/Broker: Gallagher InWest Address of Agent/Broker: P.C. Box 53910 City/State/Zip: Lubbock TX 79453 .� Agent/Broker Telephone Number: ( 806 ) 785-1988 Date: November 7, 2001 NOTE TO CONTRACTOR If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165. BID #266-01/RS WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron ShufPield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)i75-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@maii.ci.lubbock.tx.Us THANK YOU, CITY'OF LUBBOCK Ron Shuftfel Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. RFCFTVED i Nnv 2 2p BY: IA_�+_ 206-011Rsaddl 11 / vol zUril 14: 07 000 (4u u / 44 ALL11`IU A55U1:1A i t5 iAQt Ul Roy -OZ -01 11;17am From -CITY Of LUFIK-PURCHASING 000776ZI64 T-660 P.01/01 F^802 n'g 0266-01/RS, Addendum X11 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ts ADDENDUM #1 ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING ITIS #266-011RS 162513E STREET LUBBOCK TEXAS n wa1 Water Utilities Electrical Shop FH: (806)775-2167Suildin FAx:taas���5.216zlea � and it ui ment 0 trite:l/purchasing.Cl.lubbock.tx.us Building sn MAILED TO VENDOR: November 2, 2081 CLOSE DATE: November 7, 2001 @ 2:80 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any .,, item called for In the ITS documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shalt remain in effect. MPE rT M4• I. -SHEET M2: GAS UNIT HEATER DETAIL, secure the hanger rods to the bottom of the new runway crane girder indicated on- details 7/A3.0, 81A3.0 and 31S3. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron ShufPield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)i75-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@maii.ci.lubbock.tx.Us THANK YOU, CITY'OF LUBBOCK Ron Shuftfel Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. RFCFTVED i Nnv 2 2p BY: IA_�+_ 206-011Rsaddl 4 ry INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST P.O. Box 85563, San Diego, CA 92186-5563 BID OR PROPOSAL BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, Hunter Construction Company . (hereinafter called the Principal), and INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, a corporation organized and doing business under and by virtue of the laws of the State of California, and duly licensed for the purpose of making, guaranteeing or becoming sole surety upon bonds or undertakings required or authorized by the laws of the State of Texas as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called the obligee) in the just and full sum of Five Percent of Greatest Amount Bid -------- Dollars ($------ (5%)--------------� lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby bind ourselves and our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT WHEREAS, the above bound Principal as aforesaid, is about to hand in and submit to the obligee a bid or proposal dated November 7, 2001 for r" Water Utilities Electrical ShoD Building and Equipment Operations Building in accordance with the plans and specifications filed in the office of the obligee and under the notice inviting proposals therefor. NOW, THEREFORE, if the bid or proposal of said principal shall be accepted, and the contract for such work be awarded to the principal thereupon by the said obligee, and said principal shall enter into a contract and bond for the completion of said work as required by law, then this obligation to be null and void, otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, neither Principal nor Surety shall be bound hereunder unless Obligee prior to execution of the final contract shall furnish evidence satisfactory to Principal and Surety that financing has been firmly committed to cover the entire cost of the project. Signed, sealed and dated: f - November 7, 2001 /1 Principal % (Seal) J' D. Hunter, Prdsident PR INSURANCE OMPANY OF THE WEST by Kevin J unn Attorney -in- Fact ICWTX 409 (06192) r� No. 0001740 ICW GROUP Power of Attorney Insurance Company of the West The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Insurance Company of the'West, a Corpoiaton duly"organized under the laws of the State of Califomia, The Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Arizona, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Companies'),'do hereby appoint KEVIN J. DUNK; FRED "DAVIS, CARA D. HANCOCK, MIIZE HENTAORN, RON STROMAN AND HAROLDBINGGELI their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact with authority to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers this 16th day of January, 2001. asYMl(Y�, t0i8bA &9SEALq c o r v Gtr 9yloan���at' a�OM � John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST THE EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President State of California County of San Diego } ss. On January 16, 2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Public, personally appeared John L. Hannum and John H. Craig, personally known to me to be the persons whose names are;subscribed to the within instrument, and acknowledged to me' that they executed the same in their authorized capacities, and that by their signatures on the instrument, the entity upon behalf of which the persons acted, executed the instrument. Witness my hand and official seal. COMM. #1257540 U NOTARYPtl$L1C-CALWORNlA. SAN DIEGO COUNTY tAy CRmmissron Expite$ MARCH i 9, 2004 Norma Porter, Notary Public RESOLUTIONS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed, sealed and notarized with facsimile signatures and seals under authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors, of each of the Companies: "RESOLVED: That the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, together with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, are hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney appointing the person(s) named as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. _ RESOLVED FURTHER: That the signatures of the officers making the appointment,and the signature of any officer certifying the validity and current status of the appointment, may be facsimile representations of those signatures; and the signature and seal of any notary, and the seal of the Company, may be facsimile representations of those signatures and seals, and such facsimile representations shall have the same force and effect as if manually affixed. The facsimile representations referred to herein maybe affixed by stamping, printing, typing, or photocopying." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolutions were duly adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of the Companies, and are now in full force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand this 7th day of November 2001 John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-877-1111 and ask for the Surety Division. Please refer to the Power of Attorney Number, the above named individuals and details of the bond to which the " " () power is attached. Far information or filing claims; please contact Surety Claims, ICW Group, 11455 El Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 or call (858)350-2400. PAYMENT BOND Qh�D C�Et' BEST RATING LICENSED 14 TEXAS DATE ,/SY W" Bond No. 184 49 64 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021 (a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of THREE HUNDRED SEVENTY SIX THOUSAND SIX HUNDRED FORTY TWO AND N0/100 ------ -=---- Dollars ($ 376,642.00 )lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, -the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract DECEMBER , 2001 , to BID #266-01/RS - WATER UTILITIES ELE, & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING the Obligee, dated the 3RD day of CAL SHOP BUILDING and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond Is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021 (a) of the Texas Government Code, -and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 7TH day of DECEMBER 2001 INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST Surety *By: KE IN J. DUNN, ttorney-In-Fact (Title) By: (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates KEVIN J. DUNN an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST Surety * By: KEVIN J. DUNN , Attorney -In -Fact Approved as to form: City of Lubbock City Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing opa that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy :of power of attorney for our files. plot ..fit ICW GROUP_ Power of Attorney Insurance Company of the West The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS That Insurance Company of the West, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of California, The . uraanc@ _ate Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Arizona, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State_of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Companies'% do hereby appoint KEVIN J. DUNN, FRED DAVIS, CARA D. HANCOCK, MIKE HENTHORN, RON STROMAN AND HAROLD, BINGGELI their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with authority to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents..,_ IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers this 16th day of January, 2001. �prMN),`y tN•Uq '�O ext. N SEAL a 4�t•aMa'* q�'t 1.t�a '�oyr � John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary State of California County of San Diego ss. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST THE EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President On January 16; 2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Public, personally appeared John L. Hannum.and John H._Craig, personally known to me to be the persons whose names are subscribed to therewithin instrument, and acknowledged to me that they executed the same in their authorized capacities, and that by their signatures on the instrument, the entity upon behalf of which the persons acted, executed the instrument. Witness my hand and official seal. NORMA PORTSR COMM. #7257540 NOTARY pUt3L1G-GACIf ORM111A MySANMECO,COUNtY Cnrvxni5ssion Expikes MARCH la, 2044 Norma Porter, Notary Public RESOLUTIONS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed, sealed and notarized with facsimile signatures and seals under authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of each of the Companies: 'RESOLVED: That the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, together with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, are hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney appointing the person(s) named as Attorney(s)-in-Fast to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. RESOLVED FURTHER:, That the, signatures of the officers making the appointment, and the signature of any officer certifying the validity and current status of the appointment, may be facsimile representations of those signatures; and the signature and seal of any notary, and the seal of the Company, may be facsimile representations of those signatures and seals, and such facsimile representations shall have the same, force and effect as if manually affixed. The facsimile representations referred to herein may be affixed by stamping, printing, typing, or photocopying. CERTIFICATE, I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolutions 'were duly adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of the, Companies, and are now in full force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand this 7th dayof December2001 t� John. H. Craig, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-877-1111 and ask for the Surety Division. Please refer to the Power of Attorney Number, the above named individual(s) and details of the bond to which the power is attached For, mforniaUon or filing claims please contact Surety Claims ICW Group, 11455 El Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 or call (858) 350-2400. W PERFORMANCE BOND m-* D CHECK BEST RATING , LICENSESJ0,1 TEXAG SATE Sy Bond No. 184 49 64 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021 (a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of THREE HUNDRED SEVENTY SIX THOUSAND SIX HUNDRED FORTY TWO AND NO1100-------------- Dollars ------------Dollars ($376,642.00 ) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind �. themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 3RD day of DECEMBER , 2001 , to BID #266-01/RS -WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2263.021 (a) of the Texas Government Code; and'ail liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with, the provisions of said article to the same extenf as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 7TH. day of DECEMBER ____, 2001 INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST AUNONS4CT4COMPANY Surety " By: KEVIN J. DUNN , Attorney -In -Fact (Title) \tsy: (Title) By: (Title) i The undersigned surety company represents that it Is duly qualified to do business In Texas, and hereby designates KEVIN J. DUNN an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST Surety ----- K IN J. DUNN, Attorney -In -Fact Approved as to Form - City of Lubbock By: Ci y Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. Eff.7—A Www No. 0001740 ICW GROUP Power of Attorney Insurance Company of the West The Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:, That Insurance Company of the West, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of California, The Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Arizona, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the_State. of Texas,.(collectively referred to as the "Companies"), do hereby appoint KEVIN J. DUNN, FRED DAVIS, CARA D. HANCOCK, MIKE HENTHORN, RON STROMAN AND HAROLD BINGGELI their true and lawful Attorneys) -in -Fact with authority to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers this 16th day of January, 2001. oo+�►'w+o,, �NaUq'� INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST •�otro c�`�opP0�r4y°.040 THE EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY SEAL „ n INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY 6 Y r �t.� �V 9�sCNA1�gDe' • ac,ra,uufan �y1 xad �, �,� u John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary John L. Hannum, Executive Vice President State of California County of San Diego ss. On January 16, 2001, before me, Norma Porter, Notary Public, personally appeared John L._Hannum and John H. Craig, personally known to me to be the persons whose names are subscribed to the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that they executed the same in their authorized capacities, and that by their signatures on the instrument, the entity upon behalf of which the persons acted, executed the instrument. _ Witness my hand and official seal. NORMA PORTER " �U �. , • Cy M(ARf#Sf,102f15E7x5p4ireD 1TARY PU8LiC CAtFOlsi A DCNMSADCOCOUNT1 i 9, 2004 Norma Porter, Notary Public RESOLUTIONS .. This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed, sealed and notarized with facsimile_signatures and seals under authority of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of each of the Companies: "RESOLVED: That the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, together with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, are hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney appointing the person(s) named as Attomey(s)-in-Fact to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the signatures of the officers making the appointment, and the signature of any officer certifying the validity and current status of the appointment, may be facsimile representations of those signatures; and the signature and seal of any notary, and the seal of the Company, may be facsimile representations of those signatures and seals, and such facsimile representations shall have the same force and effect as if manually affixed. The facsimile representations referred to -herein may be affixed by stamping, printing, typing, or photocopying." CERTIFICATE 1, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Insurance Company of the West, The Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolutions were duly adopted by the respective Boards of Directors of the _Companies, and are now in full force. - 7th Decemb'2001 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand this day of John H. Craig, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-877-1111 and ask for the. `Surety Division. Please refer to the Power of Attorney Number, the above named individual(s) and details of the bond to which the power is attached., For information or filing claims, please contact Surety Claims, ICW Group, 11455 El Camino Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 or call, _(858) 350-2400. �pLL ` "" N " ' MW IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint; You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, .rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of. insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX # (5 12)475.-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute- concerning `yourpremium or about a claim you should -contact the agent or the company first.. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: own This notice is for information only. and does not become `a part or condition of the attached document. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE A OREL CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANC u/oe_Z001 .noouooe (806) 785-1988 FAX (806) 785-2155 CERTIFICATE IS I88UED AS MATTER OF MWORMATION ONLY ANO CONFERS NO PON THE CERTIFICATE , Gallagher invest HOLDER- TINS tfiCtlfflcATE NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR THE COVERAGE BY THE POLICIES BfetAW. r P. 0. Box $3910 ALTER Lubbock. Texas 79453 *SURERS A14bRDM COVERAGE suReo Hunter construct on Company INSURER A: Mid!Cont neat; 'C48Val ty Y ' Mutual (Hymn Staves) P.O. Box 2587 INSURERS: Fir CO. General star dennity(7arret) Lubbock, TX 79408 MBLaiER R Texais Work CoMp. Fend a E; Firemns Fund OEM—) _ .:DIYERADES OVE THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE SM MSU9 TO THE MORED NAbW, ABFOR THE POWY INDICATED. NpryYRHSTANDWG MAY BE WWD OR ANY REQUsit'JY EW. TEAM OR CoMnON ORNY AOONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUWNT WISH RESPICT TO WHM THIS IFICATE MAY PERTAIN. THR INSURANCE AFFORDLO 8Y THE POLICIES C>ESCRI D FIEREIN IS 5U8JECT TO ALL THE TIRM."DAWSKM AND CONDRIONS OF SUCH POLICES. AGMSATE LUT; $"9" MAY HAVE I'W �RDIiCID BY PAIDCLMAS. ramor weYRANCE FD7LIDY NUTatiNDT LIMIT 4GL51694 03/31/x001 03/31/2002 EACNOCCURRENCE 5 1000 0lMEmuAlum FM OAM 09 (Anyone fim) 5 ]Lira X COMLRMIAL GENERAL LIABILITY S EXP (Any one pawn) S .000 CLANS MADE 0=11 L.:.1 PERSONAL. a ADV INJURY S 1000 PERSONAL tA CA RAL AGGREGATE S 2 000 GENT AGGREGATE OMIT APPLIES PER:PRODUCTS - COMPIOP AGO S 2 000 POLICY m LOC 4AUTaRotruLIASIm PA6400396 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 cowmaDSINGLE LIMIT s 1000 ANY AUTO X ALL owma AUTOS 9ClIEDULED AUTOS 8 B t�q N : K X HIRED AUTOSYs�URY S X NawowNED Auras PRDPERiV DAMAGE S AUTO ONLY _ EA AC IDENT S EA ACC S RARJ14[ tA�61t'Y Nr aura RA ow'"A"Y.- ADti S - 010""LLARLIMf IXG376037 03/31/2001 03/31/ F-+cHOCCURRENCE a 1,000.00 AGGREGATE $ X OCCUR ❑ CLAIMS MADE C s DEDUCTIBLE X RETENTION S 10,000S 1roRluNs OOr1111smTmAtm TSF4ZOSIG 03/31/2001 03/31/ X v L uYlrrs DI:L EACH ACCIDENT $ I 000 /T1rtowav ukb Lny E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEI s 1 000 D E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1 O00 uiitders' Risk 197700341 03/31/2001 03/31/ 0 43,000,000 Per 3dwite E 1,000 Deductible orerslumoweLoei►TLouwaxTousD�caLuswasAoam sr araoDDsnuaYnPr�w. anovlswRs _ ro act: 49799.8107 Wditional Insured & Waiver of Subrogation included on can rat A Auto; �ftb lity policies is favor included all f certificate holder " required by written contract: WaTvjr of SubIrd,0046 on policies in favor of certificate holder as repaired by written contPatt. CERTIFICATE HOLDER AootnonlLL m unw. msumm L"mL- CANCE TM , .,.. ; :... , •i1 ONOWlp A 11 Or TN . en MMS ss oANOOA.R0 MR=THE sriMIT�TDDD�lOATi .: 6MFA10VALOOWAMORT011ft . 10 ; WPI VYIIDD irN TO i Tm".1m HOLDm t saw Ira V"WT' City of Lubbock Wr IP rAU TO � M+ h i No 01IL!"I ON on LIUL" aPANM 17PON ooMlll' oR R!►RRIMATDVl1i. PO Box 2000 ImfT1TOLN n M lum Lubbock. TX 79457 Ron siraima, ac, W�.JJtit01w� ACORD 26.8 (TW) w. IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder In lieu of such endomement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, jor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by. the policies listed thereon. DATE (MM/DDNY) ACOR , CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 12,06,2001 PRODUCER (806) 785-1988 FAX (806) 785-2155 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Gallagher Inwest ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR I P. 0. Box 53910 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Lubbock, Texas 79453 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURED Hunter Construction Company INSURER A: Mid—Continent Casualty Company P.O. Box 2S87 wsURERB: Fireman's Fund Co. Mutual(Myron Steves) Lubbock, TX 79408 INSURER C: General Star Indemnity(7arret) INSURER D: Texas Work Comp. Fund INSURER E: Fi remans Fund (McGee) - :OVERAGES . POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED., NOTWITHSTANDING LTHE ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. ISR I LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE MMlDD POLICY EXPIRATION DATE MM/DD LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY 04GLS1694 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,00 FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 100,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE FX] OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 A GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 on GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY PRO- JECT LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BA6400396 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT ANY AUTO (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY $ X ALL OWNED AUTOS B SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person)L BODILY INJURY $ X HIRED AUTOS X' NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE $ L (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC $ ANY AUTO AUTO ONLY: AGG $ EXCESS LIABILITY IXG376037 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,00 X OCCUR FI CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ L C $ $ DEDUCTIBLE X RETENTION $ 10,000 $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND SF426616 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 X ORY LIA ITS OER LD EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT 1 $ 1,000,000 OTq R X197700341 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 $3,000,000 Per ]obsite E uI ders' Risk $1,000 Deductible DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLESJEXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENTlSPECIAL PROVISIONS roject: #9799.8107 ,ERTIFICATE HOLDER ebRs City of Lubbock PO Box 2000 Lubbock, TX 79457 ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER: CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ¢. Ron Stroman. CIC/ASG /Y(A i IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may I�,*+ require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 2" (7/97) r CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: �y (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity w., prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; ;. (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of Et any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other .., commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 -point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: W_ 2 "^ REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the r*w identity of their employer or status as an employee." _. . "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal �+ requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; € (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage ' showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; FOR li (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (F) (G) (H) (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. No Text CL� CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 3rd day of December, 2001 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Hunter Construction Company of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #266-011RS -WATER UTILITIES ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING & EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING - $376,642.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. MR IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. ATTEST: Sec etary AP ROVED AS TO CONTENT: Owner's Representative APPROVED AS TO FORM: pop City Attorney am CITY F L BOCK, TEXAS O ) By. - MAYOR GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR A•, Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative BRUCE BLALACK, WATER SUPERINTENDENT, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. ., 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable, "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's �• Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, e*+ equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. r�+ 2 F7 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's s� Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) M" calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and L instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE �* The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. PM The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. .*� The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be P" encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's rn Representative and Contractor. 3 Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or - men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19.CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of �. any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons .�, competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. 4 Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. '"""' 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be g required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged .�, by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, ""' S together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making Lt written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the -{ specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance ` with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 26 r r RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 6 27 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. F-, 28. CONTRACTOR'SJ_NSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, E rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in r conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance .� protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such i' insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this t particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. A. General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000.000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations n Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard - Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $0 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $300.000.00 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job s and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 0% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $0 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500.000.00. 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or -a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) -includes all persons or" entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with S G the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage t vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. r■+ 9 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: a-, (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. w. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; r■+ 9 w (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current '^ certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 4 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for a■* whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. .�, 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage r Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. .�+ 10 i r� (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. �** (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for k all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially ?^�^ affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; F (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE ?+ "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workerscompensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. " "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512/440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;" and n� 11 (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i) -(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. r"' 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. "". 12 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES '* Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract t ' and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such t indebtedness. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. ..A, Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or <-. required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, '* agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's ..� Representative prior to bidding. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the �± Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's µ Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 13 is 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, �• then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $0Zj ERO) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working ,•, day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS r, OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. • 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all e.+. justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days 14 of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. n 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are u. expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and E' agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. .� 40. PRICE FOR WORK Inconsideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the k a specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative: 15 r 41 42 PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. FM 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final F- : completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, "^ Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 16 A 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. "' Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which el� shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: t (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. ren r 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR .�+ In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond isnot required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. 17 After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for "^ under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective r manners: an r (a) �Is The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at .� either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any 18 machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall ' be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions �._ conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. r*A 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 19 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom; at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grantor deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) +�*+ days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, t disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. rl 20 CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS RE: RESOLUTION NO. 6262, ITEM NO. 39, APRIL 8, 1999 EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Asbestos Worker Asbestos Supervisor Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator -Heavy Equipment Operator -Light Floor Installer Glazier Insulator-Piping/Boiler Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer -General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder -Certified Hourly Rate 11.50 12.50 6.25 9.00 12.50 12.50 7.00 11.00 7.00 8.00 11.00 13.75 7.00 9.50 8.50 9.50 10.50 11.50 7.00 11.00 6.00 6.00 9.50 12.50 7.00 9.00 7.00 10.00 7.00 11.00 EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hours Rate Asphalt Heaterman 9.00 `- Asphalt Shoveler 6.00 Concrete Finisher 8.00 Concrete Finisher -Helper 7.00 4 _ Electrician 12.00 Flagger 6.00 Form Setter 7.00 Form Setter -Helper 6.25 Laborer -General 6.00 Laborer -Utility 6.75 Mechanic 8.00 Mechanic -Helper 7.00 Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 7.75 Bulldozer 8.00 .*� Concrete Paving Machine 7.75 Front End Loader 7.25 Heavy Equipment Operator 8.00 Light Equipment Operator 7.25 Motor Grader Operator 9.50 Roller 6.75 Scraper 7.25 Tractor 7.25 Truck Driver -Light 6.50 Truck Driver -Heavy 7.00 !'^ 2 ire k EXHIBIT C w, Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the fair Labor Standards Act. r-� !A*R 3 SPECIFICATIONS 583/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 NEW ELECTRICAL SHOP BUILDING - NEW EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BUILDING FOR THE CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES 4� E: D City of Lubbock �o �� Lubbock, Texas Adling Associates Architects Project Number 583/01 k11asOctober 8, 2001 �E�Plo- -mp TABLE OF CONTENTS Following is the enumeration of the Specifications, Drawings and Addenda which form a part of this Contract as set forth in Article 1 "General Provisions" of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. BOUND HEREIN Pages Tableof Contents....................................................................................... 4 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01.031 Cutting, Patching and Alteration Procedures........................................7 01.500 Temporary Facilities................................................................3 DIVISION 2 SITE WORK " Section 02.110 Site Demolition and Clearing ......... • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3 02.200 Earthwork........................................................................ 8 02.210 Site Grading.........................................................................2 .................................. 02.514 Concrete Walks.............................................4 02.760 Traffic Control Markings......................................................... .2 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03.300 Concrete Work..................................................................... 16 y 583/01 TABLEOFCONTENTS Page 2 "' DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04.200 Unit Masonry Work........................................................................... 8 04.230 Reinforced Unit Masonry...................................................................8 DIVISION 5 METALS Section 05.120 Structural Steel ...................................... ..............................7 05.210 Steel Joists ......................... .............................. 4 05.300 Metal Roof Decking................................................................ . 4 -m 05.500 Metal Fabrications.................................................................. 4 DIVISION 6 CARPENTRY AND WOODWORK Section 06.100 Carpentry Work..................................................................... 4 06.400 Architectural Woodwork...........................................................3 DIVISION 7 MOISTURE AND THERMAL PROTECTION Section 07.180 Concrete Sealer......................................................................3 07.190 Water Repellents..............................................................................4 07.210 Building Insulation..................................................................2 07.212 Roof Insulation.......................................................................5 07.520 Modified Bitumen Roofing........................................................7 07.610 Metal roofing System...............................................................6 07.900 Caulking and Sealants............................................................. 6 DIVISION 8 DOORS WINDOWS AND GLASS Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ............................................... 4 7 08.210 Wood Doors......... ...... • • • . • .3 08.331 Overhead Doors...............................................................................2 08.410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts............................................4 08.700 Finish Hardware.................................................................... 7 08.800 Glass And Glazzing................................................................ 3 DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09.260 Gypsum Wallboard Systems.......................................................6 09.510 Acoustical Ceilings..................................................................4 09.650 Resilient Flooring.................................................................. . 7 09.900 Painting.......................................................................... 583/01 TABLEOFCONIENTS Page 3 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10.155 Toilet Partitions..•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••3 10.500 15.110 Metal Lockers................................................................................ 15.211 Piping and Accessories.............................................................5 l in i2n Fire F,xtinguishers........................................................................... • • • • • • • • .3 10.650 Wire Mesh Partitions...............................................................2 10.800 Toilet Accessories.....................................................................2 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT (Not in this Contract) DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (Not in this Contract) DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 13.122 Metal Building Systems............................................................ 11 DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS Section 14.470 Bridge Crane..................................................................................9 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL Section 15.010 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical ............................ 11 15.110 Site Utilities ....... ..........:........................................................5 15.211 Piping and Accessories.............................................................5 15.310 Plumbing Systems • • • • • • • • .3 15.411 Air Distribution......................................................................4 15.511 Hangers and Supports..............................................................3 15.660 Insulation ............... 15.710 Equipment ............................................ .............................6 15.810 Compressed Air System ..................................................... • • • • • ••2 15.901 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems .......................2 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16.010 Basic Electrical Requirements.....................................................4 �** 16.110 Raceways.............................................................................6 i i i F 583/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4 16-120 Wires and Cables....................................................................4 16.130 Boxes................................................................................. . 16.140 Wiring Devices......................................................................3 16.170 Grounding and Bonding............................................................4 16.195 Electrical Identification.............................................................3 16.441 Safety Switches......................................................................3 16.460 Dry -Type Transformers.................................................... ......4 16.470 Panelboards.......................................................................... . 4 16.477 Fuses........................................................................... ..... 2 16.510 Lighting ................................ ............... ..........................3 16.670 Lighting Protection System........................................................3 DRAWINGS BOUND SEPARATELY Sheet A1.0 Site Plans, Noted and Details A2.0 Floor Plan, Notes and Schedules (Electrical Shop Building) A3.0 Exterior Elevations, Section and Wall Sections (Electrical Shop Building) A4.0 Roof Plan, Ceiling Plan, Interior Elevations and Details (Electrical Shop Building) A5.0 Floor Plan, Roof Plan, Schedules and Notes (Equipment Operations Building) S-1 Plans, Sections, Details, and Notes (Equipment Operations Building) S-2 Plans, Sections, Details, and Notes (Electrical Shop Building) S-3 Roof Framing Plan, Sections and Notes (Electrical Shop Building) MPE1 Site Utilities Plan and Details M1 Mechanical Plan, Schedules and Legend (Electrical Shop Building) M2 Details P1 Plumbing Plan and Legend (Both Buildings) P2 Details and Schedules E1 Lighting Plan, Notes and Schedules (Electrical Shop Building) E2 Electrical Power -Communication, Notes and Schedules (Electrical Shop Buildings) E3 Lighting -Power plans and Electrical Site Plan (Equipment Operations Building) ADDENDA AS ISSUED End of Table of Contents r" CUTTING PATCHING AND ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES 583/01 Section 01.031 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and of the Agreement and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. Definition: "Cutting and patching" includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the installation or performance of other work and subsequent filling and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. 1. "Cutting and patching" shall be performed for coordination of the work, to uncover work for access or inspection, to obtain samples for testing, to permit alterations to be performed or for other similar purposes. 2. Cutting and patching performed during the manufacture of products, or during the initial fabrication, erection or installation process is not considered to be "cutting and patching" under this definition. Drilling of holes to install fasteners and similar operations are also not considered to be "cutting and patching." 3. "Demolition" is recognized as a related -but -separate category of work which may or may not require cutting and patching as defined in this section. B. Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, required to complete the Work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Join new work to existing work in place. ., l surfaces for installation piping and electrical conduit. 5. Provide routine penetrations of non-structura C. In addition to Contract requirements, upon written instructions of A/E: 1. Uncover work to provide for A/E's or Owner's Representative's observation of covered work. 2. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. D. Refer to other sections of these Specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements and limitations applicable to individual units of work. Unless otherwise specified, requirements of this section apply to mechanical and electrical work. ., E. Alterations procedures: The procedures and administrative requirements of this section apply to all sections of the Specifications which are involved in alterations to existing construction: 1. Extent notes: Cut into or partially remove portions of existing building (as necessary) to make way for new construction. Include such work as: a. Cutting, moving or removal of items shown to be cut, moved or removed. b. Cutting, moving or removal of items not shown to be cut, moved, or removed, but which must be cut, moved, or removed to allow new work to proceed. Work or items which are to remain in finished work shall be patched or reinstalled after their cutting, moving or removal, and their joints and finishes made to match adjacent or similar work. c. Removal of existing surface finishes as needed to install new work and finishes. d. Removal of abandoned items and removal of items serving no useful purpose, such as abandoned piping. e. Repair or removal of dangerous or unsanitary conditions resulting from alterations work. r F. Payments: Costs caused by ill-timed or defective work, or work not shown or specified in the Construction Documents shall be incurred by party responsible for ill-timed, rejected or non -conforming work. 583/01 CUTTING PATCHING AND ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES Section 01.031 Page 2 G. Work performed shall be in accordance with applicable codes, regulations and ordinances having jurisdiction. H. Existing warranties: Perform replacing, patching and repairing of material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with material so as not to void, in any way, warranties or bonds required under this Contract or in force on existing work (or work performed under other contracts). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural work in a manner that would result in a reduction of load -carrying capacity or of load -deflection ratio. B. Before cutting and patching structural members obtain the AB's approval to proceed with cutting and patching as described in the procedural proposal for cutting and patching. C. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operational elements or safety related components in a manner that would result in a reduction of their capacity to perform in the manner intended, including energy performance, or that would result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or decreased safety. D. Visual requirements: Do not cut and patch work exposed on the building's exterior or in its occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the A-E/Owner's opinion, result in lessening the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that would result in substantial visual evidence of cut and patch work. Remove and replace work judged by the A-E/Owner to be cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. Use a recognized experienced and specialized firm to cut and patch exposed work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit a written request to the AB well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Work of the Owner or any separate Contractor. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of the Project. 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. B. Content: Request shall include: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Description of affected work. 3. The necessity for cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. Effect on work of Owner or any separate Contractor, or on structural or weatherproof integrity of Project. 5. Description of proposed work: a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. Extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternates to cutting and patching. 7. Written permission of any separate Contractor whose work will be affected. 8. List utilities that will be disturbed or otherwise be affected by the Work, including those that will be relocated and those that will be out -of -service temporarily. Indicate how long utility services will be disrupted. 9. Where cutting and patching of structural work involves the addition of reinforcement, submit details and engineering calculations to show how that reinforcement is integrated with the original structure to satisfy requirements. 10. Approval by the A-E/Owner to proceed with cutting and patching work does not waive the AB's right to '""' 583/01 CUTTING PATCHURES ING AND ALTERATIONS PROCED ' Section 01.031 Page 3 require at a later date complete removal and replacement of work found to be cut and patched in an unsatisfactory manner. 1.05 MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, or as directed by the A-E/Owner, use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available, or cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal -or -better performance characteristics. B. Should conditions of Work or the schedule indicate a change of products from original _ installation, the Contractor shall submit a request for substitution. 1.06 INSPECTION A. Carefully examine the premises to determine the extent of work and the condition under which it must be done, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting and patching. No extra payments will be allowed for claims for additional work that could have been determined or anticipated by such inspection. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products. B. Field conditions: Check and verify Contract Documents and field conditions before proceeding with work. If there are any questions regarding these or other coordination questions, the Contractor is responsible for obtaining clarification from the A/E before proceeding with work or related work in question. C. Before cutting, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which the work is to be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding with work. D. Before start of cutting work, meet at work site with all parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict between the various trades. Coordinate layout of work and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding with the work. 1.07 PREPARATION A. Temporary supports: To prevent failure provide temporary support of work to be cut. The responsibility for the safety of persons and property is the Contractor's during work of this Contract. B. Protection: Protect adjacent improvements and other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for that part of the project that may be exposed during cutting and patching operations. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage „" to adjoining areas. Take precautions not to cut existing pipe, conduit or duct serving the building (but scheduled to be relocated) until provisions have been made to bypass them. 1.08 PERFORMANCE A. General: In performing the work prescribed herein, it will be the Contractor's responsibility to repair all existing construction disturbed, relocated, damaged or altered an all new construction installed, as required to hide all evidence of work and to refinish this construction to match existing finish and appearance. B. Damage: Contractor shall be responsible for the repairs of any accidental damage the Contractor inflicts upon the existing work to remain. If, for any reason, damage to existing work or utilities is considered to be unavoidable, submit written notification. The Contractor assumes full responsibility for damage and the cost of satisfactorily repairing or replacing the damaged work. C. Workmanship: Contractor and Subcontractors shall cooperate fully in performance of work. Cutting of new `+ work shall be avoided. However, if cutting, patching, repairing, removing and/or replacing is necessary, it shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. In all cases, exercise care 583/01 CUTTING PATCHING AND ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES Section 01.031 Page 4 in cutting operations. Perform operations under supervision of competent mechanics skilled in applicable trade. D. Cutting: Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work. 1. In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum saw or core drill to ensure a neat hole. Cut holes and slots neatly to sizes required with existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Bypass utility services such as pipe and conduit before cutting where such utility services are shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. After bypassing and cutting, cap, valve or plug and seal tight remaining portion of pipe and conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter. E. Patching: Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work. Where no tolerances are specified, patchwork shall match existing work and existing tolerances. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and, where necessary, extend finish restoration into retained adjoining work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 1.09 ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING BUILDING A. General: 1. Work Sequence: List required scheduling or sequence for project. 2. Security: When keys to locked areas are needed to perform work, obtain from staff member designated by Owner. Return keys at end of each workday. 3. Maintenance of Access and Operations: a. During period of construction, the Owner will continue to perform normal activities in existing building. Maintain proper and safe access to the Owner -occupied areas at all times. b. Schedule demolition and remodeling operations with Owner in such a manner as to allow Owner operations to continue with minimum interruption. c. During period of construction, do not obstruct in any manner existing exit passageways of Owner - occupied areas. Maintain existing fire doors in an operable condition. 4. Maintenance of Existing Services: a. Maintain environmental control in existing buildings, especially temperature, humidity and dust control. b. Provide temporary lines and connections as required to maintain existing mechanical and electrical services in building. c. Schedule utility interruptions with the Owner's Representative. B. Extent: 1. Cutting and removal work shall be performed so as not to cut or remove more than is necessary and so as not to damage adjacent work. -_ 2. Conduct work in such a manner as to minimize noise and accumulation and spread of dirt and dust. 3. Drill holes for conduit and piping using core drills. 4. All penetrations in slab, columns, etc., to be pilot -drilled to determine the exact location and possible interference with any other items. (For example rebar, piping, anchors, etc.) Joists, beams and columns are not to be cut, drilled or modified without prior written approval. C. Shoring, Bracing and Capping: Provide shores, needling, and bracing as needed to keep building structurally secure and free of deflection in all its parts, and as needed for installation of new structural members. D. Responsibility and Assignment to Trades: 1. Contractor shall assign the work of moving, removing, cutting, patching and repairing to trades under r 583/01 CUTTING PATCHING AND ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES Section 01.031 Page 5 Contractor's supervision to cause the least damage to each type of work encountered, and to return the building as much as possible to the appearance of new work. 2. Patching of finished materials shall be assigned to mechanics skilled in the work of the finish trade involved. E. Protection: 1. Protect remaining finishes, equipment, and adjacent work from damage caused by cutting, moving, removing, and patching operations. Protect surfaces which will remain a part of the finished work. Protect existing facilities and features within designated construction limits and along corridor access routes to construction areas. "" 3. During demolition, cutting and construction, provide positive dust control by wetting dusty debris and by completely sealing openings to Owner -occupied areas with temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 4. After materials, equipment and machinery are installed, properly protect Work until final acceptance. see 5. Any damage resulting from construction operations shall be repaired by the Contractor (or responsible Subcontractor as applicable) without cost to the Owner. 6. During non -working hours, provide continuous security at openings cut into existing exterior roofs. F. Temporary Barricades/Partitions: Maintain temporary and dust partitions to seal openings to Owner -occupied areas. 1. Provide temporary guardrails/barricades. 2. Dust control: The dust resulting from cutting and patching shall be controlled to prevent the spread of dust to occupied portions of the building and to avoid creation of a nuisance in the surrounding area. Use of water will be permitted as indicated. Provide drop cloths or other suitable barriers to prevent dust from traveling to other portions of the building. Seal off all return air registers or other mechanical systems to prevent dust from entering such systems. G. Debris: 1. Remove debris promptly from the building and deposit in Contractor -furnished dumpster containers. Removed material, except that listed or marked by the Owner for retention, becomes property of the Contractor. Contractor shall remove dumpster stored debris and materials and shall dispose of removed material legally. Do not burn on site. Do not allow debris to enter sewers. 2. Do not let piled material endanger structures. 3. During cutting and coring operations, use metal lined wood box secured tight against surface, to catch falling debris and water. 1.10 PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING FOR ALTERATIONS WORK ' A. Skill: Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of matching the existing quality of workmanship. PM B. Patching: 1. In areas where any portion of an existing finished surface is damaged, lifted, stained or otherwise made or found to be imperfect, patch or replace the imperfect portion of the surface with matching material. !�** 2. Provide adequate support or substrate for patching of finishes. ills, ducts, electrical boxes, k' 3. When existing surface mounted fixtures, such as, but not limited to, pipes, gr conduit, etc., are shown to be removed or are no longer required for the new work, and such surface mounted items occur in existing walls, floors, or ceiling which are indicated as the finish for the new work, Contractor shall patch, seal or otherwise cover all penetrations resulting from the removed item using materials and textures to match adjacent finishes. C. Quality: ious existing products that must be used to 1. No concerted attempt has been made to describe each of the var 583/01 CUTTING PATCHING AND ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES Section 01.031 Page 6 patch, match, extend, or replace existing work. Obtain all such products in time to complete the work on schedule. Such products shall be provided in quality which is in no way inferior to the existing products. 2. The quality of the products that exist in the building as apparent during prebid site visits shall serve as the Specification requirement for strength, appearance, and other characteristics. D. Transitions: 1. Where new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work make transitions as smooth and workmanlike as possible. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so as to make the patch or transition invisible to the eye at a distance of 3 feet. 2. Where masonry or other finished surfaces are cut in such away that smooth transitions with new work are not possible, terminate the existing surface in a neat fashion along a straight line at a natural line of division and provide trim appropriate to the finished surface. E. Matching: 1. Restore existing work that is damaged during construction to a condition equal to its condition at the time of the start of the Work. F. Overall Requirement that the Work be Complete: 1. Where a product or type of construction occurs in the existing building and it is not specified as a part of the new work, provide such products or types of construction as needed to patch, extend or match existing work. 2. These Specifications will generally not describe existing products or standards of execution, nor will they enumerate products which are not a part of new construction. Existing product is its own specification. 3. The presence of any product or type of construction in the existing work shall cause its patching, extending, or matching to be performed as necessary to make the work complete and consistent to identical standards of quality. 1.11 REPAIR IN CONJUNCTION WITH ALTERATION WORK A. Replace work damaged in the course of alterations, except at areas approved by the A-E/Owner for repair. B. Where full removal of extensive amounts of almost suitable work would be needed to replace damaged portions, then filling, spackling, straightening, and similar repair techniques, followed by full refinishing, will be permitted. C. If repaired work is not brought up to the standard for new work the A/E will direct that it be cut out and replaced with the new work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.12 REMOVAL AND RELOCATION A. Items indicated for removal and relocation shall be assigned to mechanics skilled in the particular trade involved. All items shall be cleaned prior to relocation. B. Each Successive Trade: 1. As each trade finishes its work on each part of the alterations work and related new work, it shall clean up its work area and make work surfaces ready for the work of the succeeding trades. 2. Spillage, overspray, collections of dust or debris, and damage of Owner -occupied spaces shall be cleaned or remedied immediately by the responsible trade. C. Each area as it is completed: 1. As soon as work in each area of the alterations is complete, clean all surfaces, remove equipment, salvage and debris, and return in condition suitable for use by the Owner as quickly as possible. 583/01 CUTTING PATCHING AND ALTERATIONS PROCEDURES Section 01.031 Page 7 D. Each trade and subcontractor shall deposit debris in Contractor furnished dumpster containers on site. Contractor shall remove containers from site and dispose of trash legally. Take precautions to eliminate blowing or spillage of debris onto the site. PART 2 PRODUCTS n (Does Not Apply) PART 3 EXECUTION) 1 (Does Not Apply) e End of Section s, en a 583/01 Section 01.500 Page 1 0 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. Special Conditions and 1.02 PROSECUTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish measures for prosecuting work of this project including, but not limited to, structural equipment, temporary heating, and engineering, cranes, hoists, chutes, movement of personnel, materials, operation and maintenance of such facilities. 1.03 TOILETS A. The Contractor shall provide adequate temporary toilet facilities for all workers. The temporary toilet the ject grounds as directed by die Superintendent of Schools. facilities shall be placed on pro 1.04 SECURITY .�, A. Construction period security is die responsibility of the Contractor; however, the Owner shall have the right of access to the construction site. 1.05 WATCHMAN A. The Contractor may, at die Contractor's option, employ a watchman service when work is not being carried in the of lus own �* on. However, no liability shall attach to the Contractor in this respect except protection interest. 1.06 WATER A. Utility costs for temporary water for construction purposes will be provided and paid for by the Owner. The required water to the point of service. Contractor shall make all required connections to and extensions of all 107. ELECTRICITY A. The Contractor shall provide for all temporary connections and utility costs for all temporary 1A' electrical power required for the work of this Contract. B. cal The Contractor shall provide for all temporary die utility School Distro t will osts folr die celectrical power for die duration of the protect. TSchool pa power which serves the areas of the school not under construction. 1.08 SCAFFOLDING, BARRICADES, ENCLOSURES A. The Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain for the duration of the work as required, all scaffold, be necessary for the performance runways, guardrails, platforms and similar temporary construction as may Contract. Such facilities shall be of die type and arrangement as is required for their specific use and of the shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Act. 0 583/01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES Section 01.500 Page 2 B. The Contractor sliall provide, install and maintain for the duration of the work all necessary barricades, warning signs and signals, and shall take all other precautions to safeguard persons, adjoining property, including improvement thereon, against injuries and damages of every nature whatsoever. C. Parts and structures and other work in place that are subject to injury because of the operations being carried on adjacent thereto, shall be covered, boarded up or substantially enclosed with adequate protection. 1.09 GUARDRAILS AND BARRICADES A. Provide guardrails, liandrails, and covers for floor, roof and wall openings and for stairways installed or constructed by die Contractor's forces. B. If movement of these protective facilities is required to perform work, it will be die responsibility of die Contractor to replace die said protections in a satisfactory manner. C. Provide all barricades required to protect all natural resources and site improvements. 1.10 STAIRS, LADDERS, HOISTS, ETC. A. Provide temporary stairs, scaffolding and ladders as may be required for the use of all workmen and inspectors. B. Install and operate such materials hoists as may be necessary to properly and expeditiously perform die work. 1.11 REGULATIONS A. Comply with governing regulations and utility company regulations and recommendations for construction of temporary facilities and services; in (but not necessarily limited to) code compliances, permits, inspections, testing, and health and safety compliances. 1.12 PROJECT SIGNS —_ A. The Contractor shall not erect or post any signs or notices of any kind any place on the project unless approval is secured from die Superintendent of Schools. 1.13 CLEANUP DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The Contractor shall maintain the buildings and sites clear and free of all debris and trash and shall furnish a suitable trash container for the use of all trades and contractors on the project. Each Contractor shall clean and remove all trash and debris occasioned by die Contractor's work to the trash container which will be removed from the site by the General Contractor as required. B. The Contractor will have the prime responsibility of keeping the building and site in a clean, neat and safe working condition during die entire construction period. C. The School District's trash receptacles shall not be used for construction debris. 1.14 PROTECTION OF SITE A. The Contractor shall furnish measures for protection of public, workmen and property, including structural engineering, maintenance and operation of such facilities. r 583/01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES Section 01.500 Page 3 1.15 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES A. The Contractor shall protect existing facilities during construction activities. 1.16 EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES A. Existing underground lines occur in the site where the work is to be done. The Contractor shall visit the site and determine the location of all utility lines. Existing lines shown on the drawing are not guaranteed as to size and location or for completeness. Any utility line which interferes with new construction shall be relocated or rerouted by the Contractor as directed by the Superintendent of Schools and Owner. - End of Section i! ems+ s+� SITE DEMOLITION AND CLEARING 583/01 Section 02.110 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in Conditions, Special .: this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK n A. The extent of site demolition and clearing is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All above and below grade obstructions conflicting with new construction shall be removed under this heading. Site clearing operations required in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Removal of vegetation and topsoil. 2. Removal of surplus materials. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS !�^ A. The Contractor shall take precautions to protect existing facilities and features to remain. Any damage caused by the Contractor shall be repaired immediately at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Does not Apply) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION A. Demolition includes the complete wrecking of structures and the removal and disposal of demolished materials, as shown on the Drawings and herein specified. B. The Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of structures and items to be demolished. C. The use of explosives will not be permitted. D. Conduct demolition operations and the removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. E. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. r F. Ensure the safe passage of persons around the area of demolition. Conduct operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities and persons. son I G. Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations at no cost to the Owner. H. Maintain existing utilities, indicated to remain, keep in service and protect against damage during ,�, 583/01 SITE DEMOLITION AND CLEARING Section 02.110 Page 2 demolition operations. I. Demolish existing structures completely and remove from the site. Use such methods as required to complete the work within the limitations of governing regulations. J. Break up and remove concrete slabs -on -grade, walks, roots, debris, rubbish, and all other items found on the site. Remove all existing below grade foundations and other obstructions not scheduled to remain. K. Completely fill below -grade areas and voids resulting from the demolition of structures as required under Section 02.200 "Earthwork". L. After fill placement and compaction, grade the surface to meet adjacent contours and to provide flow to surface drainage structures. M. Remove from the site debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations. N. Burning of removed materials from demolished structures will not be permitted on the site. 3.02 SITE CLEARING A. Remove all other items not designated to remain such as shrubs, grass, weeds, other vegetation or obstructions that interfere with the installation of new construction. Also, remove such items elsewhere on the site or premises as specifically indicated. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered, and in such manner so as to prevent intermingling with the underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. C. Topsoil is defined as Amarillo fine sandy loam soil found in a depth of not less than 18". Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones and other objects over 3/4" in diameter, and without weeds, roots and other objectionable material. D. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil materials, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6" loose depth and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground. E. All above and below grade obstructions conflicting with new construction shall be removed under this heading. 3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Report to the Architect all active utilities encountered which are not indicated on the Drawings. Notify the respective utility companies of any damage caused to active utilities and protect active utilities pending instructions for proceeding with the work. B. The Contractor shall repair, at the Contractor's expense, damage to the active utilities to the satisfaction of the respective utility company. 3.04 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS i 583/01 SITE DEMOLITION AND CLEARING Section 02.110 Page 3 A. Burning of combustible, cleared and grubbed materials is not permitted on the Owner's property. B. Remove all combustible and non-combustible waste materials completely from the Owner's property and dispose of all materials in strict accordance with the authorities having jurisdiction. End of Section C A 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of earthwork is shown on drawings. B. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements is included as part of this work. C. Backfilling of trenches within building lines is included as part of this work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service I Employ, at Contractor's expense, testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations. The testing laboratory shall ASTM D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing comply with the requirements of and/or Inspection of Soil or Rock Used in Engineering Design and Construction 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Submit following reports directly to Architect from the testing services, with copies to Contractor and Engineer. encountered. 1. Test reports on existing or borrow material for each type of so a. Atterberg Limits b. Linear Shrinkage C. optimum moisture/maximum dry density curve 2. Field density test reports of subgrades and compacted fills. Reports shall indicate soil type or change of soil if any other is used. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Site Information 1. A subsurface soils investigation at the site has been made. Logs of borings and test data are available for Contractor's information and for his interpretation as to soil and water conditions that may be encountered at the site. 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 2 2. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that the Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. Data are made available for the convenience of the Contractor. 3. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no cost to Owner. B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. C. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted. D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, CL, SM, SW and SP. B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups CH, ML, MH, OL, OH, and PT. C. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed sand. D. Topsoil shall be fertile, natural soil of loamy character, free of clay lumps, stones and debris. E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter. Fill materials shall have a liquid limit between 4 and 30 and the plasticity index shall be between 4 and 12. 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing required finish grade elevations. B. Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock excavation or unauthorized excavation. C. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense. D. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Architect. E. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of '^ same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. F. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect who will make an inspection of conditions. 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. 1'^ 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. A G. Stability of Excavations 1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. H. Shoring and Bracing 1. Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as uprights, stringers and cross -braces, in good serviceable condition. 2. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 4 3. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. K. Excavation for Structures 1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection. 2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. L. Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and grades as shown. M. Excavation for Trenches 1. Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups. 3. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required elevation and backfill with a 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. 4. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe. 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 5 r 5. Backfill trenches with lean concrete where trench excavations pass within 18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall P^ footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footings. 6. Concrete is specified in Division 3. 7. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. N. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric ' temperature is less than 35 degrees F. (1 degree C.) 3.02 COMPACTION A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification. B. Percentage of Minimum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of minimum dry density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor); and not less than the ..; following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship. 1. Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. e 2. Building Slabs and Steps: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. 3. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum dry density. 4. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill materials at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. 5. Pavements: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density for cohesive soil material. C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. 2. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. r 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 6 3.03 BACKFILL AND FILL A. General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area classification listed below. 1. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 2. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 3. Under walks and pavements, use subbase materials, or satisfactory excavated or borrow material, or combination of both. 4. Under steps, use subbase material. 5. Under building slabs, use satisfactory borrow material. B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of trash and debris. 5. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. C. Ground Surface Preparation 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 2. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. D. Placement and Compaction 1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 9" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. 2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 583 01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 7 3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. 3.04 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. C. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation. 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2" above or below required subgrade elevation. D. Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. E. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification. 3.05 PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE A. General: Subbase course consists of placing subbase materials, in layers of specified thickness, over subgrade surface to support a pavement base course. B. See other Division 2 sections for paving specifications. C. Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross -slope of subbase course. D. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course to prevent lateral movement. Construction shoulders of acceptable solid materials, placed in such quantity to compact to thickness of each subbase course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12" width of shoulder simultaneously with compacting and rolling of each layer of subbase course. sn E. Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, -section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for conforming to indicated cross compacting subbase material during placement operations. ree 9, 583/01 EARTHWORK Section 02.200 Page 8 F. When a compacted subbase course is shown to be 6" thick or less, place material in a single layer. When shown to be more than 6" thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6" or less than 3" in thickness when compacted. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control Testing During Construction Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed. 2. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (Sand Cone Method) or ASTM D 2167 (Rubber Balloon Method), or ASTM D 2922, (Nuclear Gage Method) as applicable. B. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade I. Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq: ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests. Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the previous compacted layer has been tested and approved by the testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer. C. If, in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense. 3.08 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of Graded Areas 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re -shape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. 3.09 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Removal from Owner's Property Remove waste materials, including unacceptable dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02.200 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. material, trash and debris, and ry a7 . a10 583A SITE GRADING Section 02.210 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL !^" 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS act, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, A. The general provisions of the Contr .w irements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. Special Conditions and General Requ 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Work of the section includes the providing compacting and finish grading of topsoil within the limits of grading shown on the site plan. B. Provide all materials, equipment and services required to meet the requirements of this section. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall take precautions to protect existing facilities and features to remain. Any damage caused by the Contractor shall be repaired immediately at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil is defined as Amarillo fine sandy loam soil. B. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones and other objects over 3/4" in diameter, and without weeds, roots and other objectionable material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TOPSOIL A. Provide a minimum depth of 6 inches of topsoil over all site areas which are not shown to be paved within the . limits of grading. 3.02 COMPACTION A. Compact top 6 inches of topsoil at 90 percent maximum dry density. 3.03 GRADING A. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading, including adjacent transition areas. B. Provide uniform, compacted grading between new elevations. C. Provide uniform, compacted grading between new elevations and existing grades at the limits of grading. D. Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. 3.04 GRADING TOLERANCE 11 583/01 SITE GRADING Section 02.210 Page 2 A. Finish areas receiving topsoil shall be graded and compacted to not greater than 0.10 foot above or below the finish grades shown on the Drawings. 3.05 EXCESS MATERIALS A. Remove all excess materials from the site. End of Section 583/01 CONCRETE WALKS Section 02.514 Page I PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of concrete walks is shown on the Drawings. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS f" A. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Forms: 1. Either steel or wood, of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use forms that are straight and free of distortion and defects. Bent, twisted, split or defective form materials are not permitted. 2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. 3. Coat forms with a non -staining, clear, paraffin base form oil that will not discolor or otherwise deface the surface of the concrete. B. Concrete: Exterior concrete shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days, and shall contain six (6) sacks (564 lbs.) of cement per cubic yard of concrete, 6.0 percent of entrained air (± 1.0%), coarse aggregate 1 inch or smaller, and shall be placed with a slump of 5 inches C. Fibrous Concrete Reinforcement: 1. General: 100 percent virgin polpropylene fibrillated fibers specially manufactured for use as concrete reinforcement, containing no reprocessed olefin materials. Fibrous concrete reinforcements shall be equivalent to that manufactured by Fibermesh Company, 4019 Industry Drive, Chattanooga, TN 37416. Use in all exterior concrete not otherwise detailed. --= 2. Physical Characteristics: a. Specific Gravity: 0.91 b. Tensile Strength: 70 to 110 ksi c. Fiber lengths: 1/2", 3/4', 1 1/2", 2" per manufacturer. D. Expansion Joints: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, '/4" thickness by . _ depth of slab. At curbs and gutters, furnish special section to meet local curb and gutter specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove all loose material from the uniformly compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 583/01 CONCRETE WALKS Section 02.514 Page 2 3.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Set forms to the required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient lengths of forms to allow continuous progress of the work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Tops of walks and paving shall slope 1/8" per foot. B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerances: 1. Top of form units: Not more than 1/8" in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face: Longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4" in 10 feet. C. Clean forms after each use, and coat with form oil as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.03 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched in amounts in accordance with approved submittals for this type of concrete. Mix batched concrete in strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion. 2. Do not place concrete until subgrade and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subgrade as required to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they have been brought to the required grade and alignment. 3 Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of the mix, and with as little rehandling as possible. Consolidate concrete along the face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand - spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. Do not over vibrate. 4. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. Sections less than 15 feet in length between transverse joints will not be permitted. Remove such sections if directed by the Architect. 3.04 JOINTS A. General: Construct expansion, weakened -plane (contraction), and construction joints true -to -line with face perpendicular to surface of the concrete, unless otherwise shown. Construct transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise shown. B. Weakened -Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened -plane (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on the Drawings. Construct weakened -plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness as follows: C. Tooled Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. D. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at the end of all pours and at locations where placement operations are stopped for a period of more than 1/2 hour except where such pour terminates at expansion j oints. 1. Construct joints as shown, or if not shown, use standard metal keyway section forms. r i 583/01 CONCRETE WALKS Section 02.514 Page 3 E. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks and other fixed objects. 1. Expansion joints shall be at 20 feet o.c., unless otherwise shown. 2. Extend joint fillers full -width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2" or more than 1" below finished surface. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for the full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. Form top edge of filler to conform to top profile of concrete. 3. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after both sides of joint are placed. F. All joints at abutment of concrete walks with adjacent walking surfaces shall be level. A u inch wide expansion joint shall be provided at all such locations, including where new concrete abuts curbs or walls. 3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Finishes: Unless indicated otherwise, items of concrete to be finished as follows: -- 1. All sidewalks, concrete aprons and porches shall have float finish, brushed as directed to provide a non- slip finish. 2. Curbs, gutters and driveway approaches shall be finished with a stiff -bristled broom to provide non -slip finish. Provide sample for approval. B. The following finishing procedures shall be observed: 1. After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth the surface by screeding and floating. Do not use "Jitterbugs". Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust the floating to compact the surface and produce a uniform mixture. 2. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 foot straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous, smooth finish. 3. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2 radius, unless otherwise shown. Eliminate any tool marks on concrete surface. 4. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared complete surface finishing as follows: a. Broom Finish: Broom finish, by drawing a fine broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to the Architect. b. On inclining slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with a stiff -bristled broom. 3.06 CURING �** A. Protect and cure finished concrete walks, curbs and gutters and paving. Use moist -curing methods for the first 24 hours, then apply curing compound. 3.07 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with polysulphide-epoxy binder, or with polysulphide resin grout, complying with FS MMM -G -650B CANC. s■, n 583/01 CONCRETE WALKS Section 02.514 Page 4 C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Sweep concrete pavement and walks free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material just prior to final inspection. End of Section t 583/01 TRAFFIC CONTROL MARKINGS Section 02.760 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS a A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of painted traffic markings shall be painting stripes on concrete slabs and other locations as marked on the Drawings. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 02,514 Concrete Walks 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for all materials furnished under this section.. B. Submit two sets of color samples for selection by the Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Traffic Markings: r 1. Paint shall be equivalent to a chlorinated rubber base traffic paint, factory mixed, quick drying with FS- TT-P-115, Type III 2. Volume Solid 43% 3. Vehicle: Alkyd 4. Thinning: mineral spirit 5. Flash point 110° F. closed cup 6. VOC: AE C 200 7. Paint shall be applied to a 15 mil wet thickness. B. Paint shall conform to the requirements of FS TT-P-85 for traffic line paints, complying with TxDOT k " requirements. C. Paint shall dry in two to four hours. g D. Paint meeting the requirements of the Specifications may be obtained from any one of the following: 1. Adams Paint Manufacturing Company a 2. Kelly Moore 3. Sherwin Williams 4. PPG E. Colors on concrete: 1. Yellow for parking lines 2. Blue for accessible parking lines, access aisles, and concrete curbs at curb ramps. 3. Yellow for pedestrian crossings. 01134 TRAFFIC CONTROL MARKINGS Section 02.760 Page 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 1.01 APPLICATION A. The equipment used to apply the paint shall be specifically designed and manufactured for that purpose and, before the application of the paint is begun, the Architect shall be satisfied that the equipment and procedures proposed for use will be able to apply the paint properly to the width and thickness. B. Apply markings according to a layout approved by Architect. Lines shall be applied in two (2) coats by means of mechanical markings equipment. Lines shall be straight, at proper angle and of uniform width. C. Access aisles lines shall be 2 inches wide, applied at a 45° angle 12 inches apart. D. Parking space lines shall be 4 inches wide. E. Pedestrian crossing lines shall be 12 inches wide, 24 inches apart. 3.02 PRECAUTIONS A. Do not lay paint in inclement weather, or when the ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. All painting shall be free from defects. C. Curbs, gutters, walks and walls of buildings, etc., shall be free of paint overspray. These items shall not be cracked, chipped or marked by heavy equipment used in painting operation. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove from site all rubbish and unused materials. Leave site in a good, clean and neat condition. End of Section 583 01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified i in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Concrete Curbs, Walks and Paving - Section 02.514 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 3. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection . 4. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". 5. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 6. MSP -1-97 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice". B. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient "concrete as directed by the Architect. C. Design and Testing: The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the Architect. A proven, established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix. All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be borne by the Contractor. 1' 2. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the Architect. A proven, established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix. All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be borne by the Contractor. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 2 3. Job site cylinders shall be taken when the Architect so directs. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory when test cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care and handling including breaking of same at laboratory. 4. The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory designated by the Contractor and acceptable to the Architect and the Owner. 5. Test results shall be furnished to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor. 6. Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further tested. If further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never meet strength requirements, the under strength concrete will be replaced with new as directed by Architect. D. Tests for Concrete Materials: 1. Test aggregate by method of sampling and testing of ASTM C 33. 2. For portland cement, sample the cement and determine the properties by the methods of test of ASTM C 150. 3. Submit written reports to the Architect, for each material sampled and tested, prior to the start of work. Provide the project identification name and number, date of report, name of contractor, name of concrete testing service, source of concrete aggregates, material manufacturer and brand name for manufactured materials, values specified in the referenced specification for each material, and test results. Indicate whether or not material is acceptable for intended use. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, chemical floor hardeners, dry -shake finish materials, and others as requested by the Architect. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS: r .CONCRETE WORK 583/01 Section 03.300 Page 3 A. B. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or "good -as -new". Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS -1 'B -B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. *+ C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. D. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square spot footings are `shown on the Drawings. 2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS: A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, except No. 3 bent ties and stirrups may be Grade 40. B. Dowels for load transfer in floors shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A 675, Grade 80 or ASTM A 499. C. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. 2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. 3. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot/dip galvanized plastic protected or stainless steel protected. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS: A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C 150, Type I, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 4 B. Fine Aggregate: 1. ASTM C 33. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. 2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted. 3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: a. Not larger than one-fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles or bars. b. These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids. D. Fly Ash: The contractor may use ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F fly ash, replacing a maximum of 20% of the cementitious materials content. E. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable. F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. G. Evaporation Reducer: The contractor may use an evaporation reducer equal to "Confilm" as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc., on concrete floor slabs -on -grade. H. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. L Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows: 1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating. J. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by Architect. n 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 5 K. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. k. 2.04 RELATED MATERIALS: , A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Pre -molded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab. B. Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 sections. j C. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. D. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. "^ 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap. E. Concrete Sealer/Hardener: Equal to SealTite Dust -Gard as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. or Intraseal by Conspec. The sealer/hardener shall harden and dust -proof in one easy operation. 2.05 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES: A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable provisions = of ASTM C 94. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1, ACI 301, and ACI 318. 1. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 192 and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C 39, specified in ACI 301. Establish a curve showing relationship between water -cement ratio (or cement content) and compressive strength, with at least 3 points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days, or an earlier age when acceptable to the Architect, to establish each point on the curve. 2. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301. Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 6 If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are available, select proportions to produce an average strength of at least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive strength of concrete. 4. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the job, using ACI 214 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency of an average of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100. C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the Architect. D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules: 1. 3000 psi 28 -day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum (non -air -entrained), 0.46 maximum (air -entrained). 2. See Section 02.514 for additional requirements for concrete mix design for site work concrete. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments maybe requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using in the work. 2.06 ADMIXTURES: A. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. B. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. C. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits: 5.5% with 11/2" maximum aggregate 2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate 3. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate D. Use admixtures for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. ems+ 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 7 E. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 2.07 SLUMP LIMITS: A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3". 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3". 3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition of HRWR to verified 2"-3" slump concrete. 4. All Other Concrete: Not more than 4". 5. Slumps greater than those specified above must be approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to any concrete pour. 2.08 CONCRETE MIXING: A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. B. Control of Mixing Water: When concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, water may be added only if neither the maximum permissible water -cement ratio nor the maximum permissible slump is exceeded. The drum shall be turned an additional 30 revolutions, or more if necessary, until the added water is uniformly mixed into the concrete. C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required. D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 11/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART EXECUTION 3.01 FORMS: A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Forms shall not leak cement paste. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 8 D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for clean out, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snap -off metal form ties, designated to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. H. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least 1 1/2" inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. I. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. J. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Re -tighten forms _ after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. 3.02 PLACING REINFORCING: A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. es CONCRETE WORK 583/01 Section 03.300 Page 9 E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. 3.03 JOINTS: A. Construction Joints: L' Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the Drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect. 2. Provide key -ways at least 11/2" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs and between walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. 3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across construction joints. B. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: 1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. Form edge of pours with wood forms having keyway as detailed on the Drawings. If optional saw cut control joints are used, they shall be made with a power saw fitted with an abrasive or diamond blade. Saw cuts must be one-fourth the slab thickness. Sawing shall begin as soon as the concrete surface is firm enough so that it will not be torn or damaged by the blade. This will be within 4 to 12 hours after the concrete hardens. C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS: A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for omit other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips 7 for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type �^ screeds. 3.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES: A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 10 B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT: A. General: Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. 2. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. 3. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to re- handling or flowing. B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. —_ C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. D. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. I I 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 11 3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. E. Cold Weather Placing: I Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. ni 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of placement. 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. F. Hot Weather Placing: 1 When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing. 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 3.07 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES: A. standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks. B. standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed -to -view, or that are to be covered d directly to the concrete with a coating material applied rete or a covering material bonded to the similar system. This I concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other s ar st in. . s is he as -east concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and smoothed. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 12 C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than the day after form removal. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown. 3.08 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION: A. General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water -fog ' spray. b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows: a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). CONCRETE WORK 583 01 Section 03.300 Page 13 b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during curing period. C. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish `materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing. 1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by methods specified above, as applicable. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. E. Applying Concrete Sealer/Hardener: Apply on all concrete slab floors scheduled to be left exposed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Concrete shall have cured for at a least 14 days. 2. Concrete shall be clean and dry prior to application, with oil stain, grease, etc. removed. 3. Apply by spray or brush applicator to approximate coverage of 500 square feet per gallon. 4. Do not apply if the temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 3.09 REMOVAL OF FORMS: A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Form facing material may be removed 4 dayem s afterform facing material withoulacement, only if shores analoosenmgor vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of disturbing shores and supports. 3.10 RE -USE OF FORMS: A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 14 B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Architect. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS: A. Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on the Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of the manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. D. Reinforced Masonry: Provide masonry grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where indicated on the Drawings and as scheduled. Masonry grout shall comply with ASTM C476. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during grout placement. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS: A. Patching Defective Areas: I. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to Architect. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than V. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discoloration that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. i 583 01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 15 2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. 2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to Architects. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by Architect. E. Repair methods not specified above maybe used, subject to acceptance of Architect. 7,3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION: A. The Contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect. , 583/01 CONCRETE WORK Section 03.300 Page 16 Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Slump: One test for each set of compressive strength test specimens taken at point of discharge. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. 5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. 6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. C. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. C. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7 -day tests and 28 -day tests. D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and additional testing as maybe required, when unacceptable concrete is verified.0 F T i Fk,�sO i .f `' I END OF SECTION 03.300 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. C. V. SUREENDRAN ................................... 33870ENS � Q %�S 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of each type of unit masonry work is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Work under this section includes the providing and installing of all unit masonry work, complete with ties, anchors, reinforcing and all incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the work. a, B. The work includes the providing for installation of materials specified under other sections of the work which are to be built into the work of this section. C. Provide and install concealed flashings at window sills, window and door heads, and at other locations indicated on the Drawings. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 04.230 Reinforced Unit Masonry B. Section 07.600 Flashing and Sheet Metal s� 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1/4" in 10', or 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 20', nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. .m B. Variation from Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more. D. Variation of Linear Cross -Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4" nor plus 1/2 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified requirements. Include instructions for handling, storage, installations and protection. 1.06 SAMPLES A. Provide a minimum of 10 bricks each representing the shades of the existing face brick blend on adjacent buildings. These bricks shall be furnished loose to the job site, and shall be labeled for shade identification. B. Submit actual samples of required reinforcing and anchors. C. Submit samples of manufactured weeps. 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 2 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall provide a one (1) year warranty from the Date of Substantial Completion for all workmanship and materials in this section. — PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer when possible, of uniform texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related area. 2.02 MATERIALS A. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 1. Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. 3. Hollow Loading -Bearing CMU: ASTM C 90-75, Grade "N". 4. Weight: Provide lightweight units using aggregate complying with ASTM C 331 producing dry net unit weight of not more than 105 lbs. per cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated. 5. Curing: Cure units in a moisture -controlled atmosphere or in an autoclave at normal pressure and temperature to comply with ASTM C 90-75, Type I. a. Limit moisture absorption during delivery and until time of installation to the maximum percentage specified for Type I units for the average annual relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest the project site. B. FACE BRICK 1. Face Brick shall be equivalent to masonry products manufactured by Acme Brick Company, matching the existing face brick blend on the adjacent buildings. 2. Provide solid brick where noted on the Drawings, or where holes would otherwise occur on exposed faces. 3. Brick shall be modular size: 3 5/8" deep x 2 1/ " high x 7 5/8" long. 4. Color and blend of brick soldier courses and rowlock courses shall be selected by the Architect. Bond shall be Running Bond. C. MORTAR MATERIALS 1. Conform to latest editions of ASTM. 2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, one sack 94# net, considered one cubic foot. 3. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91 furnished in sacks containing one cubic foot each, marked with the weight. One sack considered one cubic foot. Masonry cement shall be manufactured by Atlas, Lehigh, Lonestar, Trinity or an approved equal. 4. Sand: (Fine Aggregate) 80# damp, considered one cubic foot ASTM C144 of acceptable color graded within the following limits: SIEVE NO. PERCENT OF SAND RETAINED Max. (By Weight) Min. 4 0 0 8 5 0 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 3 16 40 0 30 65 30 50 85 65 100 98 85 5. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil acids, soluble salts and organic impurities. D. MORTAR 1. Mortar shall be type "S 2. Color shall be natural grey. 3. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents. 4. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. E. MASONRY HORIZONTAL REINFORCING 1. Continuous wire reinforcing and ties for masonry: a. Provide truss -type welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10' with matching corner and tee units. Fabricate from cold -drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross -rods, and a unit width of 1-1/2" to 2" less than thickness of wall or partition. 2. Provide units fabricated as follows: a. Truss type fabricated with single pair of 9 ga. side rods and 9 ga. continuous diagonal cross -rods spaced not more than 8" o. c. b. Hot -dip galvanize after fabrication with 1.5 oz. zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class B2. c. For multi-wythed or cavity exterior walls with concrete masonry back-up fabricate units with additional side rods spaced for embedment in inside face of back-up wythe. F. ANCHORS AND TIES 1. Provide straps, bars, bolts and rods fabricated_ from not less than 16 ga. sheet metal or 3/8" diameter rod stock, �. unless otherwise indicated. 2. For devices which extend into exterior wythe, fabricate from steel with hot -dip galvanized coating, ASTM A 153, Class Bl, B2, or B3 3. For cavity walls, provide equivalent to "Double -eye" truss -rectangular type hook and eye adjustable wall reinforcing manufactured by Southern Construction Products, Inc. Provide the proper sizes and widths to fit the conditions encountered. Adjustable wall tie eye sections shall be welded to the truss reinforcing at 16 inch centers. 4. Ties for face brick to drywall backup shall be equivalent to 1#760 -"ES" Series, 12 gauge, manufactured by Southern Construction Products, Inc. Ties shall be placed at a minimum spacing of 16 inches on center both horizontally and vertically. rte+ G. FLASHINGS FOR MASONRY 1. Provide concealed flashings to be built into masonry. 2. Provide concealed flashings as follows: a. Asphalt -Coated Copper: Copper coated both sides with flexible fabricated asphalt, equivalent to "Copper Fabric Flashing" manufactured by Polytite. b. Fabricate with 3 oz. copper, unless otherwise indicted. H. MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES 1. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 of the sizes shown. 2. Metal Expansion Joint Strips: Provide the following formed to the shape shown. r 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 4 a. Bond Breaker Strips: 15-1b. asphalt roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, or 15-1b., coal -tar roofing felt complying with ASTM D 227. b. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Solid rubber strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral stability in masonry wall, size and configuration as indicated. 3. Weeps shall be equivalent to #343W Louvered Weep Hole manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., Ft.Worth, TX, telephone 817/625-9781, gray color. 4. Weep tubes at cast stone heads and sills shall be equivalent to #341 manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., 1/a inch diameter by 4 inches long, white color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECAUTIONS A. Do not lay masonry in freezing weather unless suitable means are provided to heat materials, protect work from cold and frost and ensure that mortar will harden without freezing. No anti -freeze ingredient shall be used. B. Protect masonry materials during storage and construction from wetting by rain, snow or ground water and from soilage or intermixture with earth or other materials. C. Do not use metal reinforcing having loose rust or other coatings, including ice, which will reduce or destroy bond. D. Protect partially completed masonry against weather, when work is not in progress, by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, non -staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2' down both sides of walls and hold securely in place. E. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. For masonry which is to be wetted, comply with BIA recommendations. F. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing. G. Do not apply uniform roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or columns. H. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. I. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. J. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. 3.02 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION A. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch. B. Remove all masonry determined to be frozen or damaged by freezing conditions. C. Perform the following construction procedures while the work is progressing: 1. When air temperature is from 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) to 32 deg. F (0 deg. C), heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) and 120 deg. F (49 deg. Q. 2. When air temperature is from 32 deg. F (0 deg. C) to 25 deg. F (-4 deg. C), heat sand or water to produce mortar temperature between 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) and 120 deg. F (49 deg. C); maintain temperature of mortar 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 5 on boards above freezing. 3. When air temperature is from 25 deg. F 4 deg. C to 20 deg. F 7 deg. Q, heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) and 120 deg. F (49 deg. C); maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing; use salamanders or other heat sources on both sides of walls under construction; use wind breaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph. 4. When air temperature is 20 deg. F (-7 deg. C) and below, heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) and 120 deg. F (49 deg. C); provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 deg. F (0 deg. C); do not lay units which have a surface temperature of 20 deg. F (-7 deg. Q. �*+ D. Perform the following protections for completed masonry and masonry not being worked on: 1. When the mean daily air temperature is from 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) to 32 deg. F (0 deg. C), protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with weather -resistive membrane. When mean daily � ! temperature is from 32 deg. F (0 deg. C to 25 deg. F (-4 deg. , completely cover masonry with weather - resistive membrane for at least 24 hours. 2. When mean daily air temperature is 20 deg. F (-7 deg. C), completely cover masonry with insulting blankets or ^ similar protection for at least 24 hours. 3. When mean daily air temperature is 20 deg. F (-7 deg. C) and below, maintain masonry temperature above 32 deg. F (0 deg. C) for 24 hours using enclosures and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps, or other acceptable methods. t 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single-wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. B. Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for the work of other trades. Provide not less than 8" of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. C. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. D. Do not wet concrete masonry units. E. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in a running bond, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe bonded by lapping not less than 2". Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners, unless otherwise shown. F. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform widths and to properly locate openings, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. G. Lay-up walls plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. H. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2 masonry unit length in each course; no not tooth. Clean exposed sea surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. I. Built -In Work: As the work progresses, build in items specified under this and other sections of these Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 6 1. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 3.04 MORTAR BEDDING JOINTING A. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight, such that the required proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained. Measurement of sand exclusively by shovel will not be permitted. B. Mix mortars with the maximum amount of water consistent with workability to provide maximum tensile bond strength within the capacity of the mortar. C. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Use eater clean and free of deleterious materials which would impair the work. Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or if more than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. Retemper mortar during 2-1/2 hour period as required to restore workability. D. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed, head and collar joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. E. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells; also bed webs into mortar in starting course on footings and foundation walls and in all courses of piers, columns and plasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or to be filled with concrete or grout. F. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 3/8" joints. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. Exposed joints at face brick shall be flush. G. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 3.05 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTI-WYTHE MASONRY A. Use continuous joint reinforcing embedded in horizontal joints for bond tie between wythes. Install at not more than 8" o.c. vertically as specified. Provide continuity at corners and intersections using prefabricated "L" and "T" units. 3.06 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING A. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6" at ends of units. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing, as otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. B. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows: 1. For multi-wythe walls where continuous horizontal reinforcing also acts as structural bond or tie between wythes, space reinforcing as required by code but not less than 16" o.c. vertically. 2. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise indicated. 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 7 C. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1 "-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, both immediately above the lintel and below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 2"-0" beyond jambs of the opening, bridging control joints where provided. 3.07 ANCHORING MASONRY WORK A. Provide anchoring devices of the type shown and specified. If not shown or specified, provide standard type for facing and back-up involved. B. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with metal ties embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie sections, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Space anchors as shown, but not more than 16" o.c. horizontally. 3.08 CONCEALED FLASHINGS A. Concealed flashings shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Apply concealed flashings at sills and other locations embedded in a full covering of cold applied mastic applied at the minimum rate of one gallon to 40 square feet of sheeting area. Flashing shall not be crimped or otherwise installed to promote cracking of the flashing. C. Flashings shall have end dams at all window and door heads, window sills, and similar installations. 3.09 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build -in related masonry accessory items as the masonry work progresses. 1. See Division 7 sections for sealants. 2. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4" in direction of flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any. 3. Build -in flanges of factory -fabricated expansion joint units, specified in a Division 7 section. 4. Build -in joint fillers where shown, specified in a Division 7 section. D. Control Joint Spacing: If location of control joints is not shown, place vertical joints spaced not to exceed 35'-0" o.c. for concrete masonry wythes if reinforced, or 30'- 0" o.c. if not reinforced. 3.10 TUCKPOINTING A. To reduce subsequent shrinkage in tuckpointed joints, the material shall be mixed with just enough water to make a s� damp mixture. This semidry mixture shall be left untouched for 1 to 2 hours, after which it shall be remixed and water added to obtain proper workability. 3.11 WEEPS A. Locate weeps in veneer head joints in first course above flashings, and at base of wall. r 583/01 UNIT MASONRY WORK Section 04.200 Page 8 B. Place weeps in joints at a maximum spacing of 24 inches on center. C. Install manufactured weeps in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.12 PARGING A. All below grade masonry installations shall be fully parged. -- 3.13 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds. C. Clean exposed unit masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. On completion of all masonry work, fill all holes and imperfections or defects and leave joints completely filled and neatly pointed with all mortar droppings removed. Use mild acid for cleaning agent only if approved by Architect, otherwise use stiff fiber brushes and clean water. D. Remove all debris and unused materials resulting from the work of this section from the site. End of Section 9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 583/01 Section 04.230 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL ** 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Requirements of Section 04200, Unit Masonry, apply to work of this section. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protect partially completed masonry against weather, when work is not in progress, by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, nonstaining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2 feet down both sides of walls and anchor securely in place. B. Protect masonry against freezing when the temperature of the surrounding air is 40 degrees F. and falling. Heat materials and provide temporary protection of completed portions of masonry work. Comply with the requirements of the governing code and with the "Construction and Protection Recommendations for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" of the Technical Notes on Brick and Tile Construction by the Structural Clay Products Institute. C. Frozen Materials and Work: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. For masonry which is specified to be wetted, comply with the SCPI recommendations. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing. D. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents. E. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or masonry grout. 1.04 WORKMANSHIP A. It is the express intent of the contract documents to require a first-class masonry job throughout the entire project. Appearance shall be consideration as well as soundness in judging overall quality and workmanship. B. The Contractor shall engage, and keep on project at all times during masonry operations, an experienced and qualified masonry Foreman or Superintendent, satisfactory to the Architect. C. It shall be the duty of the aforementioned individual to layout all masonry work, expedite, and keep all masonry operations under continuous surveillance to ensure the required class of workmanship herein specified. D. Should defects become apparent, same shall be immediately noted, corrected and if necessary, halt masonry operations until corrective measures can be agreed upon. 583/01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 2 Defects are defined as, but not necessarily limited to, unequal joints (horizontal and vertical); surfaces in and out of plane; striation of highlights and shadows with parallel lighting; excessive chips; use of distorted units; bunching of blends; jumping bond; displacement of units after initial setting; surfaces out of plumb; staining; use of off color or off texture units; use of units with manufacturers defects; change of mortar color; toothing; excessive racking; lean or unsound mortar; improper bonding and anchoring; and improper pointing and cleaning. 2. If one or more of the aforementioned defects become apparent and corrective measures cannot remedy said defect, the Contractor shall replace any area or areas of defective masonry without any additional cost to the Owner. Any replaced areas shall be made in even units of surface such as vertical joint to a corner, whole wall or otherwise to prevent a "patched" appearance in any one surface area. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified requirements. Include instructions for handling, storage, installations and protection. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing bars. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Manufacturer: Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas. B. Masonry Unit Characteristics: Provide units complying with standards referenced and requirements indicated. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) A. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" wide x 8" high (15 5/8" x 7 5/8" x 7 5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated. B. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. C. Hollow Load -Bearing CMU: ASTM C 90 where shown as "CMU" and as follows: Weight Classification: Lightweight units unless otherwise indicated. (Less than 105 lbs. per cu. ft., oven dry weight of concrete). E. Water: Clean and potable. 2.04 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A 615 and as follows: 1. Provide Grade 60, except that No. 3 bent ties may be Grade 40. 2. Where No. 2 bars are shown, provide plain, round, carbon steel bars, ASTM A 675, Grade 80. 3. Shop -fabricate reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. B. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing and Ties for Masonry: 1. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with matching corner ("L") units. Fabricate from cold -drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods, into units with widths of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls as required to position side rods for full embedment in mortar coverage of not less than 1/2" elsewhere. Joint reinforcing to meet the following requirements: a. Truss type with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. b. Number of Side Rods: Single pair for single wythe masonry and as indicated for multi-wythe masonry, or if not otherwise indicated, one side rod for each brick wythe and one side rod for each face shell of each concrete masonry wythe. C. Wire Sizes: Fabricate with 9 -gauge side and cross rods, unless otherwise indicated. d. Joint reinforcing to be hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating (1.5 oz. per sq. ft). r 0 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 583/01 Section 04.230 Page 3 D. Cure units in a moisture -controlled atmosphere or in an autoclave at normal pressure and temperature to comply with ASTM C 90, Type 1. E. Limit moisture absorption during delivery and until time of installation to the maximum percentage specified for Type 1 units for the average annual relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest the project site. E F. Exposed Faces: Provide manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. Provide natural color. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type S. ..� C. Aggregate for Masonry Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4" use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve. D. Aggregate for Masonry Grout: ASTM C 404. E. Water: Clean and potable. 2.04 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A 615 and as follows: 1. Provide Grade 60, except that No. 3 bent ties may be Grade 40. 2. Where No. 2 bars are shown, provide plain, round, carbon steel bars, ASTM A 675, Grade 80. 3. Shop -fabricate reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. B. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing and Ties for Masonry: 1. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with matching corner ("L") units. Fabricate from cold -drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods, into units with widths of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls as required to position side rods for full embedment in mortar coverage of not less than 1/2" elsewhere. Joint reinforcing to meet the following requirements: a. Truss type with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. b. Number of Side Rods: Single pair for single wythe masonry and as indicated for multi-wythe masonry, or if not otherwise indicated, one side rod for each brick wythe and one side rod for each face shell of each concrete masonry wythe. C. Wire Sizes: Fabricate with 9 -gauge side and cross rods, unless otherwise indicated. d. Joint reinforcing to be hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating (1.5 oz. per sq. ft). r 0 583/01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 4 2.05 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not lower the freezing point of mortar or masonry grout by use of admixtures or anti -freezing agents. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or masonry grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use Type S, ready -mixed masonry cement for all masonry. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to masonry cement. C. Masonry Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 for masonry grout for use in construction of reinforced and nonreinforced unit masonry. Use masonry grout of consistency indicated or if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement which will completely fill all spaces intended to receive masonry grout. 1. Fine Aggregates complying with ASTM C404, Size No. 1. 2. Coarse Aggregates complying with ASTM C404, Size No. 8 or Size No. 89. 3. Air -Entraining Admixtures will not be permitted in masonry grout. 4. Water -Reducing Admixtures will not be permitted in masonry grout. 5. Grout slump shall be between 10 and 11 inches. 6. Mortar or concrete shall not be substituted for masonry grout. 7. Grout samples shall be taken and tested as per ASTM C1019 for each 5000 sq. ft. of masonry. 8. A grout sample shall be taken and tested whenever there is any change in mix proportions, methods of mixing, or materials used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single-wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. B. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, un -chipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. C. Do not wet concrete masonry units. D. Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and 583/01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 5 bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8" joints. E. Where solid CMU units are shown, lay with full mortar head and bed joints. F. Stopping and Resuming Work. Rack back 1/2 -masonry unit length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. G. Built -In Work: As the work progresses, build -in items specified under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. H. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. 1. Fill CMU cores with masonry grout under bearing plates, beams, posts, lintels and similar conditions unless otherwise indicated. J. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork. K. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. L. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during construction. M. Allow not less than 10 days to elapse after completion of masonry beams and lintels before removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period. 3.02 WALLS AND GROUTING A. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown, or if not shown, lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Bond and interlock each course at corners, unless otherwise shown. Use special -shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. Match coursing, bonding, color and texture of new masonry work with existing work, where indicated. B. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. C. Lay-up walls plumb and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. D. Non -load-bearing Interior Partition Walls: Build full height of story to underside of solid structure above, unless otherwise indicated. E. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to r 583/01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 6 provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. F. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or modify units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcing bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non -reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms. G. Use "Fine Grout" for filling spaces less than 4" in both horizontal directions. H. Use "Coarse Grout" for filling 4" spaces or larger in both horizontal directions. I. Use low -lift grouting techniques subject to the requirements which follow: 1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in. in vertical cores to be grouted. 2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet. 3. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 4 feet height, or if bond beam occurs below 4 feet height, stop pour at course below bond beam. 4. Pour grout using container with spout or by chute. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 11/2" below top course of pour. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1 1/2" below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper position. Clean top surfaces of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures to resist grout pressures. K. Grout Placing: 1. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations. 2. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are acceptable to the Architect. 3. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more than 583/01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 7 one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 4 feet. Allow not less than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation. 4. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam course to within 1" of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry. F; 5. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 11/2" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required. 3.03 JOINTING A. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 3/8" joints. Cut joints flush for masonry wall which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. B. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 3.04 PLACING REINFORCING A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater). C. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the Architect. Provide lapped splices with the minimum lap shown. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie. D. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimum mortar cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. E. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6". Provide continuity at corners by use of prefabricated "L" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity. Space 1°"" continuous horizontal reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically unless otherwise indicated. 583/01 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY Section 04.230 Page 8 F. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structures as indicated. 3.05 LINTELS A. Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds. C. Clean exposed CMU masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. Comply with recommendations in NCMA TEK Bulletin No. 28. END OF SECTION 04.230 ,. �P . • • q * bi This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. C. V 5'�RENDRAW +t�:...:...3387Q.......:® r STRUCTURAL STEEL 283/01 Section 05.120 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL " 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of structural steel work is shown on the Drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required. s that work defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise B. Structural steel i shown on the Drawings. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: h . A. Reinforcing Steel - Section 03.300 B. Steel Joists - Section 05.210 w r C. Metal Roof Decking - Section 05.300 D. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications - Section 05.500 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following except as otherwise indicated: 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby -modified by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings." 2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design", Ninth Edition, and including the "Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued. 3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. AWS D1.1- "Structural Welding Code - Steel". 5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use". 283/01 STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05.120 Page 2 B. Qualifications for Welding Work: 1. Qualify we],.-< processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. 3. If re -certification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's responsibility. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 2. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply. D. Design of Members and Connections: All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at the site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. Promptly notify the Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings, Structural Steel: Submit shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a registered professional engineer including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, and details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. 2. Architect's review of shop drawings will be for general considerations only. Compliance with requirements for materials fabrication and erection of structural steel is the Contractor's responsibility. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. w� a; 283/01 STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05.120 Page 3 B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay that work. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. D. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS u 2.01 MATERIALS: *+ A. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes: ASTM A 992 or A36. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade C, or A36, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated. C. Headed Stud Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold finished carbon steel; with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications. D. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low -carbon steel bolts and nuts. 1. Provide either hexagonal, or square, heads and nuts, except use only hexagonal units for rte, exposed connections. E. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with AS A 325 F. Concrete Expansion Anchors: Wedge type anchors meeting Federal Specification FF -S-325 INT AMD 3, Group II, Type 4, Class 1. G. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code. H. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, s "Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; equal to Tnemec 10-99 (Red) or UE705 Fleet Line Red Oxide Metal Primer by Adams Paint Company, complying with performance requirements for FS TT -P-636 (red oxide). I. Non -Metallic Non -Shrink Grout: Pre -mixed, non-metallic, non -corrosive, non -staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CE CRD -C 621. Section 05.120 Page 4 2.02 FABRICATION: A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown. 2. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 3. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces on members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. B. Connections: 1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. 2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 3. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are shown. C. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only the bolted connections of secondary framing members to primary members (including purlins, girts and other framing members taking only nominal stress) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection. D. High -Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts". Install flat hardened washers over slotted holes occurring in the outer ply of connections. g. Welded Construction: 1. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. F. Stud Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer of the stud connectors. Shop weld stud connectors, as shown, to bearing or embedded plates. Use automatic . accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. end welding of headed stud connectors G. Holes for Other Work: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final shop drawings. Provide r r� i 283/01 STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05.120 Page 5 threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. 2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. H. Splicing: Splicing of beams shall be as shown on the Drawings. All other splicing shall be made only with the written consent of the Architect and/or Engineer. When approved, copies of weld tests shall be furnished to the Architect and Engineer. 2.03 SHOP PAINTING: A. General: 1. Shop paint all structural steel work, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on the exposed portions and the initial 2" of embedded areas only. 2. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction -type connections. 3. Do not paint surfaces, which are scheduled to receive sprayed -on fireproofing. 4. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and splatter, slag or flux deposits. Solvent clean steel to remove all soluble contaminates followed by power tool cleaning to remove all insoluble contaminates in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: 1. SSPC-SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning", or 2. SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or 3. SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or �., 4. SSPC-SP 7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning". C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. fr Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and all exposed surfaces. s■� 283/01 STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05.120 Page 6 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. 3.02 ERECTION: A. General: Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein specified. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete the work. D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. 2. Refer to Division 3 of these specifications for anchor bolt installation requirements in concrete, and Division 4 for masonry installation. E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. 3. Tighten the anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions, or as otherwise required. 283 01 STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 05.120 Page 7 F. Field Assembly: 1. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 2. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified AISC tolerances. s ..,. 3. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on the mean operating temperature of the structure. Make allowances for the difference between temperature at time of erection ,. and the mean temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in service. 4. Splice members only where shown or specified. i G. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. H. Comply with AISC Specifications: For bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. I. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. J. Gas -Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to the Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. K. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. L. Shear Connectors: All areas to which studs are to be attached must be free of all foreign material, such as rust, oil, grease, paint, etc. When the mill scale is sufficiently thick to cause difficulty in obtaining proper welds, it must be removed by grinding or blasting. M. Stud connectors shall be installed on all bearing or embedded plates. Number of shear connectors required is shown on the plans. Use automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION 05.120 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. OF r*: ...:.... PC V, SUR NDRAN t�4........33870....... � r 0 STEEL JOISTS 583/01 Section 05.210 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of steel joists is shown on the Drawings, including basic layout and type of joists required. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Provide joists fabricated in compliance with the following, and as herein specified. 1. SJI "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables" for: a. K -Series Open Web Steel Joists b. KCS -Series Open Web Steel Joists B. Qualification of Welding Work: 1. Joint connections and splices of joist members shall be made by welding and shall comply with the SJI "Standard Specifications" and "Technical Digest #8 - Welding of Open Web Steel Joists". 2. Joists welded in place may subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of the steel joists for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove and replace any work found to be defective and provide new acceptable work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data, Steel Joists: 1. Joist manufacturer shall be a member of the Steel Joist Institute. 2. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of joist and its accessories. Include manufacturer's certification that joists comply with SJI "Standard Specifications". Indicate by transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been distributed to the Erector. B. Shop Drawings, Steel Joists: 1. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, special connections, jointing and accessories. Include the mark, number, type, location and spacing of joists and bridging. 583/01 STEEL JOISTS Section 05.210 Page 2 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver, store and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI "Standard Specifications". Handle and store joists in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses. B. Joists shall be delivered to the jobsite in an upright position and shall be unloaded with a two point sling on a winch line from a crane or winch truck. Allowing joists to fall from the bed of a truck will not be permitted. C. Store joists in an upright position with blocking spaced not more than 15 feet on center. Brace joists in an upright position until hoisted onto structure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Standard Specifications" B. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular hexagon type, low carbon steel. C. Steel Prime Paint: Comply with SJI "Standard Specifications", except asphalt type paint not permitted. 2.02 FABRICATION: A. General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications". B. Bridging: 1. Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for "open web" joists, complying with SJI "Standard Specifications". 2. Provide bridging anchors for ends of all bridging lines terminated at walls or beams. C. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages to secure joists to adjacent construction, complying with SJI "Standard Specifications", unless otherwise indicated. D. Shop Painting: 1. Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories before application of shop paint. 2. Apply one shop coat of steel joist primer paint to steel joists and accessories, by spray, dipping, or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil. !P" 583/01 STEEL JOISTS Section 05.210 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Erector must pxamine the areas and conditions under which steel joists are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. 3.02 ERECTION: A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SH "Standard Specifications", final shop drawings, and as herein specified. B. Bearing Plates: 1 Furnish bearing plates to be built into the concrete and masonry construction. a. Refer to Division 4 sections for installation of bearing plates set in masonry. C. Placing Joists: 1. Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently fastening. 2. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction. D. Bridging: 1. Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before any construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminated at walls or beams. E. Fastening Joists: 1 Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SH "Standard specifications" for the type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with the placing of joists. 2. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SH "Standard Specifications" for the type of joists used. 3. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for bolted connections, unless otherwise indicated. 583/01 STEEL JOISTS Section 05.210 Page 4 F. Touch -Up Painting: 1. After joist installation, paint all field bolt heads and nuts, and welded areas, abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting. Use the same type of paint as used for shop painting. END OF SECTION 05.210 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. 4;!:,% r� �s4I8 C. V. S.11REENDRANe 33870 <'C N S �O•' \alfiM,► METAL ROOF DECK 583 01 Section 05.300 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of metal roof decking is shown on the Drawings, including basic layout and type of deck units required. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Steel Joists - Section 05.210 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members". 2. AWS S13 -,,structural Welding Code - Sheet Steer'. 3. SDI "Steel Roof Deck Design Manual". B. Qualification of Welding Work - 1 . Qualify welding processes and welding operators for welding sheet steel in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 2. Decking welded in place is subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of decking for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and provide new acceptable work. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Uplift Loading: install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading of 45 lbs. per sq. ft. at eave overhang and 30 lbs. per sq. ft. for other roof areas. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout Of deck Panels, anchorage details and every condition requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, special jointing or other accessories. 583/01 METAL ROOF DECK Section 05.300 Page 2 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Steel for Painted Finish: ASTM A 611, Grade C. B. Paint for Non -Galvanized Deck: Deck unit manufacturer's baked -on, rust -inhibitive paint, for application to metal surfaces which have been chemically cleaned and phosphate chemical treated. C. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 992. D. Flexible Closure Strips for Deck: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. 2.02 FABRICATION: A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports with flush, telescoped or nested 2" end laps and nesting side laps, unless otherwise indicated. Provide deck configurations complying with SDI "Basic Design Specifications", and as specified herein. B. Wide -Rib Deck. Depth approximately 11/2"; ribs spaced approximately 6" o.c.; width of rib opening at roof surface not more than 2 1/2'; width of bottom rib surface not less that 13/4". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which metal roof decking items are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install roof deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and final shop drawings, and as specified herein. Suspended ceilings, light fixtures, ducts, or other utilities shall not be supported by the steel deck. B. Placing Roof Deck Units: 1. Place roof deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends bearing on supporting members and accurately aligned end to end before being permanently fastened. Lap ends not less than 2". Do not stretch or contract the sidelap interlocks. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive deflection. 2. Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured properly and is dry. 3. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in placing and locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. METAL ROOF DE 583/01 Section 05.300 Page 3 4. Do not use deck units for storage or working platform until permanently secured. C. Fastening Deck Units: 1. Permanently fasten roof .deck units to steel supporting members as detailed on the drawings. 2. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal -arc welding, the quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting welding work. appearance and 3. Lock side laps between adjacent deck units at intervals not exceeding 36" o.c. by mechanical fasteners. D. Cutting and Fitting: 1. Cut and fit roof deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the roof decking, as shown on the Drawings. Provide neat, square and trim cuts. 2. Openings not shown on the Drawings, such as those required for stacks, conduits, plumbing, vents, etc., shall be cut (and reinforced, if necessary) by the trades requiring the openings. E. Reinforcement at Openings: 1. Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking and support of other work, unless otherwise shown. 2. Reinforce roof decking around openings less than 15" in any dimension by means of a flat steel sheet placed over the opening and fusion welded to the top surface of the deck. Provide steel sheet of the same quality as the deck units, not less than 20 gage, and at least 12" wider and longer than the opening. Provide welds at each corner and spaced not more than 12" o.c. along each side. F. Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at all open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking, �., and in the voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation. G. Roof Insulation Support: Provide metal closure strips for the support of roof insulation where the rib openings in the top surface of roof decking occur adjacent to edges and openings. Weld closure strips into position. 3.03 TOUCH-UP PAINTING: A. After roof decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on the top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. B. Touch-up shop painted surfaces with the same paint used in the shop, as recommended by the deck manufacturer. 0 e 583/01 METAL ROOF DECK Section 05.300 Page 4 C. In areas where touch-up painted surfaces are to be exposed, apply the paint to blend into the adjacent surfaces in a manner that will minimize visual discontinuity in the coatings. END OF SECTION 05.300 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. +gip..........:i �� t S' s 8 C.......V. —P1JR ENL?RANr �....: ..........................:... �i'0 ' 33070 Q SSCENS...-CN A OMAI 583/01 METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05.500 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of miscellaneous metalwork is shown on the Drawings and includes items fabricated from metal shapes, plates, angles, lintels, tubes, and pipe which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems in other sections of these specifications. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Concrete Work - Section 03.300 B. Structural Steel - Section 05.120 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete for installation of miscellaneous metal work. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1. See Section 03.300, Concrete Work, for installation of inserts and anchorage devices. C. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings, Miscellaneous Metal: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal assemblies. Include plans, elevations, details, sections and connections. Show anchorages and accessory items. ems, PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. 583/01 METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05.500 Page 2 B. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. C. Steel Tubing: Hot -formed, welded or seamless, ASTM A 501. D. All galvanizing shall be hot dipped galvanizing, ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 386. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; type as selected; Grade A; black finish unless galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise shown or specified. F. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; equal to Tnemec 10-99 (Red) or UE705 Fleet Line Red Oxide Metal Primer by Adams Paint Company, complying with performance requirements for FS TT -P-636 (red oxide). 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL: A. Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of work. B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. C. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS Code. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown, or if not shown, phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. E. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide adequate support for intended use. F. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as required to receive finish hardware and similar items. G. Shop Painting: Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise specified. 2. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning". GQ2 Section 05.500 Page 3 3. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning' or SSPC- SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning', or SSPC-SP 7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning". 4. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. 5. Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS: A. Carpenter's Iron Work: Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware are required under other sections. B. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron od structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers for heads and nuts which bear on wo washers. C. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise construction shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates and minimum joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. D. Perimeter Angles: Furnish and install continuousunm'sh all nees at cessary essary cl ps of roof r decks where and frame all openings in same as noted or detailed. E. Floor Edging: At the termination of floor slab under Overhead Type Doors, furnish angles as noted to provide a weatherseal. PART 3 EXECUTION �., 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Anchorages: Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. rpt w 583/01 METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05.500 Page 4 B. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal items to in-place constructions; including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. C. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal items. Set work accurately in location alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing of anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. F. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. END OF SECTION 05.500 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. n�* w rte. 583/01 CARPENTRY WORK Section „016.'100 Page.1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Carpentry work includes carpentry not specified as a part of other sections of these Specifications and which generally is not exposed to view unless otherwise Detailed or Scheduled. Work under this section includes: 1. Wood Forming. 2. Wood Grounds, Nailers and Blocking. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber standards shall comply with PS 20 and with the applicable rules of the respective grading and inspecting agencies for species and products indicated. B. Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency, except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate that materials have been inspected and graded in accordance with grading standards if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. C. Keep materials dry during delivery, storage and handling. Store lumber and plywood in stacks with provision for air circulation. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp surfaces. Protect exposed materials from weather. D. Coordinate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports so that attached work will comply with design requirements. E. Shop -fabricate carpentry work to the extent feasible and where shop fabrication will result in better workmanship than feasible for on-site fabrication. F. Treat lumber as specified. G. Fit carpentry work to other work. Scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. H. Time delivery and installation of carpentry work to avoid delaying other trades whose work is dependent on or affected by the carpentry work and to comply with protection and storage requirements. I. Keep carpentry materials dry during delivery. Store lumber and plywood in stacks with provision for air circulation within stacks. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp or wet surfaces. Protect exposed materials against weather. J. Do not store dressed or treated lumber outdoors. 583/01 CARPENTRY WORK Section 06.100 Page 2 K. Store materials for which a maximum moisture content is specified, only in areas where relative humidity has been reduced to a level where specified moisture content can be maintained with a tolerance of plus or minus I%. L. Advise Contractor of heating or cooling requirements for installation areas and for maintaining required temperature until Owner's acceptance of the work. M. Deliver, store and handle exterior gypsum sheathing in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Western Wood Products Association, "Grading Rules for Western Lumber". B. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading rules for Southern Pine Lumber". C. Product Standard of NSB, "Product Standard P3-166 for Softwood Plywood/Construction and Industrial". D. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards". 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for proper use of each type of treated material. Indicate by transmittal form that copy of each instruction has been distributed to the Installer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Provide lumber complying with lumber producer's inspection agency grading rules certified as conforming to the "National Grading Rules for Dimension Lumber" by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC). Dress dimensional lumber S4S unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 FRAMING A. Roof and Floor Joists shall be No. 2 Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum moisture content. B. Studs shall be Stud Grade, Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum moisture content. C. Other Framing Material shall be No. 2 Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum moisture content. D. Grounds and Nailer shall be No. 2 Douglas Fir -Larch, 19% maximum moisture content. 2.03 FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES A. Provide size, type, materials and finish for each application, complying with the following: 583/01 CARPENTRY WORK Section 06.100 Page 3 1. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel. 2. Nails and Staples: FS FF -N-105. 3. Tacks: FS FF -N-103. 4. Wood Screws: FS FF -S-111. 5. Bolts and Studs: FS FF -B-575. 6. Nuts: FS FF -N-836. 7. Washers: FS FF -W-92. 8. Lag Screws or Lag Bolts: FS FF -B-561. 9. Expansion Shields, Expansion Nails and Drive Screw Devices: FS FF -S-325. 10. Toggle Bolts: FS FF -B-588. • 11. Bar or Strap Anchors: ASTM A 575 carbon steel bars. 2.04 WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Treat wood, including lumber and plywood, shown or scheduled as "Exterior Treated" or specified herein to be treated, to comply with the applicable requirements of the American Wood Preservers Institute (AWPI). B. Pressure treat the following items with water -borne preservatives for above ground use, complying with AWPI-LP-22: 1. Nailers, blocking, stripping and similar members in connection with roofing and flashing systems. 2. Kiln -dry wood to a maximum moisture content of 15 % after treatment with water -borne .. preservatives. 2.05 FIRE -RETARDANT TREATED A. All wood concealed in wall, ceiling or roof framing construction required to have afire -rated assembly shall be fire -retardant treated. Wood must pass U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1 and No. 32-7 and must not have a flame spread of over 25. B. Exposed wood for paint or transparent finish shall not be fire -retardant treated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION 583/01 CARPENTRY WORK Section 06.100 Page 4 A. Installer must examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the carpentry work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. B. Anchors shall be installed where specified or shown on the Drawings to anchor carpentry to masonry or concrete. Anchors for wall partition sills may be 1/2" bolts 12" long spaced 6 fee o.c. or power driven nails at 3 feet o.c. C. A moisture seal or barrier shall be placed under or around wood members which bear on or are embedded in concrete or masonry. Seal shall be asphalt mastic, or other approved type. D. Provide wood grounds and blocking of size and shape required for plaster work, for securing toilet accessories, finish hardware, door stops, and trim for chalkboards, tackboards, etc. Install true to line, level plumb, and well secured in place. Wood blocking or nailers on dry wall metal framing systems shall be bolted in place. 3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Contractor shall perform such work in his line as is usually required for plumbing, heating, electrical or other mechanics. He shall also furnish, of required sizes and forms, all furring at otherwise shown or specified, rough brackets, forms, etc., as required to properly carry out the intent of the work as shown by Drawings and Specifications. 3.03 TEMPORARY CLOSURES A. Protect all door openings, and other openings except windows when so required, with temporary batten doors, in plastered portions where conditions require. 3.04 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall do all work necessary to cover and protect all masonry window sills and metal and wood door jambs and protect all new carpentry work or material from damage of any character. B. Any work damaged through neglect of above causes or by any other means shall be replaced by Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. End of Section 583/01 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06.400 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of each type of architectural woodwork is shown on the Drawings and in Schedules. B. "Architectural Woodwork" is defined to include (in addition to items so designated on the Drawings) all miscellaneous exposed wood members commonly known as Finish Carpentry or Millwork, unless such items are specified under another section of these Specifications. C. The types of architectural woodwork include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Casework for transparent finish. 2. Plastic laminate for casework and trim. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with specified provisions of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards". B. The approved woodwork manufacturer must have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and shall have successfully completed comparable work. The Architect reserves the right to approve the woodwork manufacturer selected to furnish all of the woodwork. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment and joinery, methods of construction and material selections. B. Submit three (3) samples of each piece which is to receive transparent finish at job site. Each sample shall be 8 inches square. 1.05 FIELD DIMENSIONS A. The woodwork manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions, and shall show on the shop drawings all required field measurements to be furnished by the General Contractor. The General Contractor and the woodwork manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions. �^* 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas which meet the requirements '"" specified for installation areas. 583/01 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06.400 Page 2 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the work under this section is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do no proceed with work — under this section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Advise the Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for woodwork installation areas. do not install woodwork until the required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized in installation areas. C. Maintain temperature and relative humidity as required for a tolerance of plus or minus 1 % of the specified optimum moisture content until woodwork receives specified finishes. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions until acceptance of the work by the Owner. D. Protect installed woodwork from damage by other trades until Owner's acceptance of the work. Advise Contractor of required protection procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Red Oak Casework for transparent finish. 1. AWI Section 400, premium grade. 2. Red Oak, plain sawn at all exposed and semiexposed surfaces. B. Laminated Plastic 1. Plastic Laminate shall be equivalent to the Wilsonart and Nevamar products listed in the finish schedule and specified in this section. Reference the finish schedule and the Room Finish Schedules bound in these Specifications immediately following section 01010. 2. Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400B "Laminate Clad Cabinet". 3. Horizontal surfaces shall be GP -50 (0.050 inch nominal thickness). 4. Color to be selected by Architect. C. Casework Hardware 1. All finishes shall be US10 or brass. 2. Drawer Slides: equivalent to K&V 1429. 3. Door and Drawer Locks: equivalent to K&V 986-8 required. 4. Hinges: equivalent to Grass 1200 series with backplate, to fit conditions encountered. 5. Pulls: equivalent to Hasele 117-28-331, black. 6. Self Supports and Standards: equivalent to K&V 255BR and 256R BR. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. B. Backprime woodwork on all surfaces which will be concealed with one coat of wood primer. Schedule delivery to allow time for application and drying of backprime coat before installation of woodwork. 3.02 INSTALLATION GENERAL 583/01 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06.400 Page 3 A. Install, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. B. Cut to fit unless specified to be shop -cut to exact size. Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners. C. Distribute defects allowed in the quality grade specified to the best overall advantage, when installing job assembled woodwork items. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Trim and Moldings: Install in single, unjointed lengths for openings and for runs less than 10'. For longer runs, use only one piece less than 10' in any straight run. Stagger joints in adjacent members, cope at returns and miter at corners. B. Attach securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building movements. C. Blind nail where possible. Use fine finishing nails where exposed. Set exposed nail heads for filling, except for exterior wood which is to receive a natural finish (if any). D. Secure woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. E. Screw attach where noted on Drawings, to provide Owner -access to attic or wall chases. F. Clean woodwork and fill nail holes in preparation for finishes specified under Painting Sections of these Specifications. Where woodwork is to receive a transparent finish, use matching wood filler. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CASEWORK A. Install casework in a manner consistent with the specified Quality Grade to be plumb level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as using concealed shims. B. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, conceal end fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work. 3.05 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Repair damaged or defective work as directed by the Architect. B. Clean exposed interior and exterior surfaces. C. Clean shop finished woodwork, touch-up finish as required and remove and refinish damaged or soiled areas of finish. End of Section 583/01 CONCRETE SEALER :. Section 07.180 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this section includes the preparation work and the furnishing and application of a concrete sealer over all surfaces of interior concrete paving, ramps and slabs. B. Furnish all materials, tools, accessories, labor and services required to provide a complete, satisfactory and watertight installation. C All applications of sealer shall be performed during weekends or after hours when the parking areas around the building are empty. No sealer shall be applied while vehicles are parked in the parking areas adjacent to the building. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 02.514 Concrete Curbs, Walks and Paving B. Section 03.300 Concrete Work C. Section 07.190 Water Repellents ^ D. Section 07.920 Caulking and Sealants 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Applicator shall have a minimum of five years experience in commercial applications of the quality and scope specified in this section, and shall be a certified applicator by the manufacturer. The Applicator shall submit a copy of the manufacturer's certification with the quotation for this work. B. All materials shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. C. Test a small area of surface before starting general application to ensure desired results. Low pressure airless spray tip (pressure not to exceed 10 lbs.) is recommended for best application. Brush may also be used. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review complete product data for each product required in this section. B. Submit manufacturer's instructions for handling, storage and application for each product required in this section. C. Submit manufacturer's maintenance and repair instructions. �» D. Submit material certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying that each material complies with the requirements of this section. """ 1.06 WARRANTY A. At the completion of the project, the Applicator shall submit three copies of an unlimited one (1) year warranty r�+ 583/01 CONCRETE SEALER Section 07.180 Page 2 covering materials and workmanship. The submitted warranty shall include the manufacturer's material warranty. B. The warranty period shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. C. The warranty shall cover the following conditions which result from either material or workmanship defects: 1. Moisture penetration through the coating to the substrate. 2. Peeling or flaking of the water repellent coating. 3. Unsightly surface appearance, such as moderate to severe darkening of the surface appearance or an irregular pattern of values on the surface. D. The warranty coverage shall include all materials, services, labor, equipment, tools and accessories to return the sealer to a watertight condition at no cost to the Owner. E. The warranty shall not be subject to a deductible, and shall not be prorated. F. The materials specified for the application shall be equivalent to those manufactured by HARRIS SPECIALTY CHEMICAL, INC. The manufacturer must be notified at least two (2) weeks prior to application that a warranty will be required. Warranties are issued by HARRIS CHEMICAL, INC. on an individual job basis. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver sealer materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, new, unopened packages and containers bearing the manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Contents by volume. 4. Thinning instructions (if permitted). 5. Application instructions. 6. Handling instructions and precautions. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers at a minimum ambient temperature of 45' F. (7°C.) in a well ventilated area. Maintain containers used in storage of coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Protect sealer materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measurers to ensure that workmen and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application. D. The sealer material shall be thoroughly stirred before and occasionally during use. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Surface, air and material temperatures shall not be lower than 45° F. or higher than 100°F. during application. B. Weather shall be clear. There shall be no precipitation during application or expected for 12-24 hours following application. C. Areas not subject to natural ventilation shall have positive ventilation provided throughout the application. D. Surfaces to be treated can be slightly damp, but for best results, a dry surface is recommended. E. Personnel shall be warned against contact of materials with skin or eyes. End of Section ' 583/01 CONCRETE SEALER Section 07.180 Page 3 F. Protect surfaces to remain uncoated during application. Use drop cloths or masking if required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Sealer shall be equivalent to THOROSEAL SPECIAL as manufactured by HARRIS SPECIALTY k CHEMICAL, INC., Jacksonville, Florida, 1-800.322-7825. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. All materials handling, preparation work and application work shall be in strict accordance with Concrete Sealer t Manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Notify Architect in writing of any conditions requiring additional preparation prior to application. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Joint sealant work shall be complete and fully cured prior to the application of water repellent penetrating sealer. B. Keep sealer products from freezing in containers. C. Clean all surfaces to receive sealer. 3.04 INSTALLATION ,�. A. Apply one coat of sealer. Completely flood entire surface. B. Material should be applied to saturation, with a controlled rundown, maximum of 8 inches. C. Provide a mist coat before general application to help break surface tension to ensure maximum penetration of saturation coat. D. Coverage rates shall comply with the recommendations of the manufacturer's technical services. E. Coverage rates shall be appropriate for the porosity and finish of the substrate, and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. i 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean all other finish surfaces which are coated or oversprayed with sealer. B. All debris and extra materials resulting from the work of this section shall be removed from the site. End of Section 583/01 WATER REPELLENTS Section 07.190 Page 1 rn" PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this r section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this section includes the preparation, materials, services, and equipment required in conjunction with the application of a clear water repellent on all above grade, vertical and horizontal, exterior exposed surfaces of CMU, concrete and brick. r** B. Similar work used for exposed finishes is excluded by definition, and if required, is specified as roofing, flashings, vapor barriers, special coatings, or other appropriate category of work. C. Sealants and other moisture protection items are specified under other sections of these Specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS r A. Submit for approval manufacturer's technical literature, specifications, sample warranty and application instructions for all types of water repellent materials. B. Submit certification stating that Applicator has a minimum of three (3) years successful experience applying the specified product. Provide a list of several most recently completed projects where the specified material was used. Include the project name, location, architect and method of application. Identify the application equipment that will be used, and certify that it is well maintained and in good working order. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: A firm with no less than ten (10) years experience in manufacturing principle material required for work. B. Applicator Qualification: Applicator shall have a minimum of three (3) years successful experience applying the specified product. C. Mock -Up: 1. Apply water repellent per manufacturer's application instructions to not less that 20 square feet of substrate material which matches actual job conditions. Determine the optimum coverage rate required for application. 2. After sample treatment has cured (approximately 12 to 24 hours), water test to verify that substrate is coated with sufficient water repellent to effectively repel moisture from the surface. 3. Verify that application of water repellent materials will produce no surface stains or discoloration, and obtain Architect's approval. D. Preapplication Meeting: Convene a preapplication meeting two weeks prior to the start of application of the - specified material. Attendance by a representative of each of the following organizations is required; the application firm, the architectural firm, the water repellent manufacturer. a, 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY 583/01 WATER REPELLENTS Section 07.190 Page 2 A. Deliver materials to the job site in original sealed containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name, and type of material. Verify the product matches that of the original sample applied on the mock-up wall. B. Store materials inside if possible, away from sparks and open flame. Store in a secure area to avoid tampering and contamination. Water based materials must be kept from freezing. Store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Surface must be free of cracks, dirt, oils, paint or other contaminants which may effect the appearance or performance of the water repellent material. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Air and substrate temperature must be above 40° F (5°C) or below 95° F (35° C) unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer. 2. Do not proceed with application if the substrate is wet or contains frozen water. 3. Do not apply material when rain is predicted within 48 hours; or earlier than five days after the substrate became wet. 4. Do not apply materials in high or gusty winds. C. Protection: 1. Special precautions shall be taken to avoid vapor transmission (fumes) from entering the building being treated. Ventilation systems and fresh air intakes shall be turned off, closed and sealed with 6 mil plastic, with all edges and openings sealed. 2. Protect shrubs, metal, wood trim, glass, stone, asphalt and other building hardware during application from overspray. 3. Do not permit spray mist or liquid to drift onto surrounding properties. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Architect shall be notified not less than 48 hours before each application of water repellent is scheduled. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Each type of water repellents shall be guaranteed by the water repellent manufacturer against leakage of water, excessive deterioration, discoloration, staining, or otherwise failing to perform as required within the warranty period, due to failure of materials. B. Each type of water repellents shall be guaranteed by the Applicator against leakage of water, excessive deterioration, discoloration, staining, or otherwise failing to perform as required within the warranty period, due to faulty workmanship. C. Submit completed manufacturer's written "Request For Warranty Form" to manufacturer ten (10) days prior to application. D. After substantial completion of the project, submit manufacturer's written "5 Year Warranty Application" to manufacturer for processing. Upon receiving validated warranty, submit three (3) copies to Architect and Building Owner. E. The period of warranty for materials shall be for 5 years beginning on the Date of Substantial Completion. 583/01 WATER REPELLENTS Section 07.190 Page 3 F. The period of warranty for the workmanship shall be for one year beginning on the Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Masonry water repellent shall be equivalent to PRIME A PELL H2O Brick and Precast Formula manufactured by Chemprobe Technologies, Inc. B. Water repellent shall be a water based siloxane water repellent suitable for use on vertical surfaces C. All products must contain siloxane. No fillers, stearates, or paraffins are allowed. Products containing Siloxane only, must have a range of three (3) to even (7) percent solids. Silane-Siloxane blend product must have a minimum of twenty (20) percent solids. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. All concrete, stucco, brick, CMU, etc. to receive the specified water repellent must be cleaned of all loose particles of dust, dirt, oil, wax, detergent, soap excess mortar, or any other foreign matter. All surfaces must be completely dry and clean before application. New masonry and mortar must cure a minimum of twenty-one (21) days before application. Apply water repellent after installation of joint sealants. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Application shall be made by a professional waterproofing company with at least three years experience. Material must be applied using low pressure application equipment designed for water repellent application. Apply material as shipped by the manufacturer. Do not dilute. Apply treatment evenly until surface is totally saturated. Coverage rates are dependent on substrate material. Only one saturation coat is required. Refer to manufacturer's published application instruction for complete details B. Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetration work has been completed. Installer shall not commence' work until all substrate and other conditions are acceptable to the Applicator for a satisfactory installation. C. Proceed with work under this heading only when weather conditions comply with manufacturer s recommendations. D. All products shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .�, A. The Architect shall be contacted 48 hours prior to application. The Architect will inspect the progress as the work proceeds .� B. After water repellent has dried (24 hours — low humidity — medium temperature (70° - 90° F) and 48 hours — high humidity— low temperature (500 - 69° F)), all surfaces shall be tested with a water spray. Recoat any area that indicates water absorption. 3.04 CLEANING E 583/01 WATER REPELLENTS Section 07.190 Page 4 A. Remove all debris, tools, and unused materials from the site at the completion of this category of work. B. Dispose of water repellent containers according to state and local environmental regulations. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect shrubs, metal, wood trim, glass, stone, asphalt and other building hardware during application from overspray. Do not permit spray mist or liquid to drift onto surrounding properties or parking lots. Avoid contact with automobile paints and windshields. Clean up immediately after application using a solvent based cleaner or mineral spirits. End of Section w 0 583/01 BUILDING INSULATION Section 07.210 Page 1 PARTI. GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide batt type insulation at interior walls and ceilings where shown on the Drawings. B. Provide rigid type insulation on exterior C.M.U./brick walls as shown on the Drawings. C. Provide all materials, accessories, labor and services required for a complete and satisfactory installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of insulation required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Do not allow insulation materials to become wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Batt type insulation shall be unfaced fiberglass sound attenuation batt insulation as manufactured by CertainTeed, thickness and R values as noted on the Drawings. B. Insulation in exterior masonry walls shall be equivalent to Celotex Corporation "Thermax" Cavity Wall Insulation 610C rigid glass reinforced polyisocyanurante board with standard plain aluminum foil facers on both sides. The insulation thickness shall be 1.0 inches, as noted on the Drawings. The aged U valve @ 75° F. mean temperatuere is 21.6. Sheet size shall be 16" wide. C. Mechanical and adhesive anchors for attachment of the rigid insulation to the CMU substrate shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until substrate is satisfactory. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case; including method of support or anchorage to the substrate, as appropriate for each application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the conditions of the project, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. 583/01 BUILDING INSULATION Section 07.210 Page 2 C. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire surface to be insulated. Insulation shall extend to the roof deck. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. D. Apply a single layer of insulation of the thickness indicated. Attach units to substrate to provide permanent placement and support of units. E. Insulation shall be butted tightly together. End of Section 583/01 ROOF INSULATION Section 07.212 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of roof insulation work is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. The work includes the mechanical fastening of rigid polyisocyanurate insulation over a metal roof deck where indicated on the Drawings. C. The work includes the mopping of rigid perlite insulation over the polyisocyanurate insulation where indicated on the Drawings. D. Furnish all incidentals necessary for the satisfactory completion of the work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The roof insulation work shall be done by a single firm so that there will be undivided responsibility for the specified performance of all component parts specified in Sections 07.212, 07.520, 07.610 and 07.900. B. All work shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions for the indicated conditions. C. All materials, work and systems shall be in accordance with the requirements of the roofing system manufacturer to permit the issuance of the ten (10) year unlimited guarantee specified in Section 07520 Modified Bitumen Roofing. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for the roofing insulation products required. Include data substantiating that the materials comply with specified requirements, including evidence of required "R" values. Indicate that the Installer has received a copy of the manufacturer's instructions. B. Submit a sample section of all required roof insulation materials. C. Submit manufacturer's product specifications for mechanical fasteners including installation instructions and data substantiating that the fastener meets the requirements of this section. Submit manufacturer's r specifications for each type of fastener required for each type of structural deck substrate encountered. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store insulation materials on wood pallets above the ground in a manner which will ensure that there is no possibility of significant moisture penetration into the materials. Store in a dry, well ventilated, weathertight place. C. Do not store roofing materials on the roof deck in concentrated areas which will impose excessive stress on the deck or structural members. 583/01 ROOF INSULATION 1.06 REFERENCES Section 07.212 Page 2 A. ANSI/ASTM D41 - asphalt primer used in roofing, dampproofing, and waterproofing. B. ASTM D312 - asphalt used in roofing. C. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - roofing and waterproofing manual. D. NBS-55 - preliminary performance criteria for bituminous membrane roofing. E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - fire hazard classifications. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section for a period of not less than 5 years. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and approved by the Manufacturer to construct and repair the Manufacturer's guaranteed roofing systems. 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for roof assembly fire hazard requirements. B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Class A Fire Hazard Classification. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Primer shall conform to ASTM D-41. B. Bitumen shall be airblown asphalt manufactured especially for roofing purposes complying with the current edition or latest revision of ASTM specification D-312, Steep Grade, Type III, 185-205 degrees F. softening point. C. Rigid Polyisocyanurate insulation shall meet FS HH - I - 1972, RIC/TIMA, equivalent to Schuller UltraGard, 2 inch minimum thickness, tapered '/a inch in 12 inches. D. Rigid Perlite Insulation shall be equivalent to Fesco Board perlite insulation manufactured by Schuller of Denver, Colorado. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be N inch, with an R value of 2.08. E. Fasteners shall be appropriate for the conditions encountered and approved by both Factory Mutual and insulation manufacturer. Furnish lengths required for thickness of material and type of roof deck. Fastener selection, spacing and installation shall resist a wind uplift force of 90 pounds per square foot of deck area in accordance with UL 1897. F. Furnish and install all other materials and accessories to provide a complete and satisfactory installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ROOF INSULATION 583/)l Section 07.212 Page 3 A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secured. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, and properly sloped. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, and cant strips, nailing strips and reglets are in place. 3.02 INSULATION APPLICATION OVER METAL ROOF DECK A. The metal roof deck shall be cleaned prior to application of the rigid insulation. B. Mechanically fasten one layer of rigid polyisocyanurate insulation over the entire surface of the metal roof deck. C. Mechanical fasteners, fastener patterns and insulation panel patterns shall be in strict accordance with the insulation manufacturer's written requirements and recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION/GENERAL A. All roof insulation work shall be done in strict accordance with the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. B. Do no overload the building structure with the storage of materials or use of equipment on the deck. C. Do not proceed with the installation of insulation unless the materials, equipment and tradesmen required for the installation of the roofing insulation and membrane over the insulation are on the project site and ready to follow with this work immediately (same day) behind the work. Do not install any more insulation each day than can be covered with waterproof membrane by the end of that working day. D. Prepare the substrate so that it is dry, clean, relatively smooth and otherwise satisfactorily prepared to receive the roof insulation board. E. At all multiple -layer applications, offset all joints of each layer a minimum of 6 inches from all joints of the preceding layer. .•4 F. Extend insulation full thickness over the entire surfaces to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. G. Form slight depressions at roof scuppers and roof drains with insulation approximately 1" less in thickness than for adjacent roof areas so that finished roofing will not be above adjoining areas. H. All insulation application shall resist a wind uplift force of 90 pounds per square foot of deck area in accordance with UL 1897. I. The Contractor is cautioned that any insulation that becomes wet for any reason shall be removed ..� from the project site. 583/01 ROOF INSULATION Section 07.212 Page 4 3.04 PERLITE INSULATION APPLICATION OVER POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION A. Embed one layer of perlite insulation over the polyisocyanurate insulation into a full mopping of hot bitumen in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. B. Lay insulation boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. C. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with base ply membrane in same day. D. Mopping asphalt shall be heated to between 375 degrees and 425 degrees F. at the point of application (mop bucket, mechanical mopper or felt layer). Asphalt shall not be heated above 525 degrees F. nor held above 500 degrees F. for more than 4 hours. E. Cut and fit insulation boards where roof deck intersects vertical surfaces. Cut board 1/4 inch from vertical surface. F. Each board of insulation shall be walked into place and shall be physically checked by workmen for proper adhesion. G. The long dimension of the insulation boards shall generally run perpendicular to the roof slope and the short joints shall be staggered. H. The insulation shall be butted together with no gaps greater than 1/4 inch. Gaps greater than 1/4 inch shall be filled with the same material. Maximum elevation variation between insulation boards at joints shall be 1/8 inch. Adhere each layer(s) with a uniform and continuous application of asphalt at a rate of thirty-three (33) lbs. per 100 sq. feet. J. Promptly spread any bitumen pools that may accumulate on insulation surface to achieve smooth surface for roofing installation. K. Install insulation into a full width mopping of hot asphalt applied at an approximate rate of 33 pounds per 100 square feet of deck area. Insulation joints shall be staggered a minimum of 6 inches from the joints of the first layer of insulation. 3.05 TEMPORARY WATER CUTOFFS A. The Contractor shall install temporary water cutoffs at the end of each day's work. B. The water cutoff shall consist of a minimum of one ply of modified base sheet installed in a full mopping of hot asphalt extending onto the deck and insulation a minimum of 6 inches. C. The water cutoff must not lap onto the granule surfaced cap sheet. D. When roofing work is to be resumed, the temporary water cutoff shall be removed cleanly from the insulation (top surface and vertical joint) and from the deck to ensure tight insulation joints and level insulation surfaces. E. Any in-place roofing which becomes wet from the Contractor's failure to install a temporary water cutoff or a faulty temporary water cutoff installation shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor as directed by the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. " ROOF INSULATION 583 01 Section 07.212 Page 5 3.06 CLEANING A. At completion of work under this section, all rubbish accumulated by these operations shall be removed from the site. End of Section e*. !w1 Section 07.520 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of modified bitumen roofing work is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. The work includes membrane roofing over a lightweight insulating concrete roof deck, or rigid insulation applied over a metal roof deck, and all associated flashing materials and miscellaneous items specified in this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The membrane roofing work shall be done by a single firm specializing in the types of roofing required so that there will be undivided responsibility for the specified performance of all component parts specified in sections 07.520, 07.610 and 07.900. B. All work shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions for the indicated conditions. 1.04 SYSTEM A. Roofing system over rigid insulation board shall be equivalent to TAMKO Roofing Products modified bitumen specification # 10717R. B. All membrane flashings shall be torch applied. C. The following roofing systems are approved for the work of this section provided that all other conditions of this Section 07520, including the system warranty and membrane warranty specified in other portions of this Specification, are met and warranties issued: 1. GAF system with Ruberoid MB Plus FR finish ply membrane. 2. US Intec, Inc. system with Brai/Flex M FR finish ply membrane. 3. GS Roofing Products system with GMS 250 FR finish ply membrane. 4. Schuller system with DynaKap FR finish ply membrane. 5. The reinforcing mat in the modified bitumen membrane shall be partially or wholly constructed of polyester and shall weigh a minimum of 250 grams per square meter. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to Contract award, submit three (3) copies of a letter from the proposed roofing manufacturer confirming that the bidder is an acceptable Contractor authorized to install the proposed system. 583/01 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING Section 07.520 Page 2 B. Prior to Contract award, submit three (3) copies from the proposed roofing manufacturer stating that the proposed application will comply with the manufacturer's requirements in order to quality the project for the specified guarantee. C. Submit the manufacturer's product specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. D. Submit three (3) copies of the manufacturer's certification indicating that bulk bituminous materials delivered to the project comply with the required standards. E. Submit three (3) copies of the Roofing System Manufacturer's published recommendations and guidelines for proper maintenance of the specified roof system, including inspection schedules, penetration addition policies, temporary repairs and procedures for reporting leaks. 1.06 GUARANTEES A. At the completion of the project and prior to final payment, the Contractor shall furnish three (3) copies of the Roofing System Manufacturer's unlimited ten (10) year guarantee covering materials and workmanship for the roofing and base flashing systems, equivalent to that issued by TAMKO Roofing Products. Guarantee shall cover leaks which result from either material or workmanship defects, shall not be subject to a deductible, and shall not be prorated. The guarantee coverage shall include all repairs to the roofing system to the extent necessary to return the roofing system to a watertight condition at no cost to the Owner. B. Provide three (3) copies of a twelve (12) year product guarantee for the modified bitumen membrane material from the Roofing System Manufacturer. Guarantee shall cover leaks which result from material defects, shall not be subject to a deductible, and shall contain no maximum penal sum. C. The Roofing System Applicator shall provide three (3) copies of a two (2) year guarantee covering all membrane roofing, membrane flashing, metal flashing and sealant applications in conjunction with the roofing work. The guarantee shall not be subject to a deductible, and shall not be prorated. The guarantee coverage shall include all repairs to the roofing, flashing and sealant work to the extent necessary to return the work to a watertight condition at no cost to the Owner. The guarantee period shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.07 MATERIAL STORAGE A. Store roofing materials on wood pallets above the ground in a manner which will ensure that there is no possibility of significant moisture penetration into the materials. Store in a dry, well ventilated, weathertight place. Do not leave unused felts on the floor overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. Store rolls of felts and other sheet materials on end. B. Do not store roofing materials or equipment on the roof deck in concentrated areas which will impose excessive stress on the deck or structural members. 1.08 INSPECTIONS A. In addition to the warranty inspection by the roofing system manufacturer's technical representative, a minimum of two (2) progress inspections by the roofing system manufacturer's technical representative is required. These inspections shall occur during the installation of roof insulation board, the base ply, the modified bitumen membrane, the parapet flashing systems and the temporary water cutoff. B. These inspections shall be coordinated and scheduled with the Architect a minimum of two (2) days prior to the inspection. 583/01 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING Section 07.520 Page 3 C. The manufacturer's inspector shall be a person specially trained and experienced in roofing system technology and installation procedures and shall be an employee of the roofing system manufacturer. Independent consultants retained by the manufacturer are not acceptable for the purposes of this inspection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be acceptable to the manufacturer of the roofing system installed. B. Provide roofing materials which comply with the following general standards or as recommended by the roofing system manufacturer. C. Roofing System Materials: .� 1. Bitumen shall be airblown asphalt manufactured especially for roofing purposes complying with the current edition or latest revision of ASTM Specification D 312, Steep Grade, Type III. 2. Base Sheet shall be equivalent to TAMKO AWAPLAN VERSA -BASE. 3. Finish Ply shall be equivalent to TAMKO AWAPLAN PREMIUM FR granule surfaced modified bitumen membrane, ceramic granule color shall be white. 4. Torch Applied Flashing Ply shall be equivalent to TAMKO AWAPLAN HEAT WELDING granule surfaced modified bitumen membrane, color shall be white. D. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Plastic Cement shall be equivalent to TAMKO TAM -PRO Q-15. 2. Concrete Primer shall comply with ASTM D 41. 3. Fasteners shall be galvanized or non-ferrous type, size and design as required to suit application. 4. Preformed Cant shall be 4 x 4" with a 5" face at a 45 degree angle. Cant material shall be molded asphalt impregnated organic fiber or fire resistant perlite. 5. Protection Sheets, where required, shall be equivalent to TAMKO 'Awaplan Premium modified bitumen sheet. 6. Termination Bars, where required, shall be minimum 1 1/2" wide x 3/16" thick aluminum with predrilled holes for fasteners at 6" o. c. and 1" from ends. 7. Pourable Filler shall be equivalent to Sonolastic SL 1 by Sonneborn Building Products; Minneapolis, MN, a single component of pouring consistency, exhibiting no weathering or cracking when tested according to ASTM D 920 Type S. ng system manufacturer to allow the issuance of the Ten E. Provide all additional materials required by the roof (10) Year Unlimited Roofing System Guarantee. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All modified bitumen roofing materials and construction shall be done in strict accordance with the 61 583/01 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING Section 07.520 Page 4 manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. If printed instructions are not obtainable or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. 3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. Before ply application is started, prepare surface by removing trash, debris, grease, oil, water moisture and contaminates affecting bond of asphalt to surface. B. Verify that surfaces are dry per respective manufacturer's or applicator's published instructions. C. Prepare other surfaces according to respective manufacturer's or applicator's published instructions. D. Use cleaning materials necessary to render an acceptable surface. E. Use compatible materials on voids and joints so finished deck surface will be even and smooth. F. Protect adjacent areas with tarpaulin or other durable materials. G. Prepare properly for flashing and secure in position any projections through the roof deck. Install new metal flashings, fascias, gravel guards and other items as required. Ensure roof drains, etc., are at proper height to permit water to drain properly without ponded water. H. Inspect all parapet walls, roof edges, etc. prior to application of roofing to make sure that proper provisions have been made to install metal roof edges, etc. I. Do not apply roofing if damp weather is imminent or if any other conditions exist that will not permit proper application. Do not apply roofing when moisture is present in the deck. J. Apply concrete primer over the concrete deck and allow to dry before beginning the base sheet application. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Protect any lifting point on the roof or deck where roofing materials are transferred from one container to another with two sheets of 4' x 8' x 5/8" plywood laid with long edges together covered with base sheet overlapping all sides four feet and up and over the parapet. B. Repair any damaged areas of base sheet by applying a patch with mopping of hot asphalt overlapping the damaged area 12" on each side. C. Furnish a thermometer for checking temperature of asphalt in the kettle and at the point of application to the roof deck. D. Asphalt heating and application: 1. ASTM D312 Type III Steep Asphalt shall not be heated above 525 degrees F. nor held above 500 degrees F. for more than 4 hours, and shall be applied at temperatures between 375 degrees F. and 425 degrees F. unless specifically instructed otherwise by the roofing system manufacturer. E. Provide temporary water cut-offs at the end of each day's work. Remove temporary water cut-offs cleanly when work is resumed. 3.04 MEMBRANE ROOF INSULATION OVER RIGID INSULATION BOARD A. Starting at the low point of the roof, embed one layer of base ply with a minimum of 2" side laps and a r% 583/01 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING Section 07.520 Page 5 minimum of 4" end laps into a full mopping of hot steep asphalt at a minimum of 23 pounds per square feet. Broom to obtain embedment of the base ply. B. Starting at the low point of the roof, solidly adhere one layer of finish ply by mop applying with minimum 4" laps and minimum 6" end laps. All laps shall be checked and sealed while the modified bitumen is still in a semi -fluid state from roll application. A minimum of 1/a" flow of asphalt must extend beyond all edges. Asphalt application rate shall be a minimum of 30 pounds per 100 square feet. Asphalt temperature shall not be less than 425 degrees F. at point of application. Do not mop more than 4 feet in front of roll. Remove factory splices of modified asphalt sheet materials prior to installation or cover factory splices in the field with modified asphalt sheet material set in hot asphalt. C. Apply membrane without wrinkles or tears, free from air pockets. D. Extend membrane up cant strips and a minimum of 2 inches onto vertical surfaces. E. At the end of each day install water cut-off consisting of two plies of felts or one ply of coated base sheet installed in a mopping of asphalt extending onto the deck a minimum of 6 inches. Cover all exposed edges of insulation. Completely remove cut-off before resuming roofing. F. Seal membrane around roof penetrations. 3.05 FLASHINGS A. All base and parapet flashings shall be torch applied material and system except at combustible substrates. B. Apply membrane base flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements. Extend a minimum of 6 inches onto field of roof surface and a minimum of 8 inches up vertical surface being flashed. Secure top edge at 8 inches on center. C. Apply modified bitumen parapet flashing in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written requirements and recommendations. D. Termination bars shall be bedded in sealant and shall be anchored 6" on center and within 1" of the end of each bar. Abutting bars shall be spaced 1/4 to 1/2" apart. A continuous bead of sealant shall be placed along the top of all termination bars. E. At roof drains, terminate courses of membrane and hot bitumen at edges of drain. Trim surface o insulation or deck where necessary so that roofing is flush with ring of drain. F. Set metal flanges as recommended by the roofing materials manufacturer. G. See Section 07600 for miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items to be installed in the work. H. Provide all accessories and materials to provide a complete and watertight installation of the expansion joint cover. rte* 3.06 PROTECTION SHEETS A. Provide protection sheets where shown on the Drawings, at each service side of all mechanical roof -mounted +�* equipment and at other locations required by the Roofing System Manufacturer. B. Adhere pads to the modified bitumen membrane in a full mopping of hot asphalt. Do not provide the flood coat and aggregate surfacing over the pads. 3.07 PITCH PANS 583/01 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING Section 07.520 Page 6 A. Pitch pans will be allowed only if specifically approved by the Architect. B. Completely clean the metal penetration of all roofing materials. C. Clean any residual oil shop coatings from the inside wall of the pitch pan using Naphtha solvent. The pitch pan wall shall then be etched using a 5 % acetic acid solution. D. Completely prime the flange of the pitch pan and allow to dry prior to installation. _. E. After the base ply has been applied, set the flange in mastic and secure to the deck. F. Strip -in the flange using the base ply material, extending a minimum of four (4) inches beyond the edge of the flange. G. Fill the pitch pan with a non -shrink grout to a level approximately 1-1/2 - 2 inches below the top rim. — H. Install duct tape around the pitch pan wall to act as a form for the pitch pan filler. I. Proper mixing if required of the pitch pan filler should follow manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. J. Slowly and carefully fill the pitch pan to the top level of the duct tape, ensuring the finished level is above the top rim. K. Apply the finish ply, terminating at the flange -pitch pan wall juncture. Apply a continuous bead of sealant along the edge of the finish ply. L. Install a watertight umbrella to the penetration, completely covering the opening of the pitch pan. 3.08 CLEANING A. At completion of work under this section, all rubbish accumulated by these operations shall be removed from the site. B. Remove all stains of every nature from all surfaces stained by the roofing operations. If stains cannot be removed, the affected areas shall be replaced with new material matching the existing material. C. Remove all equipment, tools and excess materials from the site. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces from damage. End of Section 583/01 METAL ROOFING SYSTEM Section 07.610 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL P" 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of the metal reroofing work is shown on the Drawings. B. Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, and services for all preformed metal roofing and related work as indicated on the Drawings. C. Coordinate with the work of all other trades. D. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable standards: 1. SMACNA: "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc., latest edition. 2. AISC: "Steel Construction Manual" American Institute of Steel Construction, latest edition. 3. AISI: "Cold Form Steel Design Manual", American Iron and Steel Institute, latest edition. 4. ASTM A792-AZ50: Specifications for steel sheet, aluminum -zinc alloy coated (galvanized by the hot dip process, general requirements (galvalume). B. Manufacturer's qualifications: 1. The Manufacturer is required to have a minimum of three years of satisfactory experience in manufacturing panels and components of the type and quality required by these Contract Documents. C. Installer's qualifications: 1. The Installer shall have a minimum of three years of satisfactory experience in installing metal framing and metal roofing systems required by these Contract Documents. D. All work shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for the indicated conditions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: 1. Submit complete shop drawings and erection details to Architect for review. Do not proceed with manufacture prior to review of shop drawings. Do not use drawings prepared by Architect for shop 583/01 METAL ROOFING SYSTEM Section 07.610 Page 2 or erection drawings. 2. Shop drawings shall show methods of erection, elevations, and plans of roof and wall panels, sections and details, anticipated loads, flashings, roof curbs, vents, sealants, interfaces with all materials not supplied and proposed identification of component parts and their finishes. 3. Roof slopes shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Design roof live load shall be 20 psf. 5. Roof system shall meet UL Class 90 wind uplift rating. 6. Shop Drawings shall show locations of all end laps and shall provide end lap details. B. Samples: 1. Submit samples and color chips for all proposed finishes. a. Submit one 8 in. long sample of panel. b. Submit two sets of 3 in. x 5 in. color chip samples for selection by the Architect. c. Submit fasteners. C. Manufacturer's letters: 1. Prior to Contract award, submit three (3) copies of a letter from the proposed Roofing System Manufacturer confirming that the bidder is an acceptable Contractor authorized to install the proposed system. 2. Prior to Contract award, submit three (3) copies from the proposed Roofing System Manufacturer stating that the proposed application will comply with the manufacturer's requirements in order to qualify the project for the specified warranty. 3. Submit three (3) copies of the Roofing System Manufacturer's approval of the shop drawings submitted by the Roofing Contractor, ensuring that the shop drawings describe a system which will allow the issuance of the specified Roofing System Manufacturer's warranty. 4. Provide the manufacturer's certification and construction number that demonstrates that the system meets the UL class 90 requirement. D. Product data: 1. Submit eight (8) copies of the manufacturer's product specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirement. 2. Submit three (3) copies of the Roofing System Manufacturer's published recommendations and guidelines for proper maintenance of the specified roof system, including inspection schedules, penetration addition policies, temporary repairs and procedures for reporting leaks. E. Warranties: 1. Submit four (4) sample copies of the required warranties. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. At the completion of the project and prior to final payment, the Contractor shall furnish three (3) copies METAL ROOFING SYSTEM 583/01 Section 07.610 Page 3 of the Roofing System Manufacturer's no dollar limit twenty (20) year watertightness warranty covering materials and workmanship for the roofing and flashing systems, equivalent to that issued by MBCI. The warranty period shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. A sample copy of the required } warranty is bound into these specifications for reference at the end of this section. 1. Warranty shall cover leaks which result from either material or workmanship defects, shall not be subject to a deductible, and shall not be prorated. 2. All repair or replacement costs covered under the warranty shall be borne by the Roofing System Manufacturer and Roofing Contractor, 3. The warranty coverage shall include all repairs to the roofing system to the extent necessary to return the roofing system to a watertight condition at not cost to the Owner. G , coverin all metal B. The Roofing Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of a two (2) year warranty g roofing, metal flashing and sealant applications in conjunction with the roofing work. The warranty shall cover' all gutters, valley flashings and all other incidental work. The warranty shall not be subject to a <, deductible, and shall not be prorated. The warranty coverage shall include all repairs to the roofing, flashing and sealant work to the extent necessary to return the work to a watertight condition at no cost to the Owner. The warranty period shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. p. C. The metal panel manufacturer, shall furnish three (3) copies of a warranty covering bare metal against rupture, structural failure, and perforation due to normal atmospheric corrosion exposure for a period of 20 years. Warranty period shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. D. The metal panel manufacturer shall furnish three (3) copies of a warranty covering panel finish against cracking, checking, blistering, peeling, flaking, chipping, chalking and fading for a period of twenty (20) years for wallpanels and twenty (20) years for roof panels. Warranty period shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING F„, A. Delivery: Deliver panels to jobsite properly packaged to provide protection against transportation damage. Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original sealed and labeled containers and in quantities required to allow continuity of application. B. Handling: Exercise extreme care in unloading, storing and erecting panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Storage: Store all material and accessories above ground on well skidded platforms. Store under waterproof covering. Provide proper ventilation to panels to prevent condensation build-up between each panel. 1.07 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Precipitation: Do not apply roofing materials during precipitation or in the event there is a probability of precipitation during application. Take adequate precautions to ensure that materials, applied roofing, and building interiors are protected from moisture damage or contamination. 583/01 METAL ROOFING SYSTEM Section 07.610 Page 4 B. Roof Loading 1. Do not stack materials in concentrated areas on the existing roof structure, causing the structure to deflect or weaken due to loading stress. 1.08 MATERIAL TESTING A. Testing of materials delivered to the project site will be tested for conformance with the requirements of this section as determined by the Architect. B. The Contractor shall cut and furnish samples for testing as directed by the Architect. The Architect has the authority to select samples from materials installed in the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Panel profile: 1. 1 3/a high seam by 12" wide panel equivalent to MBCI Lokseam. 2. Soffit panel shall match roof panel. B. Gauge: 1. 24 gauge (#UL -90 rated - Underwriters Laboratories). C. Texture: 1. Smooth D. Finish 1. Signature 300 with Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resin (20 year warranty). E. Color: 1. Color to be selected by Architect. F. Fasteners: 1. Shall match panel material and color. Shall have EPDM gaskets. Shall be of the type and size recommended by the Roofing System Manufacturer. G. Acceptable manufacturer: 1. MBCI, or equivalent. METAL ROOFING SYSTEM 583/01 Section 07.610 Page 5 PART 3 EXECUTION !*�+ 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examination: 1. Inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to a point where this work may continue. 2. Verify that installation will be made in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. B. Discrepancies: - 1. In event of discrepancy, notify Architect. ' 2. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have been resolved. 3.02 FABRICATION A. Material shall be in-line tension leveled prior to roll forming finished panel profile. B. Roll form panels in continuous lengths, full length of detailed runs. It is recommended that panels should r - be factory rolled. C. Standard panel length shall be no more than 45 feet. D. Fabricate trim, flashing and accessories to detailed profiles. E. Fabricate trim and flashing from same material as panel. .�, F. End laps will be acceptable if accomplished in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. G. Factor applied mastic to panel sidelaps. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install panels so that they are weathertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, allowing for expansion and contraction. B. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings. C. Provide anchors at all panel attachment locations. D. Install panels plumb, level, and straight with seams and ribs/battens parallel, conforming to design as indicated. rte+ E. No work shall be performed that cannot be weathersealed at the end of each day's work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any water damage to the building's interior resulting from an inadequate weatherseal in all areas where work is being performed. 583/01 METAL ROOFING SYSTEM Section 07.610 Page 6 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall be liable for any property damage caused by the Contractor's failure to prevent water entry into the building below. B. Clean work in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Protect work against damage until final acceptance. Replace or repair to the satisfaction of the Architect any work that becomes damaged prior to final acceptance. D. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions. E. Remove all debris, unused materials, tools and equipment from the site. End of Section e V 583/01 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this Conditions, Special section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this section includes miscellaneous interior and exterior caulking and sealant work not specifically covered by other sections of these Specifications. B. All junctures of dissimilar finish materials shall be caulked or sealed to provide a finished condition. C. All penetrations through walls, floors or ceilings that are not required to be fireproofed shall be completely sealed to reduce sound transference through the assemblies. D. Furnish all materials, and perform all work required to complete the joint preparation, joint packing or filler, F _ priming, caulking and sealing indicated by the Drawings and specified herein. E. The work of this section includes the sealing of new thresholds installed under section 08.710. F. The work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, sealing all of the following conditions: 1. Intersections of masonry walls to masonry walls. 2. Intersections of concrete paving to vertical surfaces. 3. Expanse joints in concrete walks and paving. 4. Joints where concrete paving abut dissimilar materials. 5. Intersections of aluminum frames and masonry or steel. 6. Intersections of aluminum window frames and masonry or steel. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 02.514 Concrete Walks. B. Section 06.400 Architectural Woodwork. C. Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames F_1 D. Section 09.260 Gypsum Wallboard Systems E. Section 09.900 Painting 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable provided it complies with the requirements of this section. 1. ChemRex, Inc. 2. Dow Corning Corporation 3. General Electric Company 4. Gibson -Homans Company 5. W. R. Grace and Company 6. Mameco International, Inc. 583/01 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 2 7. Morton International, Inc. 8. Products Research and Chemical Corporation 9. Sika Corporation 10. Sonnebom Building Products, Inc. 11. Tremco 12. USG B. The Caulking and Sealant Contractor shall employ personnel skilled in the caulking and sealant application conditions required for this project. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA. B. TRC - Tremco Research Center, Tremco Inc., Cleveland, OH. C. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Northbrook, IL. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's published data for caulking and sealants. B. Submit material safety data sheets. C. Submit two sets of cured sealant color samples for selection by the Architect. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of materials: 1. Deliver materials to the job site in new, dry, unopened, and well-marked containers showing product and manufacturer's name. 2. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work. B. Do not order project materials or start work before receiving product data review comments from the Architect. C. Storage of materials: 1. Store materials marked "keep from freezing" in areas where temperatures will remain above 40°F. 2. No materials may be stored in open or in contact with ground. 3. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises. D. Material handling: 1. Material handling equipment shall be selected and operated so as not to damage existing construction. Do not operate or situate material handling equipment in locations that will hinder smooth flow of vehicular or pedestrian traffic. 1.08 SITE CONDITIONS A. Field measurements and material quantities: 1. Applicator shall have sole responsibility for accuracy of all measurements, estimates of material r 583/01 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 3 quantities and sizes and conditions that will affect work. B. Safety requirements: 1. All application, material handling and associated equipment shall conform to and be operated in conformance with OSHA safety requirements. 2. Comply with federal, state, local and Owner fire and safety requirements. 3. Advise Owner whenever work is expected to be hazardous to Owner, employees, and/or operators. 4. Maintain fire extinguisher within easy access whenever power tools are being used. C. Environmental requirements: 1. Do not work in presence of water. 2. Do not work in temperatures below 40°F. 3. Do not install materials marked "keep from freezing" when daily temperatures are scheduled to fall below 40°F. 4. Do not perform masonry work below 40°F. 5. Remove any work exposed to freezing. 6. Advise Owner when volatile materials are to be used near air ventilation intakes so that they can be shut down or blocked as Owner requires. 1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS A. When a particular make or trade name is specified, it shall be indicative of the quality standard required. Bidders may propose substitutes in accordance with the requirements of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions and section 01600. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Submit a warranty covering all materials and workmanship for work furnished and installed under this section. B. Warranty shall be unlimited, covering both materials and workmanship. C. Warranty shall cover leaks which result from either material or workmanship defects, shall not be subject to a deductible, and shall not be prorated. D. The warranty period shall be for one (1) year, and shall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion. �. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL n A. Comply with quality control, references, specifications and manufacturer's data. Products containing asbestos are prohibited on this project. Use only asbestos -free products. -e B. Use products with personal protection. User must read container label and material safety data sheets prior to use. C. Compatibility: Provide sealers, fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by testing and field 583/01 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 4 experience as warranted, by one manufacturer. D. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealant, as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Up to three colors will be selected. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General Purpose shall be equivalent to Vulkem 116 polyurethane sealant as manufactured by Mameco International, Inc. of Cleveland, Ohio. B. Exterior Paving Joint (or "Traffic Grade") Sealant, shall be equivalent to Sonneborn SL2 polyuerethane sealant by ChemREX, Inc. (for horizontal exterior paving to horizontal exterior paving surfaces). C. Exterior Paving Joint (or "Traffic Grade") Sealant, shall be equivalent to Thiokol 2p polysulfide sealant by Morton International (for horizontal exterior paving to exterior vertical surfaces). D. Exterior Wall Joint Sealant shall be equivalent to Dow Corning 790 Silicone Building Sealant. E. Exterior Aluminum Frame to Masonry Joint Sealant shall be equivalent to Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant. F. Exterior sealant at applications coming in contact with modified bitumen roofing shall be equivalent to Black Jack # 1010 Neoprene Flashings Cement as manufactured by the Gibson -Homans Company of Twinsburg, Ohio, or as recommended by the roofing system manufacturer. G. Interior Caulk shall be equivalent to Sonneborn Sonolac, siliconized acrylic latex caulk. Caulk shall be — acceptable to paint manufacturer for receiving the scheduled latex or oil base paints. H. Sealant shall be used in conjunction with gypsum drywall sound or fire seals shall be recommended by the Architect. I. Backing Rods shall be closed cell polyurethane as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the application conditions encountered. Caulk shall be equivalent to Sonneborn Sonolac, siliconized acrylic latex caulk. Caulk shall be acceptable to paint manufacturer for receiving the scheduled latex or oil base paints. K. Sound Sealant shall be equivalent to USG Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant. L. Sealant Primer shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each type of surface application and condition encountered. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine all surfaces to receive caulking or sealant and report all conditions which are not acceptable to the General Contractor. Installation shall be deemed as acceptance of the surfaces. B. Clean all surfaces thoroughly, removing all foreign matter, dust, oil, grease, water surface, dirt, frost, old caulking material and previously applied paint or primer. For all metal and glass surfaces that are to be sealed with a silicone sealant, use isopropyl alcohol as a cleaning liquid. Pour or squirt the liquid onto a clean cloth. Wipe vigorously to remove surface contaminants. Rotate the cloth to a clean area and rewipe until no dirt or oily material is evident on the cloth. Immediately wipe the liquid cleaned area with a second clean, dry cloth. Clean only as much as can be sealed in one hour. Change cloths frequently as they become 583/01 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 5 dirty. C. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.02 APPLICATION OF SEALANTS A. Follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding preparation, priming, application life and application procedure. B. Apply masking tape where required in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge. Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed. C. Apply sealant under pressure with gun having nozzle of proper size, or other appropriate means. Provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints. D. Neatly point or tool sealant to provide proper contour. Use clean water -wet tool or tooling solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored sealant. E. Use clean water -wet tool or tooling solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored sealant. F. Sealants shall slop away from vertical substrates. M. Ensure a'/4 inch minimum thickness of sealant over all backer rods. 3.03 JOINT SIZES A. The width of a sealant joint shall not be less than 1/8 inch. B. In joints up to'/4 inch wide, sealant depth shall be `/4 inch. C. In joints from `/4 inch to `/2 inch wide, the depth of the sealant shall be equal to the width. D. For joints wider than `h inch, but not exceeding 2 inches, the depth shall be maintained at'/2 inch. E. For joints wider than 2 inches, consult with the sealant manufacturer's technical services department. F. In all joints'/4 inch or wider, the sealant shall be applied over a backing rod. 3.04 APPLICATION OF CAULKING A. Caulk joints before final coat of paint is applied to adjacent surface. B. Apply caulking with a pressure gun having nozzle of proper size to fit joint. C. Completely fill joint and firmly tool against backing to make a smooth, convex bed, and ensure good adhesion. D. Caulking shall develop a firm skin prior to applications of paint. 3.05 APPLICATION OF SOUND CONTROL SEALANT A. Minimum sealant depth shall be 3/8 inch minimum, and shall completely seal all openings around and between penetrations. 583/01 CAULKING AND SEALANTS Section 07.900 Page 6 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant excesses or smears. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Leave all finished work in a neat and clean condition. C. Remove all debris and extra materials resulting from the work of this section from the site. End of Section HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 583/01 Section 08.150 Page 1 PARTI. GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,Supply entary General General Requirements (Division 1) , apply to the work specified in Conditions, Special Conditions and € ' this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of hollow metal doors and frames is shown on the Drawings and Schedules; all shall be custom hollow metal work. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 08.700 Finish Hardware rye 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide hollow metal doors and frames manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of ^! A. this type of work. B. The Contractor shall not submit any hollow metal manufacturer for the Architect's approval without first adequate to perform the work in accordance with verifying that the proposed manufacturer's facilities are The manufacturer shall have been in the business for at least five years and the Contract Documents. for financial responsibility and for doing work of the quality required by the Contract shall have a record Documents. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS oma+ A. SDI -100. -Recommended Specifications -Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel Door Institute. B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and Factory Mutual (FM), as applicable to fire rated hollow metal door frames. C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, General Requirements. D. ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon, Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. E. ASTM A591 - Steel Sheet, cold -Rolled, Electrolyte Zinc Coated. F. ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. r 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and erection of hollow metal doors and frames. Includes at openings, details of details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions locations and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements and details construction, 583/01 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08.150 Page 2 of joints and connections. Show anchorages and necessary items. B. Samples 1. Submit 12" x 12" sample corner section of typical frame showing details of construction and finish. 2. Submit 12" x 12" sample corner section of typical door showing details of construction and finish. 3. Submit samples of all accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable provided it complies with the contract Documents. L HOLLOW METAL Steelcraft Overly Manufacturing Company Williamsburg Steel Products Company Superior Door & Sash Company Republic Steel Corporation Hol -O -Met, Inc. Tex -Steel Corporation 2.02 MATERIALS A. METAL: ASTM A366, gauges as specified for each particular member. B. PAINT: Zinc -Chromate Alkyd resin primer for baked primer, Fed. Spec. TT -P-645. C. INSULATION: Mineral wool batt insulation, thickness as required for door thickness. 2.03 FABRICATION A. DOORS 1. Fabricate doors from cold rolled, pickled and oiled, stretcher leveled steel; 18 gauge face sheets. Use16 gauge for channel frame and 22 gauge for interlocking vertical channels or "z" shaped member reinforcing. 2. Construct doors rigid, neat and free from defects, with continuous welded joints at door edges dressed smooth and invisible. No joints shall occur on face of the door. 3. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap with templates, frames to receive all mortise hardware. Provide reinforcing plates for surface applied hardware. Reinforce for hinges with 7 gauge steel; for locks and other hardware cutouts with 12 gauge steel; for surface applied hardware with 12 gauge steel. r Pot HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 583/01 Section 08.150 Page 3 4. Provide 1/8" clearance at jambs and heads; 3/16" at meeting stiles of pairs of doors; 3/8" at sills, except fire doors and where indicated otherwise. Bevel lock edge of stiles 1/8" in 2". B. FRAMES 1. Form metal frames to size and shapes indicated from cold rolled, pickled and oiled steel sheets with clean smooth surfaces. Fabricate all frames from 14 gauge steel. 2. Construct frames strong, rigid, neat and free from defects, true and fully welded unit type construction at joints. Miter joints and continuously arc -weld full depth and width of frames. Dress smooth and invisible, welds of joints on exposed surfaces. 3. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap with templates, frames to receive mortise hardware. Provide reinforcing plates for surface applied hardware. Reinforce for hinges with 7 gauge steel; for locks and other hardware cutouts with 12 gauge steel; for surface applied hardware with 12 gauge steel. 4. Provide 26 gauge galvanized cover boxes in back of all hardware cutouts. Punch frames for rubber or vinyl silencers; three on lock side of single doors and one for each leaf in heads of double door frames. 5. Provide jamb anchors for frames set in metal stud partitions, welded to back of frames, not less than 18 gauge, of design required for type of stud, 4 anchors for openings up to T-6" and one additional anchor for each additional 30" height or part thereof. Locate anchors immediately above each hinge reinforcing plate and one below the top hinge reinforcing on both sides. 6. Provide 16 gauge steel fixed floor clips fastened to bottom of each jamb member and drill for 3/8" anchor bolts for floor connection. 7. Provide temporary steel spreaders fastened across bottom of frames. Label each frame before e* shipping with metal or plastic tags to show their location, size door swing and other pertinent information. 2.04 SHOP PAINTING A. Clean ferrous metal and treat chemically to prepare for maximum paint adhesion. Apply coat of rust - inhibitive metal primer by spraying or dipping. Bake or oven -dry prime coat to secure hard, abrasion - resistant finish. Finish surfaces smooth and free from irregularities and rough spots. PART 3 EXECUTION r 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B. Leave shipping spreaders on frames until complete wall system surrounding the frame is rigidly secured to frame, floors and ceilings. Set bottom anchors of frame to floor with power -driven fasteners or expansion bolts (not lead shields). C. Hang doors in frames as scheduled. Welding of hinges to doors or frames will not be permitted. Follow 583/01 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08.150 Page 4 recommendations of the manufacturer for installation of the hardware. Install hardware in location as provided by door manufacturer. D. Coat contact surfaces of any dissimilar metals with bituminous, base paint and let dry before installation. E. Install all surface mounted hardware taking care that all attachment devices are anchored in their reinforcement materials inside the door frames. F. After installation, adjust all hardware items for correct, easy and efficient operation. G. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames, within the following ^ clearances: Jambs and Head: 3/32". Bottom at Threshold or Carpet: 1/8". Bottom: 3/8" where no threshold or carpet. H. Install hollow metal frames plumb and square, in correct location indicated on drawings and with a maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16 inch. Ensure frames are securely and rigidly anchored to adjacent construction. I. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust all operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove all smudge, dirt, oil, grease or adhered materials which might affect painting. Remove all excess materials and debris from Site. End of Section 583/01 WOOD DOORS Section 08.210 Pagel PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent and location of each type of wood door is shown on the Drawings and in schedules. B. The type of doors required include the following: 1. Solid core flush wood doors. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect wood doors during transit, handling and storage to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. �., B. Package doors in heavy cartons and shrink wrap plastic with identifying marks; slit plastic wrap on site to permit ventilation, but do not remove from cartons until ready to install. C. Store doors upright with at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) between doors, in protected, dry area. D. The installer shall advise the Contractor of proper procedures required for protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of the work. E. Cut and trim openings through doors and panels as shown. Comply with the applicable requirements of NWMA 1.S.1 for the kind and quality of doors shown and specified. 1.04 RELATED WORK A. Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08.700 Finish Hardware. s*s+ C. Section 09.900 Painting. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings indicating the location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and all other pertinent data. .� B. For information only, submit 2 copies of door manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of wood door required, including other data as may be required to show compliance with the specified requirements. Indicate by transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been transmitted to the. Installer. 1. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for openings, and similar components. C. Submit 2 copies of written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by the Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or 583/01 WOOD DOORS Section 08.210 Page 2 which show photographing of construction below in face veneers, as defined in NWMA Standard Door Guarantee, except the NWMA provision for refunding the price received by the door manufacturer for any defective door shall not apply. The guarantee shall also include finishing and reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. Guarantee shall be in effect during the following period of time after the date of acceptance. — 1. For Solid Core Flush Interior Rated Doors: Five Years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The Maiman Company. B. Curtis Companies, Inc. C. Paine Door Company. D. Sun-Dor-Co. E. Weyerhauser Roddis Plywood Corporation. 2.02 VENEERS AND EDGES A. Doors scheduled for clear finish shall have plain sawn red oak veneers, with matching edges. 2.03 INTERIOR FLUSH DOORS A. Where interior flush doors are shown or scheduled, provide doors complying with applicable requirements of _ NWMA 1.S.1 and as herein specified. B. Quality Grade: All interior doors shall be 1-3/4" thick, AWI Quality Standards, section 1300, custom grade. C. Core type shall be solid wood particle board, or mineral with wood lock blocks, as required by manufacturer to comply with fire rating and guarantee period. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with requirements of AWI Quality Standards, section 1300, custom grade. B. Fabricate doors scheduled to be fire rated to UL labeling requirements. C. Prepare doors to receive hardware and weatherstripping. D. Make cut-outs and provide stops for glass, if required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging. 583/01 WOOD DOORS Section 08.210 Page 3 B. Fit doors to frames and machine for hardware, to whatever extent not previously worked at the factory. C. Install wood door in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as shown. Adjust for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge. D. Install wood doors plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16 inch. E. Install hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08.700. F. See painting sections of these specifications for requirements for finishing wood doors. Coordinate delivery and storage to comply with the requirements for sealing tops and bottoms of wood doors immediately upon delivery to project site. G. Fit wood doors accurately in their respective frames within the following clearances: 1. Jambs and head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum between door and frame. 2. Sills without thresholds: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum between door and top of finish floor. 3. Sills with thresholds: 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum between door and top of threshold. 4. Meeting stiles of pairs: 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum between doors. 5. Lock edge: Bevel 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm/50 mm). H. Seal the top and bottom of the doors with two (2) coats of clear varnish upon arrival on the site and after trimming. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely as directed by the Architect. B. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation as directed by the Architect. C. Advise the Contractor of proper procedures required for protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of work. End of Section Section 08.331 re I PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of overhead doors is shown on the Drawings and schedules. B. Furnish all accessories required for a complete and satisfactory installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product literature, operating instructions and installation instructions. B. Submit data substantiating overhead doors meets the requirements of this section. C. Submit shop drawings detailing installation and sizing, including anchoring devices. Shop drawings shall detail and list all accessories to be furnished. Details shall include framing members, required clearances, anchors, and accessories. Include relationship of adjacent materials. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to jobsite in their original, unopened packages with labels intact. Inspect materials for damage and advise manufacturer immediately of any unsatisfactory materials. B. Package door assemblies in individual corrugated cartons so no portion of the doors have contact with the outer shell of the container. Package and ship frames preassembled to the greatest possible extent. a. RELATED WORK A. Opening preparation, miscellaneous or structural metal work, access panels, finish or field painting, field electrical wiring, wire, conduit, fuses and disconnect switches are in the Scope of Work of other divisions or trades. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide three (3) copies of a written warranty signed by the Door Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to replace, at no cost to the Owner, any doors or components which fail in materials or workmanship within the warranty period. Failure of materials or workmanship includes: excessive deflection, faulty operation of doors, deterioration of finish and defects in hardware installation. The warranty period shall be one (1) year from the Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OVERHEAD DOORS A. Overhead Coiling Doors shall be equivalent to Model 625 series insulated Rolling Door manufactured by Overhead Door Corporation of Dallas, Texas. I 583/01 OVERHEAD DOORS Section 08.331 Page 2 B. Salt profile shall be flat, 22 gauge, insulated, painted steel, color to be selected by Architect. C. Insulation will be a rigid, foamed -in-place, polyurethane core free of CFC's and HCFC's and will be fully encapsulated in nonpermeable materials to prevent loss of thermal efficiency over time. D. All doors will be constructed with an air infiltration rating of .08cfm per square foot of door at 15mph and .13cfm per square foot of door at 25mph. (ASTM -E-283-73) E. End stiles will be 16 gauge steel. F. Hinges and fixtures will be galvanized steel. Full floating ball bearing rollers will have hardened steel races. Roller sizes will be adequate for design requirements and limitations. G. Track is 2" standard, or 3" optional, and angle mounted. H. Lock will be interior mounted slide lock. I. Weatherstrip between sections will be EPDM rubber tube seals fitted inside every joint. Bottom weatherstrip will be EPDM rubber bulb -type strip. J. Bottom bar shall be primed steel. K. Guides shall be primed steel. L. Rollers shall be of polyurethane. M. Operation shall be by electric motor. N. Lock shall be cylinder lock. O. Furnish to fit openings indicated on the Drawings and in schedules. P. Furnish complete with curtain, weatherseals, guides, brackets, barrel, counterbalance, hood and all accessories to provide a complete and satisfactory installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead doors by an authorized distributor in the location and condition shown on the Drawings in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Upon installation, doors shall be tested for proper operation. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove all debris, excess materials and tools resulting from the work of this section from the site. B. Clean doors prior to Owner's acceptance. End of Section R PART I GENERAL kND STOREFRUN 1 Section 08.410 Page 1 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK storefronts is shown on the Drawings, and is specified herein. A. The extent of aluminum entrances and B. Glazing of aluminum entrances and storefronts shall be under Section 08.800 Glass and Glazing. C. Hardware shall be furnished under Section 08.700 Finish Hardware. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE standards of A. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements for is d ec fid and rrecommended n ANSwindows, and terminologyI A 134.1 (AAMA performance and fabrication workmanship are thosep �. 302.8), and applicable general recommendations published by AAMA and AA. a single firm, capable of showing prior successful production B. Provide aluminum doors and frames produced by of units similar to those required. 1.04 SUBMITTALS ls for aluminum A. Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommeon onto of the wos and trk. includedard lcertcertified test laboratory reports as fabrication, finishing, hardware and other comp necessary to show compliance with requirements. B. Submit shop drawings including all elevations at'/a" scale, typical unit elevations at 3/a" scale and full size detail ical com osite member. Show anchors, hardware, operators and other components not sections of every typ P .�, included in the manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details. to ce C. Submit 3 copies of written warranty signed bvyotl1�anshimanufacturer, awithin 3 years of dateo fa�ceptanceng Failureof aluminum units which fail in materials or P materials or workmanship shall include rorbut not ge or air infiltration, excessive at on of finish h or metal in excess d to) excessive aof normal weathering, and defect deflections, faulty operations of sash, de in hardware, weather-stripping and other components of the work. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the job site in original protective packaging with manufacturer and product names clearly indicated. B. Handle and sore products according to manufacturer's recommendations and in a manner to prevent damage, deterioration and contamination. C. Protect aluminum surfaces from contact with lime, mortar, cement, acids and other harmful substances as well as from damaged by careless handling of tools, machinery and materials. 5 _, Section 08.410 Page—2 1.06 COORDINATION A. Examine substrate and condition which aluminum work is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of any detrimental conditions. Do not proceed with work until conditions are acceptable to installer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. The use of proprietary terms or numbers on Drawings or specified herein is to establish the type and quality of window system required for this project. Products or other established manufacturers will be acceptable if equal to quality appearance, weight and depth of sections, features and performance. B. Unless designated otherwise, all window materials are manufactured by Kawneer Company, Inc. of Niles, Michigan. 2.02 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM A. Aluminum Storefront Framing System shall be equivalent to Kawneer Trifab 11 450 or 451 System, 1 3/ " x 4 '/z" or 2" x 4 '/z". B. Aluminum finish for frames installed in exterior walls shall be selected by the Architect. C. Aluminum finish for frames installed on the interior of the building shall be mill finish. D. Furnish all parts and accessories required for a complete and satisfactory installation. E. Extrusions shall be 6063-T5 alloy and temper (ASTM B21 allot G.S. l0A-T5). Fasteners, where exposed, shall be slum, stainless steel or zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A 164. Perimeter anchors shall be aluminum or steel, provided the steel is properly isolated from the aluminum. F. Steel Reinforcement and Brackets shall be manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated stainless steel units of shapes, plates or bars. G. For required anchorage into concrete or masonry work, furnish inserts of stainless steel. H. Expansion Anchor Devices shall be stainless steel expansion bolt anchors. 2.03 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOORS A. Flush Aluminum Doors shall be equivalent to Flushline series manufactured by Kawneer, 1 3/a inch thick, size as shown on Drawings. B. Extrusions shall be 6063-T5 alloy and temper (ASTM B21 allot G.S. 10A -T5). Fasteners, where exposed, shall be slum, stainless steel or zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A 164. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Vertical and horizontal framing members shall have a nominal face dimension of 1 /z". Overall depth shall be 583/01 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08.410 Page 3 B. Complete the cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of all metal work prior to cleaning, finishing, treatment and application of coatings. C. Weld by methods recommended by the manufacturer and AWS to avoid discoloration at welds. Grind exposed welds smooth and restore finish. Remove arises from cut edges and ease edges and corners to a radius of approximately 1/64". D. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible, except as otherwise shown. E. Fit and assemble all the work at the shop to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble only as required for shipment and erection. Maintain true continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joints, with hairline fit of contacting members. F. Reinforce the work as necessary for performance requirements, and for support to the system. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or performed separators which will prevent corrosion. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for the installation of windows units and other components of the work. B. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Anchor securely in place. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources or corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. C. Set sill members and other member in a bed of compound as shown, or with joint fillers or gaskets as shown, to provide weathertight construction. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of the work. 3.02 DOORS AND HARDWARE A. Accurately drill and cut for entrance door hardware and finish hardware. Reinforce frames, door stiles and rails to receive finish hardware according to the door manufacturer's recommendations. B. Erect door frames installing hardware according to the manufacturer's installations. Provide doors which move smooth throughout their full swing and close on frame with uniform contact. Check and adjust weather- stripping to provide seal at door edges. C. Adjust closers after installation of glass for normal operation with check and back -check, easing door to its closed and open positions. D. Thresholds shall be in full bed of sealant. Cut off excessive sealant and removes smears from finished work. E. Tight Metal Joints to be sealed with sealant. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adjust entrances for proper operation and appearance. 583/01 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Section 08.410 Page 4 B. Clean spoiled surfaces according to manufacturer's recommendations and leave ready for Owner's final acceptance. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. After installation, the General Contractor shall adequately protect exposed portions of aluminum surfaces from damage by grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement or other contaminants. B. The General Contractor shall be responsible for final cleaning. End of Section eye 583/01FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 1 eR 1.05 SUBMITTALS 0 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the Drawings and/or specified herein, including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for their completion. Any item of finish hardware not specifically mentioned, but which is necessary for proper completion of the work shown on the Drawings shall be provided with additional cost to the Owner. Any omission shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to bid opening; otherwise the Drawings and Specifications shall be considered complete. B. The Contractor shall furnish cylinders and keying for each lockset to conform to the Owner's existing system. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08.210 Wood Doors. -.9 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI A115.1 - Door and Frame Preparation for Mortise Door Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. B. ANSI Al 15.2 - Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. C. ANSI A115.4 - Door and Frame Preparation for Lever Extension Flush Bolts. D. ANSI A115.5 - Frame Preparation for 181 & 190 Series Deadlock Strikes. E. ANSI A115.9 - Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single Acting. F. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges. G. ANSI A156.2 - Locks and Lock Trim. H. ANSI A156.3 - Exit Devices. I. ANSI A156.4 - Door Controls (Closers). w J. ANSI A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim. K. ANSI A156.7 - Template Hinges. eR 1.05 SUBMITTALS 0 583/01 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 2 A. As soon as practicable and not later than 10 days after award of General Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval, copies of the finish hardware schedule complete with all details and a sample of each individual item as may be requested. The General Contractor shall not award contract for finish hardware until samples and schedules have been approved by the Architect. B. Finish Hardware Schedule shall be a complete detailed list of hardware required to meet requirements of the drawings and specifications. C. Provide the Architect with manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for proper maintenance of hardware. D. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The furnishing of finish hardware shall be subcontracted only to recognized and experienced supplier and who has employed an experienced hardware consultant who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work for project hardware consultation to the Owner, Architect and Contractor. 1.08 UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES REQUIREMENTS A. All hardware for openings requiring UL label shall be furnished and installed in strict accordance with the requirements of Underwriter's Laboratories, 1.08 TEMPLATES A. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames, and other work to be factory -prepared for the installation of hardware. Check the shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use of doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the - information in the contract documents. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the times and to the locations (shop or field) for installation, as directed by the Contractor. 1.10 SECURITY A. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. 1.11 QUANTITIES A. Contractor shall verify the number of doors and other parts requiring hardware listed under an item and make 583/01 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 3 his own quantities in making his quotation, as he will be required to furnish hardware in accordance with the actual requirements of the Drawings. In case of any omission or error in the hardware as scheduled, furnish r" hardware identical to that required for similar openings, as approved by the Architect. 1.12 HARDWARE SCHEDULE .- A. The Hardware Schedule is not complete with respect to the thickness of doors, hand and backset of hardware <� items, method of fastening and other detail requirements. B. Thoroughly check the Drawings and Door Schedules and provide all required hardware for all openings. 1.13 KEYING A. All locksets shall be keyed by the Contractor to the existing keyway system. B. Provide 4 keys to each lockset installed in this Contract. C. All keys shall be nickel silver. !"+ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturer's is acceptable, provided it complies with the Contract Documents. 1. LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS Sargent 2. HINGES Roton 3. CLOSERS Sargent LCN 4. PLATES, STOPS AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS Triangle Brass, Pemko, MAG 2.02 HARDWARE A. Provide items as listed in schedule at end of this section, complete to function as intended. 2.03 CLOSERS A. All closers shall be parallel arm mount. 583/01 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. B. Adjust and check each operating items of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite -type if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. C. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and relubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. D. If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3.5 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. E. The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall be as follows: 1. Fire doors shall have a minimum opening force allowable by the appropriate administrative authority. 2. Other Doors: a. exterior hinged doors: 8.5 lbf b. interior hinged doors: 5 lbf C. sliding or folding doors: 5 lbf 3. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that may hold the door in a closed position. 4. Forces for pushing or pulling doors open are measured with a push-pull gauge under the following conditions: a. Hinged Doors: Force applied perpendicular to the door opener or 30 in (760 mm) from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: Force applied parallel to the door at the door pull or latch. c. Application of Force: Apply force gradually so that the applied force does not exceed the resistance of the door. Air -pressure differentials may require a modification of this specification in order to meet the functional intent. 583/01 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 5 F. Door closers shall be mounted parallel arm unless specifically approved otherwise by the Architect. G. Unless directed otherwise, all hardware shall be mounted at heights as recommended by the hardware industry. The hardware schedule submitted to the Architect shall slow proposed mounting heights or locations of each hardware item. 3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all required hardware although not specifically mentioned; trim such openings with hardware of equal quality and design to that specified for similar openings. No claims for extras will be allowed for any services or materials which, in the Architect's opinion, should have been foreseen by the Contractor and included in the Proposal. B. Where the exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to the finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having as nearly as practicable the same operation and quality as the types specified. C. Hardware supplier shall make an inspection of each items, and after completion, notify the Contractor, in writing, with a copy to the Architect, of any hardware that has been improperly installed, it being understood that the Contractor is entirely responsible for satisfactory performance of the completed work. 3.03 FASTENINGS A. Furnish hardware complete with all necessary screws, through -bolts and other fastenings of suitable type and size to assure a permanent concealed attachment and of finish to harmonize with the hardware. B. Provide concealed fastenings wherever possible. Where exposed, use countersunk Phillips oval -head type screws, (flat head for hinges) and match finish of hardware being attached. Do no attach hardware to metal frames with self -tapping or sheet metal screws. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF WEATHERSTRIPPING A. All weatherstripping shall be installed by experienced mechanics in accordance with methods recommended by manufacturer. B. All weatherstripping shall be continuous and not pieced in any run. Fasten all materials under this heading with screws or other fasteners to match adjacent background finish. C. Adjust weatherstripping so that installation will be permanently weathertight, permitting no infiltration of air or dust when doors are in a closed position. Leave all weatherstripping in perfect working order upon ly aligned with the frames and doors, and at the proper completion. Set threshold units level and accurate elevations for door operation. Shim, if necessary, for full continuous support of threshold at each edge and intermediate legs, if any. Use non -corrosive shims of metal or plastic set in adhesive or otherwise anchored against dislocation from impact forces of traffic upon the threshold. �^* D. Notch thresholds and saddles at all jambs to ensure full width opening in one piece. Set in a bed of sealant as specified in Section 07.900 to completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture from every source. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant. 583/01 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 6 3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HDWE SET #1 DOORS: #101, 109 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 EACH HINGES T4A3786 5 X 4 '/z 652 MCK 1 EACH EXIT 8813 ETL 630 SGT 3 1 EACH CLOSER EN351-CPSH X TB 689 SGT 8265 LW 1 L 1 EACH K.P. 10" X 2" LDW 630 RWD K.P. 1 EACH THRESHOLD 170A 719 PMKO 1 1 EACH DOOR BOTTOM 18061 CP 719 PMKO 45061 CP 1 SET W/STRIPPING 45061 CP 719 PMKO HDWE SET #2 DOOR: #102 DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES T4A3786 5 X 4 1/z 652 MCK I LOCK 8205 LW1L 630 SGT 1 STOP 409 630 RWD 3 SILENCERS 1229A TRCO HDWE SETO DOORS: #103, 104, 106, 107, 108 (EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS BLDG #101, 102) EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 3 EACH HINGES T4A3786 5 X 4 1/z 652 MCK 1 EACH LOCK 8225 LW1L 630 SGT 1 EACH CLOSER EN 351-CPSH X TB 689 SGT 1 EACH K.P. 10" X 2" LDW 630 RWD 1 EACH THRESHOLD 170A 719 PMKO 1 EACH D/B 18061 CP 719 PMKO 1 SET W/STRIPPING 45061 CP 719 PMKO HDWE SET #4 DOOR: #105 DOOR TO HAVE: 3 HINGES T4A3786 5 X 4 1/z 1 LOCK 8265 LW 1 L 1 CLOSER EN 351-CPSH X TB 1 K.P. 10" X 2" LDW 1 THRESHOLD 170A 1 D/B 18061 CP 1 SET W/STRIPPING 45061 CP 652 MCK 630 SGT 689 SGT 630 RWD 719 PMKO 719 PMKO 719 PMKO 583/01 FINISH HARDWARE Section 08.700 Page 7 HDWE SET #5 DOOR: #110 DOOR TO HAVE: �., 1 LOCK 8204 LW1L 630 SGT BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER HDWE SET #6 DOORS: #111, 112 ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER r Note: Coordinate Keying with the Owner. End of Section G*e E: E< `P" 583/01 GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08.800 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Glass and glazing for wood doors and hollow metal frames. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 08.150 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08.210 Wood Doors. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Provide a written ten year warranty on new materials and installation. Provide documentation that glass meets these specifications. 1.05 SUBMITTALS ° A. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of glass required. Include test data substantiating that glass complies with specified requirements. Indicate that Glazier has received a copy of handling and glazing instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The following manufacturers produce glass complying with the requirements of this section: r 1. ASG Industries, Inc. 2. CE Glass Division of Combustion Engineering, Inc. " 3. PPG Industries, Inc. 4. Libbey Owens Ford B. Mirrors shall be a minimum '/a inch thick polished plate glass with an applied white polyvinyl safety backing, polished edges, with a continuous j -mold polished aluminum trim around the perimeter, meeting ANSI 297. 1, Category 1 ASTM D-1709. Provide continuous clips for secure attachment to substrates. Provide sizes and quantities indicated on the drawings. 2.02 GLASS A. Where noted on the Drawings, glass shall be 114 inch thick clear polished plate glass, tempered where required by code. 4 2.03 GLAZING MATERIALS 583/01 GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08.800 Page 2 A. Provide type and hardness of materials as recommended by the manufacturer for the required application and condition of installation in each case. Provide only compounds which are known (proven) to be fully compatible with surfaces contacted. B. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. C. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Protect glass from edge damage at all times during handling, installation and operation of the building B. Glazing channels are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable tolerances. The Glazier is responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and necessary dimensions established. C. The Glazier must examine the framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing removable stop design, and the conditions under which the glazing is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Glazier. D. Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representatives direct otherwise. E. Comply with "Glazing Manual" by Flat Glass Marketing Association, except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by manufacturer of the glass and glazing materials. F. Clean the glazing channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coating which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. G. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer. H. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and eliminate any which have observable edge damage or face imperfections. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from the glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of the channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. J. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. K. Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. L. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in any other way during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. M. Maintain glass in a reasonable clean condition during construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive 583/01 GLASS AND GLAZING Section 08.800 Page 3 P" action and will not contribute (by wash -off) to the deterioration of glazing materials and other surfaces. N. All exterior glazing shall be installed watertight. 0. Install mirrors plumb, square, level and true with wall or other substrates. 3.02 CLEANING A. After installation, mark clear glass with "X" by using tape or removable paste. B. Immediately remove droppings from finished surfaces. Remove labels after work is completed. C. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to Owner's acceptance of the Work in each area. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations for all cleaning materials and procedures. End of Section F" r7 0" 583/01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS F- - Section 09.260 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary Genera Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. t 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Metal framing and accessories required for gypsum board. B. Gypsum board. C. Batt type insulation in interior walls. D. Taped and sanded joint treatment. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 06.100 Carpentry Work. B. Section 09.900 Painting. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform gypsum wallboard systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C754 unless otherwise specified in this section. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASTM C754: Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water -Resistance Backing Board. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit certification and test results that clearly states and indicates that each and every individual element or component of fire rated drywall system partitions is approved and appropriately rated for the specific required rated assembly in which it is to be used, and that the use of such individual element or component would in no way jeopardize the required rating of the entire assembly. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to the job site in their original unopened packages, containers, and bundles bearing the manufacturer's name and brand name. B. Store material in an enclosed space protected from damage and exposure to the elements. Remove damaged material from the premises. ., PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS ""' A. Provide metal framing materials in accordance with ASTM C 645-81, hot dipped galvanized. 583/01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS _ Section 09.260 Page 2 B. Studs: Screw-type Cee -shaped standard 25 gauge, or as required for wall heights shown. C. Runners: Galvanized, channel type, screw type, width as required by stud width, same gauge as stud. D. Fasteners and Anchorages: Self -tapping, self -drilling, as recommended by drywall manufacturer. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable, provided it complies with the Contract Documents. 1. DRYWALL SYSTEMS The Celotex Corporation The Flintkote Company Georgia-Pacific Corporation Kaiser Gypsum National Gypsum Company United States Gypsum Company B. Drywall systems for fire rated partitions, if required, shall be constructed using either, all component parts of one manufacturer or, individually approved and rated components which are totally compatible with the entire required rated assembly and which would in no way jeopardize the rating of the entire assembly. Drywall system shall meet test requirements approved by the Local Building Officials. All exit corridor walls shall be of one hour fire rated construction. C. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36, Type "X", tapered edge, 5/8 inch thick, fire rated at fire rated assemblies, unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Lathing Channels: 16 gauge cold rolled steel, black asphaltum painted, 3/4" and 1 ''/z". B. Screws: Self -drilling, self -tapping, type as recommended by the Drywall Manufacturer. C. Nails: ASTM C380, annular ring type. D. Corner Bead: Galvanized steel, perforated flange, USG Dur -A -Bead. E. Edging and Casing: Galvanized steel for painting. USG 200B, size as required for gypsum wallboard thickness. F. Control Joint Casing: USG #093. G. Adhesive: As recommended by wallboard manufacturer. ASTM C475. H. Sealant: USG Acoustical Sealant. I. Wire: Galvanized, 9 -gauge hanger wire, 16 -gauge tie wire. J. Reinforcing tape, Joint Compound, Water, Fasteners: As recommended by Manufacturer. K. Batt type insulation shall be unfaced fiberglass sound attenuation batt insulation as manufactured by CertainTeed, thickness and R values as noted on drawings. GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS 583/01 Section 09.260 Page 3 ! L. Sound Control Batts: Equivalent to CertainTeed Fiber Glass Sound Control Batts, unfaced, 3-1/2 inches thick, or as indicated on the Drawings. M. Furring Channels: USG hat -shaped 25 ga. metal furring channels. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DRYWALL PREPARATION A. Examine spaces and correct defects that could interfere with proper installation. Starting work shall be construed as acceptance of spaces. B. Maintain in ' cold wee ather uniform controlled range temperature between 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. during the installation. Provide adequate ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture. C. Install gypsum drywall systems in accordance with the Gypsum Drywall Contractors International, Underwriters Laboratory and the manufacturer of the Drywall material. 3.02 METAL STUD FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754. B. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 1 feet in any direction. C. Floor and Ceiling Runner Tracks: Align runner tracks to the partition layout at both floor and ceiling. Secure ommended by the stud manufacturer for the floor and ceiling construction involved, except runner tracks as rec t driven fasteners, nor 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. do not exceed 24" o.c. spacing for nail or power - Provide at all corners and ends of runner tracks. D. Use full length studs between runner tracks wherever possible. If necessary, splice studs by nesting with a minimum lap or 8" and fasten laps with 2 screws through each flange. Friction fit studs to runner tracks by positioning and rotating into place. Provide positive attachment to runner tracks for studs located at partition corners and intersections, and adjacent to openings, using 3/8" self -tapping screws or stud clinching tool on both flanges of studs E. Size and Spacing: Use studs of the sizes shown and install at the spacing shown. Provide 16" o.c. spacing unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. M F. Provide additional studs to support inside corners at partition intersections and corners, and to support outside corners, terminations of partitions and both sides of control joints (if any). G. Provide rough framing at openings consisting of double full-length studs adjacent to jambs and horizontal to length and split flanges and bend webs at ends for flange header and sill tracks. Cut horizontal tracks overlap and screw to jamb studs. Install cut -to -length, intermediate studs between jamb studs at head and sill sections, at same spacing as full-length studs. rn H. At door frames, provide rough framing as required for door frame dimensions and tolerances. 1. Tops of all partitions not continuing to roof deck shall be solidly braced to overhead or adjacent construction by means of steel channels (1 '/z" minimum) or other means approved by Architect. Wood construction shall not be used. J. Provide 2 x 6 fire retardant treated wood blocking in drywall where toilet accessories or other items are scheduled to be attached. Verify the heights of the blocking with the requirements of the Drawings and the 0 583/01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS — Section 09.260 Page 4 manufacturer of the item to be attached. All wood blocking shall be fire -retardant treated wood in compliance with Uniform Building Code Standard Number 42-1. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A. Comply with the requirements recommended by the manufacturer. The term "Manufacturer" defines the gypsum wallboard manufacturer unless otherwise noted. Comply with all requirements for specified fire -resistance ratings. B. Provide drywall of the thickness shown on the Drawings. C. Provide additional framing and blocking as required to support gypsum board at openings and cutouts, and to support built-in anchorage and attachment devices for other work. D. Form control joints in drywall construction where shown. All 1" continuous opening between edges of adjacent drywall board to all for insertion of control joint trim accessory. E. Partition/Walls: apply gypsum board vertically or horizontally at Contractor's option, with vertical joints located over supports, but offset at least one stud on opposite faces of partition/walls. Stagger joints of adjacent sheets of gypsum boards if applied horizontally. F. Fasten gypsum wallboard with screws. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for fastening, but do not exceed 12" o.c. spacing. G. Caulk sides and backs of electrical boxes to completely seal openings and joints. H. Apply wallboard to ceilings before applying to vertical surfaces. Install wallboard to ceilings with long edge perpendicular to supports using longest pieces practicable. Stagger end joints and provide support for all edges. Apply sealant at joint between edge of wallboard at floor and at ceiling. Fit wallboard snugly into steel door frames. Cut wallboard neatly to fit around all outlets and switch boxes. Install metal edge trim along top edge of all wallboard at ceiling and wherever wallboard edge is exposed, or abuts another material. Install corner bead at all exterior corners. J. Use moisture resistant gypsum wallboard in all toilet rooms. K. Apply second layer of gypsum board sheets, if required, perpendicular to base layer. 3.04 CEILING INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install the suspension system per the recommendation of ASTM C636. Deflection of any component must not exceed 1/360 of the span. B. Suspend main beams spaced 4'-0" on center from structure with wire hangers spaced 4'-0" on center. Install main beams level within 1/8 inch in 12 feet with hanger wire taut and tightly wrapped to prevent vertical movement or rotation. Do not make local kinks or bends in hanger wires as a means of leveling. C. Install cross tees at right angles to main beams, space at T-0" on center and join to main beams with positive interlock. Install cross tees to within 1/32 inch of their required location and within 0.015 inch of the same horizontal plane as main beam, and never below continuous member. D. Lay ends of main beams and cross tees on angle moldings at vertical surfaces. Provide additional hanger wires at each corner of recessed light troffers and other concentrated load conditions to prevent deflection. E. Install cross tees at right angles to beams and cross tees to support ends of recessed light fixtures, diffusers or 583/01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS Section 09.260 Page 5 grilles. 3.05 CONTROL JOINTS A. Locate control joints as indicated but not to exceed 50'-0" in either direction for ceilings and not to exceed 30'-0" on center for partitions. Locate control joints where wallboard abuts any dissimilar wall or ceiling assembly and where wallboard construction changes within the same plane. B. Install control joint casing where control joint occurs in continuous wall surface. Make joint 1/4" wide with supports noncontinuous over joint. Install metal edging where wallboard abuts any structural element or dissimilar material. Make joint 1/8" wide and fill with sealant. 3.06 DRYWALL FINISHING !�*+ A. Do not install joint treatment compounds unless installation areas comply with minimum temperature and ventilation requirements recommended by the manufacturer and conditions are acceptable to the Installer. B. Finish exposed drywall surfaces with joints, corners and exposed edges reinforced or trimmed as specified, and with all joints, fastener heads, trim necessary flanges and surface defects filled with joint compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for a smooth, flush surface. Drywall finishing work will not be considered acceptable if corners or edges do not form true, level or plumb lines, or if joints fastener heads, e-* flanges of trim accessories or defects are visible after application of field -applied decoration. C. Use joint tape to reinforce joints formed by tapered edges or butt ends of drywall units and at interior corners and angles. Set tape in joint compound then apply skim coat over tape in one application. t D. Outside corners and joints shall be floated a minimum of 18 inches in each direction from the corner or joint to provide a level drywall surface which completely masks the corners and joints. E. Where open spaces of more than 1/16" width occur between abutting drywall units, (except at control joints), prefill joints with joint compound and allow prefill to dry before application of joint tape. F. Reinforce external corners of drywall work with specified type of corner bead. G. Securely fasten metal corner beads as recommended by the manufacturer. Do not use fastens which cannot be fully concealed by joint compound fill applied over flanges. H. Provide specified type of metal casing bead trim. Install in single unjointed lengths unless run exceeds longest available stock length. Miter corners of semi -finishing type trim. I. Use only compatible compounds from one manufacturer. After mixing, do not use joint compounds if recommended pot -life time has expired. 3.07 SOUND CONTROL BATTS A. Install sound control batts full thickness, tightly butted, in drywall construction where noted on the Drawings. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.08 STC RATINGS A. Provide construction in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations to meet the required STC rating for the walls noted on the Drawings. 7 583/01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS Section 09.260 Page 6 B. Any completed wall system which does not pass a sound transmission test for the required STC rating shall be reconstructed under this section of the work to meet the required rating at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.09 CLEANING AND PATCHING A. Clean exposed surfaces of wallboard of all soil and stains that would affect finish. Repair or remove and replace defective work. Remove excess materials and debris from Site. End of Section "" 583/01 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09.510 Page 1 "" PART 1 GENERAL D. Warranty: 1. The Contractor shall furnish a written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the Date of Substantial Completion, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the Warranty. 2. The following shall be adjudged as defective work: Loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping, cracking, settling, chipping, spotting, and loss of acoustical properties of materials. 3. Furnish three copies of the Manufacturer's warranty for a period of two (2) years from the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontract the acoustic ceiling and related work to an Installer acceptable to the manufacturer of primary acoustic materials. 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish materials, labor and equipment, as required by the Contract Documents, to provide and install acoustical ceilings. 1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS „ A. Acoustical Materials Association: 1. "Specifications for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceiling Suspension Systems." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: 1. 12 inch x 12 inch sample of each type of acoustical unit. 2. 12 inch samples of suspension system including: a. Main beam b. Cross tee connection c. Angle moldings B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's data showing compliance with the Contract Documents. C. Maintenance Instructions: 1. Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning and refinishing each type acoustical unit. 2. Include precautions against materials and methods detrimental to finishes and acoustical efficiency. D. Warranty: 1. The Contractor shall furnish a written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the Date of Substantial Completion, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the Warranty. 2. The following shall be adjudged as defective work: Loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping, cracking, settling, chipping, spotting, and loss of acoustical properties of materials. 3. Furnish three copies of the Manufacturer's warranty for a period of two (2) years from the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontract the acoustic ceiling and related work to an Installer acceptable to the manufacturer of primary acoustic materials. 583/01 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS _ Section 09.510 Page 2 B. Subcontract the installing of suspended acoustic ceiling materials to the Installer of the ceiling suspension systems for single responsibility. C. The Installer must examine the condition under which acoustic ceiling work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the acoustic ceiling work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. D. Deliver acoustic ceiling materials to the job site in original, unopened packages, bearing manufacturer's name and label identifying each type of acoustic unit. E. Coordinate layout with other work which penetrated or is supported by ceiling suspension system. F. Comply with acoustic material manufacturer's recommendations for storage of units to be used in the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Exposed suspension grid system for acoustical panels: 1. Suspension system shall be equivalent to USG Centricitee (DX) 15/16" face, white, 2'x2' grid, non fire rated. B. Wire Hangers: 1. Not less than 12 gauge (0. 106" diameter), galvanized carbon steel wire per ASTM A 641. 2. Where hanger wires cannot be directly wire -tied to structural or intermediate framing members, provide attachment devices designed for the type of construction used in the work and with a carrying capacity of not less than 3 times the design loads involved. C. Acoustical Panels: 1. Acoustical Panels shall be equivalent to USG Sandrift # 808, 2'x2'x3/4" (SL), white, non fire rated. D. Retention Clips as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine spaces and correct defects that could interfere with proper installation. Installed ceiling system shall meet requirements of "Specifications for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceiling Suspension System," published by the Acoustical Materials Association. B. Install acoustical treatment after moist materials have been installed. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions closely approximating the interior conditions which will exist when the building is occupied but not less than 50 degrees or more than 85 degrees F. before, during and after installation. C. Prior to start of acoustic ceiling work, consult other trades and contractors involved to determine areas of potential interference. Do not start installation of suspension systems until interferences have been resolved. 3.02 LAYOUT 583/01 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09.510 Page 3 A. The acoustical panels shall be installed as shown on the Reflected Ceiling Plans on the Drawings. Unless shown otherwise on the Reflected Ceiling Plans, in general, the acoustical panels shall be symmetrical about the center lines of the room in both directions and edge panels on opposite sides of each room shall be equal in width. 3.03 SUSPENSION A. Suspension Systems: 1. Suspension system shall comply with ASTM C 635, "Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings." Suspension system shall be classified "intermediate" duty. B. Molding: 1. Install angle molding around perimeter of room at proper level. 2. Miter angle molding at exterior corners; 3. Cut flanges and bend web at interior corners; 4. Exposed leg shall be in same plane as bottom flange of main beam and cross tees. C. Hangers: 1. Hang main beams at 4 feet on centers with hangers spaced at 4 feet on centers. 2. Wrap hangers around beams or joists and twist at least 3 full turns. 3. Where hanger wires cannot be wrapped around structural members, provide: a. Attachment devices for the type of construction (Vertical screws up into wood are not acceptable.) b. With a carrying capacity of at least 5 times the design loads. 4. Space hangers not more than 6 inches from each end. 5. Provide additional hangers for support of other items to be supported by the suspension system, including all light fixtures. 6. Hangers shall be plumb: a. If splayed hangers cannot be avoided; b. Provide counter splay, bracing or other suitable offsetting members. 7. Hang beams level: a. Do not make kinks or bends in hanger wires to level. 8. Tightly wrap beams to prevent vertical movement or rotation. a. Twist wires at least 3 full turns. D. Grid: 1. Install cross beams at right angles to main beams. 2. Space 2 feet on centers. 3. Join beams to positive interlock. a. Within 1732 inch of required location. b. Within 0.015 (1/64) inch of horizontal plane. c. Never below a continuous member. 3.04 ACOUSTICAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General 1. Position acoustical units on flanges of inverted tees. 2. Cut and fit acoustical units closely and accurately around recessed light fixtures, grilles or other ceiling items. 3. Throw away and replace units that are damaged. 583/01 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Section 09.510 Page 4 B. Shall be by an applicator who is an authorized representative of the manufacturer of the units. C. Do not install acoustic ceiling until installation areas meet the following criteria. Exterior openings have been closed and roofs are weathertight. Concrete, terrazzo, plastering and painting work has dried out. Mechanical, electrical and other work above ceilings have been completed. Wet work has been installed and completed. Temperature and relative humidity have reached levels which comply with acoustic material manufacturer's recommendations for the units to be used in the work and are acceptable to the Installer. D. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and other recommendations applicable to the work. E. All acoustical unit surfaces shall be true and free from irregularities; joints shall be straight and continuous. All units at walls, columns and openings shall be scribed accurately. 3.05 RETENTION CLIPS A. Provide and install retention clips at all vestibules at all exterior doorways to hold the panels in place during wind and pressure change conditions. 3.06 FURRING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ITEMS A. All Mechanical and Electrical items occurring immediately below acoustical ceilings: 1. Shall be furred in with the acoustical ceiling materials whether shown on the Drawings or not. 2. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical drawings for a complete description of items. 3.07 COOPERATION A. This Contractor shall consult and cooperate with trades whose work precedes and follows ceiling installation, to permit orderly procedure in executing work under this Contract. Installation of tile shall not start until foundation work to receive the tile has been completed and inspected, and the Architect's approval has been obtained to proceed. The Contractor shall give the Architect advance notices for inspection. 3.08 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Touch-up or replace damaged ceiling grids. B. Replace damaged and stained acoustical panels. C. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage. D. Remove all debris, tools and extra material resulting from the work of this Section from the site. End of Section Section 09.650 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 Al RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions d Supplemsentary Ge eneral this Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Resilient flooring, related materials and accessories generally consist of the following: 1. Vinyl Composition Tile. 2. Resilient Base. 3. Reducer Strips and Edge Moldings. B. The work includes preparing all substrate surfaces for the complete and satisfactory installation of resilient flooring. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. For information only submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, product data, and installation instructions for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. Indicate by transmittal that a copy of each installation instruction has been distributed to the Installer. B. Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's written instructions for recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient material. ., C. Submit two complete sets of color samples for vinyl composition tile, resilient base, resilient stair treads, and reducer strips and edge moldings for selections by the Architect. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Installer must thoroughly examine the substrate and the conditions under which resilient flooring is to be performed. Notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. e^ B. Surfaces shall be smooth, level and at required finished elevations and without more than 1/8" in 10'-0" variation. Cracks, holes, seams or low spots shall be filled with approved patch or filler material. 1.05 WARRANTY A. The resilient flooring supplier and installer shall warrant the work of this section against defects in materials or workmanship for a one year period beginning on the Date of Substantial Completion. .�, B. Submit the manufacturer's warranty for each product used in this specifications section. ,., PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) shall be equivalent to Armstrong Imperial Texture Vinyl factured by Armstrong World Industries of Parsippany, N.J. Tile shall be 1/8 inch Composition Tile as manu Section 09.650 Page 2 gauge, 12 x 12" size. Color to be selected by Architect. B. Resilient Cover Base 2 (RB) shall be equivalent to Armstrong 4" Cove Type as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries of Parsippany, N.J., 1/8" thick, 4" high, with extended toe cove type, furnished in 120" continuous rolls. The color is to be selected by Architect. C. Reducer Strips and Edge Moldings shall be equivalent to items as manufactured by Mercer Plastics Company, Inc., in shapes and sizes as recommended by the manufacturer and as required for the complete and satisfactory installation of all new resilient flooring. Color(s) to be selected by the Architect. D. Adhesives shall be waterproof, stabilized type, as recommended by the manufacturer. Emulsions and other non - waterproof type adhesives are not acceptable. E. Concrete Slab Primer shall be non -staining, as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Prior to laying flooring or other resilient materials, float out imperfections in the subfloor, broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered and inspect subfloor. Start of flooring installation will indicate acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed work. Remove existing finish on concrete floor as required for a permanent and satisfactory installation. B. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. C. Continuously heat areas to receive flooring to 70 degrees F. for at least 48 hours prior to installation, when project conditions are such that heating is required to raise the temperature to 70 degrees F. Maintain 70 degrees F. temperature continuously during and after installation as recommended by manufacturer, but for not less than 48 hours. D. Install flooring and other resilient items after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by manufacturer. E. Place resilient materials with adhesive cement in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings and edgings. Scribe as necessary around obstructions and to produce neat joints, laid tight, even and straight. Extend into toe spaces, door reveals and into closets and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non -permanent marking device. G. Install flooring around covers for floor type telephone and electrical outlets and other such items as occur within finished floor areas. Maintain overall flow of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed around covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers. H. Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks or other surface imperfections. I. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of the area be of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 3" at perimeters. 583/01 RESILIENT FLOORING Section 09.650 Page 3 Lay tile square to wall axis, unless otherwise shown. J. Match tile for color and pattern by using the from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. Cut tile neatly to and around all appurtenances. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tile are not acceptable. K. Lay VCT with in directional pattern as directed by the Architect. L. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Bond tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. M. At base installations on masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular surfaces, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed materials from damage with suitable protective covering. 3.03 FINISHING A. After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. Apply wax and buff, with type of wax, number of coats (no less than two), and buffing procedures in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. End of Section i r�* 583/01 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of painting work is shown on the Drawings and schedules, and as herein specified. B. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems, materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and filler and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. C. Paint all exposed surfaces whether or not colors are denoted in schedules, except where the natural finish of the material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, the Superintendent of Schools will select from standard colors available for the materials systems specified. D. The following categories of work are not included as part of the field -applied finish work, or are included in other sections of these specifications: 1. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under the various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, and similar items. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory -finishing or Installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) prefinished partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework, finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets, doors and equipment. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas. 4. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Do not paint over any code -required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. E. The required painting on the tennis court surface is specified in section 02.440. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application instructions for each materials proposed for use. Transmit a copy of each manufacturer's instructions to the paint applicator. B. Submit samples for Superintendent of Schools' review of color and texture only. compliance with all 583/01 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 2 other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Provide a listing of the material and application for each coat of each finish sample. 1. On 12" x 12" hardboard, provide two samples of each color and material with texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit each sample as requested until acceptable sheen, color and texture is achieved. C. Submit two sets of Architectural Color samples with paint chips suitable for mounting on color boards for the Superintendent of Schools' use. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable. 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacturer. 4. Manufacturer's name. 5. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Color name and number. B. Store materials and equipment in a single lockable area of project site. Provide adequate means to protect floors and adjacent surfaces of this area from damage. C. Store clean rags, paint and solvents in closed metal containers located in designated area. Dispose of soiled rags daily. D. Comply with applicable health and fire regulations. 1.05 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds and stages necessary to complete work. B. Protect completed finish and painted work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work. 1.06 EXTRA PAINT A. Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Owner one (1) gallon of each color of latex and enamel paint used. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. This contractor shall guarantee all work performed under this contract for a period of one (1) year from the Date of Substantial Completion. Cracking, peeling and scaling of paint shall be judged as defective work. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS ti 583/01 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 3 A. Apply paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees and 90 degrees F., unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's s printed instructions. B. Do not apply paint when the relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. 1.09 COLORS AND FINISHES t** A. Paint finishes are indicated in the schedules of the contract documents. B. Prior to beginning work, the Architect will furnish a color schedule for surfaces to be painted. ` 1. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. 2. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job. M.a C. Color Pigments to be pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit the substrates and service indicated. D. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify the Superintendent of Schools in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. PART 2 PRODUCTS +�*+ 2.01 MATERIALS A. Products specified in Schedule of Painting are as manufactured by Pittsburgh Paint Company unless otherwise indicated; equivalent products of Pratt and Lambert, DuPont, Sherwin-Williams, Glidden, Devoe, Cook, TCI and Kelly -Moore may be furnished in lieu of those listed, provided that they are of equal type and quality. B. Materials selected for coating systems shall be products of a single manufacturer unless otherwise t_. specified. C. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be first line quality products of a reputable manufacturer. D. Lead Free Paint: All paint specified for use under this section shall be lead and mercury free and shall be in full compliance with Federal Hazardous Substances Act. E. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard, best -grade product will not be acceptable. F. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners r 583/01 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 4 approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 2.02 MIXING AND TINTING A. Accomplish job site tinting and mixing only when approved by the Superintendent of Schools. Use tinting colors recommended by paint manufacturer for specific type of finish. B. Thin paints only when specifically allowed by manufacturer: do not exceed thinning directions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of finish work, and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through normal preparatory work. B. Notify the Superintendent of Schools in writing of such unacceptable conditions. C. Do not proceed with surface preparations or coating applications until conditions are suitable. — D. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint firm. E. Application of paint or finish to surfaces shall constitute acceptance of that surface. 3.02 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS _ A. The intent of these specifications is to produce highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. B. Floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as surfaces to be painted shall be clean before painting. C. Clean surfaces free of foreign matter before applying paint or finishes. D. Do not paint masonry surfaces with a moisture content exceeding 12%. E. Provide a minimum of 20 foot candles illumination for surfaces to be painted or finished. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects with putty after first coat. Color to match finish. B. Wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt, oil or grease before applying primer. Remove rust or scale by wire brushing or sanding clean before painting. Clean marred shop coats and touch-up with primer. C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. F 583/01 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 5 D. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Final coat of paint shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or hidden corner molds. B. Apply paint, stain, and varnish with suitable brushes, or rollers, as recommended by manufacturer. Spray application will be allowed only upon written approval of the Superintendent of Schools. C. Allow previous coats to thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats. D. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. E. Slightly vary color of successive coats. F. Sand and dust between each coat as required to remove visual defects. G. Each coat of paint applied shall be inspected by the Superintendent of Schools before application of succeeding specified coats. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats. Provide the Superintendent of Schools with a report of each coat applied when completed for inspection to comply with above. The Superintendent of Schools reserves the right to make revisions within color range of paint prior to final coat. 4 H. Apply each coat of paint uniformly to minimum wet file (MWF) thickness specified in Schedule, or as recommended by manufacturer. Additional coats shall be applied if required to produce full coverage. 3.05 CLEANING, PATCHING AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of work, remove paint and varnish spots from floor, glass and other finished surfaces. Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials. Leave work in clean, orderly, and acceptable conditions. B. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing. Otherwise, re -coat entire section to corners or visible stopping point. .�. C. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the Superintendent of Schools. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly -painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings proved by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. E. At the completion of work of other trades, touch -up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.06 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING A. The kinds and brands of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be those listed below. 583/01 PAINTING Section 09.900 Page 6 B. Exterior Exposed Ferrous Metal: 1. Primer Coat: To be applied in the shop or field. a. Description: Fast curing, VOC compliant zinc -rich primer. b. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP6 according to manufacturer's product data sheet. c. Color: Standard reddish gray. d. Finish: Flat. e. Solids Content: 63 % solids by volume. f. Zinc Content: 83% zinc in the dried film. g. Application Rate: One coat @ 3.0-4.0 mils dry film thickness. h. Acceptable Product: Tnemec Series 90-97 Tnemec-Zinc. 2. Intermediate Coat: To be applied in the field. a. Description: High -build polyamide epoxy. b. Surface Preparation: clean and dry according to manufacturer's data sheet. c. Color: As selected by Architect. d. Finish: Semi -gloss e. Solids Content: 56% solids by volume. f. Application rate: One coat @ 4.0-6.0 dry mils. g. Acceptable Product: Tnemec Series 66 HB Epoxoine. 3. Finish Coat: To be applied in the shop or field. a. Description: High -solids high-performance, fast drying aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating. b. Surface Preparation: clean and dry according to manufacturer's data sheet. c. Color: As selected by Architect. d. Finish: Semi -gloss _ e. Solids Content: 72% solids by volume. f. Application rate: One coat @ 3.5-4.5 mils dry film thickness. g. Surface burning: Conform to NFPA 101 Class A requirement for flame spread and smoke density. h. Acceptable Products: Tnemel Series 75 Endurashield C. Interior and Exterior Metal: 1. First Coat: PPG 6-208 Speedhide Rust Inhibitive Primer 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide Gloss Enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide Gloss Enamel D. Galvanized Metal: 1. First Coat: PPG 6-209 Galvanized Steel Primer ^^ 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Speedhide Gloss Enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Speedhide Gloss Enamel E. New Gypsum Board: 1. First Coat: PPG 6-2 Speedhide Primer Sealer PAINTING 583/01 Section 09.900 Page 7 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-510 Series Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-510 Series Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel F. Interior Wood: For transparent finish: 1. First Coat: Rez 77 line Semi -Transparent Satin (dark "mahogany" colored stain will be required) 2. Second Coat: PPG Speedhide 6-10 Sanding Sealer 3. Third Coat: Rez 77-9 Satin Polyurethane Varnish G. Interior CMU 1. First Coat: PPG 6-7 Spedhide Masonry Block Filler 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-2 Latex Sealer 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-90 Series Speedhide Low Sheen Oil Based enamel 4. Fourth Coat: PPG 6-90 Series Speedhide Low Sheen Oil Based Enamel A•. End of Section l-, 1. TOILET PARTITIONS 583/01 Section 10.155 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. k 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of the toilet partition work is shown on the Drawings and is specified herein. n - B. The types of toilet partitions include the following: 1. Overhead -braced partitions and doors. C. Provide all materials, fittings and labor to provide a complete and satisfactory installation. D. Manufacturers offering products to comply with the requirements for toilet partitions include the following: 1. Global Steel Products, Deer Park, NY. 2. General Partitions Mfg. Corp., Erie. Pennsylvania. 3. Flush Metal Partition Corp., Maspeth, NY. 1.03 GENERAL A. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication without delaying the project. B. Preassemble units at the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize any field cutting, joints and assembly of units. C. All doors and hardware shall meet the Texas Accessibility Standards, effective April 1, 1994. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. For information only, submit 2 copies of the manufacturer's detailed specifications and installation instructions. Include catalog cuts of hardware, anchors fastenings and other data as required. Indicate by transmittal that copy — of each instruction has been distributed to the Installer. B. Submit shop drawings for the fabrications and erection of toilet partition assemblies, to the extent not fully ata sheets. Include plans and elevations at not less than 3/8" or 1/2" to P-0" described by the manufacturer's d scale, and details at not less than 3" to 1'-0" scale. Show all anchorage, accessory items and finishes. Provide location template drawings for bolt hole locations in supporting members for attachment of partitions. C. Submit 2 sets of samples of partition stainless steel. Samples will be reviewed by the Architect for color, texture and reflective surface only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. R 1.04 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee all work, supplied or installed, against defects resulting from the use of inferior materials, hardware, or workmanship, for a period of ten (10) years from the Date of Substantial Completion. oA PART 2 PRODUCTS 583/01 TOILET PARTITIONS Section 10.155 Page 2 2.01 MATERIALS A. Toilet partitions and doors shall be equivalent to General Series 40 floor supported with headrails, stainless steel B. The toilet partitions shall be 1 ''/4" thick with two sheets of #304 Stainless Steel No. 4 Finish, bonded before attaching die drawn stainless steel molding to both sides. Same construction as panel specification outlines above. Pilasters are to be anchored to floor with heavy gauge angle. Top of pilasters to be securely braced with extruded aluminum headrail with integral crown loafer rail. C. Headrail to be 1 7/8" x 1 5/32" x 1/16" with integral crown loafer rail, extruded aluminum heat-treated and anodized with necessary fittings. D. Provide manufacturer's standard Hardware and Accessories, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories required for a complete and satisfactory installation, as follows: 1. Non-ferrous cast alloy with polished chrome finish. 2. Provide easy -to -operate and easy -to -grasp hardware meeting the requirements of the Texas Accessibility Standards, effective April 1, 1994. a. Concealed latch (No. 2000D), hinge brackets (No.1250D), and doorstop and keeper (No. 2060DO heavy castings non-ferrous alloy, chrome -plated. Concealed hinge (No. 10041)), works on opposing nylon cams under spring tension. Top pivot pin, mounted within door having bearing points above and below hinge bracket. 3. Fittings — wall connection brackets for panels and pilasters to be high strength heavy chrome plated. Pilaster trim to be 3" high, .031 stainless steel. All hardware and fittings to be secured with chrome -plated one-way vandal -proof sex bolts or No. 14 plated -steel metal screws of proper lengths. E. Anchorages and Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel of chromium plated steel or brass, with finish to match hardware. Use theft resistant (one-way) type heads and nuts for exposed screws. Provide concealed anchors of hot -dip galvanized, cadmium plated, or other rust resistant protective - coated steel. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Provide standard doors and panels, fabricated for the partition system in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications, unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide concealed reinforcement for installation of hardware, fittings, brackets and required accessories. C. Provide 36" wide doors, except as otherwise indicated, for stalls required to be accessible. D. Provide hardware and accessories for each door in the partition system, as follows: 1. Hinges shall be constructed of 16 gauge metal, either surface -mounted or cutout insert type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type, or spring action cam type, or concealed, torsion rod type, to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Latch and Keeper shall be Manufacturer's latch unit, with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide latch unit equipped for emergency access. provide latch unit design for use by physically impaired (see the State of Texas Program for the Elimination of Architectural Barriers). 3. Coat Hook and Bumper shall be combination unit with hook and rubber -tipped pin. Install as recommended by the Manufacturer. 4. Anti -grip headrail for partition. PART 3 EXECUTION i 583/01 TOILET PARTITIONS Section 10.155 Page 3 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions rigidly, straight, plumb and level with the panels laid out as shown. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2" between pilasters and panels and not more than 1" between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls with not less than 2 stirrup brackets, attached near top and bottom of the panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure panels to supporting walls with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices, as indicated on final shop drawings or in manufacturer's instructions. B. Overhead -braced Partitions shall have secure pilasters to the supporting floor with the specified anchorage device. Level, plumb, and tighten the installation with the leveling device. Secure the overhead brace to face sheets with ., not less than 2 fasteners per face. Set tops of doors parallel with the overhead brace when doors are in the closed position. C. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation after installation. D. Set hinges on out -swing doors to return to the fully closed position. 3.02 PROTECTION, CLEANING AND FINAL ADJUSTMENTS e A. Protect units during delivery, storage and after erection so that there will be no indication of use of damage at the time of acceptance by the Owner. Replace damaged work as directed. B. Perform all final adjustments to pilaster leveling devices, door hardware, and other operating parts of the partition assembly just prior to final inspection. Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings and accessories, using materials and methods recommended by the partition manufacturer. End of Section i i. t 583/01 LOCKERS Section 10.500 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of metal lockers is shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Provide seventy-eight 12" x 12" x 30" high double tier lockers. Four (4) of those lockers shall be accessible. Do not provide the accessibility symbol on the accessible lockers. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide locker units in colors selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Unless otherwise shown or specified, non -exposed surfaces may be manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect. • 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide lockers which comply with performance characteristics of, and are capable of successfully "* passing the impact and loading test of, FS AA -L-486. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. For information only, submit three copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for metal locker units. Indicate by transmittal that a copy of each instruction has been forwarded to the Installer. B. Submit two metal staples on metal, of each color and finish that are required for lockers. Architect's review will be color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. v� C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for metal lockers, verifying dimension affecting locker installations. Show locker detail, method installation, fillers, trim, base and accessories. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver metal lockers until building is enclosed and ready for their installation. Protect F from damage during delivery, handling, storage and installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS z 2.01 LOCKERS A. Provide metal lockers equal to Standard Lockers # 5242, manufactured by Lyon Metal Product, Inc. of Aurora, Illinois. B. Material: Prime high grade Class 1 mild annealed, cold -rolled steel free from surface e imperfections. 583/01 LOCKERS Section 10.500 Page 2 C. Body: 24 gauge steel, flanged to give double thickness of metal at back vertical corners. D. Door Frame: 16 gauge formed steel channels. Vertical members shall have an additional flange to form continuous door strike. Corners shall be lapped and welded into a rigid assembly. Top and bottom cross members shall provide support for front edge of locker top and bottom. E. Door: One-piece, 16 gauge steel on a single, double and triple tier with both vertical edges formed into channel -shaped formation: top and bottom shall be flanged at 90° angle. F. Ventilation: Louvers shall be provided as per manufacturers. G. Door Jambs: Shall have two jambs welded to side of door frame to engage locking device. Design and gauge of jamb shall prevent freeing of locking device by prying. Each jamb shall have safety reverse nose to eliminate hazard of sharp -pointed edges protruding into the locker. H. Hinges: Shall be not less than 2" high, full loop forming double thickness on each leaf. Hinges to be set in slot in door and frame and projection welded to frame and securely attached to door. Quiet Locking Device: Channel shaped locking device shall be a quiet design with nylon coated metal latches to eliminate any metal to metal contact. Lock bar shall be enclosed on three sides and operate with the channel formation of the door. Locking device shall be prelocking so mechanism can be locked in open position — door locking automatically when closed. Doors also to be provided with lock hole filler to permit use of built in key or combination lock. Handles: All parts shall be chrome plated, die-cast zinc alloy with a tensile strength of no less than 40,000 psi. No moving parts are to operate against outside surface of locker. Padlock attachment to be integral part of lift which shall be attached directly to locking bar and protected by fixed handle housing. Handle to provide built in padlock strike. Lockers shall be equipped with a 16 gauge door pull with padlock attachment when not used with built in locks. The recessed handle shall be 4 1/8"w x 6 1/6"h x 1 '/4 "d and constructed of die cast zinc alloy, nickel plated, with a minimum tensile strength of 40,000 psi. K. Coat Hooks: Lockers shall have double prong (ceiling) hook and three single prong wall hooks. All hooks to be zinc plated or subjected to a comparable rust retardant treatment and attached with two bolts. L. Number Plates: All lockers shall have 3/8' high number plates attached near top of door. M. Standard Finish: Exposed steel parts shall be thoroughly cleaned, given a bonding and rust inhibitive phosphate treatment and then electostatically sprayed with a heavy coat of high quality enamel. Color to be selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Installer must examine the substrates and conditions under which the specialty signs are to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install metal lockers at the locations shown in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for a plumb, level, rigid and flush installation. 583/01 LOCKERS Section 10.500 Page 3 B. Space fasteners about 48" oc and apply through suitable reinforcing plates where necessary to prevent metal distortion. Conceal all fasteners whenever possible. Use suitable anchors to provide secure anchorage. C. Touch up any marred finishes, or replace as directed by Architect. Use only materials and finishes as recommended or furnished by the locker manufacturer. D. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without bind. Verify satisfactory operations of integral locking devices. E. When required, provide metal filler panels for closure to adjacent surfaces, factory -finishes to match lockers. End of Section A■+o s - .. """ 583/01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Section 10.520 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Perform all work required to complete the Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets indicated by the Contract Documents and furnish all supplementary items necessary for their proper installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval samples of typical accessories showing construction and finish specified if requested by the Architect. B. Submit manufacturer's literature and mark sufficiently to indicate compliance with these Specifications. Show locations, methods of supporting, methods of anchoring and finishes of each accessory. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable, provided it complies with the Contract Documents. 1. J.L. Industries 2. Larsen's Manufacturing, Co. 3. Muckle Mfg. Co. - Division of Technico, Inc. 4. Profile International, Inc. 5. Seco Mfg., Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. ABC FIRE EXTINGUISHERS: Equal to J.L. Industries "Cosmic 5E", 5 pound nominal capacity, with Panorama aluminum 1012P48 cabinets with ADAC option. Furnish and install four (4) sets of extinguishers and cabinets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's latest written requirements, details and recommendations. B. Install in locations and heights directed by the Architect. ?' End of Section a 583/01 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS Section 10.605 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, (Division 1 1 to the work specified in this ons, Special Conditions and General Re ), apply worke s n, � - section. P 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this section includes the furnishing and installing of wire mesh partitions as indicated on th Drawings. e SPIR t , 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Four (4) copies of Manufacturer's printed data on products to be furnished. C. Shop Drawings: Complete layout and fabrication drawings. D. Samples: Finish color samples for selection. E. Cylinders: Submit Sargent Cylinders and four (4) sets of blank keys. The Owner will key the cylinders and return them to the Contractor for installation. Y PART 2 PRODUCTS �- 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: Miller Wire Works, Inc., P.O. Box 610280, Birmingham, Alabama 358261-0280 Telephone: r (205) 592-0341, Facsimile: (205) 592-3725 2.02 COMPONENTS -STANDARD DUTY PARTITIONS k A. Wire mesh partitions, ceiling partitions and gates shall be configured as shown on Drawing. B. Wire Mesh Partitions: Factory -assembled modular interchangeable units that allow expansion without waste of components, complete with all components, accessories, hardware, and fasteners. 1. Style: Full Mesh 1-1/2" Diamond -Intermediate Crimped. 2. Provide fixed sections unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide special width panels to achieve partition dimensions indicated. 4. Panel frames bolted together and to posts at 12 inches (305 mm) on center vertically. 5. Height: As indicated on plans. 6. Finish: Hot -dip galvanized. C. Ceiling Partitions: Factory -assembled modular interchangeable units that allow expansion without waste of components, complete with all components, accessories, hardware, and fasteners. L Style: Full Mesh 1-1/2" Diamond -Intermediate Crimped. 2. Provide fixed sections unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide special width panels to achieve partition dimensions indicated. 4. Panel frames bolted together and to beams at 12 inches (305 mm) on center. Section 10.605 Page 2 5. Finish: Hot -dip galvanized. ames with wire mesh securely clinched through holes in channels; frame D. Wire Mesh Panels: Steel channel fr joints mortise and tenoned. 1. Wire Mesh: 10 gauge steel wire woven into 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diamond mesh. 2. Frame Member: Cold rolled steel "C" -section chan 5�8 inch (16 mm); extend below bottom horizontal to 3. Vertical Frame Members: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) by form feet post. 1/z 13mm). 4. Horizontal Frame Members: 1 inch (25 mm) by 5. Provide intermediate horizontal stiffener bar floor level and as of same tlnosmore thanr60 inches (1830 mm) apart approximately 36 inches (915 mm) ab vertically; wires woven through stiffener bars. E. Hinged Door Sections: Matching Wire Mesh Pane 1z inch 13 mm) channel with 1-1A 1. Hinge Side, Top and Bottom Frame Members: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) by / inch (32 mm) by 1/8 inch (3 mm) flat bar cover. b 3/4 inch (19 mm) by 1/8 inch (3 mm) angle, riveted. 2. Lock Side Frame Members: 1-3/8 inch (35 mm) y 3. Single Door Width: 48 inches ( 1220 mm). 4. Hinges: 3 butt hinges riveted to door panel and frame 5. Lock: Mortise cylinder lock operated by key outside, recessed knob inside. F. Flat Bars: 5/16 (8 mm) thick flat steel bars; provide between each section of partition. 1. Panels over 19 feet 8 inches (5994 mm) High: 3 inches (76 mm) wide posts. to 19 feet 8 inches (5994 mm) High: 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) wide posts. 2. Panels 14 feet 8 inches (4470 mm) h: 1-314 inches (44 mm) wide posts. 3. Panels 12 feet (3657 mm) to 14 feet 8 inches (4470 mm) High: G. Floor Sockets: 1 '/4 " x 1 '/4 " x 2 '/4 " high deductible Iron, (weldable). H. Top Bar: Continuous steel channel stiffening length of partition run. 1. Size: 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) by 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Anchored to panel frames t wiehas4ch (6indicated mm) on the Drawings. inches (7 10 mm) on center. 3. Anchored to adjacent I, Color: color to be selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install lumb, level, and securely anchored to floor and to other structural members where indicated. B. p C. Adjust doors and service windows for smooth, easy operation. End of Section 583/01 TOILET ACCESSORIES K r Section 10.800 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on the Drawings and scheduled herein. B. The type of toilet accessories required includes the following: 1. Paper Towel Dispensers 2. Soap Dispensers 3. Toilet Tissue Dispensers 4. Grab Bars 5. Waste Receptacle C. Mirrors shall be furnished and installed under the work of section 08.800. r" 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's literature for each product. Mark sufficiently to indicate compliance with these specifications. Indicate locations, methods of supporting, methods of anchoring and finishes of each accessory. r A. Products manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable, provided they comply with these Specifications: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Co. ,., 2. Bradley Corporation B. Proprietary references used herein are to serve as guidelines for establishing style, type and quality of accessories to comply with requirements of this project. Other accessories will be considered provided same are, in the opinion of the Architect, equal in weight, finish, size, appearance and dispense same type of goods or 1.04 GENERAL �P A. Use concealed fastenings. B. Verify type of mounting surfaces; provide proper anchors or fasteners to ensure permanent mounting. C. Provide locks where specified; provide same keying throughout for all accessory units. rot D. All mounting locations and heights shall meet the State of Texas Program for the Elimination of Architectural Barriers. 1.05 WARRANTY :-, A. Provide a one (1) year warranty from the Date of Substantial Completion for all materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Products manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable, provided they comply with these Specifications: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Co. ,., 2. Bradley Corporation B. Proprietary references used herein are to serve as guidelines for establishing style, type and quality of accessories to comply with requirements of this project. Other accessories will be considered provided same are, in the opinion of the Architect, equal in weight, finish, size, appearance and dispense same type of goods or 583/01 TOILET ACCESSORIES Section 10.800 Page 2 services. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Toilet Tissue Dispensers: Equivalent to Bobrick #B-2740, surface mounted, multi -roll toilet tissue dispenser. Provide one unit at water closet. B. Soap Dispensers: Equivalent to Bobrick #B4112 Contura Series, surface mounted soap dispenser for liquid soap. Provide 1 unit at each toilet room lavatory. C. Paper Towel Dispensers: Equivalent to Bobrick # 4262 Contura Series, surface mounted paper towel dispenser. Provide one unit as shown on Drawings. D. Grab Bars: Equivalent to Bobrick B-550 (1 1/4" diameter) polished ends, peened gripping surface, concealed mounted with 4 setscrews. Clearance between the grab bar and the wall shall be 1 1/2". Mounting shall be as shown on the Drawings. Furnish in lengths noted on the Drawings. E. Recessed waste receptacle for 4" wall shall be equivalent to type 304 (18-8) #B-3644 by Bobrick, stainless steel welded construction with satin finish. Flange shall be 22 gauge, one piece, seamless construction. Capacity 1.6 cu.ft. keyed like other Bobrick equipment. F. All dispensers shall be located for accessibility in strict accordance with ADA and the State of Texas Elimination of Architectural Barriers Program (TAS). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All accessories shall be located for accessibility in accordance with ADA and the State of Texas Elimination of Architectural Barriers Program B. Install accessories according to manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Install accessories plumb, square, level and true with wall or surfaces. C. Install grab bars where scheduled to support a minimum load of 300 pounds downward pull. D. Frames of recessed accessories shall neatly trim the opening. Gaps and voids between frames and finished walls will not be allowed. Exposed and concealed fastening shall match finish of fixtures and shall be stainless steel, theft -proof type. E. Install concealed anchor plates to wall construction for mounting all accessories. Provide grounds or rough bucks to rigidly secure accessories. F. All controls, dispensers or other operable equipment shall be mounted no higher than 48 inches above the floor. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove all manufacturer's temporary labels or marks of identification. Clean and polish to remove all oil, grease and foreign material. Leave accessories in a neat, orderly and clean condition. End of Section E:- 583 01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. This section includes a single -story, single -span, rigid frame type of pre-engineered metal building of the nominal length, width, eave height, and roof pitch indicated. 1. Exterior walls are covered with field -assembled corrugated wall panels attached to framing members using exposed fasteners. Endwalls are not expandable. 2. Roof system consists of the manufacturer's standard lap -seam insulated roof. B. Included as a part of the building system are structural framing (columns, rafters, struts, purlins, girts); pre -finished roofing and siding; roof and wall insulation; metal flashings; trim; gutters and downspouts; diagonal bracing; fasteners, anchorages and connectors; anchor bolts; overhead coiling doors; pedestrian doors; windows; accessories and other components and materials required for complete and watertight installation. C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Concrete floor and foundations and installation of anchor bolts are specified in Division 3 Section "Concrete Work." 2. Aluminum windows and frames are specified in Division 8 Section "Aluminum Windows". 3. Sealants and caulking are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers". *+ 4. Roof and wall insulation are specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation". 5. Steel doors and frames are specified in Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames". 6. Finish hardware and provisions for master keying are specified in Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware". 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. General: Engineer, design, fabricate and erect the pre-engineered metal building system to withstand loads from winds, gravity, 3 ton overhead crane, structural movement including movement thermally induced, and to resist in-service use conditions that the building will experience, including exposure to the weather, without failure. Design each member to withstand stresses resulting from combinations of loads that produce the maximum allowable stresses in that member as prescribed in MBMA's "Design Practices Manual." 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 2 B. Structural design for the pre-engineered metal building shall be by a Professional Engineer, registered in Texas, employed by the manufacturer, and all shop and erection drawings for the pre-engineered metal building for this project shall bear his seal and signature. C. The engineer employed by the metal building manufacturer shall have no responsibility for foundation design but shall provide the Architect with loads on the foundation from the metal building plus any special requirements of his building system on the construction of the foundation. D. Design Loads: Basic design loads, as well as auxiliary and collateral loads, are indicated on the Drawings. 1. Design each member to withstand stresses resulting from combinations of loads that produce the maximum allowable stresses in that member as prescribed in MBMA's "Design Practices Manual". 2. Basic design loads include live load, wind load, and seismic load, in addition to the dead load. 3. The Metal Building shall be designed to meet or exceed the criteria for 80 mph wind speed, Exposure C, as specified in the 1997 Uniform Building Code. 4. Auxiliary loads include dynamic live loads such as those generated by cranes and material handling equipment. 5. Collateral loads include additional dead loads over and above the weight of the metal building system such as roof -supported mechanical systems and light fixtures. E. Structural Framing and Roof and Siding Panels: Design primary and secondary structural members and exterior covering materials for applicable loads and combinations of loads in accordance with the Metal Building Manufacturers Association's (MBMA) "Design Practices Manual" except that wind loads shall be based on the 1997 Uniform Building Code as called out on the Drawings and the roof live load of 20 psf shall be non-reducible. F. Structural Steel: Comply with the American Institute of Steel Constructions's (AISC) "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings' for design requirements and allowable stresses. G. Light Gage Steel: Comply with the American Iron and Steel Institute's (AISI) "Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" and Design of Light Gage Steel Diaphragms" for design requirements and allowable stresses. H. Welded Connections: Comply with the American Welding Society's (AWS) "Standard Code for Are and Gas Welding in Building Construction" for welding Procedures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data consisting of metal building system manufacturer's product information for building components and accessories. g; 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 3 C. Shop drawings for metal building structural framing system, roofing and siding panels, and other metal building system components and accessories that are not fully detailed or dimensioned in manufacturer's product data. 1. Structural Framing: Furnish complete erection drawings prepared by or under the supervision of a professional engineer legally authorized to practice in Texas. Include details showing fabrication and assembly of the metal building system. Show anchor bolts settings and sidewall, end wall, and roof framing. Include transverse cross-sections. 2. Crane girders and supports: Provide layout of crane girders, beam size, channel size, connections, center to center distance of the rails, and girders. t 3. Roofing and Siding Panels: Provide layouts of panels on walls and roofs, details of edge conditions, joints, corners, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings closures, and special details. Include transverse cross-sections. 4. Building Accessory Components: Provide details of metal building accessory components to clearly indicate methods of installation including the following: !' a. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide layouts at 1/4 -inch scale. Provide details of gutters, downspouts, and other sheet metal accessories at not less than 1-1/2 inch scale showing profiles, methods of joining, and anchorages. D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts or chips showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for metal roofing and siding panels with factory -applied finishes. E. Samples for verification purposes of roofing and siding panels. Provide sample panels 12 -inch long by actual panel width, in the profile, style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips, battens, fasteners, closures, and other panel accessories. F. Installer certificates signed by the metal building manufacturer certifying that the installer complies with requirements included under the "Quality Assurance" Article. In addition, after erection of the metal building components, a registered Professional Engineer with the manufacturer shall visit the site and give written certification that the erection is in accordance with the manufacturer's standards and instructions. G. Professional engineer's certificate prepared and signed by a Professional Engineer, legally authorized to practice in Texas, verifying that the structural framing and covering panels meet indicated loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction. Include therewith a listing of design loads, load combinations and other criteria upon which the design was based. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer to erect the pre-engineered metal building who has specialized in the erection and installation of types of metal buildings systems similar to that required for this project and who is certified in writing by the metal building system manufacturer as qualified for erection of the manufacturer's products. 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 4 B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide a pre-engineered metal building manufactured by a firm experienced in manufacturing metal buildings systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain the metal building system components, including structural framing, wall and roof covering, and accessory components, from one source from a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. D. Design Criteria: The Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of the pre-engineered metal building. Metal building systems having equal characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver prefabricated components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package wall and roof panels for protection against transportation damage. B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall and roof covering panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weather tight ventilated covering. Store metal wall and roof panels so that water accumulations will drain freely. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage. 1.07 WARRANTY: A. Roofing and Siding Panel Finish Warranty: Furnish the roofing and siding panel manufacturer's written warranty, covering failure of the factory -applied exterior finish on metal wall and roof panels within the warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. Warranty period for factory -applied exterior finishes on wall and roof panels is 20 years after the date of Substantial Completion. 2. The Metal Building System and accessories shall be warranted for a one year period beginning on the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS: A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish at least 5 percent over required amount of nuts, bolts, screws, washers, and other required fasteners for each metal building. Pack in cartons labeled to identify the contents and store on the site where directed. 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 5 1.09 COORDINATION: A. The General (Prime) Contractor and the Metal Building Contractor shall have a complete understanding as to the furnishing of their respective items of construction to avoid duplication or omissions in their work. Also there shall be the fullest cooperation between the aforementioned and the work of other trades. B. PART 2 PRODUCTS ems, 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Shall be subject to compliance with requirements as outlined above under "Quality Assurance". The dimensions, details and materials specified herein and shown on the Drawings are based on those manufactured by the Star Building Systems Division of H. H. Robertson. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 2.02 MATERIALS: A. Hot -Rolled Structural Steel Shapes: Comply with ASTM A 36 or A 529. B. Steel Tubing or Pipe: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, ASTM A 501, or ASTM A 53. _ C. Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: Provide 50,000 psi minimum yield strength. Comply with ASTM A 570, or ASTM A 572. D. Steel Members Fabricated by Cold Forming: Comply with ASTM A 607, Grade 55. E. Cold -Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 366 or ASTM A 568. F. Hot -rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A 568 or ASTM A 569. G. Structural Quality Zinc -coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Comply with ASTM A 446 with G90 coating complying with ASTM A 525. Grade to suit manufacturer's standards. H. Bolts for Structural Framing: Comply with ASTM A 307 or ASTM A 325 as necessary for design loads and connection details. 1. Thermal Insulation: Glass fiber blanket insulation, complying with ASTM C 991, of 0.6 lb per cu. ft. density, 3" thickness as indicated, with UL flame spread classification of 25 or less, and 2 inch wide continuous vapor -tight edge tabs. 1. Fiberglass insulation facings shall be laminated on one side with vinyl film facing. .' 2. Retainer Strips: 26 -gage (0.0179 -inch) formed galvanized steel retainer clips colored to match the insulation facing. 3. For roof installation, furnish patented Roll Runner System including steel banding support system. 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 6 Paint and Coating Materials: Comply with performance requirements of the federal specifications indicated. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, compliance with compositional requirements of federal specifications indicated is not required. 1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead-free, abrasion -resistant, rust -inhibitive primer selected by the manufacturer for compatibility with substrates with types of alkyd finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. Comply with FS TT -P-86, Types I, II, or III. 2. Shop Primer for Galvanized Metal Surfaces: Zinc dust -zinc oxide primer selected by the manufacturer for compatibility with substrate. Comply with FS TT -P-641. 2.03 STRUCTURAL FRAMING: A. Rigid Frames: Fabricate from hot -rolled structural steel shapes. Provide factory -welded, shop -painted, built-up "I -beam" -shape or open -web -type frames consisting of tapered or parallel flange beams and tapered columns. Furnish frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field -bolted assembly. Provide length of span and spacing of frames indicated. Slight variations in length of span and frame spacing may be acceptable if necessary to meet manufacturer's standard. B. Secondary Framing: Provide the following secondary framing members: 1. Roof Purlins, Side Wall and End Wall Girts: "C%or "Z" -shaped sections fabricated from shop -painted roll -formed steel. Purlin spacers shall be fabricated from cold -formed galvanized steel sections. 2. Eave Struts: Unequal flange "C" -shaped sections formed to provide adequate backup for both wall and roof panels. Fabricate from shop -painted roll -formed steel. 3. Flange and Sag Bracing: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inch angles fabricated from 16 -gage (0.0598 -inch) shop -painted roll -formed steel. 4. Base or Sill Angles: Fabricate from 14 -gage (0.0747 -inch) cold -formed galvanized steel sections. Secondary endwall structural members, except columns and beams, shall be the manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from 14 -gage (0.0747 -inch) cold -formed galvanized steel. C. Wind Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing using threaded steel rods; comply with ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 572, Grade D. Locate bracing only where indicated. D. Bolts: Provide shop -painted bolts except when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofing and siding panels. Provide zinc -plated or cadmium -plated bolts when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofing and siding panels. s.e k 583 01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 7 E. Shop Painting: Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other matter precluding paint bond. Follow procedures of SSPC-SP3 for power -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP7 P for brush-off blast cleaning, and SSPC-SP1 for solvent cleaning. 1. Prime structural steel primary and secondary framing members with the manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive primer. 2. Prime galvanized members, after phosphoric acid pretreatment, with manufacturer's standard zinc dust -zinc oxide primer. o 2.04 ROOFING PANELS: 0"R A. The ribbed roof panel shall be precision roll -formed to provide 36" net coverage from minimum 24- gage, 80,000 PSI minimum yield steel. The panels shall have 11/8" high major ribs at 12" o.c. with two minor ribs symmetrically spaced between the major ribs. Panel sidelaps shall be formed by ,.. lapping major ribs at the panel edges. The underlapping rib shall have full bearing legs to support the sidelap. Panel end splices shall be over a structural member and shall be a 6" minimum lap. -- Panels shall be longest length possible to minimize endlaps. Perimeter trim, ridge panel and transition flashing will be provided as required for a weather tight installation. Fastener spacing and type to be determined manufacturer's standard offering. Match existing profile. Form panels of minimum 24 -gage (0.0239 -inch), Grade C, factory -painted steel sheets. Color to be approved by architect. 2.05 WALL PANELS: A. Corrugated Roll Formed: Precision roll -formed minimum 26 gage steel (ASTM A 446, Grade D; minimum Fy of 55,000 psi, with ASTM A 525 G90 zinc coating) panels with 36" wide net coverage, four (4) 1-1/8" high major corrugations at 12" centers, two (2) minor ribs located symmetrically between major ribs, and support bearing leg on one (1) lap corrugation to support panels at sidelaps. Provide in manufacturer's maximum length panels to minimize number of end joints, complete with all required trim, flashings, panel closures, and other components required for complete weather tight installation. Product shall be equal to "DuraRib" wall panels as manufactured by Star Building Systems. Form panels of minimum 24 -gage (0.0239 -inch), Grade C, factory -painted steel sheet. Color to be approved by architect. 2.06 PANEL FINISHES: A. Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard baked -on siliconized polyester finish in "Starcote" Antique White over galvanized finish. B. Wall Panels: Manufacturer's standard baked -on siliconized polyester finish in "Starcote" color as selected by the Architect. Finish procedure steps to be as follows: 1. Factory pre-treatment. 2. Corrosive (rust) inhibitive primer. 3. "Starcote" color finish; 1.0 mil dry film thickness (plus or minus 0.2 mil), in color selected, for weather side of wall panels and 0.5 mil dry film thickness (plus or minus 0.1 mil) white color wash coat on interior surface of wall panels. 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 8 4. Baking in multi -stage baking oven. 5. Uniform wax coating for protection during transit and handling, and lubrication during roll -forming. 2.07 PANEL FASTENERS: A. Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets, self-locking bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design load. — 1. Provide metal-backed neoprene washers under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of panels. _ 2. Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners for exterior application and galvanized or cadmium -plated fasteners for interior applications. 3. Locate and space fastenings in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer. 4. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of roofing or siding sheets by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating. 2.08 PANEL ACCESSORIES: A. Provide the following sheet metal accessories factory -formed of the same material in the same finish as roof and wall panels: 1. Flashings. 2. Closers. 3. Fillers. 4. Metal Expansion joints. 5. Ridge covers. 6. Fascias. B. Flexible Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded cellular rubber, self -extinguishing flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of roofing and siding sheets. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. C. Sealing Tape: Pressure -sensitive 100 percent solids grey polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non -sag, nontoxic, non -staining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. D. Joint Sealant: One -part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone rubber sealant as recommended by the building manufacturer. i 593/0 tion 13.122 Page 9 E. Baked Enamel Finish: Provide the manufacturer's standard shop applied baked enamel finish to galvanized steel roof and wall panels, and related trim and accessory elements. For roofing and coat on exterior facings and manufacturer's standard wash coat on revers face. siding, apply finish 1. Clean galvanized steel with an alkaline compound, then treat with a zinc phosphate conversion coating, and seal with a chromic acid rinse. 2. Apply baked -on thermo-setting modified acrylic enamel to pretreated steel sheets, in one or more coats as standard with the manufacturer to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. 3. Color: As selected by the architect from the manufacturer's standard colors. 2.09 PERSONNEL DOORS A. Exterior hollow metal doors and frames by building supplier, meeting the requirements of Section 08.150. Finish hardware shall not be furnished under this section. 2.10 SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES: A. General: Provide coated steel sheet metal accessories with coated steel roofing and siding panels. eine B. Gutters: Form in 8 -foot -long sections, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Size in accordance with SMACNA. Join sections with riveted and soldered or rot joints. Provide expansion -type slip joint at center of runs. Furnish gutter supports spaced 36 inches on center, constructed of same metal as gutters. Provide bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball strainers at outlets. Finish to match roof fascia and rake. C. Downspouts: Form in 10 -foot -long sections, complete with elbows and offsets. Join sections with rs designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away 1 -1/2 -inch telescoping joints. Provide fastene from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 5 feet on center in between. �.. Finish to match wall panels. 2.11 FABRICATION: A. General: Design prefabricated components and necessary field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly and disassembly. 1. Fabricate components in such a manner that once assembled, they may be disassembled, repackaged, and reassembled with a minimum amount of labor. 2. Clearly and legibly mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals. B. Structural Framing: Shop -fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with base plates, bearing plates, and other plates required for erection, welded in place. Provide holes for anchoring or connections shop -drilled or punched to template dimensions. +* 1. Shop Connections: Provide power riveted, bolted, or welded shop connections. r 583/01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 10 2. Field Connections: Provide bolted field connections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION: A. Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level base plates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures. Use a non -shrinking grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than 7 days after placement. B. Purlins and Girts: Provide rake or gable purlins with tight -fitting closure channels and fascias. Locate and space wall girts to suit door and window arrangements and heights. Secure purlins and girts to structural framing and hold rigidly to a straight line by sag rods. C. Bracing: Provide diagonal rod or angle bracing in roof and sidewalls as indicated. 1. Movement -resisting frames may be used in lieu of sidewall rod bracing, to suit manufacturer's standards. 2. Where diaphragm strength of roof or wall covering is adequate to resist wind forces, rod or angle bracing will not be required. D. Framed Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to building structural frame. 3.02 ROOFING AND SIDING: A. General: Arrange and nest sidelap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. Protect factory finishes from damage. Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Provide weatherseal under ridge cap. Flash and seal roof panels at eave and rake with rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather. B. Roof Sheets: Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of ribbed or fluted roof sheets and between roof sheets and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to clean, dry surface of the weather side of fastenings on end laps, and on side laps of corrugated nesting -type, ribbed, or fluted panels and elsewhere as needed to make roof sheets weatherproof to driving rains. C. Wall Sheets: Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal sill member and top of concrete and elsewhere as necessary for waterproofing. Handle and apply sealant and backup in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations. 583 01 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Section 13.122 Page 11 1. Align bottom of wall panels and fasten panels with blind rivets, bolts, or self -tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self -tapping screws. Fasten window and door frames with machine screws or bolts. When building height requires two rows of panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over wall panels at eave height. », 2. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 3. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Install gutters, downspouts, louvers, and other sheet metal accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting. Adjust operating mechanism for precise operation. E. Thermal Insulation: Install insulation concurrently with installation of roof panels in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths with both sets of tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor barrier. 1. Roof Installation: The fiber glass blanket roof insulation shall be installed using the patented Roll Runner Insulation System, including the steel banding support system. Provide two rows of band iron in each purlin bay and extend one run at right angles to the purlins directly over each roof beam. Band iron shall be stretched tight, wrapped around end wall eave beams and crimped together with special joining tab. The insulation shall be pulled taut over the purlins and spacer blocks installed before attaching the roof panels. The facing shall face toward the interior of the building. 2. Wall Installation: The fiber glass blanket wall insulation shall be pulled taut over the girts before attaching the wall panels. The facing shall face toward the interior of the building. Tabs shall be sealed in accordance with standard accepted practices to effect a continuous vapor barrier. F. Overhead Coiling Doors: Set doors and operating equipment with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold stops, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Adjust moving hardware for proper operation. G. Cleaning and Touch -Up: Clean component surfaces of matter that could preclude paint bond. Touch up abrasions, marks, skips, or other defects to shop -primed surfaces with same type material as shop primer. END OF SECTION 13.122 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. 0 C. V. ` t.1t ENDRAN �i '• 33870 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 1 t, PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. This specification covers the Manufacturer's requirements for the mechanical design, fabrication, testing, inspection, and shipment of one single girder, top running bridge and under hung trolley, "^ electrically powered, pendant controlled, overhead traveling bridge crane complete with auxiliary equipment. The bridge crane shall be installed at the Equipment Operations Building for the City of Lubbock, Water Utilities Department, Lubbock, Texas. B. Design should be based on a plant elevation of 3200 feet above mean sea level, maximum ambient temperature of 104° F and minimum of 40° F with +40° F being used as the minimum temperature for equipment installed indoors. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The Contractor and/or Manufacturer shall include only standard equipment of his own manufacture and of other reliable established manufacturers in connection with this installation. The equipment shall be the product of a nationally recognized manufacturer of the type of equipment who has had one or more similar installations now in operation for a period of at least ten (10) years. B. Only a licensed Contractor currently and regularly installing cranes shall perform this work. C. The materials shall be as specified herein. Material not definitely specified shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial practice. Material shall be free from all defects and imperfections that may affect the finished product. All parts shall be new and unused. D. Structural steel shall be of good commercial quality conforming to ASTM specifications designation A36 or shall be an accepted type for the purpose for which the steel is to be used or for the operations to be performed. E. All welding designs and procedures shall conform to the current issue of AWA D14.1, "Specification for Welding Industrial and Mill Cranes." 1.04 SUBMITTALS: �-+ A. Submit copies of Product Information on all materials and equipment. B. Submit copies for Shop Drawings showing size, location, weights and any other information related to Bridge Cranes, Hoists and Trolleys. C. Submit copies of materials specification with chemical and physical properties of all major components. 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION D. The crane shall be in accordance with Specification 74 (Revised 1999) of the Crane Manufacturers Association of America, Inc., "Specifications for Top Running and Under Running Single Girder Electric Traveling Cranes" utilizing under running trolley hoist unless stated otherwise herein. Where no preference is shown, manufacturer's standard will be satisfactory. E. All mechanical parts of the crane system shall be designed to have a minimum factor of safety of five (5) (with capacity load) based on the ultimate strength of the material used. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SCOPE OF MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall supply an overhead bridge crane complete with, but not limited to, the following components: Cranes, Trolleys, Hoists, Motors, Controls, Runway Conductors, Runway Rails (401b. ASCE), Rail Stops, Splices and Clamps, Erection, Special Tools, and Touch-up Paint. 2.02 BRIDGE DETAILS A. The bridge structure comprising the girders, end trucks and drive unit, shall be designed and fabricated as a complete integral structure with only such parts removable as required to facilitate the shipping, erection, or maintenance of equipment. B. The crane girders shall be welded structural steel box sections, wide flange beams, standard I -beams, reinforced beams or sections fabricated from structural plates and shapes. The manufacturer shall specify the type and the construction to be furnished. Camber and sweep should be measured by the manufacturer prior to shipment. C. The girders shall be attached to the end trucks in such a manner as to positively insure the necessary rigid connection between the two. D. End trucks shall be equipped with double flanged wheels with treads accurately machined or ground to size in pairs. Wheels shall be steel with hardened threads, or graphite impregnated cast iron, designed to carry the maximum rated load under normal conditions without undue wear. Proper clearance shall be allowed between the wheel flanges and the rail head. The wheel base of the end trucks shall be properly proportioned to the span. No open, grease lubricated gearing on bridge or trolley drives. The bridge end trucks shall be constructed of structural steel forming a box section, heavily reinforced to provide a rigid structure. Safety stops shall be provided to prevent excessive drop in case of axle failure. Substantial guards shall be provided in front of each wheel and shall project below the top of the runway rail. The bridge trucks shall be provided with extended bumpers at each end to engage stops on the crane runway. E. The crane shall be driven by two (2) electric motors (CMAA drive arrangement No. A-4) connected to self-contained, self-lubricating gear reducer units and equipped with solenoid operated brakes. Limit switches shall de -energize the drive motors near both ends of the crane runway. 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 3 BRIDGE END TRUCK F. The crane bridge shall be carried on end trucks designed to carry the rated load when lifted at one end of the crane bridge. The wheel base of the end truck shall be 1/7 of the span or greater. G. End trucks may be of the rotating axle type as specified by the crane manufacturer. H. The bridge end trucks should be constructed of structural steel or other suitable material. Provision shall be made to prevent the end truck from dropping more than one inch in case of axle failure. Guards shall be provided in front of each outside wheel and shall project below the top of the runway rail. 2.03 TROLLEY FRAMES The trolley frame shall be constructed of structural steel and shall be designed to transmit the load to the bridge rails without deflection which will impair functional operation of machinery. Provision should be made to prevent a drop of more than one inch in case of axle failure. A. w_ B 2.04 A. a> B. C. u _ 2.05 + A. en B. C. c D. E. BRIDGE RAILS All bridge rails shall be of first quality and conform to all requirements set forth in the specifications of the ASCE, ARA, AREA or any other commercial rolled sections with equivalent specifications. Bridge rails shall be joined by standard joint bars or welded. The ends of non -welded sections shall be square and sections joined without opening between ends. Provision shall be made to prevent creeping of the bridge rails. Bridge rails shall be securely fastened in place to maintain center distance of rails. RUNWAY CONDUCTORS The runway conductors shall be installed in accordance with Article 610 of the National Electric Code and comply with all applicable codes. Contact conductors shall be guarded in a manner that persons cannot inadvertently touch energized current -carrying parts. Flexible conductor systems shall be designed and installed in a manner to minimize the effects of flexing, cable tension, and abrasion. The runway conductors shall be festooned type suitable for use. The conductors shall have sufficient ampacity to carry the required current to the crane, or cranes, when operating with rated load. The conductor ratings shall be selected in accordance with Article 610 of the National Electrical Code. The nominal runway conductor supply system voltage, actual input tap voltage, and runway conductor voltage drops shall result in crane motor voltage tolerances per Section 5.13 (Voltage Drops) of CMAA Specification, #74. 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 4 HOIST DETAILS F. Drum and sheaves shall be as recommended in the Crane Manufacturers Association of America Specification 74. Drum and sheaves shall be accurately machined and smoothly finished. Grooving dimensions and tolerances shall be within standards as recommended by the wire rope manufacturer for maximum rope lift. Drum shall be grooved and shall be of sufficient size to maintain two wraps on the drum when the hook is in the lowest position. No over -wrapping of cable on drum will be permitted. Hoist is to be double reeved for true vertical lift. G. Load breaking in compliance with C.M.A.A. Specification 74, Section 4 shall be used. H. Hoist shall have a primary two position geared type limit switch with adjustable upper and lower limits, and a secondary upper paddle limit switch as a back-up system. I. Hoisting rope shall be a 6 x 37 strand improved plow steel. The hoisting rope shall be of proper design and construction for crane service, The rated capacity load plus the load block weight divided by the number of parts of rope shall not exceed 20 percent of the published breaking strength of the rope. J. Load -Blocks: The load block frame shall be of steel construction. A drop forged steel hook shall be supported on a ball or roller thrust bearing. The hook shall rotate freely on this bearing. The hook shall be equipped with a latch. 2.06 CONTROLS A. All movements of the crane shall be controlled from the floor via a festooned pendant control box. B. A separate, non -electrical, cable shall support the pendant control box. A green wire in the control cable shall ground the control box to the bridge. C. A bridge mounted track and trolley system shall be provided to allow movement of the pendant control along the length of the bridge. D. Control circuits shall be 120 volts AC. Control transformers shall be liberally sized for all control functions. E. Mainline contactor pushbuttons shall be provided on the pendant to completely de -energize the crane. F. A warning horn shall be provided on the crane with the actuating pushbutton located on the pendant. 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 5 G. The pendant shall have an eight (8) button control. 1. Power - On 2. Power - Off 3. Hoist - Up 4. Hoist - Down 5. Trolley - West 6. Trolley - East 7. Bridge - North 8. Bridge - South 2.07 BUMPERS A. The bridge bumpers shall be capable of stopping the crane (not including the lifted load) at an average rate of deceleration not to exceed C.M.A.A. requirements. B. The trolley bumpers shall be capable of stopping the trolley (not including the lifted load) at an „ average rate of deceleration not to be exceeded by C.M.A.A. requirements. 2.08 CRANE RAILS A. Runway rails shall be ASTM A759 for crane service. B. Runway rails shall be ASCE 40 pound/yard light rails. The runway rails shall be straight, parallel, !'* level, and at the same elevation. C. Rails shall be arranged so that joints on opposite runway beams will be staggered with respect to each other and with respect to the wheel base of the crane. Rail joints shall not coincide with runway beam splices. D. Runway rails should be furnished in standard lengths with one short piece on each side to complete a run. The short piece should not be less than 10'-0" long. E. Runway rails shall have bolted splices with tight joints (finished by milling or grinding) and special �^^* rail drilling and joint bar hole punching. Rail separation at joints should not exceed 1/16". 2.09 CRANE STOPS A. Crane stops shall be designed by the crane manufacturer for all lateral forces. B. Stops to be located at each end of crane runway and field verified for exact location. h. 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 6 C. Stops to be located so as to stop the Bridge Crane structure from hitting any existing or new structure at each end of runway. 2.10 LUBRICATION A. A manufacturers standard maintenance platform shall be provided on the cranes for lubricating parts not sealed. 2.11 PAINTING A. All surface preparation, prime, and finish coat painting shall be by the Contractor, prior to shipment. All structural members shall be given a commercial sandblast (SP -6) and one coat of iron oxide primer (P-7). All structural and mechanical components shall be given one finish coat of exterior gloss alkyd enamel. B. The finish coat color shall be Manufacturer standard. The load block, hook, and pendant shall be painted safety yellow. C. Manufacturer shall supply, with the crane, sufficient quantity of finish coat paint for field touch-up by Contractor after field erection and assembly. D. The rated load capacity of the crane shall be indicated on each side of the crane bridge in easily read figures painted on by the Manufacturer. The hoist unit shall have its rated capacity marked on the bottom block. In addition, capacity labels should be marked on the hoist body. 2.12 SHOP TESTS A. Manufacturer shall perform his standard, no load running, shop test and inspection on each unit. 2.13 FIELD TEST A. After installation, each bridge crane shall be put through all of its operations using 125% of normal operating load, in the presence of the crane Manufacturer's Representative, Project Contractor and the Architect. General Contractor will furnish weights and power for tests. Visual inspection will be made for proper installation, operating, alignment and lubrication. B. Locate the bridge crane over column supports during the test. 2.14 NAMEPLATE A. Manufacturer shall provide a permanent corrosion resistant metal nameplate for each major component. The applicable items as a minimum listed below shall be included on each nameplate: 1. Manufacturer's Item Number 2. Manufacturer's Name 3. Manufacturer's Size and Type 4. Serial Number s r 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 7 5. Design Capacity 6. Design Speed 7. Design Horsepower 2.15 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT A. All equipment shall be protected to withstand outside storage at the job site for at least three months. Contractor shall make every effort possible to store equipment inside and protect it from outside elements. The equipment covered by this specification shall be shipped in assembled sections of convenient size. The crane shall be taken apart only to the extent necessary for shipment and all parts shall be carefully match -marked. All shipping units shall be securely crated or provided with skids. The manufacturer shall attach a permanent corrosion -resistant tag on the outside of each separately shipped item showing item number, purchase order number, and identification of contents. B. Manufacturer shall indicate the degree of dismantling necessary for shipment and amount of field assembly that will be required. C. The minimum acceptable preparation shall consist of: 1. Clean all surfaces. All exposed faces of finished parts of machinery shall be coated with a suitable rust preventative. 2. All internal surfaces of the equipment shall be flushed with a suitable rust preventative. 3. All miscellaneous openings shall be sealed with the manufacturer's standard metal or plastic closures. 2.16 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Number Of Bridge Cranes Required One (1) B. Rated Capacity 3 Tons C. Length Of Runway (Approximate) (Verify) 100'-0" D. Span Centerline -to -Centerline Of Rails (Verify) E. Total Height From Floor To Top of Runway Rail (Verify) F. Hook Travel G. Size of Runway Rail H. Operation I. Atmosphere (area classification) 45'-2" 14'-11 1/2" To Floor Level 40 lb. ASCE Indoor Non -hazardous 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 8 J. Type of Material To Be Handled Electrical and Mechanical Equipment K. Service Moderate Service L. Service Classification CMAA Class C M. Type of Crane Top Running - Single Girder, Dual Drive N. Type of Trolley Under Running O. Number of Trolleys/Hoists One (1) P. Trolley Rated Capacity 3 Tons Q. End Trucks Type Enclosed Gearing R. Control (All Operations) Floor Operated Pendant Control Pushbutton Station 1. Bridge One (1) Speed Magnetic 2. Trolley One (1) Speed Magnetic 3. Hoist One (1) Speed Magnetic S. Pendant Elevation (To Centerline) Y-6" (Approximate) above F.F. T. Power: 460 V, 3 Phase, 60 Hz AC 1. Bridge Electric Motor With Motor Brake 2. Trolley Electric Motor With Brake 3. Hoist Electric Motor With Brake U. Speeds (Feet per Minute): 1. Bridge 60 fpm 2. Trolley 50 fpm 3. Hoist 16 fpm V. Safety Control Control Voltage at Pendant shall be 110 V W. Safety Factor Not Less Then Five (5) X. Bridge Overload Field Tested to 125% Nominal by Manufacturer Y. Construction Bolted or Welded Steel 583/01 BRIDGE CRANE Section 14.470 Page 9 Z Conductors: p. 1. Main Runway Insulated Bar, Copper r■• 2. Cross Bridge Festooned Cable AA. Collectors Shoe Type, Tandam, Heavy Duty END OF SECTION 14.470 This section prepared by RTR Engineers, Inc. h .• " _ f �_ 6a * .../ Si.1RENDRAti t ................... .a 338 6 A . �.�. �1 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SPECIAL NOTE A. The Architectural and Structural Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical and electrical plans, and shall be complied with in every .+ respect. All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is on file at the Architect's office, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of drawings. B. Where the Supplementary General Conditions conflict with the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern. 1.02 CHECKING DOCUMENTS A. Thedrawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.03 GENERAL A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required. D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and fmishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact r, locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 2 G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. O. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" & "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 3 1.04 DIMENSIONS A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.05 INSPECTION OF SITE A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.06 ELECTRICAL WIRING eye A. All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. F: B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method e� of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. 1.07 MOTORS AND CONTROLS A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 15 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. C. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. 1.08 PROGRESS OF WORK A. The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner. Fai GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 4 1.09 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.10 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding. C. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. 1.11 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory -- construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. Within 30 days of being awarded the Contract for any section or sections of the work under this heading, the Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. If the material is not submitted within 30 days of the contract signing, the Contractor shall furnish the specified materials. C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. �** GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 5 MIA 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract F" documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. C. Shop drawings submitted_ shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. 1.13 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS r A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. 1.14 PERMITS, FEES, ETC A. The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including sewer, water, gas and electric services as applicable. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications. 1.15 TESTING A. The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 6 1.16 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.17 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install", and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.18 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a fmished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from the Architect, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. 1.19 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 7 7. Control devices and details B. Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc. C. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish. D. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling r1 materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. E. All items specified under Divisions 15 and 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. b 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of ' this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence ." to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other trades before bidding. B. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. C. The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. D. Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under the respective section with all trades. E. In all spaces where new work under Division 15 and 16 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All r cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. F. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. 1.21 PAINTING A. Painting for Divisions 15 and 16 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous metal. 3. Paint all exposed sheet metal. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 8 4. Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. Surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. B. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or insulation surface is visible. 1.22 SEALING A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors by packing fire resistant rope and fire resistant cement. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.23 ACCESS PANELS A. Wherever mechanical and/or electrical equipment is installed and where future access is required through either walls or ceilings and such cannot be obtained through the removable ceiling or through other means, the Contractor shall provide Milcor Style "M" access doors at least 12 inches by 12 inches in size or larger if required for access. Provide access doors for all fire dampers, smoke dampers, valves, etc. 1.24 USE OF SYSTEMS A. It is considered that it will be necessary to operate the mechanical systems to provide heating and ventilation in portions of the building that are enclosed. As systems or portions of systems become operable, they shall be operated as required to maintain habitable conditions in enclosed portions of the building that are still under construction and portions that are fully complete as may be required to properly protect installed piping, equipment and finishes. B. In order to provide protection to ducts, plenums, etc. install temporary filters over or in return air openings until all fmished painting is completed. Protect supply outlets, coils, etc. as necessary in each case. C. Except for operation of cooling equipment to prove its performance and to adjust and balance the systems, that equipment will not be operated for comfort of construction workers. D. During warm weather the Contractor shall arrange for the operation of systems to supply 100 percent outside air. The systems controls shall be reset to their normal cycle of operation in each case during the times that heating is required and when the cooling equipment is operated. E. Immediately prior to the time that the systems are to be accepted by the Owner, each system shall be carefully examined and if ductwork is dirty, it shall be carefully cleaned by men skilled in that type of work. All filters shall be put in first class condition by replacement of filters and/or other procedures as directed. F. The use of the equipment for maintaining environmental and/or protective temperature conditions shall in no way constitute acceptance of that equipment and the connected piping, ducts, insulation, finishes, etc. by the Owner. Furthermore, it shall in no way shorten the guarantee period hereinafter specified. The Contractor shall either secure extended warranties from the vendors of equipment or shall purchase insurance to provide proper coverage on the equipment through the guarantee period and shall file with the Architect substantiating affidavits from equipment manufacturers or a copy of the insurance policy covering the equipment through the guarantee period. The personal underwriting of the Contractor for equipment manufacturers' warranties is not acceptable, but his personal underwriting of piping, ductwork, insulation and associated materials is acceptable subject to the provisions of the contract. G. The Contractor shall provide such labor as may be required in the operation of the systems and shall pay all costs. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 9 1.25 OWNERS OCCUPANCY A. It shall be understood that the building in which the work is to be done is a necessary part of the Owner's operation, and shall continue in use throughout the construction period without interruption. Take all precautions required by the Owner for the protection of his equipment and property. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the owner in scheduling areas in which work is permitted. Owners schedule will govern. 1.26 SCHEDULE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall program his work in such manner as to interfere as little as possible with the normal ' routine of the Owner. It must be understood that the Owner will continue to function throughout the construction period. All water, electrical and sanitary facilities shall therefore be continued in operation with a !? minimum of interruption and the Contractor shall make any temporary connections necessary to comply with y this requirement. 1.27 WORKING TIME A. Where new connections are to be made into existing lines, present lines must be relocated or rerouted, present equipment items relocated or other work accomplished that would affect the operation of the present building, the work shall be carried on at such times as to cause a minimum of interference with the normal operation of that building. In certain cases the work may be accomplished during normal working hours during certain designated seasons or times of the year. In other cases the work may have to be executed during times of the day outside of the normal working period, on holidays, etc. Each individual case presents a separate decision as to the time during which it shall be performed. The Contractor involved shall present each case to the Architect for his decision, which will be made after due consultation with the Owner. No additional compensation for overtime will be granted for compliance with these requirements. 1.28 EXISTING WASTE AND DRAIN LINE A. Special care and precaution shall be used where existing waste or drain lines are to be opened. The following procedure shall be adhered to at all times when opening existing waste or drain lines: Before opening, prepare a solution of one part household bleach to nine parts water. At every inlet to the affected piping run, add 2 gallons of the solution to flush out the piping. Any worker who has cuts or open skin breaks shall be prevented from working with the waste or drain piping. Workers shall wear approved face shields, gloves, aprons, boots, etc. for protection. In addition, existing piping shall be thoroughly washed inside and out with bleach solution prior to handling by unprotected persons. The safety director or Owner's representative shall be notified prior to commencing work on any existing waste or drain lines. 1.29 SALVAGE MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment, piping, duct, grilles, conduit, wire, junction boxes, light fixtures and other items associated with the mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems where shown on the drawings. Where such items are exposed to view or uncovered by any cutting or removal of general n construction and has no continuing function (as determined by the Architect), they shall be removed by the contractor under the section in which the item normally falls. B. Existing items (see above) where concealed in/above construction which is not disturbed, abandon in place. Plug, cap, disconnect or otherwise render harmless all such items. i GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page 10 C. All items or materials removed from the project shall be made available for the Owner's inspection. The Owner retains the option to claim any item or material. Contractor shall deliver any claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated by the Owner. All item not claimed become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site. 1.30 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.31 MARKING OF PIPE A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows _ shall be used to indicate direction of flow. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers. C. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (" Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 '/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 1.32 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING: A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF -1, EF -2, etc.; AC Units will be AC -1, AC -2, etc. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3 -ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1.35 A. 1.36 A. r GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page l l 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. AC Units 5. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. OPERATING MANUALS Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 8. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. GUARANTEE Unless a longer period is specified elsewhere, the contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate "as built" drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. END OF SECTION 1.33 A. 1.34 A. B. 1.35 A. 1.36 A. r GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL Section 15.010 Page l l 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. AC Units 5. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. OPERATING MANUALS Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 8. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. GUARANTEE Unless a longer period is specified elsewhere, the contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate "as built" drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. END OF SECTION *^* SITE UTILITIES Section 15.110 Page 1 .■* PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE A. Perform all layout, trenching, excavation, backfill, shoring and similar work and provide and install all materials and appurtenances necessary for the installation and final connection of all utilities. 1.04 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Prior to beginning work, manually locate and stake all utility lines existing at the site. B. The Contractor shall not rely solely on the scale drawings in determining the scope of the work. C. The drawings are not certified surveys and are not guaranteed for accuracy of location or elevation of existing ■*�+ lines or completeness. Before bidding, each bidder shall by personal examination of the project satisfy himself as to the existing conditions which prevail. D. Reasonable differences in actual jobsite dimensions and the drawings shall not be considered justification for a change in the contract sum. E. Interruptions: Conduct operations to minimize service outages. When interruptions is unavoidable, schedule the interruption in consultation with the Architect and Owner to occur at a time of least demand for the utility. Notify the Owner of requested interruption time at least 24 hours in advance of outage. F. Disconnections: The Contractor shall arrange with the City for disconnections indicated on the drawings. Where not so indicated provide disconnections at appropriate locations as selected by the Contractor to facilitate his work. Cap terminal ends of active utility branches. Pay any charges levied by the City for these services. w G. Utilities to Remain: Protect from damage due to construction operations. Repair or replace portions so damaged as directed by the Architect. H. Utilities Abandoned In Place: Outside the limits of construction on the site, except as specified above, abandon in place all disconnected utility lines. Plug ends of utility lines which are abandoned in place, and insure that no active services are connected to them. PART2 PRODUCTS e-+ 2.01 MATERIALS A. All piping materials for every purpose shall be furnished and installed as hereinafter specified. B. All pipe and fittings shall be new and unused unless specifically indicated otherwise. SITE UTILITIES Section 15.110 Page 2 C. Underground steel piping shall be cleaned and primed with Humble 'Rust -Ban" and wrapped with a double thickness of 3M Scotch "51" vinyl tape over pipe and fittings. D. Factory coated pipe "X -Tru -Coat" or epoxy coated pipe with wrapped fittings will be considered equal. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER A. PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D3034 type PSM with a maximum SDR of 35 with elastomeric joints complying with ASTM D3212. PVC may be used on all exterior sanitary sewer lines except under vehicular areas. 2.03 WATER LINES A. PVC Piping: ASTM D-2241, SDR -17, Class 150, bell and spigot 4" and up only with ASTM D-1869 rubber gasket, Johns -Manville Blue Brute. 2.04 GAS LINES A. Plastic Gas Piping: Polyethylene, Type III, Grade 3, (PE 3406-3408), resin conforming to ASTM D1248 -7A, pipe construction conforming to ASTM D2513 (SDR 11). B. Mechanical Joints: Where steel lines connect to plastic lines 2" and smaller in size, use Continental Style 5 extra heavy duty malleable iron couplings with stiffeners. C. Flanges: Where steel lines valves or accessories connect to plastic lines 2-1/2" and larger, use polyethylene and steel flat face flanges with full face gaskets. D. Casing: Encase plastic lines under streets in schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe extending 36" beyond paving with a vented riser on both ends. E. Service Risers: General Plastic "Corrosion Guard" type CGR-2. F. Plastic marking tape shall be acid and alkali -resistant polyethylene film, 6 inches wide with minimum thickness of 0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1750 psi lengthwise and 1500 psi crosswire. The tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil backing or other means to enable detection by a metal detector when the tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. The tape shall be of the type specifically manufactured for marking and locating underground utilities. The metallic core of the tape shall be encased in a protective jacket or provided with other means to protect it from corrosion. Tape shall bear a continuous printed inscription describing the specific utility. 2.05 GATE VALVES IN EXTERIOR WATER LINES A. Buried Valves: Buried valves shall meet the requirements of AWWA standard C500-61. Design working pressure shall be 175 psi and the valves shall be double disc gate valves with non -rising stems. Valves shall have mechanical joint ends except where flanged ends are shown on the drawings. Valve stems shall be furnished with o -ring seals. All valves shall open by turning counter clockwise. An affidavit of compliance as specified in paragraph 31 ofAWWA Standard C500 shall be furnished. B. Valve Boxes: Cast iron valve boxes shall be furnished for each underground valve. 6" cast iron pipe sections shall be used for box extensions where required. Each box shall have a cast iron cover and shall have a flange type base, approximately 4" larger in diameter than the outside diameter of the barrel and provided with a locking device as shown on the drawings. Anchor valve boxes with a flush 18"x18"x8" reinforced concrete collar. SITE UTILITIES Section 15.110 Page 3 C. Extension Stems: Extension stems shall be provided for all buried valves where the top of the operating nut is 36" or more below finished grade. Top of the extension stems shall be not more than 18" below finished grade. D. Collar: Provide a protective concrete collar, square, dimension equal to valve cover frame plus 12" and no less than 8" thickness. Use 3,000 PSI concrete with reinforcing. Set top of cover flush with finish paving and 1 " above finish grade level. 2.06 EXTERIOR CLEANOUTS A. Provide and install cleanouts in exterior sewer lines where shown or as required by ordinance but not greater than 100 ft. apart. Cleanouts shall consist of a concrete encased special fitting with sewer pipes extending therefrom upward, terminating in a concrete slab. A brass countersunk cleanout ferrule shall be set on this '^ slab in such manner as to be flush with finished grade and to provide access, through its cover, to the cleanout. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the sewer, up to 6" in size, and 4" on 6" and larger sizes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LAYOUT OF UTILITY LINES A. Before starting excavation Contractor shall: 1. Uncover and determine the elevation at beginning and end terminals of each line. 2. Compute and verify depth of all lines and grade of sewer lines and submit figures in writing. 3. Stake route of each line. 4. Arrange utility connections with authorities. 5. Locate and identify any conflicting underground structures and adjust grade or routing to accommodate installation of the lines. 3.02 LAYING PIPE A. Lay pipe to the lines and profiles required by conditions at the site and the drawings. Keep pipe trenches free of water and dry during the bedding, laying and jointing operations. Install fittings and valves at the required locations, with joints centered and with valve stems vertical. Handle pipe carefully to avoid damage to dimensioned ends. Remove pipe with damaged ends which cannot be suitably repaired. Keep interior of piping and accessories clean. B. Proximity of Water and Sewer Lines: Unless otherwise required by drawings, lay parallel water lines and sewer lines in separate trenches at least 10 feet apart. Insofar as possible place water line at a higher elevation than the sewer. Where water lines and sewer lines cross each other, the water line shall be at least 3 feet above the sewer, or if this is not possible, amount of clearance between the lines may be reduced to 12" out to out i clearance provided the sewer line is cast iron for at least 10 feet on each side of the water line. 3.03 BACKFILLING A. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until the utilities systems as installed conform to the requirements specified hereinafter. The trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavation materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft F: shale, or other approved materials free from large clods of earth or stones deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6" layers, until the pipe has a cover of not less than one foot for water mains and two feet where possible for other lines. SITE UTILITIES Section 15.110 Page 4 carefully rammed 6" layers, until the pipe has a cover of not less than one foot for water mains and two feet where possible for other lines. B. The remainder of the backfill material shall then be thrown into the trench, moistened and tamped in one foot layers. Blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, and large boulders shall not be used as backfill material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and will be a requirement when so directed. Any trenches improperly backfilled or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and mounded over, and smoothed off. C. Open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved shall be backfilled as specified above, except that the entire depth of the trench shall be backfilled in 6" layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density at least equal to that of the surrounding earth in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value, so that paving of the area can proceed immediately after backfilling is completed. Along all other portions of the trenches, the ground shall be graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounding over the trenches left in a uniform and neat condition. 3.04 BORED CROSSINGS UNDER WALKS A. Crossings beneath walks may be bored rather than open -cut but casing is not required. The trench may be open cut to within three feet of the edge of the pavement. Boring shall proceed from a pit provided for the boring equipment and workmen. The use of water or other fluids in connection with the boring operation will be permitted only to the extent required to lubricate cuttings. Jetting will not be permitted. Care shall be taken to keep the bore on proper line and grade. 3.05 OPENING AND RECLOSING PAVEMENT A. Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets, drives or other existing pavement, that pavement shall be cut as required to install new lines and to make new connections to existing lines. The sizes of the cut shall be held to a minimum, consistent with the work to be completed. B. When the excavation has been backfilled, the paving shall be patched, using materials to match those cut out. The patches shall thoroughly bond with the original surfaces and shall be level with them. Quality of the patch shall be equal to or better than adjacent paving. 3.06 DISINFECTING WATER LINES A. After installation of water lines has been completed, thoroughly flush the lines to remove foreign material. After flushing fill the lines with a chlorine solution of 200 PPM for lines 4" in diameter and smaller or 100 PPM for lines greater than 4" in diameter. Fill lines in manner to prevent formation of air pockets. Leave chlorine solution in lines no less than 24 hours before wasting. Flush until residue is 0.2 PPM or less. 3.07 UTILITY SERVICES A. Water Service: The Contractor shall secure water service from the city main as indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall make all arrangements with the city for domestic water service, including the tap, meter and meter box, and pay all charges levied by the city. Beginning at the termination of the city work, the contractor shall provide and install all water piping, fittings, valves, valve boxes, etc. shown on the drawings. Meter box shall be concrete with a manhole, conforming to municipal requirements. B. Sanitary Sewer: The contractor shall arrange with the city for sewer service at the point shown on the drawings. Pay any charges levied by the city for this connection. r•* E SITE UTILITIES -Section 15.110 Page 5 C. Gas: Refer to the drawings for details of gas service. C... 3.08 TESTING A. Sewer: 1. Prior to testing for leakage the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half of the pipe. If y " required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving d.: the joints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be corrected regardless of leakage test results. r" 2. Test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 2 feet is provided above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipe line to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand until the pipe has reached its maximum absorption, but not less than 4 hours. After absorption, the head shall be re-established. The hour test period shall be measured. 3. Leakage shall not exceed 0.4 gallons per inch diameter per 100 feet of pipe line per hour. When leakage exceeds the maximum amount specified, satisfactory correction shall be made and retesting accomplished. Correction and retesting shall be made at no additional cost. B. Water Lines Soldered or Flanged: Test under hydrostatic pressure of 200 PSIG for 4 hours with no leaks and no pressure drop. • C. Gas: Before backfilling, test under air pressure at 50 PSIG for 24 hours. There shall be no pressure drop, except for correction for temperature variation. If any pressure drop occurs, soap test every joint, correct the leaks and retest. „ END OF SECTION l PIPING AND ACCESSORIES Section 15.211 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.04 INSPECTION A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. 1.05 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe ASTM C564 Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe Fed. Spec. HH -P-117 Type II No Hub Joints PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings Copper Tubing Wrought Copper Solder Fittings Cast Bronze Solder Fittings Steel Pipe Butt Weld Fittings ,.•+ Socket Weld Fittings Steel Flanges ASTM D3183 ASTM D3034, Type PSM Max. SDR = 35 ASTM B88 ANSI B16.22 ANSI B16.18 ASTM A120, A53, A106 ANSI B16.9 ANSI B16.11 ANSI B16.5 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES Section 15.211 Page 2 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI 1316.3 PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1584 Type 1120 Push On Joints for PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1585, AWWA C900 Flange Bolt, Sets ASME Pressure Piping C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Maloney. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. 2.02 VALVES A. General Service Valves: 3" and smaller, all bronze, screwed; 3-1/2" and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Fluid Pressure Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Above 125 PSIG Gate 3" and smaller 428 424 Gate 3-1/2" and larger 465-1/2 7-1/2 E Globe 3" and smaller 1 14-1/2 P Globe 3-1/2" and larger 351 21E Angle 3" and smaller 2 16-1/2 P Angle 3-1/2" and larger 353 23E B. Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Provide extended stems for valves in insulated line, so that the handle clears the insulation and jacket. C. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. D. Check Valves: Use "Silent" check valves at the discharge of circulating water pumps. Unless specifically noted to the contrary, use horizontal swing check valves in all other locations. E. Silent Check Valves 1-1/2" and Smaller: Bronze body; bronze trim; stainless steel spring; equal to Combination Pump Valve Company No. 36. F. Silent Check Valves 2" and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, equal to Combination Pump Valve Company No. I OB or 20B up to 125 psi 11B, or 21B up to 250 psig. G. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and O -rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be three piece break away for in-line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems to clear the insulation and jacket. ++ PIPING AND ACCESSORIES Section 15.211 Page 3 H. Gas Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to Nordstrom Fig. 143 in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Valves i• 2" and smaller equal to Crane No. 270 threaded gas stop. 1. Pipe Flexible Connections: Flexible connections shall be molded expansion joints as manufactured by Proco Series 240. Construction shall include neoprene cover and tube elastomer, retaining flanges and control rod plate. 2.03 GAUGE COCKS AND GAUGES A. Where gauge connections are installed in insulated lines, install a ConBraCo No. 41-380 T -handle gauge cock on a nipple of sufficient length that the cock handle will be free of the pipe insulation, and position each cock in relation to surrounding piping and equipment so that the gauge may be easily read, and so that a gauge having a 6" diameter dial can be screwed into and out of the cock. B. Install gauge cocks at pumps as close to pump suction and discharge connections as possible. Where drilled and tapped gauge connections are provided in the pump casing by the manufacturer, use these tappings. C. Pressure Gauges: Phosphor bronze, seamless Bourdon spring type with phosphor bronze bushed rotary movement and link; 4-1/2" dial, nickel plated ring, free standing cast aluminum case; equipped with micrometer adjustment pointer. Furnish each gauge with scale range suitable for the duty. -I with cast aluminum case; Weksler, Weiss, and Trerice D. Water Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14 acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. s PIPING AND ACCESSORIES Section 15.211 Page 4 G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.02 FLASHING A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than 4 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. Flashing at roof drains shall be 36" square. 3.03 PITCH PANS A. Small lines thru the roof shall be installed thru pitch pans. Pans shall be 18 gage galvanized, welded, 3" deep, 8" X 8" or larger, packed with lead wool and filled with pitch. 3.04 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS A. Cast Iron Pipes, Caulked Joints: Make joints in cast iron bell and spigot pipe by centering the spigot within the bell, packing the joint with oakum closely compacted, and then pouring the remaining space in the bell full of molten lead. When the lead has cooled, thoroughly caulk at least three times around the joint using caulking tools of the proper width. B. No -Hub Joints: Install according to manufacturer's instructions. Rubber sleeve shall be neoprene. Clamps and bolts shall be stainless steel. C. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. D. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder (95% tin, 5% antimony) or Silvabrite 100 solder (95.5% tin, 4% copper, .5% silver composition) for all copper tubing. Under no circumstances will solder with any lead content be permitted on the jobsite. E. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1/8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. Pot PIPING AND ACCESSORIES Section 15.211 Page 5 3.05 REPAIR OF LEAKS A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. 3. Leaks in caulked joints may be stopped by additional caulking of the joint; but if that fails, remake the joint. 4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100% penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 4" in length. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 3.06 HANDLING OF MATERIAL A. Hauling: All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be delivered and distributed at the site by the Contractor. B. Loading and Unloading: Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be loaded or unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. Each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed. No material shall be unloaded where it will block any road, drive, building entrance, or walkway or where it will be a hazard to safe vehicular or pedestrian traffic. C. Care of Pipe Coating and Lining: Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining shall not be damaged: If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. If satisfactory repair cannot be made, the Contractor shall replace the damaged pipe. 3.07 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. B. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. END OF SECTION r i PLUMBING SYSTEMS Section 15.310 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings, piping inside of, under and within 10'0" of the building or other structures shall be bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphaltum or coal tar pitch and each having the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. Type "L" copper in sizes up to 2" may be used where space is restricted. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be �* used, unless otherwise prohibited. B. Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service weight cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings for all lines 2" and larger and standard weight galvanized steel, Type L or heavier weight copper, red ^+ brass, or lead for lines smaller than 2" except that the same class of material shall be used throughout, insofar as practicable. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. C. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines underground or under slabs on grade - shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Where connections are made between copper tubing and cast iron pipe, use adapters. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder joint fittings. No lead solder will be permitted. D. Gas Lines: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 lbs. banded malleable iron fittings. E. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. F. Compressed Air Lines: Type L hard copper with solder joint fittings. at the bottom of each stack, at each change in direction, and in G. Interior cleanouts: cleanouts shall be provided each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil, waste, and drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be concealed behind chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W -8480-R or provided with other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance. Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with cast iron plug and gasket and secured satin bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in finished tile floors PLUMBING SYSTEMS Section 15.310 Page 2 shall be Wade W -6000 -TS with square tile top; in carpeted areas Wade W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All -- cleanouts shall be the same size as the line served up to 4" size and shall be 4" for all larger lines. H. Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and no smaller than the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if sized in accordance with PDI recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ISOLATING VALVES A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving the riser. These isolation valves shall be installed at an accessible location. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or chase. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. 1. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. 2. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10" above the roof. 3. Water Lines: a. Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely drain the system. b. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins. 4. Gas Lines: a. All gas piping shall run exposed unless specifically detailed otherwise on the drawings, with special venting provisions. b. A drip pocket shall be installed at connection to an item of equipment and at each low point of the gas distribution system. Grade all lines to drip pockets. Drip pockets shall consist of a nipple and cap screwed to the bottom of the drop. c. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure regulator at each connection to a gas consuming appliance. d. All gas piping on the roof shall be supported on Miro Pillow Block pipe stands, Model 02 for 2" and below, Model 24-R for piping 2" to 4" and Model 48-R for 5" and above. Pans shall be mopped to roof. Pipes shall be strapped to supports with galvanized strap. 5. Identification: For other than black steel pipe, exposed gas piping shall be identified by a yellow label marked "Gas" in black letters. The marking shall be spaced at intervals not exceeding 5 feet (1524 mm). The marking shall not be required on pipe located in the same room as the appliances served. All tubing carrying medium -pressure gas shall be marked with a label at the beginning and end of each tubing section. 3.03 TESTING A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. MPM PLUMBING SYSTEMS Section 15.310 Page 3 B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Test for 6 hours at 150 prig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. ` C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in a sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1" in 8 hours. D. Gas Lines: Test with 50 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except for temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and retest. 3.04 DISINFECTING A. After cleaning, flushing and testing, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the disinfection of all domestic pipe lines which shall be disinfected by the application of a chlorinating agent. The chlorinating agent may be a liquid chlorine, liquid chlorine gas water mixture, or a calcium " hypochlorite solution, which shall be fed into the lines through a suitable solution feed device. B. The chlorinating agent shall be applied at or near the point from which the line is being filled and through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of the newly laid pipe. The water being used to fill the line shall be controlled to flow into the section to be disinfected very slowly. C. The chlorine dose applied to the water entering the lines shall be at least 40 to 60 parts per million. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe lines for a period of not less than 24 hours. At the end of the 24 hour retention period the chlorine residual shall be at least 20 ppm. All treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the lines until the replacement water in the lines has a chlorine residual of not more than 0.2 parts per k ;J million. END OF SECTION AIR DISTRIBUTION Section 15.411 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS rp"I A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 A. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of apparatus casing, ductwork, plenums, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, relief air vents, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. B. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those various items of equipment and materials. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK: A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ducts insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. B. Duct construction details shall conform to "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", 1st Edition, (1985) published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Refer to the fan schedules (TSP) for system pressures. Construction shall be suitable for actual duct system pressures. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1" in 7" on any side. Make decreases in ' dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of I" in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate. E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. e•, AIR DISTRIBUTION Section 15.411 Page 2 2.02 DUCT LINER A. All sheet metal supply, return, and fresh air duct shall be lined. B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1" with Johns -Manville "Permacote Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with immobilized antimicrobial impregnated acrylic surface coating on one side. C. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .25 btu-in./sq. ft. -degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. D. Duct liner shall comply with ASTM C1071 with an NRC not less than 0.70 as tested per ASTM C423. E. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2" greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. F. Use 100% adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. 2.03 DUCT SEALER - A. All supply air ductwork from the air unit to the terminal units shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Sea] -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. 2.04 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a splitter damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off and additional volume dampers shall be installed where shown or required to achieve the final air balance. B. Splitter dampers and volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. The length of any splitter damper blade shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the smaller split in the duct, but shall be not less than 12". Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 18". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion. C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24", volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall be fitted with felts to insure tight closure. Felts shall be both glued and — riveted to the damper blades. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. AIR DISTRIBUTION k Section 15.411 Page 3 ..�+ D. Each splitter or volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting ? device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 896 concealed air split regulators. On exposed or easily accessible e ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets. 2.05 PLENUMS A. The Contractor shall fabricate and install all sheet metal plenums. Plenums shall be constructed and insulated as specified for "Low Pressure Ductwork." In addition as a minimum requirement, plenums shall be braced - with 1-1/2 by 10 gauge angles 24" on center, all sides. When plenums are mounted on the floor there shall be an additional angle around the plenum secured to the floor. Caulk all seams air and water tight. B. There shall be at least one door in each plenum 18" by 48" with two latches, 12" square Airsan Ductport, piano hinge, and gasket. All plenum doors shall be double metal clad with 1" thick internal insulation. rte, Provide two Ventlock series 300 latches on each door. 2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and outlet of each fan. These connections shall in each case be long enough to permit a minimum separation of 3" between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least l"slack in the flexible material itself. B. The material shall be of a vinyl coated woven nylon/polyester blend base fabric, 22 oz. per square yard, meeting NFPA 90A and B for flame spread and smoke developed. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and mildew -resistant. The material shall be equal to Excelon Fabric as manufactured by Duro-Dyne. 2.07 HOOD AND EXHAUST DUCTS A. Ductwork serving kitchen hoods shall conform to the requirements of low pressure ductwork with the following additional requirements and all requirements of NFPA 96. 1. Ductwork shall be 16 ga. black steel minimum. Ducts larger than 2 square ft. in cross section shall be 14 gage - 2. All duct shall be all welded construction only. 3. Bolted access doors shall be provided above the hood for cleanout. 4. Duct shall be sized for at least 1500 fpm velocity. 5. The Contractor shall make final connections to all equipment. Where black steel mates with stainless steel, use companion flanges gasketed and bolted. 2.08 LOUVERS - FIXED A. Provide louvers shown on the drawings. Provide with galvanized blades and frames to fit wall construction. Provide with inside insect screen on exhaust louvers and birdscreen on intake louvers. Louvers shall be 4" thick stormproof, Krueger series XY with K blades. Units shall be factory primed for painting on the job. e" B. Dimensions shown are nominal. Coordinate exact dimensions with the general construction. AIR DISTRIBUTION Section 15.411 Page 4 C. Provide automatic raintight, opposed blade dampers with neoprene seal as indicated on the drawings. END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15.511 Page I PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. n 1.03 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 PRODUCTS s++a 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 4" and Larger 364 copper plated Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 Hanger Steel lines 4" and larger 239 Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 r , Hanger Cast Iron Lines 239 Hanger Plastic Pipe 108+109 Hanger Refrigerant Pipe 102 Hanger Glass Pipe 375 Wall Bracket All 150, 151, or 155 Saddles Steel Lines On Rollers 71, 1710, 1712, 172, 173 Conc. Inserts New Construction 185 Rollers Steel Piping 161,272 Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 - - Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Exp Shield Concrete 374 Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 Adjuster All 2381 2.02 HANGERRODS A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: a. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15.511 Page 2 Rod Diameter Size of Steel Pipe or Size of Cast Iron Copper Tube Supported Pipe Supported 3/8" 2-1/2" and smaller 3" and smaller 1/2" 3" and 4" 4" through 6" 5/8" 5" through 8" 8" through 10" 3/4" 10" and larger 12" and larger 2.03 HANGER SPACING A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or required by code. Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet 3/4" and smaller 5 1 " through 1-1 /2" 7 2" and larger 10 All cast iron lines 5 (Minimum two per joint) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U -braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. F. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists, piping may be _ suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts. On piping larger than 4", verify the joist strength before installation. G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed for sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Section 15.511 Page 3 .� lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest dine supported on or from the trapezes. H. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material. 3.02 COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES A. Where pipes specified under different sections may possibly be racked on the same supporting structure, each trade shall cooperate with the others involved to properly locate the supporting members and shall furnish a proportionate share of the labor and materials involved in the installation. B. Any other special hangers and supports shall be provided and installed as indicated on the drawings, specified elsewhere herein or required by conditions at the site. 3.03 DUCT HANGERS f A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. r END OF SECTION m� w. �1 r: F INSULATION Section 15.660 Page 1 ** PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. m 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. x; 1.03 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and L appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically excepted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ** A. In describing the various materialsa licat' d d pp ion proce ures, an fmishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. B. Where materials are described under other sections of the 11 specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2.02 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber fabric between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with aflame resistant latex adhesive. B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville "Zeston" covers with taped seams. INSULATION Section 15.660 Page 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.02 APPLICATION OF INSULATION A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. 3.03 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. In the following, the word "exposed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in any room above the lowest floor in any building unit, exterior to the building and above ground, and/or in equipment rooms; the word "concealed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in other underfloor areas, ceiling spaces furrings and chases. 1. Domestic Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate with V thick Manville "Micro -Lok APT 650" molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with all purpose jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. 2. Domestic Cold Water Lines: All cold water lines throughout with those exceptions noted hereinbefore, shall be insulated with 1/2" thick Manville "Micro-lok APT 650" molded glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied vapor barrier jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. 3. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Armaflex. Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on during fabrication. 4. Water Heaters: Factory Insulated. 5. Duct Insulation: Refer to Section 'AIR DISTRIBUTION' for duct liner specification. END OF SECTION EQUIPMENT Section 15.710 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. 1.03 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be ,r furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. 4 C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - no. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6. Quantity PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. Motors with special operating conditions such as multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as specified under the equipment served. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with •*+ a service factor of 1.0. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 2. Fractional larger than 1/6 HP: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 3. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. EQUIPMENT Section 15.710 Page 2 4. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Power factor shall be 85% or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E -Plus. 2.02 MOTOR STARTERS A. The Division 15 Contractor shall furnish all motor starters (controllers) and control equipment for equipment specified under Division 15. The Contractor under this section of the specifications shall be responsible for coordinating starter sizes, characteristics, heater element sizes and all other details. B. All individual starters shall be the product of a single manufacturer and submitted for review at the same time. C. Where starters are specified with items of equipment, the starters shall be factory mounted and wired. D. Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual units, combination starter/molded case circuit breaker units, combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or combination starter/unfused disconnect switch units unless otherwise indicated. E. Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Federal or Gould manufacture with the proper enclosures. F. Provide pilot lights and either pushbutton stations or hand -off -automatic switches as required for the control of each item of equipment. Generally, pushbutton stations shall be used only where no interlock or remote functions are specified. Control devices shall be in the starter cover unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. H. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. I. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. J. Manual Starters: Where manual starters are indicated, they shall consist of a horsepower rated on-off switch, or hand -off -auto switch with a pilot light and overload element(s) in the same enclosure. Where the starter is installed in public areas, it shall be in a recessed box with a stainless steel coverplate. 2.03 FLUE VENTS A. Provide and install flue vents on all gas burning devices including water heaters, unit heaters and furnaces. B. All such flue vents shall be constructed of Metalbestos double wall metal conduit and shall be of the sizes recommended by the manufacturers of the devices vented. They shall be complete with all couplings and other required fittings and shall terminate 24" above the roof in a ventilator type weatherproof rainhead similar and equal to a Breidert Air-X-Hauster. Where any vent passes through combustible construction it shall be provided with a separation in accordance with the standards of the NFPA. All vents shall be flashed and counterflashed into the roofing construction to the satisfaction of the Architect and shall be watertight. 2.04 WATER HEATER A. Provide the water heater shown and scheduled on the drawings. It shall be a glass lined, jacketed, insulated package water heater. EQUIPMENT Section 15.710 Page 3 B. The gas fired unit shall be complete with draft diverter, adjustable thermostatic control, gas pressure regulator and all standard accessories including a thermomagnetic safety pilot designed to shut off gas flow completely to both main burner and pilot burner, if pilot flame is extinguished. C. Provide in the outlet of each heater a Watts temperature and pressure relief valve, with a drain line therefrom full size to the floor drain. Size valve according to the applicable codes. D. Gas fired water heaters shall bear the ASME Stamp and shall be installed in accordance with the Boiler Code if the capacity is 120 gallons or more, or the input is 200,000 BTUH or more. Specifically, 2' of clearance is required on all sides, and 4' of clearance is required above the heater. .� E. Refer to drawings for capacities. 2.05 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER F. Electric water heater shall be a packaged electric water heater with welded steel, glass lined tank, factory insulated and jacketed. Provide with a drain. G. Heating elements shall be direct immersion elements, Incaloy sheathed. H. Control shall be automatic. Thermostat shall be immersion type. Thermostat shall operate the magnetic contactors. I. Master Control Panel: Prewired and factory installed to contain the contactors, wiring and terminals. J. Provide with magnesium anode. K. Provide a Watts T & P relief valve piped full size to floor drain. L. Unit shall be UL listed. t^' M. Capacity shall be as scheduled on the drawings. 2.06 FANS A. The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. B. All v-belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that the specified fan performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for bidding purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified and if changing of the motor and drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the contract. C. Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v-belt drive shall be selected for a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified rpm. The motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit shall be flexible. D. Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of noise and vibration. E. ` Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled. F. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect. EQUIPMENT Section 15.710 Page 4 G. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. H. Fans shall have factory applied finish. L Fan motors 1/8 HP and larger shall be permanent capacitor start type. 2.07 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS A. All roof mounted exhaust fans shall be of the low silhouette type with fan wheels mounted horizontally. All fan housings shall be corrosion resistant construction. All fans shall be equipped with ball bearings, permanently lubricated. Fans shall be resiliently mounted. B. Unless scheduled otherwise, all exhaust fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal wheels. C. All fans shall have backdraft dampers and bird screens. D. Refer to the drawings for special requirements. E. Curbs shall be factory fabricated and furnished with the unit. F. Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Jenn Aire Products Co. or Greenheck. 2.08 UNIT HEATERS - GAS FIRED A. Unit heaters shall be vented, gas-fired, horizonal unit heaters and shall be AGA approved and so labeled. They shall be suspended from the building construction at a height and in a manner as directed by the Architect. B. Unit heaters shall be complete with gas pressure regulator, manual firing cock, magnetic gas valve, safety pilot, high temperature limit control, thermostat, draft diverter and shall be suitable for burning the gas locally available. C. The fan shall be centrifugal or propeller as scheduled. D. Temperature controls are to be furnished by the unit manufacturer. E. Unit heaters shall be as manufactured by Trane, Lennox Industries, Modine, or Hastings and shall have cfm and btu outputs not less than those shown. 2.09 FURNACE - GAS FIRED A. Furnace shall have the heating and fan capacities scheduled. It shall be a Lennox steel forced warm air, gas fired winter air conditioner complete with heavy furniture steel casing, heat transfer element, bumer, draft diverter, gas pressure regulator, automatic pilot and safety controls, squirrel cage fans with motors and v -belt drives, filter and all other standard accessories. B. Automatic controls at each unit shall include magnetic gas valves, remote room thermostats, limit controls, and thermostatic fan switch. Fan motors shall be provided with thermal overload protection. C. Temperature controls shall be furnished by the unit manufacturer. D. Similar and equal furnaces as manufactured by Carrier, Trane and Westinghouse are acceptable. e** EQUIPMENT Section 15.710 Page 5 2.10 PACKAGED DX COOLING COIL FOR FURNACE A. Cooling coil shall fit the furnace. It shall be of the configuration indicated on the drawings. Provide complete with coil, casing, drain pan, expansion device and other accessories required. When performing with the furnace and condensing unit it shall deliver the scheduled capacity. B. Provide the refrigerant piping to completely connect the coils with the condensing units. The piping shall consist of precharged lines with quick couplings. Suction piping shall be insulated with foam plastic insulation threaded on and sealed. Support the piping with Unistrut hangers. C. Provide a liquid line filter dryer and a sight glass at each coil. D. Provide a drain line from each coil to the floor drain. 2.11 PACKAGED AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS A. The air cooled condensing units shall be of the self contained packaged type suitable for outdoor mounting. Each shall be factory assembled complete with refrigeration system, condensing coils, fans, controls, etc. all in a rigidly constructed and finished housing. The condensing unit shall be connected to the remote cooling coil. The units shall be mounted as shown on the drawings. B. The refrigeration system shall be of the hermetically sealed type utilizing Freon as a refrigerant. It shall be of the air cooled type with the refrigerant condensed in copper coils with aluminum fins. C. The fan in each unit shall be direct driven with motor of the permanently sealed lubrication type. D. Each unit shall have minimum performance characteristics as tabulated on the drawings. It shall be furnished with the manufacturer's standard thermostatic, manual, and safety controls, and shall be completely internally wired. Each shall be as manufactured by Lennox, Trane or Carrier. E. Each compressor shall be guaranteed for 5 years. F. Hail Guard Screen: Entire condenser coil shall be covered with 18 gauge, 1/2" mesh galvanized wire screen. 2.12 HEAT PUMP — SPLIT SYSTEM A. Inside Unit: 1. Furnish and install where shown on the plans direct expansion fan coils equipped with electric heater either packaged or assembled from separate sections. Unit shall operate properly in vertical upflow position and is to be installed with ductwork. Capacities shall be as scheduled. 2. Unit enclosure shall be insulated and constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked enamel. Large front service access panels shall provide easy access to all components. Reversible filter rack shall have duct connection flanges and be equipped with permanent type filter that slides out for maintenance. 3. Fan shall be forward curved with double inlet, mounted on motor shaft, dynamically and statically balanced. The fan shall deliver scheduled cfm with required external static pressure. The multi -speed fan motor shall be factory lubricated, have internal overload protection and be resiliently mounted. Fan motor assembly shall slide out for service. 4. Cooling Coil shall have a face area scheduled and be constructed with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to nonferrous tubing with all joints brazed. Coil shall have factory installed; refrigerant metering EQUIPMENT Section 15.710 Page 6 device; refrigerant line fittings which permit mechanical connections; 2 condensate pans with primary and auxiliary drain connections on each. Electric heater shall be factory installed. Heater models over 10 kw shall have heating elements sequenced on and off in 5 kw increments, and shall be wired for 2 stage operation. All heaters shall be equipped with both thermal and current overload devices, and the required heating and cooling system controls including control circuit 24v transformer. B. Outdoor Unit: 1. Furnish and install an air to air electric heat pump with a Sound Rating Number (SRN) of 20 or less at full capacity. The unit shall be designed and tested for use with Refrigerant 22 and contain sufficient charge (R-22) for complete system. Brass service valves with refrigerant line fittings and service ports shall be located on exterior of unit. 2. Nominal unit electrical characteristics shall be as scheduled. 3. Total cooling capacity shall not be less than scheduled. Unit energy efficiency ratio (EER) shall be as scheduled or more at ARI conditions. 4. Heating capacity shall not be less than scheduled Btuh. 5. Outdoor coil shall be 2 rows deep with a nominal fm spacing of 16 fins per inch. Aluminum plate fins shall be mechanically bonded to aluminum tubing with all joints brazed. Coil shall be protected by vinyl coated grille. Factory installed coil refrigerant metering device shall be mounted on unit liquid service valve. Metering device internal components shall be removable for cleaning or replacement. 6. Outdoor unit fan shall be propeller type, direct driven, and arranged for vertical air discharge. Fan motor shall be factory lubricated, inherently protected and resiliently mounted. Twin speed fan motor shall automatically switch to high speed above 95 degrees F. and below 55 degrees F. outdoor temperature. 7. Compressor shall be of the welded hermetic type with internal vibration isolation and be covered with a - shield to muffle operating sound. Compressor motor shall have both thermal and current sensitive overload device, and start assist device shall be standard on 1 phase units if required. Compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater and have internal high pressure protection. Compressor motor power input shall not exceed scheduled KW at specified conditions. 8. Controls shall be factory wired and located in a readily accessible location on unit swing out service door. Controls and protective devices shall include a liquid line low pressure switch, suction line accumulator and pressure relief device. An automatic defrost control shall be included to accomplish defrosting (only if coil saturated suction temperature indicated freezing temperatures) every 90 minutes for a period of not more than 10 minutes. Control wiring terminal board shall be designed to match indoor unit terminal board and accessory thermostat terminals for standardized point to point connection. 9. Accessories shall include indoor thermostat, outdoor thermostat, emergency heat relay, solid state time guard, service sentry, optimizer control, start capacitor and relay, coupler, liquid line filter dryer, precharged tubing packages. END OF SECTION COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM Section 15.810 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS r"A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, fixtures, trim, services, and accessories necessary and incidental to a complete system of compressed air piping throughout the areas as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. The system shall be connected to the air compressor and shall be run to the various outlets as shown on the drawings and as specified herein or - required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING A. Schedule 40 black steel with banded malleable iron 300# fittings. B. All compressed air lines, mains, branches, valves, risers and fittings shall be run approximately as is shown on the drawings and as specified herein. This Contractor shall provide suitable needle gate valves at all outlets and a threaded male nipple for attachment of owners equipment. Furnish and install dirt pockets with one half (1/2") valve blowdown at ends of air mains and other necessary points for removing condensation from piping. Brace all air piping. C. Special attention shall be given to leaks at fittings and valves, and all valves shall be thoroughly examined and tested for leaks at the stems. w 2.02 AIR COMPRESSOR A. The air compressor shall be a single acting one or two stage reciprocating type. It shall be mounted on a receiver, belt driven, air cooled, and powered by an electric motor and shall be furnished with a hooded inlet .a filter and muffler. Cylinders shall be separately cast from each other and bolted to the crankcase for ease of maintenance. Valves shall be finger type and shall be readily accessible. A discharge line check valve shall be included in the piping from unit. The compressor shall be unloaded every time the unit stops, regardless of the cause of shutdown. The unloader mechanism shall operate as a function of speed. B. Delivery shall be 17 SCFM at 150 psig. Required compressor operating pressure shall be 150 psig. . a C. Manufacture: Quincy or equal. The drive motor shall be of the standard open drip proof induction 40 -degree C rise type. It shall be 7.5 HP suitable for the electrical characteristics noted. k ' D. Regulation: Automatic start -stop control with raintight pressure switch. w COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM Section 15.810 Page 2 E. Discharge Receiver: The compressor unit shall be mounted on an 120 gallon size ASME receiver. It shall include pressure gauge; safety service and drain valves; and a sturdy support base. Provide with a relief valve, and automatic drain valve with electric timer. F. Starter: Magnetic motor starter with overload protection in each phase. G. Provide crankcase heater for each compressor. H. Before starting compressor, this Contractor shall check to see that crankcase contains oil. L Motor shall be totally enclosed and fan cooled. J. Couplings: Couplings shall be Hansen 3000 quick couplings. K. Filter Dryer: Provide as shown on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEM A. All compressed air lines, mains, branches, valves, risers and fittings shall be run approximately as is shown on the drawings and as specified herein. This Contractor shall provide suitable needle gate valves at all outlets and a threaded male nipple for attachment of owners equipment. Furnish and install dirt pockets with one half (1/2) valve blowdown at ends of air mains and other necessary points for removing condensation from piping. Brace all air piping. B. Special attention shall be given to leaks at fittings and valves, and all valves shall be thoroughly examined and tested for leaks at the stems. 3.02 FABRICATION OF PIPING JOINTS A. Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. If tightening fails to stop leaks, remake the joint. 3.03 TESTING A. The Contractor shall pressure test the entire system at 150 prig for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. Repair all leaks. END OF SECTION TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Section 15.901 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. 1.02 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air and water, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: 1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Flow rate and temperature at each coil and heating device. 5. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. 6. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. I. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Section 15.901 Page 2 J. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.03 INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. In addition, provide schematic wiring diagrams of each piece of equipment framed under glass and mounted on the wall as directed. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. END OF SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 16.010 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SCOPE i A. The work included in Division 16 of the Specifications includes all electrical work, interior and exterior to the project. Provide all materials, labor, equipment, transportation, tools, permits, fees, and supervision to install, test and make operational the complete electrical systems. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide and install products in accordance with referenced standards. Comply with the standards listed in each section. B. Codes: The electrical work shall be in accordance with latest edition of the following codes: 1. National Electrical Code 2. National Electrical Safety Code 3. Life Safety Code 4. Uniform Building Code 5. City of Lubbock Electrical Ordinance 6. State of Texas codes as applicable 7. National Fire Protection Association 8. Other codes as referenced in individual sections C. Material Standards: Materials and equipment shall be listed or labeled as defined in Article 100 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), by a testing agency acceptable to the Owner. Materials shall be marked for their intended use. .�, D. Permits and Inspections: Obtain all permits and inspections for the installation of the work and pay all charges incident thereto. Deliver to the Owner all certificates of inspections issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for equipment as listed in each Section. B. Submittals shall include descriptive material, catalog sheets, diagrams, performance curves, and charts published by the manufacturer to show conformance with drawings and specifications. C. Provide complete electrical characteristics for all equipment. Lighting submittals shall include photometric data. a D. Submittals shall be clearly marked showing the individual item offered E. All electrical submittals shall be bound in a book, indexed by specification section, and certified that they have been checked by the contractor. F. Omissions from the submittal of any material which has been shown on the drawings or specified, does not relieve the contractor from furnishing and installing the item. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 16.010 Page 2 1.05 WARRANTY A. The contractor warrants the material and equipment installed to be free from defects for a period of one year after acceptance by the owner. All defects in labor or materials occurring during this period shall be repaired or replaced. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. The electrical equipment specified and shown on the drawings is based on information available at the time of design. If the equipment furnished has different electrical requirements, the contractor shall make the required changes to the wire, conduit, controls, overcurrent protection, switchgear, and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the owner. The cost for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this Specification under which the equipment is furnished. 2.02 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be UL labeled where a Standard exists for the product. If the product does not bear the UL label; the manufacturer shall submit documentation from an independent testing laboratory, acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, showing evidence that the product is suitable for the installation. B. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products in current production of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. C. All materials shall be new and free from defects. Materials of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer. D. All material and equipment shall be installed, applied, and handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and standards. E. Where no specific material is mentioned, provide the required material from a reputable manufacturer. The material shall conform to the project requirements, and shall be suitable to the engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Fabricate, erect, and install the complete electrical systems in accordance with accepted good practice by qualified personnel who are licensed and experienced in such work. Proceed in an orderly manner so as not to impede the progress of the project. 3.02 DRAWINGS A. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic. Carefully coordinate the work with structural, architectural, and mechanical conditions. Make adjustments to avoid conflicts. B. The locations shown for electrical equipment is approximate and not intended to convey the exact details of installation. Exact locations are to be determined in the field by actual measurements. e i BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 16.010 Page 3 C. The contractor is responsible for fitting the equipment and material into the space. If the equipment furnished requires different space conditions than shown on the drawings, the contractor shall arrange for such space and shall submit a drawing indicating the exact details of installation prior to construction. D. Do not scale drawings. Layout electrical equipment using dimensions obtained from the manufacturer of the equipment and from field measurements. 3.03 SITE INVESTIGATION A. Prior to submitting bids, visit the site and become aware of existing conditions that may affect the cost of the project. Include in the bid the work required to remove, extend, relocate, reconnect or modify existing equipment or systems, and to restore them to their original condition. 3.04 MATERIALS HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Handle materials in accordance with the manufacturer's standards and recommendations. B. All materials, except those specifically designed to be installed outdoors, shall be stored in an enclosed, dry building or trailer. Protect all stored equipment from damage. Remove damaged materials from the premises. C. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the environmental conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment and materials. They shall be protected from water, direct sunlight, cold and heat unless designed for such conditions. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Sleeve or cut all openings walls, floors, ceilings and roof required to install the electrical work. B. Do not cut structural members unless specific permission is granted by the structural engineer. C. Patch all openings after installation of the work, and repair any damage caused by this activity. Restore the surface to its original condition. 3.06 PAINTING A. Refer to PAINTING Section of these Specifications. B. Touchup scratched or marred surfaces of all electrical equipment with paint obtained from the equipment manufacturers specifically for that purpose. Remove all oil, dirt, grease and foreign material before painting and prepare the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where plywood backboards are used to mount equipment, paint backboards with two coats of light gray semi -gloss paint. 3.07 TESTING A. Provide all field-testing specified in the individual specification sections. 3.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide record documents as required in Division 1 of the specifications. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 16.010 Page 4 3.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance manuals as required in Division 1 of the specifications. B. Before final inspection, instruct the owner's personnel in operation of the systems under this Division. Use the Operation and Maintenance Manual as basis for the instruction. Review the contents of the manual in detail and explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Prepare and insert additional data in the manual when need for such data becomes apparent during ^' instruction. END OF SECTION RACEWAYS t Section 16.110 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS w, A. Submit product data sheets for all conduits and fittings. �* 1.03 SCOPE A. Furnish and install all conduits, wireways, raceways, and fittings for all systems interior and exterior to the building. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4 C-80.1 Rigid Galvanized Conduit C-80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 1 Flexible Metal Conduit UL 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings UL 6 Rigid Metal Conduit UL 651 Rigid PVC Conduit UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing UL 1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit UL 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) RNI Externally PVC Coated GRS and IMC Conduit PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Metal Conduit and Fittings: a. Allied b. Wheatland c. Appleton A.. d. Raco e. Killark f. O-Z / Gedney 2. PVC Conduit and Fittings: a. Carlon b. Certainteed 3. PVC Coated Metal Conduit: a. Robroy Industries ws+ RACEWAYS Section 16.110 Page 2 b. Levy 4. Support Channel: a. Unistrut b. Kindorf 2.02 METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS) : 1. Rigid, threaded, galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with protective coating inside. 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): 1. Rigid, threaded, thin wall steel, galvanized outside with protective coating inside. 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) : 1. Steel tubing, galvanized outside with slick corrosion resistant interior coating. 2. Steel set -screw couplings and connectors in dry locations; steel compression couplings and connectors in wet locations. D. Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips. Aluminum is not permitted. 2. Flexible conduit shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. 3. Connectors shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips with PVC cover extruded over the exterior to make the conduit liquidtight. 2. Shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. 3. Shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity, liquidtight. 2.03 PVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. PVC conduit shall be Schedule 40 unless noted otherwise. B. Exterior underground conduit encased in concrete ductbank shall be type EB. C. Conduit fittings shall be the same material as the conduit supplied by the same manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR RACEWAYS A. Types: Exposed exterior raceways shall be rigid galvanized steel, or intermediate metal conduit. Conduits containing underground branch circuits or control wiring shall be direct buried schedule 40 PVC, or wrapped galvanized steel. Underground conduits containing secondary service conductors shall be concrete -encased ducts or wrapped galvanized steel. ,., RACEWAYS R Section 16.110 Page 3 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Perform all excavation work required in connection with the installation of the work under this Section. After the electrical work has been installed, tested and approved, backfill all excavations with suitable material under the direction of the Architect. Include the cutting of all sidewalks, streets, and other pavement and repairing the openings in them to return the surface to approximately its original condition. B. Perform all excavations of every description of whatever substances encountered and to the depths required i for installation of the work under this Division. C. During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from �** the banks to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all excavated material not required or suitable for backfill. Control grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations, and remove any water accumulating therein by pumping. r*+ D. Make trenches the necessary width for proper installation of the lines. E. Grade the bottom of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for conduit or duct on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. F. Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets, drives or other existing pavement, cut the pavement as required. Hold the size of the cut to a minimum consistent with the work to be accomplished. After the installation of the new work is completed, and the excavation has been backfilled, patch the paving using materials to match those cut out. Take care that the patches are level with the original surfaces and thoroughly bond with them. 3.03 BACKFILLING A. Carefully backfill trenches with earth, sandy clay, soft shale or other approved material free from large clods of earth deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6-inck layers. B. Do not use broken concrete or pavement as backfill material. C. Settling the backfill with water is permissible and will be a requirement when so directed. D. Re -open any trenches improperly filled or where settlement occurs to the depth required for proper compaction, then refill, mound over and smooth off. E. Install continuous identification tape as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION. F. Backfill open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved as specified above except that the entire depth of trench shall be backfilled in 6 -inch layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density of not less that 95% Standard Proctor in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value and permit paving the area immediately after backfilling as completed. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND DUCTS A. Concrete between ducts and earth, and with 3 inches of concrete between adjacent ducts. Provide at least 30 inches of cover from top of concrete encasement to finished grade. Install with uniform slope for !" drainage, with no low pockets to collect water. B. Build up duct banks completely in the trench before any concrete is poured, using factory -fabricated plastic conduit spacers in staggered configuration to provide the proper horizontal and vertical spacings, and r RACEWAYS Section 16.110 Page 4 securing the entire assembly with heavy twine or cord to insure rigidity during pouring. Do not use metal for this purpose. Assemble conduits with staggered adjacent couplings so that no two couplings will lie in the same transverse plane, in a vertical direction. Use solvent cement as directed by the duct manufacturer in making up all joints. C. Fabricate duct runs with standard factory -made fittings, elbows and accessories. Make all changes of direction, horizontal or vertical, with long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 feet, except that manufactured bends at or near the ends of the runs may be used on short runs of 100 feet or less. Make long sweep bends with one or more curved or straight sections of duct. Manufactured bends, where permitted, shall have a minimum radius of 10 times the nominal duct diameter. Where manufactured ducts of greater than a 30 -degree angle are required, use rigid hot dipped galvanized steel conduit bends. During construction, protect partially completed duct lines from entrance of dirt and debris by means of suitable factory -made duct plugs. After completion of installation, seal all ends of spare ducts with factory made duct plugs. D. Where ducts enter in or under buildings, change from plastic duct to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade outside the structure, using suitable factory adapters. At the point of change of materials, extend the concrete envelope to enclose at least 2 feet of steel conduit. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings buried in earth as specified elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits. E. Install the concrete envelope for a given duct run in one pour where possible. Use concrete of 3000 psi compressive strength. In pouring concrete, do not allow heavy masses of concrete to fall on ducts. Direct flow of concrete down sides of assembly to bottom, forcing it to flow to center of bank and then to rise up in middle, filling all spaces uniformly. Spade concrete liberally and carefully with a long, flat slicing bar between vertical rows to eliminate voids. Weight or brace the duct bank assembly if necessary, to prevent the assembly from floating. Because of the fact that plastic conduits may expand considerably during construction, each run and its concrete envelope shall be installed starting at one end and proceeding toward the other with any necessary adjustments to length being made at the end toward which the work is progressing. F. After ducts are installed, complete with envelope, and before pulling any cable, pull a mandrel through every duct to check for alignment and clear passage. Use an iron -shod mandrel with a diameter of 1/4 inch less than the nominal size of the duct and a length equal to the duct diameter. Mandrel shall have a leather or rubber gasket slightly larger than the duct hole. After testing the ducts with the mandrel, pull a stiff -bristled brush through each duct until it is clear of all particles of earth, sand or gravel; then install duct plugs immediately. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT A. Install at least 30 inches below finished grade unless noted to the contrary. Assemble and install raceways in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make joints with couplings and solvent cement. Fabricate bends of 30 degrees or more with factory -made elbows, or make field bends with proper heating equipment. Bends showing signs of overheating or flattening are unacceptable. Ream ends of all conduit before joining. B. "Snake" plastic conduit in trench, from side to side, with a complete cycle every 40 feet to allow for expansion and contraction. Maintain this configuration during backfilling. C. Where conduit turns up out of earth, or floor slabs, change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade and outside of such structures. Do not extend any plastic conduit above grade. Make similar change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit at connections to underground pull or junction boxes. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings buried in earth as specified elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits. RACEWAYS Section 16.110 Page 5 3.06 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT A. All steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. Wrap such conduit with 3M Company 0.020 -inch thick No. 51 "scotchrap" vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease and dirt from conduit with a suitable solvent, and clean and dry conduit before wrapping. If conduit is pre -wrapped in the shop and then cut and joined on the job, wrap all joints on the job, overlapping pipe wrapping 3" on both sides of joints. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF PVC COATED CONDUITS A. During installation, visually examine the conduit for cuts. Patch these areas with a paste containing a PVC solvent obtained from the conduit manufacturer. The patch shall be built up to the original thickness of the coating and feathered out on all sides of the damaged area a minimum of 1/2 inch to provide a complete bonded seal over the damaged area. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, or on roofs shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit, intermediate metal conduits or electrical metallic tubing. Conduits installed below grade in slabs or buried in earth shall be PVC or PVC coated rigid galvanized steel or wrapped rigid galvanized steel. C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final connections to all motors, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, w breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1 " from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. F. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by P" galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. G. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. H. Pull Lines: Install pull line in each empty conduit, including the conduits installed for telephone and computer data systems. i RACEWAYS Section 16.110 Page 6 Penetrations: 1. Fire Wall and Smoke Partitions: Penetrate fire walls through sleeves. Seal the opening between the conduit and sleeve with UL rated fire foam sealant to maintain the fire rating of the wall. 2. Roof. Conduits shall penetrate the roof in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and architectural specifications. Make penetrations in asphalt roof in pitch pocket filled with asphaltic compound. Coordinate locations of all roof penetrations with Architect and Division 15 contractor. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire -resistive and installed to meet requirements of the UL Fire Resistance Directory. 3.09 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. B. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. C. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. D. Dry -Wall Partitions: Conduits installed in dry -wall partitions shall be firmly secured to the studs. Where conduits rise vertically in the wall, secure at locations near the top and bottom of the run and at intermediate points as necessary to comply with NEC requirements. Support multiple conduits from metal studs using pre -assembled bar hanger assembly consisting of support bar, retaining clips and conduit straps. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect raceways as recommended by the manufacturer to insure coatings, finishes, etc. are not damaged. Repair or replace damaged raceways. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by the manufacturer. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.11 CLEANING A. Upon completion, clean all installed materials of foreign paint, dirt and construction debris. END OF SECTION "* WIRES AND CABLES Section 16.120 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE FOR A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS w A. Submit catalog data sheets on all conductors and cables and wire. 1.03 SCOPE A. Under this Section, furnish and install all building wires and cables (600 volts and below) complete with connectors and terminations. Exterior branch circuits and feeders are also included in this section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products which comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) _ UL 44 Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables UL 83 Thermoplastic -Insulated Wires and Cables UL 486 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs UL 510 Insulating Tape PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS a� A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable. 1. Insulated Cable: a. Southwire Co. b. Senator Wire & Cable Co. c. Okonite d. Anaconda e. Pirelli Cable Co. >' 2. Electrical Spring Connectors: a. Scotch b. Ideal c. Buchanan 3. Compression Connectors: a. Burndy b. Scotch c. Ilsco 4. Mechanical Connectors: a. Burndy b. Scotch c. Ideal 5. Insulating Kits: a. Raychem - b. Scotch WIRES AND CABLES Section 16.120 Page 2 6. Insulating Tape: a. Scotch 2.02 CONDUCTORS A. Type: Soft drawn copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, free from flaws and imperfections. Conductors no. 10 and smaller shall be solid. Conductors larger than no. 10 shall be stranded. B. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, otherwise specified in other Sections, or otherwise required by the National Electrical Code, conductors shall have type THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation. C. High Temperatures: Use type RHH or RHW-2 for wiring in proximity to boilers and other devices subject to high temperatures. D. Markings: Conductors shall be marked on the surface with rated voltage, size, type, and manufacturer. The size shall be repeated at intervals not exceeding 24 inches, with the remaining data repeated at intervals not exceeding 40 inches. E. Performance: Conductors shall be electrically continuous and free from shorts or grounds. All open or shorted conductors shall be replaced. All conductors with damaged insulation shall be removed and replaced with new conductors free from defects. F. Conductors and cables installed open in ceiling plenums shall be plenum -rated. 2.03 JOINTS AND SPLICES A. Solid Conductors (No. 10 AWG and smaller): U.L. approved, screw -on, electrical spring connectors, 600 volt, 105C, insulated. B. Stranded Conductors (No. 8 and Larger): Crimp type compression connectors properly selected for the conductor size and material. All connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools as recommended by the manufacturer. Insulate the splice with an insulating kit providing 600 volt, 90C rating. 2.04 COLOR CODING A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. 2. Equipment grounding conductors, no. 6 awg and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Sizes larger than no. 6 awg shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of green tape, or green adhesive labels. B. Neutral Conductors: 1. Neutral conductors shall be white or natural gray. 2. Sizes no. 6 awg, or smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of white tape or stripped tape or white adhesive labels. C. Phase Conductors: 1. Conductors no. 10 awg and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of colored tape, or colored adhesive labels. WIRES AND CABLES Section 16.120 Page 3 2. 120/208 volt, 3 phase system: Phase A — Black Phase B — Red Phase C — Blue 3. 480 volt, three phase system: Phase A Yellow Phase B — Brown Phase C — Orange PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING: Install all wiring in raceways unless specified otherwise. A. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Use U.L. listed cable pulling compound where necessary. B. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. C. Wire Sizing: 1. No wire shall be smaller than no. 12, except for signal and control circuits, or lighting fixture taps. 2. Receptacle and motor branch circuits — Use no. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. 3. 120 volt, 20 amp lighting branch circuits — Where the length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use no. 10 conductors; otherwise use no. 12. 4. Where more than three current -carrying conductors are installed in the same conduit or raceway, the conductors shall be increased in size as required to maintain the required ampacity after application of the adjustment factors of NEC Table 310-15(b)(2)(a). D. Joints and Splices: 1. Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes, wiring troughs and other enclosures permitted by the NEC. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. 2. Do not splice conductors in panelboards, safety switches, or motor control enclosures. 3. Conductors for use with insulated spring connectors shall be twisted together prior to application of the connector. E. Terminations: Tighten electrical connections and terminations in accordance with the manufacturer's published values. A calibrated tool shall be used to insure proper torque values. ^'^ F. Bundling: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets, pullboxes and the like using nylon straps made for this purpose. Bundle conductors larger than no. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. G. Identification: Refer to ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION. 1. Mark conductors to clearly identify each circuit by number. Securely attach to each conductor in each p� junction box, pull box, panelboard, etc. 2. The cover of each junction box and pullbox shall be marked with the designations of each circuit contained therein. 3. Where colored plastic tape is applied to conductors for identification, use half -lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from the terminal points and in boxes where taps and splices are made. Apply the last two turns with no tension to prevent unwinding. Use 1 -inch wide tape applied to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. WIRES AND CABLES Section 16.120 Page 4 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. Tests and procedures shall be accordance with the applicable IPCEA standards. Furnish all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing. Submit test data to the engineer on data sheets in a format that can be compared with future testing. All test data shall be included in the project operating manual. 1. Test wires and cables for electrical continuity and short circuits. 2. Prior to terminating, check each service and feeder conductor with megohmmeter to determine the insulation resistance with respect to ground and other phases. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts do for 1 minute. 3. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturer's recommended values using calibrated torque wrench. 4. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. END OF SECTION BOXES Section 16.130 Page 1 PARTI GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, 7711 and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data sheets for all boxes. 1.03 SCOPE A. Furnish and install electrical boxes in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) No. 514 Outlet boxes and fittings No. 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) No. OS 1 Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports No. FB 1 Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable. ., 1. Sheet Steel Outlet and Device Boxes: a. Raco b. Steel City c. Appleton 2. Cast Metal Device Boxes: a. Crouse Hinds b. Appleton c. Pyle National 2.02 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. All boxes shall be UL listed. B. Sheet steel boxes shall be not lighter than 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication. C. Cast metal boxes shall be cast iron or cast alloy. D. Outlet boxes for switches, receptacles and communications use shall be 4" square with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the N - BOXES _ Section 16.130 Page 2 device requires a larger box. Box depth shall be as required by NEC for device and wiring volume requirements, but not smaller than 1-1/2 inches. E. Boxes for devices mounted flush in concrete block walls shall be single gang masonry boxes, 3-1/2" deep. F. Boxes installed in poured concrete shall be concrete -tight type. G. Boxes for surface mounted or pendant fixtures shall be 4"octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth. H. Boxes for flush mounted fixtures shall be 4" by 4" size with cover installed above the ceiling and accessible by removing ceiling panel or fixture. Connection to fixture shall be with flexible conduit. I. Boxes for interior exposed work shall be cast metal boxes (Cast iron or cast alloy). J. Boxes for outdoors shall be cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. 2.03 PULLBOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet steel galvanized inside and outside , with galvanized covers. B. Dimensions shall be as required by NEC for the number, size and locations of conduits entering the box. C. Boxes installed above ceilings shall be accessible by removing ceiling panels, installing access door in hard ceiling, or flush mounting the cover on the ceiling. D. Boxes installed flush in walls in finished areas shall have overlapping trim with hinged door and lock to — match the appearance of electrical panelboard. E. All boxes shall have covers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. B. All pull and junction boxes shall be accessible after construction is complete. Install access panels in the construction as required to make the box accessible. C. Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. �. D. Where outlet box on grid ceiling supports surface or suspended fixture, provide box with fixture stud and secure the box to ceiling members with steel channel. E. Outlet boxes for devices shown back to back shall be offset a minimum of 6 inches. F. All boxes shall have covers and unused conduit openings shall be covered. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Circuit numbers shall be marked on junction box covers as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION section. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES Section 16.140 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL r_ 1.01 NOTE �^^ A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. e�+ 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all wiring devices. 1.03 SCOPE A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated complete with coverplates. All rte+ shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE d d P •d d cts that com 1 with the referenced standards nom+ w A. Referenced Stan ar s. rove e pro u p y 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices WD 6 Wiring Devices — Dimensional requirements ., 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 20 General -Use Snap Switches PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: ,.., 1. Hubbell 2. Leviton 3. Pass & Seymour 4. General Electric a 5. Bryant 2.02 CLASSIFICATION A. All wiring devices shall be UL listed. B. All wiring devices shall be specification grade. 2.03 COLORS A. All devices shall have white finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. nom+ w WIRING DEVICES — Section 16.140 Page 2 2.04 SWITCHES A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish switches in colors specified above even though the numbers listed may not contain the correct suffix. 1. Single pole wall switch — 1221. 2. Three-way wall switch — 1223. 3. Four-way wall switch — 1224. 4. Pilot -lighted switch — 1221 -PLC. 5. Momentary contact switch — 1556. 2.05 RECEPTACLES A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish receptacles in colors specified even though the numbers listed may not contain the correct suffix. 1. Duplex receptacle: 20 amp, 125 volt, grounding (NEMA 5-20R) — No. 5362. 2. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacle (GFI) — No. GF -5362. 3. Special Receptacles: Furnish devices in the NEMA configuration listed on the drawings. 2.06 WEATHERPROOF DEVICES A. Provide the specified device in weatherproof cast box with gasketed coverplate. 2.07 COVERPLATES: Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, including telephone, signal outlets and other devices. Coverplates shall be one piece single or multi -gang type as required. A. Indoor Flush Devices: 1. Type 302 stainless steel. 2. Where installed in masonry walls, use jumbo plates. B. Indoor Surface Devices: For indoor devices use zinc -coated metal with rounded or beveled edges, same size as the box. C. Outdoor devices: TayMac PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring devices plumb and level. B. Install SPST wall switches with OFF position down. C. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. E. Install devices within outlet boxes to allow coverplates to be in full contact with the wall on all sides. F. Replace broken devices and plates with new. e� WIRING DEVICES Section 16.140 Page 3 G. Clean all paint, plaster and dirt from wiring devices and plates. 3.02 MOUNTING HEIGHTS ` A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. B. Devices noted to be installed above counters or millwork shall be installed above the backsplash. C. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by architect, install devices at the following heights above finished floor: DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHT Wall switch 48» Receptacle 18„ Telephone outlet 18" a _ 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. At each wiring device mark the inside of the coverplate with the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. Use black indelible marker. 3.04 FIELD TESTING n s A. Energize lighting circuits and operate each wall switch to verify proper operation. B. Energize receptacle circuits and test each receptacle with circuit tester to verify the device is energized and has correct polarity. t; C. Test TRIP and RESET buttons on GFI receptacles. In addition, test GFI receptacles with a GFI tester to ., verify it trips at 4ma of ground current. END OF SECTION F'" GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 16.170 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all grounding equipment. 1.03 SCOPE A. Furnish and install grounding equipment and systems as specified herein. Also refer to, and comply with specific grounding requirements contained in other Sections. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) i No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Grounding Products: a. Chance / Hubbell b. Copperweld Corp c. Erico Inc. d. Ideal Industries, Inc. e. ILSCO f. Kearney / Cooper Power Systems ,y g. Lyncoln XIT Grounding h. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. i. Thomas and Betts j. Raco, Inc. k. Burndy 2.02 CONDUCTORS A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1. Use insulated conductors that comply with WIRES AND CABLES Section. 2. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. A i GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 16.170 Page 2 3. No. 6 AWG and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of conductor. Larger sizes shall be identified with color -coded plastic tape at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. B. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Insulated stranded cable complying with WIRES AND CABLES Section. C. Underground Ground Conductors: Bare conductors installed underground shall be tinned, stranded complying with ASTM B8. 2.03 GROUND RODS A. Ground rods shall be one-piece or sectional type, copper -clad steel, 5/8" in diameter by 10 feet long. 2.04 GROUND CONNECTORS A. Compression Connectors: 1. Suitable for direct burial, embedded in concrete, or above grade applications, equal to Burndy Hyground. 2. Connectors shall be equivalent in current -carrying capacity to the maximum size copper conductors being joined. 3. Equipment shall be in accordance with the connector manufacturers recommendation. This shall include cable preparation, installation tools and dies, and the required number of crimps. B. Bolted Connectors: 1. UL listed for grounding. 2. Above grade applications. 3. Provide equipment in accordance with connector manufacturers recommendations for the application. C. Welded Connectors: 1. Exothermic -welded type, UL listed for grounding connections. 2. Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes, conductors and other items to be connected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICE GROUNDING A. Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding in accordance with the NEC B. Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a common point within the metallic enclosure containing the main service disconnecting means. From the common point of connection of the service ground and equipment ground, run in conduit a combined service and equipment grounding conductor (grounding electrode conductor) without joint or splice to the grounding electrode system. At each end point of connection, attach the metal conduit containing the grounding electrode conductor to the grounding electrode, or bond the grounding electrode conductor to its conduit as it exits the conduit with a fitting selected for this purpose. Separate bonding jumpers are not permitted for bonding the conduit to the electrode. GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 16.170 Page 3 3.02 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. Ground rods e B. Building steel C. Counterpoise 3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NEC are indicated. B. Install a separate, green -insulated, equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and each branch conduit. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with related phase and neutral conductors, and connect to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect the grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and ground busses in service equipment to the end that there will be an r. uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault to the point of connection of the equipment t - ,y ground and system neutral. C. Install equipment grounding conductors in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. D. Install equipment grounding conductors in all flexible metal conduit and liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Ground Rods: i6,j 1. Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. B. Grounding Building Steel: The building structural steel frame shall be grounded to the grounding electrode system. 3.05 GROUNDING SEPARATELY -DERIVED SYSTEMS tj A. Transformers: 1. Ground the secondary neutral and housing of each dry -type transformer. Connect these points together and run a common grounding conductor from their point of connection to the grounding electrode r system. 2. Where this grounding electrode conductor is installed in metal conduit, bond the conduit to the !�!+ conductor at the point of exit with a fitting approved for this purpose. 3.06 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspection: 1. Visually verify proper grounding connections at the service entrance equipment. ^^* 2. Visually verify proper connections to the grounding electrode system. 3. Visually verify proper grounding connections of separately derived systems. 4. Visually verify proper grounding connections at distribution panels and branch circuit panels. GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 16.170 Page 4 B. Testing: 1. Perform ground impedance measurements using the fall -of -potential method described in IEEE Standard 81. Instrumentation utilized shall be specifically designed for ground testing. 2. The testing shall be performed before the electrical distribution system is energized, and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after rainfall, and without moistening the ground. 3. The impedance -to -ground of the main grounding electrode system shall be 5 ohms or less. 4. Where tests show an impedance to ground of more than 5 ohms, take action to decrease this value to 5 ohms by driving and interconnecting additional ground rods, installing ground plates, or installing chemical electrodes. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section 16.195 Page 1 e� PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SCOPE ,.: A. Provide and install electrical identification for electrical conductors and equipment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). B. Comply with UL Standard 969. C. Comply with ANSI C2. D. Comply with NEMA WC -1 and WC -2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable. 1. W. H. Brady 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. Seton Nameplate Co. 4. Panduit Corp. 2.02 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates: 1. Melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16" thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches, and 1/8" thick for larger sizes. 2. White letters on black face for equipment connected to normal power system. 3. Attach with self -tapping stainless-steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive can be used where screws can not or should not penetrate the surface. 2.03 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color -Coded Plastic Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1-1/2" wide. B. Identification Bands: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters to show circuit identification. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section 16.195 Page 2 2.04 UNDERGROUND LINE WARNING TAPE A. Permanent, bright colored, continuous printed, vinyl tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend indication type of underground line. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical identification products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC and OSHA. B. For items attached with adhesive, degrease and clean the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where items attach to surfaces that require painting, attach after completion of painting. D. Install signs at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. E. Identification on Raceways and Boxes: 1. Every box containing circuit wiring shall have the circuit numbers marked on the outside cover of the junction box. Use indelible marker with wide tip. Markings for normal circuits shall be black. 3.02 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION A. Apply conductor identification on each conductor in each box, enclosure, cabinet and panel. B. Refer to Section 16120 for color -coding of conductors. 3.03 MARKING EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND LINES A. During trench backfilling for power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above the line at 12 to 16 inches below finished grade. 3.04 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install engraved, plastic laminate sign on each unit of electrical equipment. This includes power, lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems unless the units contain their own self-explanatory identification. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with '/2" high lettering on 1-1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required). C. Text shall match the notations used on the drawings for identification. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION OF PANELBOARDS, SWITCHBOARDS, AND SWITCHGEAR A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign containing 3 lines of text. The top line shall be the panel name. The center line shall indicate the panel voltage, and the bottom line shall indicate the source of supply. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section 16.195 Page 3 B. Signs for equipment fed from the normal system shall have white letters on black background. C. An example of the required identifications is: Panel 4HA 277/480 Fed From Panel 4DP END OF SECTION v, a A., SAFETY SWITCHES Section 16.441 Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: Submit the following information for review: A. Requirements: Provide and install safety switches as shown on the drawings or as required by NEC. Where code requires the installation of safety switches that are not shown on the drawings, provide and install the required switches. B. All switches shall be heavy-duty type. C. Switches shall be fusible or non -fusible as noted on the drawings or as required by codes. D. Provide switches with the voltage and current ratings as shown on the drawings. rte+, 0 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short circuit rating. 4. Cable terminal size. 5. Fuse rating and type. 1.03 SCOPE A. Provide, install, and connect all safety switches shown on the drawings or required by codes. .-A 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 50 Enclosures for electrical Equipment W UL 98 Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 2.02 HEAVY DUTY SWITCHES A. Requirements: Provide and install safety switches as shown on the drawings or as required by NEC. Where code requires the installation of safety switches that are not shown on the drawings, provide and install the required switches. B. All switches shall be heavy-duty type. C. Switches shall be fusible or non -fusible as noted on the drawings or as required by codes. D. Provide switches with the voltage and current ratings as shown on the drawings. rte+, 0 SAFETY SWITCHES Section 16.441 Page 2 E. Where safety switches serve as motor or motor starter disconnects, provide horsepower rated switches with auxiliary contacts to disconnect all power and control circuits. F. Construction: 1. Switch blades and jaws shall be plated copper. 2. Switches shall have a handle that is easily padlockable in the OFF position. 3. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the handle is in the ON position. 4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure base. 5. Switches rated 100A to 600A shall have reinforced fuse clips. 6. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. 7. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasible, positive quick -make / quick -break type. 8. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment. 9. Switches shall have line terminal shields. 10. Switches shall have CU/AL mechanical lugs. G. Enclosures: 1. Where installed indoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA I, general purpose type unless otherwise noted. 2. Where installed outdoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA 3R, raintight type unless otherwise noted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install safety switches in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and NEC requirements. B. Install adjacent disconnects at the same height. C. Install disconnects to maintain the required NEC clearances and working space. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install engraved plastic sign on each safety switch as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. The sign shall contain 3 lines of text. The top line shall identify the load served. The center line shall indicate the voltage. The third line shall indicate the source of supply. D. An example of the required identification is: AHU #2 480 V Fed From Panel PP 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each switch for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. SAFETY SWITCHES Section 16.441 Page 3 2. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. 3. Verify fusible switches contain proper type and size of fuses. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Operate each switch ON and OFF four times to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuit and verify proper operation. END OF SECTION s DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS Section 16.460 Page I 0 PARTI GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Drawing showing dimensions, wiring diagram and weight. 2. Transformers ratings: a. KVA b. Primary and secondary voltages. c. Primary and secondary continuous currents. d. Taps e. impedance f. Insulation class and temperature rise. g. Sound Level 3. Certification that the transformers are constructed and tested in accordance with the referenced Standards. 1.03 SCOPE A. Furnish, install, and connect all dry -type transformers shown on the drawings. The transformers covered by this Section are those having primary and secondary voltages of 600 volts or less. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C57.12.50 Ventilated Dry -type Distribution Transformers C57.12.51 Ventilated Dry -type Power Transformers 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEW') ST 20 Dry -type transformers for General Applications 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) No. 506 Specialty Transformers PART PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 0 DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS Section 16.460 Page 2 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All transformers shall be UL listed and bear the UL label. B. Transformers shall be two -winding, self -cooled type. C. Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated KVA, for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year operation, with normal life expectancy as defined by ANSI C57.96. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Insulation Systems: 3 — 15 KVA: 185 degree C insulation system based upon 115 degree C rise in 40 degree C maximum ambient. 15 KVA and above: 220 degree C insulation system based on 150 degree C rise in 40 degree C maximum ambient. B. Core and Coil Assemblies: 1. Transformer core shall be constructed with high-grade, grain -oriented silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Maximum magnetic flux densities shall be substantially below the saturation point. Core laminations shall be tightly clamped and compressed. Coils shall be wound of electrical grade aluminum with continuous wound construction. 2. On units rated 9 KVA and below the core and coil assembly shall be completely encapsulated to provide a moistureproof and shock resistant shield. Taps shall be two (2) steps below nominal voltage in 5% increments. 3. On units rated 15 KVA and above the core and coil assembly shall be impregnated with non - hydroscopic, thermosetting varnish and cured to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture. The assembly shall be installed on vibration -absorbing pads. Taps shall be two (2) steps above and four (4) steps below nominal voltage in 2.5% increments. 4. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor. C. Enclosure: 1. Enclosures shall be made of heavy -gauge sheet steel. Transformers shall be equipped with a wiring compartment suitable for conduit entry and large enough to allow convenient wiring. 2. On units rated 9 KVA and below (encapsulated), the enclosure construction shall be totally enclosed non -ventilated, NEMA 3R, with lifting eyes. 3. On units rated 15 KVA and above, the enclosure construction shall be ventilated, drip -proof with lifting holes. The ventilation openings shall be protected against falling debris. Where installed outdoors, provide weather shields over the ventilation openings. 4. Enclosures shall be finished in medium gray, weather -resistant enamel. D. Sound Levels: Transformer sound ratings shall not exceed the following levels for self -cooled ratings: KVA Rating Sound Level 9 KVA and below 40 dB 10 — 50 KVA 45 dB 51 — 150 KVA 50 dB 151 — 300 KVA 55 dB 301 — 500 KVA 60 dB 501 — 700 KVA 62 dB 701 — 1000 KVA 64 dB r DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS Section 16.460 Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Dry -type transformers larger than 15 KVA shall be floor mounted, unless wall or suspension mounting is indicated on the drawings. Transformers 15 KVA and smaller shall be wall mounted. B. Floor mounted transformers shall be mounted on neoprene pads 5/8" thick for vibration and noise control. Wall mounted transformers shall have vibration and noise eliminator pads installed between the mounting brackets and wall. C. Where transformers are indicated to be suspended, construct a mounting platform of welded or bolted angle iron. Support the platform from building construction with steel rod hangers, with spring type vibration and noise eliminators interposed between the rods and platform. All vibration isolators shall be properly selected by their manufacturer for the specific duty involved. D. Install all conductors to and from each transformer in flexible metallic conduit not less than 24 inches long. E. Install transformers in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions. Unless otherwise directed, ..": install transformers with a minimum of 12 inches clear on all sides for ventilation. e■• F. Ground the secondary neutral of dry -type transformers as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. G. Adjust the tap settings to deliver nominal rated voltage. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Install engraved plastic sign for each transformer as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. B. The sign shall contain 3 lines of text. The top line shall the transformer name. The center line shall indicate the source of supply, and the bottom line shall indicate the panel served. C. An example of the required identification is: Transformer Tl Fed from Panel HDP Serves Panel LDP 3.03 FACTORY TESTING A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed. All tests shall be in accordance with ANSI and NEMA Standards. 1. Ratio tests at rated voltage connection and at all tap connections. 2. Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection. 3. Applied potential tests. 4. Induced potential test. 5. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. �*a DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS Section 16.460 Page 4 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each transformer for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section 2. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors at each transformer as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. 3. Visually verify proper clearance and ventilation space around each transformer. B. Testing: 1. Test cable connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings. Record voltage readings and tap setting. 3. Megger primary and secondary windings. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS Section 16.470 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, 1. and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short circuit rating. 4. Cable terminal sizes. 5. Catalog product sheets. 6. Nameplate Identification. �**! 1.03 SCOPE i A. Provide, install, and connect all electrical panelboards shown on the drawings and specified herein. Panels shall be complete assemblies including enclosures, bussing, overcurrent protective devices, and trim. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes UL 67 Panelboards UL 489 Molded Case Breakers / Enclosures 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) " PB -1 Panelboards No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment AB -1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 2.02 PANELBOARD REQUIREMENTS A. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. The building main panel shall be listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment". PANELBOARDS Section 16.470 Page 2 C. Panels shall be arranged for flush mounting, surface mounting, or free-standing as indicated on the drawings. D. Panels shall have the voltage ratings, continuous current ratings, and interrupting ratings as scheduled on the drawings. E. All panelboard accessories and features scheduled or specified on the drawings shall be provided. F. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where the device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where the device is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. G. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic indicating type unless otherwise noted. H. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. I. Connect all overcurrent protective devices with sequence phasing. J. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a plastic covered cardholder on the inside of the panelboard door, K. Install laminated plastic nameplate for each panel as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Cabinets: 1. Rigidly constructed of galvanized sheet steel per UL 50 Standards. Corners shall be overlapped or welded with the edges turned over to receive trim. 2. Where two -section panels are required, both sections shall be same height, and have fully rated bussing in separate cabinets connected by conduit nipples. B. Trim: 1. Fabricated from sheet steel meeting the requirements of UL 50 Standards. Trim shall have medium gray enamel finish suitable to serve as the final finish, or suitable to receive field painting. 2. Trim door shall have rounded corners and edges free from burrs. 3. Surface trims shall be the same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box 3/4" on all sides. 4. Furnish each door with substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. Doors more than 48" high shall have auxiliary fasteners. Provide each lock with 2 keys. All locks shall be keyed alike. 5. Unless noted otherwise, interior mounted panels shall have type 1 fronts (one piece with hinged door). 6. Exterior mounted panels shall be type 3R in accordance with UL 50 requirements. All doors shall be gasketed and be equipped with a tumbler type vault lock and two additional trunk type latches. C. Bussing: 1. All bussing shall be plated copper sized in accordance with UL Standards to limit temperature rise on any current -carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. PANELBOARDS _ Section 16.470 Page 3 2. Main lugs and main breakers shall be UL approved for copper or aluminum conductors sized to accommodate the conductors to be terminated. Provide oversized lugs to terminate conductors that are increased in size due to voltage drop or temperature requirements. 3. A bolted ground bus shall be included in all panels. Where scheduled, an isolated ground bus shall also be included. 4. A full size (100%) neutral bar shall be furnished for panels shown with neutral. Neutrals shall have suitable lugs for each outgoing feeder requiring neutral connection. Where scheduled, provide 200% rated neutrals with lugs for oversized neutral conductors. 2.04 DISTRIBUTION PANELS — CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE A. Distribution panels with bolt -on devices contained therein shall have fully rated interrupting ratings to interrupt fault current values indicated on the drawings. Breakers shall be molded case type. B. Molded case circuit breakers shall provide overcurrent and short circuit protection with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. Also provide ground fault protection where scheduled. C. Circuit breakers shall operate by toggle -type handle and shall be quick make, quick -break switching mechanism that is mechanically trip -free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. 2.05 DISTRIBUTION PANELS — FUSIBLE SWITCH TYPE A. Distribution panels shall have fusible switches for fuses in the ratings shown on the drawings. B. Fusible switches shall be quick -make, quick -break design. Units 30 thru 600 amperes shall be rated not Tess than 200 kAIC with rejection -type fuse clips for Class R fuses. Units 800 and 1200 amperes shall be rated for 200 kAIC with Class L fuse provisions. C. Fuses shall be field installed. 2.06 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELS A. Bolt -in type, heavy duty, quick -make, quick -break, single- and multi -pole molded case circuit breakers with toggle handles that indicate when unit has tripped. B. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type with common handle for all multiple pole breakers. C. Breakers shall be UL listed as type SWI) for lighting circuits. D. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency lights and fire alarm panels. k E. Breakers shall be fully rated to interrupt the fault current values scheduled on the drawings. F. Provide breaker accessories as scheduled on the drawings. G. Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42 branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes with each box containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices. PANELBOARDS Section 16.470 Page 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, NEMA PBL1 and NEC standards. B. Panelboard enclosures shall be securely fastened to the structure with a minimum of four bolts or screws. C. Clean dirt and foreign paint from exterior and interior of all panels. D. Do not splice conductors in panels. E. Conductors not terminating in panelboard shall not extend through or enter panel enclosure. F. A single conductor shall terminate in each lug on a circuit breaker. Do not terminate multiple conductors under a single lug. G. During installation carefully balance the electrical loads between the various phases. This may require connecting loads to circuits different from the circuit numbers indicated on the drawings. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in panelboards as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install panelboard nameplate identification as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. Provide individual circuit identification for each circuit with a type -written directory of circuits mounted in a holder on the inside of the panel door. The directory shall identify the type or name of the load served along with the room names and numbers. The room names and numbers shall be the final names and numbers assigned to the space and not those used on the drawings. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each panel for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. 2. Visually inspect breakers and switches for broken parts and loose terminals. 3. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. — 4. Visually verify panelboard trim fits properly with no gaps between the trim and panel enclosure. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Operate each breaker ON and OFF to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. 4. When the facility is under normal use, amperage measurements shall be taken on each phase conductor in each panel feeder, and any unbalances shall be corrected to a point that no conductor load shall be more than 5% high or low (maximum unbalance of 10%). END OF SECTION FUSES Section 16.477 Page 1 ,. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE 77 A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, Supplemental and Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Catalog data for each type fuse. 2. Time -current curves for fuses 3. Current limiting characteristics and let-thru current curves. 1.03 SCOPE A. Provide and install all fuses necessary for leaving the installation complete and in working order. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 198B Class H Fuses UL 198C Current -Limiting Fuses UL 198D Class K Fuses UL 198E Class R Fuses - 3 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) FU -1 Low voltage cartridge fuses 1 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable. .-a 1. Bussmann 2. Littlefuse 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide fuses of types, classes, and current ratings as required by NEC. Voltage ratings shall be suitable for the systems to which the fuses are applied. B. Fuses shall be UL listed and labeled. 2.03 FUSES C. Class L: Fuses larger than 600 amperes shall be Class L, current -limiting, time delay type, with minimum interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. 1""'a FUSES Section 16.477 Page 2 D. Class RK 1: 600 amperes and below, current -limiting, time delay type, minimum interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Unless otherwise noted, fuses larger than 600 amperes shall be Class L current -limiting, time delay type. Fuses 600 amperes and below shall be Class RKI, current -limiting time delay type. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in each fusible device after installation is complete and prior to energizing equipment. B. Where the spacing of fuse clips in equipment is greater than required by the proper size of fuse, use suitable fuse reducers to fit the fuses. C. Place a fuse identification label showing type and size of the required fuses inside the door of each enclosure requiring fuses. END OF SECTION :. LIGHTING Section 16.510 Page 1 F: PART1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all lighting products. B. Submit complete photometric data for each fixture. 1.03 SCOPE A. This Section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the - complete interior and exterior lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) No. 101 Life Safety Code 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C82.1 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts C82.4 HID Lamp Ballasts 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LE 4 Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 542 Lampholders, Starters for Fluorescent Lamps UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment UL 1029 HID Lamp Ballasts UL 1570 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures UL 1571 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures UL 1572 HID Lighting Fixtures PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Ballasts: a. Advance b. Lutron c. General Electric d. Valmont 2. Lamps: a:' Osram/Sylvania 1 b. General Electric c. Philips R"! LIGHTING Section 16.510 Page 2 2.02 LUMINAIRES A. Provide and install a lighting fixture on each lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations scheduled on the drawings. Should any designation be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes of suffixes corresponding to the feature called for. 2.03 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. Fixtures shall bear UL label. B. Lenses shall be 100% virgin acrylic with nominal thickness of 0.125 inches. 2.04 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Use ballasts from manufacturers listed above. Generic ballasts from other manufacturers are not acceptable. 1. General Requirements: a. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated for full light output. b. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10%. c. Sound Rating: A d. Power Factor: 95% minimum 2. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: ^ a. CBM labeled b. Encapsulated c. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. 2.05 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Lamps: 1. Color Temperature: 3500 K 2. CRI: 86 or higher 3. Lamp types as scheduled on the drawings. B. HID Lamps: 1. Metal Halide Color Temperature: 3600 K 2. CRI: 70 or higher 3. Phosphor coated unless otherwise specified. 4. All metal halide lamps used in open fixtures where people may be exposed to ultraviolet radiation shall be the type that will automatically extinguish when the outer envelope is broken. This feature shall be provided regardless of the lamp code listed in the fixture schedule. 5. Provide HID lamps with correct burning position selected for the fixture orientation and mounting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached. ^+ LIGHTING Section 16.510 Page 3 B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Refer to the ceiling installer's layout for exact location. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. r■+ C. Fixtures in Plaster Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster ceiling. D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. E. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. END OF SECTION !!R PR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Section 16.670 Page 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. _ 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit data for all products. B. Submit shop drawings detailing the lightning protection system showing air terminal locations, conductor routing, connections and grounding. 1.03 SCOPE A. The work shall include the design and installation of a complete Master Labeled Lightning Protection System. Work includes layout, design, securing approval from all authorities having jurisdiction, and the furnishing and installation of all components. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) No. 780 Lightning Protection Code 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 96A Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C2 •, B. The system shall be installed by a firm actively engaged in the installation of Master Labeled Lightning F Protection Systems, and shall be so listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. PART 2 PRODUCTS FIR 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Robbins Lightning Protection Co. 2. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. 3. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. 4. Erico 5. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Corp, 2.02 MATERIALS A. All materials used in the installation shall be labeled or listed by Underwriters Laboratories for use in Master Labeled Lightning Protection Systems. r LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Section 16.670 Page 2 B. Generally all materials shall be of copper and/or copper -bronze. In locations where system components are mounted on aluminum surfaces, aluminum materials shall be used to avoid electrolytic corrosion of the dissimilar metals. C. Materials shall be sized in accordance with the material requirements of NFPA 78 and UL 96A. Class I materials shall be used for systems on structures not exceeding 75 feet in height and Class II materials shall be used for systems on structures exceeding 75 feet above grade. 2.03 AIR TERMINALS A. Air terminals shall project a minimum of ten inches above the area protected and shall be located at intervals not exceeding 20'-0" along ridges and around the perimeter of flat or gently sloping roofs. Flat or gently sloping roofs exceeding 50'-0" in width shall be protected with additional air terminals located at intervals not exceeding 50'-0" in the flat or gently sloping area. Air terminals shall be location within two feet of roof edges and outside corners of protected areas. Air terminal spacings exceeding these dimensions are permitted so long as the area protected lies within a zone of protection. B. Air terminals shall be installed for stacks, flues, mechanical equipment, and other object not located within a zone of protection. Non-metallic objects or metal objects having a metal thickness of less than 3/16" require the installation of air terminals and required conductors. Objects having a metal thickness 3/16" or greater shall be connected to the lightning protection system per code requirements using main size conductor and connector fittings having 3 square inches of surface contact data. C. Air terminal mounting bases shall be of cast construction and securely fastened to the structure in accordance with code requirements. 2.04 CONDUCTORS A. Main conductors shall be sized in accordance with the material requirements above and shall provide a two-way path from each air terminal horizontally or downward to connections with ground terminals. Conductors shall be free of excessive splices and sharp bends. No bend of a conductor shall form an included angle of less than 90 degrees nor have a radius of bend of less than 8 inches. Conductors shall be secured to the structure at intervals not exceeding 3'-0". B. Down conductors shall be of copper and shall be concealed in the exterior wall construction. Down conductors shall be spaced at intervals averaging not more than 100 feet around the perimeter of the structure. In no case shall a structure have fewer than two down conductors. C. In the case of structural steel frame construction, down conductors may be omitted and roof conductors shall be connected to the structural steel frame at intervals averaging not more than 100 feet around the perimeter of the structure. Connections to the steel frame shall be made with bonding plates having 8 square inches of contact or by exothermic weld connections. D. Roof penetrations required for down conductors or for connections to structural steel framework shall be made using thru-roof assemblies with solid bars and appropriate roof flashing. Conductors shall not pass directly through the roof. Roof flashing compatible with the roofing system shall be furnished and installed by the roofing contractor. 2.05 GROUNDING A. Connect down conductors to ground rods connected to the counterpoise as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. B. Connections to the ground rods shall be exothermic welded connection. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Section 16.670 Page 3 C. Common grounding of all ground mediums entering the building shall be ensured by interconnecting to the system using main size conductors and fittings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install lightning protection systems in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and in compliance with applicable installation standards. r+*„ B. All wiring and down conductors shall be concealed within the building construction. Down conductors shall be installed in Schedule 40 PVC conduits. C. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections to avoid sharp bends and loops. D. The entire installation shall be made by an accredited installer of the manufacturer of UL listed lightning protection equipment. E. Upon completion of the installation furnish the Master Label issued by Underwriters Laboratories for this system. END OF SECTION 1 B